OMRON - Electric Automation Network

OMRON - Electric Automation Network
At the end of this document you will find links to products related to this catalog. You can go directly to our shop by
clicking HERE. HERE
Cat. No. V061-E1-05
NT-series
Support Tool for Windows [email protected]
OPERATION MANUAL
NT-series
Support Tool for Windows Ver.4.j
Operation Manual
Revised May 2007
iv
Introduction
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.j) is a software package for creating and maintaining
screen data used by OMRON Programmable Terminals. Be sure to read and understand the functions
and performance of the Support Tool before you attempt to use a Programmable Terminal. When using
the Support Tool, be sure to have the manuals for the Programmable Terminal close at hand.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems
(an electrical engineer or the equivalent) and computers.
S Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities
S Personnel in charge of designing FA systems
S Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA equipment
S Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities
Notice
This manual provides information required to use the NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.j). Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Support Tool, and keep the manual close at hand for
reference during operation.
E OMRON, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless,
OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting
from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Trademarks
MicrosoftR, MS-DOSR, WindowsR and Windows NTR are either registered trademarks or Trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PLC names of MELSEC FX, A series and FX-2PIF of MELSEC F series are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation.
Hewlett-Packard, HP, PCL and Laser Jet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
v
vi
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
WARRANTY
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON’s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for
a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON–INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR
STRICT LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on
which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON’S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
vii
Application Considerations
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SUITABILITY FOR USE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to
the combination of products in the customer’s application or use of the products.
At the customer’s request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the
uses listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions
or uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
viii
Disclaimers
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PERFORMANCE DATA
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative
at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and
does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON’s test conditions, and the users
must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
ix
Safety Precautions
Safety-related Indications and Their Meanings
The following precautionary indications and symbols are used in this manual to aid in the safe usage of the
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.j). These precautions contain important safety information.
Be sure to observe them carefully.
The indications and symbols used herein, and their meanings, are as listed below.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property
damage.
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury, or property damage.
Precautions for Safe Use
Indicates actions that should be done, or avoided, for the safe use of this product.
Precautions for Correct Use
Indicates actions that should be done, or avoided, to prevent operating failure or malfunction of this product, or to prevent adverse effects on the performance or functions of this product.
Note
Notes within the text of this manual indicate safety–related points and information that are equivalent in
importance to those included in the Precautions for Safe Use sections.
Symbols
Disassembly Prohibition
Indicates prohibitions when there is a possibility of injury, such
as from electric shock, as the result of disassembly.
Electrical Shock Caution
Indicates the possibility of electric shock under specific conditions.
Indicates the possibility of injury by high temperature under
specific conditions.
WARNING
x
Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result
in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read
each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in
the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1
Introduction to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
What Is Support Tool? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Configuration of the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usable Hardware Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Setting Up the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Before Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Support Tool Starting-up and Exiting Procedure
and File Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
Starting-up and Exiting the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
What Is the Application Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Screen Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous/Overlapping Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window/Keyboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occurrence History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Connect Screen (System Initializing Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Format Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contrast and Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
6
7
21
22
26
29
30
31
37
38
39
44
63
64
65
77
78
88
89
92
97
98
99
99
100
101
101
101
102
102
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6
Element Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
Common Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recipe Screen Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 7
Memory Table Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
Common Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character String Memory Table (String Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended I/O Input Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended I/O Output Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Comment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Key Input Notify Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mathematical Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recipe Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 8
Editing Graphic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-2
8-3
Image Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 9
Example Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9-2
9-3
Example Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Sample Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 10
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 11
Data Communications with a PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
xii
Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure .
Communication Setting at the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending (Downloading) the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving (Uploading) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving (Uploading) the History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting and Reading the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
105
136
159
171
192
200
204
207
224
250
259
265
266
275
281
286
291
295
296
305
306
311
321
322
334
342
349
350
355
358
405
406
427
428
430
431
434
437
438
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 12
Making Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
Report Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Print Image (Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting the Screen Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Data Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Installer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT Transfer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Translation Support Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables of Functions of PT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limits on Numbers of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
441
442
449
456
457
459
461
485
491
499
515
535
539
541
543
545
547
553
555
557
567
573
xiii
Organization of the Manual, and How to Use It:
The related manuals are listed below.
* The final digit of the manual number is the revision code.
For operating the Support Tool
S NT-series Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-2):
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This manual
Details on the operating procedure, settings, etc., of the Support Tool can be
displayed on the screen in the form of online help information. Normal operation
can be carried out by following this help information.
When you are unsure of the operating procedure while using the Support Tool, or
you need to check detailed settings, refer to this manual.
The explanations in this manual center on the Support Tool itself. It does not
include detailed explanations on the operation of the PT. Therefore, refer to the
following manuals also.
This manual also explains the operation of NT Transfer Utility which is
exclusively used for downloading and uploading the screen data.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.j) can be used with the latest
direct access versions of the following PT models. Details are given in this manual.
NT11, NT11S, NT20, NT20S, NT21, NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C, NT600S,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C
For information on PT functions, operations, and restrictions
S NT11 Programmable Terminal User’s Manual (V084-E1-j)
S NT11S Programmable Terminal User’s Manual (V029-E1-j)
S NT20 Programmable Terminal User’s Manual (V091-E1-j)
S NT20S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual (V020-E1-j)
S NT600S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual (V022-E1-j)
S NT30/NT30C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual (V034-E1-j)
S NT620S/NT620C/NT625C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual
(V033-E1-j)
S NT21 Programmable Terminal Setup Manual (V068-E1-j)
S NT31/31C Programmable Terminal Setup Manual (V062-E1-j)
S NT631/631C Programmable Terminal Setup Manual (V063-E1-j)
S NT21/31/631 Programmable Terminal Reference Manual (V069-E1-j)
These manuals contain full descriptions of PT functions, operations, and
restrictions.
For information on the functions and operations of the PC
S Operation manual for each PC
xv
When you need information about the operations, functions, etc., of the PC, refer
to the operation manual for the PC, advanced function unit, or communication
unit being used.
Description of NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C
There are two types of the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, models with the
suffix “-Vj” and models without the suffix “-Vj.” In this manual, they are written
as “NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C” collectively when it is not necessary to
classify them. However, they are written separately as “NT31, NT31C, NT631,
and NT631C with -Vj” and “NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C without -Vj”
when it is necessary to classify them. (The system program version will be indicated as “NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with (System Ver. 3.1),” if required.)
The system programs of the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C with “-V2” or
“-V3” (System Ver. 3.1/4.1) are supplied by NT-series Support Tool for Windows
(Ver.4.j). System Ver. 4.1 is supported only by NT31, NT31C, and NT631C
models with “-V3.” It cannot be installed to upgrade the NT31, NT31C, NT631, or
NT631C below “-V3.” It is possible to upgrade NT31, NT31C, NT631 and
NT631C models without “-V2” to System Ver. 3.1 by installing the new system. In
this case, however, the functions indicated below cannot be used even though
other functions can be used in the same way as the models with “-V2.”
S 32-dot font
For details of 32-dot font, refer to Settings for text display in 6-1-10 Setting Properties. Note that smoothing is not performed for 32-dot font.
For details of font types, refer to Font Type in 3-3 Operation of Screen Data (Application) File and Appendix K.
xvi
SECTION 1
Introduction to the Support Tool
This section is designed for users to utilize the efficient usage of Support Tool.
Discussed in this section are what you can do using the Support Tool and the specifications and functions of Support Tool.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
What Is Support Tool? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Configuration of the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 Outline of Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 Correspondence to PC (PLC) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-4 Types of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usable Hardware Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-1 Applicable PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-2 Communication Method for Each PT Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
6
7
7
11
15
18
21
22
26
26
27
1
Section
What Is Support Tool?
1-1
1-1
What Is Support Tool?
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.) (hereafter referred to as the
Support Tool) is application software that runs on Windows 95, 98, NT4.0, 2000,
or XP and was developed to create the screen data for programmable terminals
(PTs).
Since the Support Tool has been developed to use the graphical interface and
run under the operation environment of Windows, persons not familiar with the
Support Tool can create the screen data of the programmable terminal without
difficulties.
The Support Tool can create the screen data for the following models of PT.
NT11, NT11S, NT20/NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, T620C/NT625C
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
The screen data created using the Support Tool consists of the objects shown in
the following page.
2
Section
What Is Support Tool?
Data created
by the Support Tool
Screen Data
Screen 1
1-1
Screen Properties
Display
Object
Screen 2
Arc
Circle
Sector
Polyline
Polygon
Screen 3
Rectangle
.............
Text
Tiling
Image Object
Library Object
Mark
Lamp
Standard Lamp
Image Lamp
Numeral Display
String Display
Graph
Bar Graph
Analogue Meter
Broken-line Graph
Trend Graph
Alarm List/Alarm History
Input
Object
Table
Touch Switch
Input
Setting
Numeral Input
String Input
Numeral Table
Thumbwheel Switch
String Table
Recipe
Bit Memory Table
Extended I/O Input Table
Extended I/O Output Table
I/O Comment Table
F-key input Notify Table
Mathematical Table
Recipe Table
System Memory
Direct Access
Symbol Data
Screen N
Temp. Alarm 10:00
Screen 2
Alarm display
Temp. Alarm 11:01
Screen 1
Graph display
ABCD
Fixed
display
Lamp
display
String Display
7 8 9
4 5 6
Menu
Touch switch
SV
PV
Fixed
display-text
Data input (numeral input)
1 2 3
SP 0 CR
Numeral
display
3
Section
What Is Support Tool?
1-1
Product Configuration
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.) consists of the following software and data.
Support Tool
Model number
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
Specifications
For IBM PC/AT or compatible, media: CD-ROM
Keyboard tenkey library
Color pallette symbols (Library of parts for filling with color models)
System Installer (to replace PT system program)
NT20 system program
System program for NT31, NT31C, and NT631C with “-V3”
Original NT30/620 system program
NT Screen Data Transfer Utility
This utility is for uploading and downloading PT data using mmi screen data
files. Refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utility for details.
Samples
Lamp/touch switch parts library
This parts library contains the image library with lamps and touch switches
incorporated into it as a mmi image data file. Refer to 3-3-7 Using Method of
Parts Collection for details. (The folder containing the parts library list in the
samples folder also contains HTML files with operating methods and a parts
list.)
Sample screen data
This screen data is provided only as a sample. Operation may not be as
expected when this data is transferred to a PT and used for communications
with a PLC.
Symbol manager ISO symbol data
Refer to 6-10 Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation) for
details.
Main Differences of V4.1
Following changes are made for NT-series Support Tool for Windows to improve
operational efficiency and to support new functions added for NT31, NT31C,
NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or “-V3” (System Ver. 3.1 or 4.0). Refer to Appendix G New Functions of Support Tool Ver. 4.1.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C new system program support
System program for the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C has been upgraded
to Ver. 3.1/Ver. 4.0, so the following functions are now supported. System program version 4.0 is used only with the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. New
system program is supplied with Support Tool Ver. 4.1.
CS/CJ-series PC (PLC) memory area support
Recipes
Interlocks
Mathematical table
4
Section
What Is Support Tool?
1-1
NT30/620-compatible mode
Multiple line labels
ON/OFF state labels
Numeral display/string display labels
Device monitor screens
Contrast & brightness adjustment screens
Addition of NT Translation Support Utility
The Translation Support Utility is software that helps in translating a language to
another supported language.
For details, refer to Appendix D NT Translation Support Utility.
I/O comments importing from TAB-delimited text file
For details, refer to 7-7-4 Importing I/O Comments from Tab-delimited Text Files.
Centering the Labels of Lamp and Touch Switches
Only horizontal direction could be centered in previous versions. In this version,
the labels of lamp/touch switches can be centered in both vertical and horizontal
directions.
For details, refer to 6-1-9 Centering the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch.
The Data input string in a string input function touch switch (Only for NT31/631)
The label was used for the input data string in previous versions. In this version, a
different string from the label can be specified as the data input string.
For details, refer to 6-8-3 Character String Input Touch Switch.
Launch the system installer
It is possible to launch the system installer from [Connect]–[Launch System Installer] in the menu bar.
Addition of NT30/620 series system programs
The system programs for NT30/620 are included.
Main Differences of V4.6
NT21 New System Program Support
Starting with NTST-EV4.6, the NTST supports creating screen data for the
NT21.
NT31-V2 (System Ver. 3.1) data and NT21 data can be converted for mutual
compatibility.
NT20 data can be converted to NT21 data.
NTST-EV4.6 can transfer screen data to the NT21 in high-speed mode.
Refer to NT21/31/631 Reference Manual for details.
Pick I/O Comments from a CX-Server Database
I/O name in CX-Server data can be used as PT I/O comment.
When a PLC address is defined in the dialog, an I/O comment can be picked up
from CX-Server PLC point data in a cdm file. The “Pick CX-Server point” button
is enabled only when CX-Server is installed.
When the I/O comment table is edited, multiple I/O comment data can be picked
up from CX-Server PLC point data in the cdm file. The “Import” button is enabled
only when CX-Server is installed.
5
Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool
Section
1-2
Each I/O name will be imported as a PT I/O comment within 16 characters.
Property Dialog for Grouped Objects
Grouped object attributes can be edited by double-clicking or right-clicking to
display the properties for grouped objects. The properties show the tree the objects included in the group. Choose each object in the tree to edit the structure.
Preview in Symbol Manager
Registered symbols can be previewed on the symbol manager. Previous symbols can be previewed after they are copied onto the NTST-EV4.6 screen and
copied back to symbol manager to create preview images. Or, those symbols
can be reused without preview as they are.
Copying Image/Library/Mark with contents
When copying Image/Library/Mark objects, NTST-EV4.6 will copy them with
contents and registered them in each table. If the same code is already used in
the table, the NTST will display a dialog to show the next unused number as a
substitute.
The functionality does not recursively apply to references in the Image/Library/
Mark object. For example, when copying a library object that refers to library
entry, and the content of the entry contains text with a mark reference, then the
corresponding mark content will be ignored. It also does not apply to when
screens are copied in Application Manager for pasting into a second instance of
NTST.
Main Differences of V4.7
NT11-V1 New System Program Support
Starting with NTST-EV4.7, the NTST supports creating screen data for the
NT11-V1.
NT11S data can be converted to NT11-V1 data.
Refer to NT11 User’s Manual for details.
Supported Windows OS
Starting with NTST-EV4.7, the NTST supports Windows Me, 2000 (Professional
Edition), and XP (Pro/Home Edition).
Automatically Adjusted Screen Size when Editing Starts
In response to the high resolution of personal computers recently, the screen
size is now automatically enlarged when editing screens.
Main Differences of V4.8
Support for the NT20 PTs has been added to version 4.8 of the NT-series Support
Tool for Windows.
• The NT20 system program has been added.
• The system installer has been updated to support the NT20 system program.
1-2
Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool
The following indicates the equipment necessary for using the Support Tool.
Hardware
Recommended CPU
Pentium 100 MHz or faster CPU
Personal Computer
Use an IBM personal computer or 100% compatible.
Recommended Memory
6
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
32 Mbytes minimum
Free area in hard disk
At least 52 Mbytes is required to install everything.
The following options can be selected at installation:
Support Tool: Approx. 23 Mbytes
System Installer (Installer only): Approx. 20 Mbytes
Samples (parts, parts list, etc.): Approx. 9 Mbytes
To install other data, such as Sample Collection for Support Tool on CD-ROM,
another 23 MB is required.
CD-ROM drive
At least one drive is required if the Support Tool is provided on CD-ROM.
Display
VGA compatible display
When creating screen data for a PT that has a color display, a color display is
required.
When the resolution setting of desktop area is low (lower than 640 480), part
of the window of Support Tool may stick out of the screen. In this case, change
the resolution setting of desktop area to the higher one with the control panel
property of Windows.
Mouse
Serial mouse or bus mouse
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, 2000, or XP. (Windows 3.1 is not supported.)
Device necessary for transmitting screen data
RS-232C cable
For cable specifications, refer to Appendix K Connecting Cable Specifications.
1-3
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3-1 Outline of Screen Data
The screen data of the Support Tool consists of multiple screens that are linked
with each other.
Screens are managed by screen numbers. The range of usable screen numbers
varies according to the type of the PT connected to the Support Tool.
The screen display is switched by pressing a touch switch or giving an instruction
from the PC (PLC).
PT Model
Range of Screen Numbers
NT11/NT11S
1 to 25
NT20/NT20S
1 to 250, 256 to 500
NT600S
1 to 1000
7
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
PT Model
1-3
Range of Screen Numbers
NT30/NT30C
NT620S/NT620C/NT625C
1 to 1899, 1900 to 1979 1980 to 1999, 2000
NT21
1 to 3999, 9000, 9001, 9002, 9020
NT31/NT31C/
NT631/NT631C
1 to 3999, 9000, 9001, 9002, 9020 to 9023,
9030
On a screen, a variety of objects can be arranged as desired.
The following objects are used to create a screen.
Display objects
Display objects are drawn on a screen and do not have an input function.
Display objects are classified into two kinds: Objects that are always displayed in
the same status, and those that change according to the status of the PT or the
PC (PLC).
Input objects
Input objects are objects that allow input by operation at the PT. Touch switches
and input fields for numerals and strings are examples of input objects.
Objects having code numbers
These objects are created using an exclusive editor.
They are registered with a code number so that they can be used in different positions and different screens.
Library data
A drawing created as a fixed display is registered as library data so that it can
be used multiple positions and screens.
The library editor is used to create library data.
Image data
Image data are objects used to display bit map data on the screen.
An image editor or bit map editor (running on Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, 2000, or
XP) available on the market is used to create image data.
Marks
Marks are used to display special characters and symbols. These objects can
be handled as characters.
The mark editor is used to create marks.
Registering created objects (symbol manager)
The efficiency of use of created objects can be increased by reusing them in other screen data or by registering objects that will be used frequently.
The symbol manager is provided to register created objects.
8
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
Objects that can be used
The table below shows that objects can be used with particular PT models.
Objects
Display
Object
NT11S
/NT11
NT20/
NT20S
NT600
S
NT30
NT30C
NT620
S
NT620
C
NT625
C
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631
C
Arc
–
–
Circle
–
Sector
–
–
Polyline
–
Polygon
–
–
Rectangle
–
–
Text
Tiling
–
Standard Lamp
–
Image/Library
Lamp
–
–
Numeral
Display
String Display
Bar Graph
Broken-line
Graph
–
–
Analogue Meter
–
–
–
*1
Trend Graph
–
–
Alarm List
–
–
Alarm History
–
–
Recipe
–
–
–
*3
: Can be used.
*1: Can be used only with models with “-V1” and above.
*2: Only use is insertion into character strings.
*3: Can be used only with models ”-V2 (System Ver.3.1) and above.
9
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
Objects
Library
Type
Object
NT11S
/NT11
NT20
NT600
S
NT30
NT30C
NT620
S
NT620
C
NT625
C
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631
C
Touch Switch
–
Numeral
Input
String Input
–
–
Thumbwheel
Switch
–
Image Display
–
–
Library Display
–
–
*2
*2
Input
Objects
Mark
: Can be used.
*1: Can be used only with models with “-V1” and above.
*2: Only use is insertion into character strings.
10
1-3
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
1-3-2 Correspondence to PC (PLC) Data
The following table shows objects that are capable of transmitting data with PC
(PLC) to execute processing such as updating the screen display.
Object
Input
Output
Standard Lamp
PC (PLC) (bit address)
PT (Numeral table)*1
PT (String table)*1
Image/Library Lamp
PC (PLC) (Bit address)
Touch Switch
PC (PLC)
(bit address for lamp)
PC(PLC) (bit address for interlock) *1
PT (Numeral table) *1
PT (String table) *1
–
Notify Bit (bit address)
Switch Screen
Input key-Window/Keyboard
Window Move
(Can be used only on Window Screen)
Copy Setting
(Numeral, String table)
Input key - Control
Input key - String
Cursor Move
Print Screen
Thumbwheel Switch
PC (PLC) (bit address for interlock) *1
PT (Numeral table)
Numeral Display
PT (Numeral table)
–
String Display
PT (String table)
–
Bar Graph
PT (Numeral table)
–
Analogue Meter
Broken-line Graph
Trend Graph
Numeral Input
PC (PLC) (bit address for interlock) *1
PT (Numeral table)
String Input
PC (PLC) (bit address for interlock) *1
PT (String table)
Alarm History
PT (Bit Memory table)
PT (Alarm History)
Alarm List
PT (Bit Memory table)
String Display
Image/Library Display
Recipe Object
PC (PLC) (Word address)
PC (PLC) (Word address)
*1: For the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C with “-V2” or “–V3,”
only for numeral display or string display for labels.
*2: For the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C with “-V2” or “–V3,”
only when using the interlock function.
Operation of changing display objects
Lamp display
The lamp is turned ON (OFF) when the specified PC (PLC) bit goes ON (OFF).
Screen
PC (PLC)
Bit address
Lamp lights when
bit comes ON
11
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
Touch switch – Notify Bit
The specified PC (PLC) bit goes ON (OFF) when the switch area is pressed.
PC (PLC)
Screen
Notification
Bit address
Touch switch – Switch Screen
The display screen is switched to another when the switch area is pressed.
Screen B
Screen A
Touch switch – Input Key - Window/Keyboard
A window (Keyboard Screen) pops up in the screen when the switch area is
pressed.
Screen
Screen
Window (Keyboard)
Touch switch – Window Move
The window is moved by touch panel operation when the switch area is
pressed.
Window
Screen
Window in a moving status
Screen
Screen
Touch switch – Input key - Control
When the switch area is pressed, the processing assigned to the specified control code is executed.
Screen
12
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
Touch switch – Input Key - String
When the switch area is pressed, the characters of the label set for the switch
are displayed in the string input field and stored in the string table.
String input field
Screen
Screen
Touch switch – Copy Setting
When the switch area is pressed, data is copied. The following types of copying
can be designated.
Data in Numeral table
Numeral table
Data in Numeral table
Numeral Input field
Data in String table
String table
Data in String table
String Input field
Constant
Numeral table
Constant
Numeral Input field
Screen
Data
Data
Input box
Touch switch – Cursor Move
The cursor moves from Numeral Input to Numeral Input fields when the switch
area is pressed.
Screen
Screen
Touch switch – Print Screen
A hard copy of the screen will be printed when the switch area is pressed.
Screen
13
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
Numeral display
The data in a Numeral table will be displayed.
Numeral
table
Screen
Reference
1234
1234
Display
Numeral display
String display
The string display object displays the data in a string entry.
String
table
Screen
Reference
ABC
ABC
Display
String display
Graph display
The graph display object displays the data in a numeral table entry.
Numeral
table
Screen
100
Reference
60
Display
0
Bar graph display
Data Input – numeral input and string input
These input objects write data into a table.
Numeral Table
String Table
Numeral Input field
String Input field
Numeral
table
Screen
Input field
50
50
Writing
Numeral data input
Data Input – Thumbwheel switch
The Thumbwheel Switch object stores the numeric values to a numeral table
entry through transaction of Thumbwheel Switch.
Screen
Numeral
table
1234
14
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
Data Input – Recipe
The recipe object reads/writes numeric values that were set using NTST from/
to the PC (PLC) when the write/read touch switch is pressed.
PC (PLC)
Screen
Write
Read
10
25
315
Recipe
Alarm
When a bit in a bit memory table is ON (OFF), the object displays the data in a
string table entry and stores it in the alarm history.
When the displayed data of the string table is touched, the object displays
image/library data, switches the screen to the specified screen.
Bit memory table
Alarm list display
Temp .Alarm
String table
Temp. Alarm
Touch display
Image/Library table
Library
data
Alarm history display
Temp. Alarm 96/11/06 16:02
Pres Alarm 97/01/06 18:25
Reference: If an “Indirect Reference” is used with image/library data, data to be displayed
can be changed according to the change in the contents of numeral table. (The
NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with System Ver. 2.1 and above only.)
Reference: The NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C with “-V2” or “–V3” provide an interlock
function that can be used to enable/disable operations or inputs using touch
switches, numeral inputs, string inputs,or thumbwheel switch based on the status of specific bits in the PLC.
1-3-3 Tables
Tables are areas secured in the PT to store data such as numeral data and character string data. They are used to share data for the functions assigned to objects and communicate with a PC (PLC).
If a word address of a PC (PLC) is set in a table, data communication processing
between the PT and PC (PLC) is executed automatically in predetermined
cycles.
The following types of tables are provided.
Numeral table
String table
Bit memory table
Extended I/O Input table
Extended I/O Output table
I/O Comment table
15
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
F-key Input Notify table
Mathematical table
Recipe Table
The number of memory table entries varies according to the model of PT connected.
NT11S/
NT11
Numeral
table
String
table
128
NT20/N
T20S
128
NT600S
NT30
NT30C
NT620S
NT620C
NT625C
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
512
512
or
1000
512
or
1000
512,
1000,
or
2000
512,
1000,
or
2000
256
or
1000
256,
1000
or
2000
256,
1000
or
2000
128
128
256
256
or
1000
Bit
Memory
table
–
–
–
256
256
256
or
1000
256
or
1000
Extended
I/O Input
table
–
–
–
64
–
–
–
Extended
I/O Output
table
–
–
–
64
–
–
–
F-key Input Notify
table
4
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mathematical
table
–
–
–
–
–
256
256*1
Recipe
table
–
–
–
–
–
200
200*2
*1:
This option is available only for V2 and above.
*2:
This option is available only for V2 (System Ver.3.1) and above.
Numeral Table
The Numeral table stores numeral data.
This table is set when using Numeral Display objects, Graph objects, and Numeral Data Input.
For details of table setting, refer to 7-2 Numeral Memory Table.
String Table
The String table stores text data.
This table is set when String Display object and String Input object are used.
For details of table setting, refer to 7-3 Character String Memory Table (String
Table).
Bit Memory Table
The Bit Memory table stores status of a PC (PLC) memory bit.
This table is set when using the alarm list/history function.
16
General Configuration of the Support Tool
Section
1-3
It is also used when switching the screen by the operation at the PC (PLC).
For details of table setting, refer to 7-4 Bit Memory Table.
Extended I/O Input Table
The Extended I/O Input table sets the usage of input terminals of an extended
I/O unit (e.g., B7A Unit).
For the individual input terminals, a function is set or a PC (PLC) bit to be referenced is allocated.
For details of table setting, refer to 7-5 Extended I/O Input Table.
Extended I/O Output Table
The Extended I/O Output table is used to allocate the PC (PLC) bits that control
the output terminals of an extended I/O unit.
The output terminals of the extended I/O unit are controlled according to the
statuses (ON/OFF) of PC (PLC) bits.
For details of table setting, refer to 7-5 Extended I/O Output Table.
I/O Comment Table
The I/O Comment Table is an area provided in a PT to manage the comment
data of all words and bits in the PC (PLC) that are set by the Support Tool.
It displays comments on PC (PLC) words and bits specified by the numeral
memory table, character string memory table (string table), bit memory table,
extended I/O input table, extended I/O output table, and elements, in list form.
The displayed comments can be edited. For details, refer to 7-7 I/O Comment
Table.
F-Key Input Notify Table
The F-Key Input Notify table assigns to a function key in a PT device. Host bits
are allocated to the function keys. By switching the function key ON and OFF,
the corresponding bit is turned ON and OFF. For details of table setting, refer to
7-8 F-Key Input Notify Table.
Mathematical table
Mathematical functions can be formed through this table and associated to any
numeral table entry/PLC address location. For details refer to 7-9 Mathematical Table.
Recipe Table
The Recipe Table will set the parameters of designated memory areas of the
address. For details refer to 7-10 Recipe Table.
17
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
1-3-4 Types of Screens
A PT displays two types of screens — user screens that are created by arranging
objects as desired and system screens for which a specific function is preset.
The types of screens displayed on a PT, and screen numbers assigned to the
each screen are shown below.
NT600S
NT30
NT30C
NT620S
NT620C
NT625C
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
1 to
250
1 to
1000
1 to
1899,
2000
1 to
3999
1 to
3999
–
1 to
250
1 to
1000
1 to
1899,
2000
1 to
3999
1 to
3999
Continuous
screens
–
1 to
250
1 to
1000
1 to
1899
–
–
Window/Keyboard screens
–
–
–
1900
to
1979
1 to
3999
1 to
3999
Host connect
screens
–
–
–
1999
–
–
System initializing screens
–
–
–
–
9000
9000
Password
screens
1 to
250
–
–
–
–
–
Menu screens
1 to
250
–
–
–
–
–
255
–
–
–
–
–
Screen display
OFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
Extended
screens
–
–
–
1980
to
1996
–
–
Occurrence history screens
–
–
–
1997
9001
9001
Frequency history screens
–
–
–
1998
9002
9002
Programming
Console
screens
–
–
–
– *1
9020
9020
Device monitor
screens
–
–
–
–
–
9021
to
9023 *2
Return to the
previous screen
–
–
–
–
9999
9999
NT11S/
NT11
NT20/
NT20S
1 to
250
Overlapping
screens
Screen Types
User
Screens
Standard
screens
Print format
screens
System
Screens
*1:
Available only from the system menu. A screen number is not assigned.
*2:
Only with V2 and above.
Standard screens
Standard screens are the fundamental screens of the PT. Specify a Standard
Screen to create a screen.
18
Section
General Configuration of the Support Tool
1-3
Overlapping screens
Overlapping screens are grouped screens; a maximum of eight screens can
be overlapped to display information on one screen. The screen used as the
base for the overlapping screens is called the Parent Screen and the multiple
standard screens that configure the overlapping screen are called Child
Screens.
This is an
Screen No. 10
(Child Screen)
Screen No. 8
(Parent Screen)
This is an
example of an
Overlapping
Screen.
example of an
Overlapping
Screen.
Screen No. 7
(Child Screen)
Screen No. 25
(Child Screen)
When screen No. 8 (parent screen) is specified, objects set on the individual
child screens (screens No. 10, No. 7, No. 25) are displayed in this order.
Since screen No. 8 is set as an overlapping screen, it cannot be displayed independently. Note that a child screen can be displayed independently.
Continuous screens
Continuous screens are grouped screen: a maximum of eight screens can be
displayed in series. The base screen where continuous screens are registered
is called the Parent Screen and the registered screens are called Child
Screens.
Screen No. 10
Parent
screen
Screen No. 20
Continuous
screen 1
[↓]
[↑]
Screen No. 15
Continuous
screen 2
[↓]
[↑]
Screen No. 1
Continuous
screen 3
When screen No. 10 is specified, screen No. 20 – which is the first of the continuous screens – is displayed. After that, screens are displayed in the order of
screen No. 20, screen No. 15, and screen No. 1 by the operation of touch
switch
[ ].
Since screen No. 10 is set for a continuous screen, it cannot be displayed independently.
Continuous screens are switched by pressing touch switches [ ] and [ ↑ ], to
which system keypad is assigned.
Continuous screens cannot be used for the NT21, NT31/NT31C, and
NT631/NT631C. For these models, Switch Screen function of touch switch is
recommended to obtain the identical function.
Window/Keyboard Screen
Window/Keyboard Screen is used as a window screen. This is a partial screen
used to display a keyboard such as a keypad for inputting numeral/string or an
operational help etc. overlapping a display screen.
For NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, this screen can also be
used as a standard screen if it is not used as a keyboard screen. (For NT21,
19
General Configuration of the Support Tool
Section
1-3
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, a keyboard screen cannot be displayed
independently.)
With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and
above, all objects other than thumbwheel SW can be registered. With other
models, only fixed display, and touch switch used to input numeral/string and
temporary input field can be registered. (This type of window is called a
Keyboard Screen.)
With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, and NT631C with “-V1” and above,
up to 3 window/keyboard screens can be opened at the same time. (With other
models, only 1 window/keyboard can be opened.) For details, refer to 5-4
Window/Keyboard Screens.
Host connect screen (System initializing screen)
This screen is displayed at the start of PT operation until the connection to a PC
(PLC) is completed.
If a Host Connect screen is not registered, the default screen that shows the
host connection message is automatically displayed when the PT power is
switched on or when the PT mode transfers to the run mode.
Display OFF screen (no-display screen)
This screen is used when nothing is to be displayed on the screen. Since this
screen is reserved by the system as a Display OFF screen, it cannot be edited.
Extended screen
Screens reserved for future extension of PT functions. Screens should not be
registered to the screen numbers of these reserve screens.
Occurrence history screen
An occurrence history screen displays the numbers of screens displayed by
Switch screen operations in the order of occurrence.
Frequency history screen
A frequency history screen displays the numbers of screens displayed by
Switch screen operations in the order of frequency.
Password screen
This screen exists for the secure protection of a designated screen so that users can switch the screen only when the accurate password is input.
Menu screen
Menu screen serves as a control screen to switch to a designated screen
through the operation of numeric key.
Print Format screen
If this screen is assigned, printing can be done by simple operation.
Programming Console Screen
This screen can be used to execute Programming Console functions with the
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. User editing of this screen is not
possible. Refer to 5-12 Programming Console Screen for details.
Device Monitor Screen
This screen can be used to execute device monitoring functions with the NT31,
NT31C, NT631, and NT631C with “-V2” or higher. User editing of this screen is
not possible. Refer to 5-13 Device Monitor Screen for details.
20
Section
Basic Operation Flow
1-4
1-4
Basic Operation Flow
The procedure for creating a screen using the Support Tool is shown below.
CAUTION
Carefully check the operation of all screen data and host programs
before using them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
21
Section
Menu Chart
1-5
1-5
Menu Chart
The pull down menu commands provided by the Support Tool and the function of
each menu item are shown below.
File
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating new screen data
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading created screen data
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending creation of screen data
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving screen data being created to a file
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering screen data being created under a new file name
Import Component . . . . . . . Importing data from different screen data file
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading the data created by DOS version Support Tool
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing screen data
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying print format of screen data
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the printer
Recent File(s) . . . . . . . . . . . Recently used files
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting the Support Tool
Edit
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling the last operation
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the screen status to the status before Undo
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting an object (to the clip board)
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying an object (to the clip board)
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pasting an object (from the clip board)
Align
Align Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning objects to the top
Align Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning objects to the bottom
Align Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning objects to the left
Align Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning objects to the right
Center in a Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning objects to vertically center
Center in a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning objects to horizontally center
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an object
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying objects collectively
Edit Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying editing an object
Select Object . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an object
22
Section
Menu Chart
1-5
Full Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching tiling display for object to be tiled
View
Show Tag
PC (PLC) Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing over the display to one with word numbers
Table No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing over the display to one with table entry numbers
Image and Library Code . . . . . . . . . Changing over the display to one with code numbers
Show
Window/
Keyboard
Local 1 (keyboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying local window 1 (keyboard screen)
Local 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying local window 2
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redrawing the current screen
Toolbars
Standard Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying standard tool bar
Draw Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying drawing tool bar
Utility Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying utility bar
Alignment Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying alignment bar
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying/not displaying status bar
Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing over entire screen display
Zoom
100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing display enlargement scale (100%)
200% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing display enlargement scale (200%)
400% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing display enlargement scale (400%)
800% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing display enlargement scale (800%)
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the error log
Simulate Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying flash status of an object
Simulate ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying lamp ON/OFF status
Draw
Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting object
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping objects
Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ungrouping objects
Bring to Front . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing object to the front
Send to Back . . . . . . . . . . . Sending object to the back
Associate with . . . . . . . . . . Associating touch switch with object
Disassociate . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling association of touch switch with object
Set Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying moving order among numeral/character-string input fields
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting attributes of selected object
Use as Default . . . . . . . . . . Registering the status of the selected object as the default
for the object
Centralize Label . . . . . . . . . Centralizing label of lamp/touch switch
23
Section
Menu Chart
Objects
Fixed
Display
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying text
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a circle
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying an arc
Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a sector
Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a polyline
Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a polygon
Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a rectangle
Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying tiling
Image Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying image data display
Library Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying library data display
Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a mark
Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a touch switch
Lamp
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a standard lamp
Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying an image/library lamp
Data Input
Numeral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a numeral setting input field
String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a character-string input field
Thumbwheel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a thumbwheel switch
Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a recipe screen element
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a numeral display
String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a character-string display
Graph
Bar Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a bar graph
Analogue Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying an analogue meter
Broken-line Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a broken-line graph
Trend Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a trend graph
Alarm
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying alarm list
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying alarm history
Screen
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a new screen
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a screen
Modify Parent . . . . . . . . . . . Setting continuous/overlapping screens
Copy to Image . . . . . . . . . . Saving screen data in image (BMP format) file
Extended I/O . . . . . . . . . . . Setting an extended I/O table (setting a table common to all screens)
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting grid
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting screen attributes
24
1-5
Section
Menu Chart
Tools
1-5
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting memory tables
Image Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing image
Library Editor . . . . . . . . . . . Editing library
Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing marks
Mathematical Table . . . . . . Editing mathematical functions
Recipe Table . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting recipe data
Import I/O comments . . . . . Importing I/O comments from ladder program
Change Address . . . . . . . . Changing PC (PLC) addresses set for objects and memory tables collectively
Validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking errors
PT Configuration . . . . . . . . Setting PT type, system settings, PT Status Control Area/PT Status Notify Area settings,
changing PT type (data conversion)
Connect
Comms. Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting methods for communicating with the PT
Download
(Support Tool to PT)
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending (downloading) all screen data to the PT
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending (downloading) screen data to the PT
in units of screens
Direct Access Information . . . . . . . Sending (downloading) direct connection setting data
to the PT
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending (downloading) system memory data to the PT
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending (downloading) memory table data to the PT
Upload
(PT to Support Tool)
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) all screen data from the PT
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) screen data to the PT in units
from the screen
Direct Access Information . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) direct connection setting data
from the PT
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) system memory data to the PT
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) memory table data to the PT
Get History Log
Screen History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) screen history data from the PT
Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading (uploading) alarm history data from the PT
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading/setting (uploading/downloading) clock
data in the PT
Window
New Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening another window on the same screen
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying cascaded windows
Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying tiled windows
Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arranging icons
Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting symbol manager
(Opened Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting window
25
Section
Usable Hardware Combinations
Help
1-6
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying table of contents of online help
Search for Help on . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying help by search operation
What’s This? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying help by a click
PLC Address Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying PLC Address help of the specified PLC vendor
About NT-series Support Tool . . . . Product information
1-6
Usable Hardware Combinations
The combinations of hardware that can be used are shown below.
The table shows the basic combinations. Depending on the PT display method
and system configuration, they may not be usable.
1-6-1 Applicable PT
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.) can create screen data for the
following PT models.
PT Model Model
NT11S
NT11S-SF121
NT11
NT11-SF121-EV1
NT20
NT20-ST121
NT20-ST128
NT20S*1
NT20S-ST121-V1
NT20S-ST122-V1
NT30
NT30-ST131-E
NT30C
NT30C-ST141-E
NT600S*1
NT600S-ST121-V1
NT600S-ST211-V1
NT600S-ST121-EV3
NT600S-ST211-EV3
NT620S
NT620S-ST211-E
NT620S-ST212-E
NT620C
NT620C-ST141-E
NT625C
NT625C-ST152
NT21
NT21-ST121-E
NT31
NT31-ST121-E
NT31-ST121-EV1
NT31-ST121-EV2
NT31-ST122-EV2
NT31-ST123-EV3
NT31C
NT31C-ST141-E
NT31C-ST141-EV1
NT31C-ST141-EV2
NT31C-ST142-EV2
NT31C-ST143-EV3
NT631
NT631-ST211-E
NT631-ST211-EV1
NT631-ST211-EV2
NT631C
NT631C-ST141-E
NT631C-ST151-E
NT631C-ST141-EV1 NT631C-ST141-EV2
NT631C-ST151-EV1 NT631C-ST151-EV2
NT631C-ST152-EV2
NT631C-ST153-EV3
*1:
NT20S-ST121-EV3
NT20S-ST161-EV3
NT20S and NT600S have direct access Ver.4 and Ver.5.
NT-series Support Tool for Windows supports only Ver.5.
Reference: Direct access version 4 screen data for the NT20S or NT600S can be used on
Windows by using version 5 of the Support Tool for Windows.
26
Section
Usable Hardware Combinations
1-6
1-6-2 Communication Method for Each PT Model
Usable communication method differs depending on the PT types.
Also, some PT can use communication method that is not supported in their initial state by installing the exclusive system programs. (For details, refer to Appendix B System Installer Operation.)
Model
PT
Model
Communication Method
Host
Link
NT Link
(1:1,1:N)
C200H
Memory MitsuLink
bishi A
Mitsubishi FX
NT11S
NT11SSF121
(1:1
only)
NT11
NT11-SF
121-EV1
(1:1
only)
NT20
NT20-ST
121
NT20-ST
128
NT20S-ST
121-V1
NT20S-ST
121-EV3
NT20S-ST
122-V1
NT20S-ST
161-EV3
NT30
NT30-ST13
1-E
NT30C
NT30C-ST
141-E
NT600S NT600S-ST
121-V1
NT600S-ST
121-EV3
NT600S-ST
211-V1
NT600S-ST
211-EV3
NT620S NT620S-ST
211-E
NT620S-ST
212-E
NT20S
NT620C NT620C-S
T141-E
NT625C NT625C-S
T152
27
Section
Usable Hardware Combinations
Model
1-6
Communication Method
PT
Model
Host
Link
NT Link
Memory
C200H
(1:1, 1:N)
Link
Mitsubishi A
Mitsubishi
FX
AB
GE
Siemens
NT21
NT21-ST121-E
NT31
NT31-ST121-E
NT31-ST121-EV1
NT31-ST121/122-EV2
NT31-ST123-EV3
NT31C-ST141-E
NT31C-ST141-EV1
NT31C-ST141/142-EV2
NT31C-ST143-EV3
NT631-ST211-E
NT631-ST211-EV1
NT631-ST211-EV2
NT31C
NT631
NT631C NT631C-ST141-E
NT631C-ST141-EV1
NT631C-ST141-EV2
NT631C-ST151-E
NT631C-ST151-EV1
NT631C-ST151/152-EV2
NT631C-ST153-EV3
:
:
:
:
Note
Usable in the default state.
Exclusive system program should be installed.
Exclusive communication I/F unit is needed. (C200H I/F unit: NT-LB122)
Not usable
Communication methods are indicated in the table above using the following abbreviations:
C200H: C200H I/F
28
SECTION 2
Setting Up the Support Tool
When you are going to use the Support Tool for the first time, the Support Tool software must be installed at your personal
computer.
The Support Tool is an application software that runs on Windows 95, 98, NT4.0, 2000, or XP of Microsoft Corporation.
The procedure described in the following pages assumes that your personal computer already has Windows installed.
2-1
2-2
Before Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Basic Installation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Uninstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
31
31
31
36
29
Section
Before Installing the Software
2-1
2-1
Before Installing the Software
The Support Tool comes with the following program data.
Specifications
Type
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
For IBM PC/AT compatibles, media: CD-ROM
Support Tool
Supplement Symbols (keyboard/keypad collection)
Color Palette Symbol (Tilling collection for color-type PT)
System installer (for replacing the PT system program)
NT20 system program
System program for NT31/NT31C/NT631C with “-V3”
System programs for NT31/NT31C with “-V2” (Ver. 3.1)
System programs for NT631/NT631C with “-V2” (Ver. 3.1)
System programs for NT21
System program for NT11S
System program for NT11-V1
System programs for NT30/620 Series
The following software should be installed separately.
NT Transfer Utility
This utility uploads/downloads screen data file from/to PT using MMI format.
For details, refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utility.
NT Translation Support Utility
This utility will help in translating the language to another supported language.
For details, refer to Appendix D Translation Support Utility
The following data is copied to the folder if it is selected when installation.
Parts Collection
Lamps and touch switches combined with image/library data are registered in
the Parts Collection (This is a screen data file in MMI format). For details, refer
to 3-3-7 Using Method of Parts Collection.
Sample Screen Data
This data is provided just as sample screen data. It is not created for the purpose of actual operation on PT after downloading it to PT.
Symbol manager – ISO symbol data
For details, refer to 6-10 Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation).
Reference:
30
The system installer is an application software that sends the system program
from a personal computer to PT to update the system program. Updating the
system program allows communication using a new method or upgrades the
PT software. However, since the system program is specific to each PT model, the system program that matches the PT model must be downloaded.
Section
Installing the Support Tool
2-2
2-2
Installing the Support Tool
To install the Support Tool, execute the install program provided in your software
package.
Reference:
The following data is selectable for installation.
NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.
System Installer
Sample Collection
If you select a Sample Collection, data such as Parts Collection, Image/Library
Sample Collection, ISO symbol data, and Sample Screen Data are installed.
NT Transfer Utility should be installed separately. Please refer to Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility.
NT Translation Support Utility should be installed separately. Refer to Appendix D Translation Support Utility.
Data can be added afterward by executing the installation program again. In
this case, when an item that is already installed is specified, it will not be overwritten. Also, the data will not be uninstalled even if its check mark was set to
OFF when the data is already installed.
To delete data that has already been installed, delete all data by uninstalling it
and then perform installation again.
2-2-1 Basic Installation Operation
The buttons that are displayed during the course of installation are shown below.
Clicking on this button confirms the settings in the displayed window and displays
the next window.
Clicking on this button cancels the settings in the displayed window and displays
the previous window.
Clicking on this button causes the window to close. The status set in the window
is canceled.
This button stops Support Tool installation if it is clicked at the program install window. In this case, a message is displayed requesting confirmation that installation is to be stopped.
Clicking on this button displays the actual folder configuration in tree form. You
can select the folder in this display to install the Support Tool.
2-2-2 Procedure
The following procedure uses Support Tool version 4.8 as a example.
1. Start up Windows.
2. Set the Support Tool CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. The setup program automatically starts. Follow step 6 onward. If the setup program does not start
automatically, execute the setup program according to the steps shown below.
31
Section
Installing the Support Tool
2-2
Reference: You can execute the setup program by double clicking Setup.exe in the Support
Tool system disk by displaying Windows Explorer. In this case, steps 3, 4, and 5
below can be skipped.
3. Click on the Start button of Windows and select “Run ...”
4. Input “d:\FD_Version\ Disk1\ Setup.exe” in the input field in the displayed
window.
Note that drive designation must agree with the name of the drive where you
set the CD-ROM. If you set the CD-ROM in drive E, input “e:\FD-Version\
Disk1\ Setup.exe.”
5. Click on
.
The installation is started.
6. When the setup screen of the Support Tool is displayed, click the
Button.
The screen to prompt you to input User Information (Name and Company) is
displayed.
32
Section
Installing the Support Tool
2-2
7. Input your name and company. In the initial state, the name and company
that are registered for the computer are displayed.
After inputting, click the
Button.
The screen for specifying the destination of program installation is displayed.
8. Select the directory for installation.
In the initial state, the directory shown below is set as the destination directory.
C:\Program Files\Omron\NTST4.8E
Button and input the drive and
To change the directory, click the
directory. (If a directory that does not exist in the hard disk is specified, the
directory is automatically made.)
After specifying the destination, click the
Button.
33
Section
Installing the Support Tool
2-2
The program selection screen is displayed to allow you to select the
programs to be installed.
9. Click on the check box, displayed to the left of the program to be selected to
enter a check mark.
The following data and software will be installed depending on the options
that are selected.
Option
Data/software that is installed
NT-series Support Tool ver 4.8
The Support Tool, keyboard/tenkey
library, and color pallette symbols
(approx. 23 MB)
System Installer
Only the System Installer (access the
system programs directly from the
CD-ROM (approx. 20 MB)
Sample Collection
Lamp/touch switch parts library, parts
library list, sample screen data, and ISO
parts library (approx. 9 MB)
Click the Next Button
The screen for specifying the destination for registering the start menu is
displayed.
10. In the start menu of Windows, specify the folder where the short-cut to the
Support Tool is created.
In the initial state, the following folder is selected.
Start\Program\Omron\NTST4.8E
34
Section
Installing the Support Tool
2-2
If you want to change the folder, select the desired folder from the Existing
Folders or directly input the folder name. (If a folder that does not exist in the
hard disk is specified, the specified folder is automatically made.)
After specifying the folder, click the
Button.
Installation of the specified programs is implemented; files are copied.
During program installation, the progress of the processing is indicated as a
percentage.
11. After step (10), a dialog to select restart/non-restart will come out for Windows 95, 98, NT4.0, 2000, or XP.
Restarting your machine is recommended because important information is
registered after the restart. If you select to restart later, the registration will be
performed at this next restart and installation is completed.
Click the
Windows2000.
Button to finish or restart. Restart is not required for
35
Section
Installing the Support Tool
2-2
2-2-3 Uninstall
An uninstaller (uninstall software) is supplied with the Support Tool.
If you want to remove the Support Tool from your personal computer, run the
uninstaller to delete the Support Tool program files and installation information.
Note that the data created by the Support Tool is not deleted.
Starting the uninstaller from the Windows start menu
Select “Uninstall NTST” in the same folder where the short-cut to the Support
Tool is stored.
Example: Assuming the short-cut to the Support Tool exists in the Start\Program\Omron\NTST4.8E
Select the uninstaller by the following operation.
[Start] → [Program] → [Omron] → [NTST4.8E] →[Uninstall NTST]
After the start up of the uninstaller, follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
36
SECTION 3
Support Tool Starting-up and Exiting Procedure
and File Operation
This section describes how to start up and exit the Support Tool and the operating procedure for PT screen data files.
3-1
3-2
3-3
Starting-up and Exiting the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Start-up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Exit Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Functions Provided in the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Major Functions of Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3 Functions of Message Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Creating New Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Reading the Existing Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4 Closing the Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-5 Importing (Reading) the DOS Version Screen Data (Application) File . . . . . . . .
3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File
(Starting Up the Second Support Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-7 Using Method of Parts Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
38
39
39
39
43
44
44
45
53
54
56
56
57
60
37
Starting-up and Exiting the Support Tool
3-1
Section
3-1
Starting-up and Exiting the Support Tool
The procedure for starting up the Support Tool installed in your personal computer and exiting it is shown below.
3-1-1 Start-up Procedure
To start up the Support Tool, select [Programs] → [Omron] → [NTST4.8E] → [NTSeries Support Tool] beginning with the Windows start button.
After the start-up of the Support Tool, the main window, shown below, is displayed.
Reference: Up to two Support Tools can be started up at the same time.
You can copy and paste the screen data or table data between them by opening the two different screen data files. To start up the second Support Tool, select [Import Component] from the [File] menu in the main window of the first
Support Tool (It is not possible to start up the second Support Tool from the
[Start] menu of Windows). For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components
from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
38
Section
User Interface
3-2
3-1-2 Exit Procedure
To exit the Support Tool, use any of the operations shown below.
In the menu, select [File] → [Exit].
Click the
Button at the upper right corner in the main window.
Double click the Support Tool icon displayed at the upper left section in the
main window.
Click the Support Tool icon displayed at the upper left section in the main window, then select the
Button in the control menu box.
Press F4 key while pressing down the Alt key.
If you are going to exit the Support Tool before saving the data of the opened
screen, a confirmation message is displayed.
After you exit the Support Tool, the screen returns to the Windows screen.
3-2
User Interface
3-2-1 Functions Provided in the Main Window
The configuration of the Support Tool operation screen, name of each parts, and
the available functions are described below.
Title bar
Control Menu box
Menu bar
Standard toolbar
Draw bar
Application manager screen
Data creation screen
Status bar
Application manager screen
Directories of screens and tables are displayed as a tree list, which allows opening, copying, and other operations.
Data creation screen
On this screen, the screen to be displayed by the PT is created.
Control menu box
The control menu box displayed at the upper left corner of the operation screen
and windows allows you to select how a window is displayed.
39
Section
User Interface
3-2
Title bar
The titles of windows are displayed here on each window respectively.
Status bar
The status bar displays a simple explanation about the selected function, selected object, cursor position, object position, the model type of the objective PT,
PLC Vendor, the maximum memory size, and the remaining application size.
Status/Help message
or
information of object
Cursor Position
Selected PT model
Selected PLC
Top-left coordinate of
Vendor
selected objects
Application Memory (Remaining memory/Total memory
In case user application exceeds the total memory, remaining memory will be shown
as negative value in red color.)
Menu bar
The functions provided by the Support Tool are divided into several groups.
The menu bar shows the names of these function groups and the functions in
each group are displayed in pull-down menus.
Standard Toolbar
Functions that are used frequently — such as file reading/writing, copy and
paste, undo/redo, and print — are assigned to the buttons in the standard toolbar.
These functions can be called easily without selecting the function item from
the menu bar.
New
Save
Open
Print
preview
Print
Cut
New
Screen
Paste
Copy
Redo
Undo What’s This?
Draw Bar
Functions to draw objects are assigned to buttons in the draw bar.
40
Section
User Interface
3-2
These functions can be called easily without accessing the commands from
the menu bar.
Polyline Rectangle
Text
Image
Library object
object
Polygon
Selector Arc
Circle Sector Tiling
Mark
Standard lamp
Recipe
Touch
switch
Numeral
input
Image lamp Thumbwheel
switch
Numeral Bar Trend Alarm
display
graph graph history
String
input
Analogue
Meter
Broker
String
line
display
graph
Alarm
list
Utility Bar
Buttons for centralizing label of touch switch or lamp (refer to 5-1-3 Changing
the Display Method on the Support Tool), simulation for flash attribute in fixed
display objects (refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on the Support
Tool), lamp ON facility (refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool), and a combo-box for selecting to display certain screen object type
(refer to 5-1-4 Filter Function) are provided.
Simulate
Centralize
ON/OFF
Label
Simulate
Flash
Filter Screen
Element
Alignment Bar
This toolbar provides the object alignment to the top, bottom, left, right and also
center in a row and center in a column. (Refer to 6-1-6 Aligning Elements.)
Align
Top
Align
Left
Align
Bottom
Center in
a Column
Align
Right
Center
in
a Row
Reference: Whether or not Status Bar, Standard Toolbar, Draw Bar, Utility Bar and Alignment Bar are displayed can be selected, respectively, by the following operation.
41
Section
User Interface
Status Bar:
[View] (menu bar) → [Status Bar]
Standard Toolbar:
[View] (menu bar) → [Toolbars] → [Standard Bar]
Draw Bar:
[View] (menu bar) → [Toolbars] → [Draw Bar]
Utility Bar:
[View] (menu bar) → [Toolbars] → [Utility Bar]
Alignment Bar:
[View] (menu bar) → [Toolbars] → [Alignment Bar]
3-2
Each time you select the item, display/no-display selection changes alternately.
The check mark, if displayed, indicates that the selection of the corresponding
item is to be displayed.
If [Auto hide] invoked by selecting [Start] button (Windows) → [Settings] →
[Taskbar] → [Taskbar Options] is checked, status bar may not be displayed correctly when the window of the Support Tool is maximized. In this case, clear the
checkmark for [Always on top] at [Taskbar Options].
Floating palette
The standard toolbar, draw bar, utility bar and alignment bar can be moved as a
floating palette to a convenient place for your operation.
Object information on the status bar
The information for the selected object that will be displayed on the status bar is
indicated in the following table. (No information will be displayed when multiple
objects are selected) Information to be displayed may be cut depending on the
resolution of the screen or the selected object.
Screen Element
(Selected item)
Information to be displayed
Fixed Display Object
Fixed Display {Object Name: Attribute}
Fixed Display-Mark
Mark Object {Code*1}
Fixed Display-Image
Image Object {Reference Type: Code*1: Comment: Size: Compression}
Fixed Display-Library
Library Object {Reference Type: Code*1: Comment}
Image Lamp
Image Lamp {PLC Address: ON code*1: OFF code*1: ON comment if check else OFF comment}
Standard Lamp
Standard Lamp {PLC Address: Label*2}
Touch Switch
Touch Switch {Function: PLC Address: Label*2} (If function type is Notify Bit, display Notify
Address, else display Lamp Address)
42
Section
User Interface
Screen Element
(Selected item)
3-2
Information to be displayed
Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel {PLC Address: Table Entry*3}
Numeral Input
Numeral Input {PLC Address: Table Entry*3: Reference Type}
String Input
String Input {PLC Address: Table Entry*3: Reference Type}
Recipe
Recipe{Recipe Number; Recipe Name; Write Notify Bit; No. of Records: No. of Parameters}
Numeral Display
Numeral Display {PLC Address: Table Entry*3: Reference Type}
String Display
String Display {PLC Address: Table Entry*3: Reference Type}
Bar Graph
Bar Graph {PLC Address: Table Entry*3: Direction}
Trend Graph
Trend Graph {Type: Drawing Width: Direction}
Broken-line Graph
Broken-line Graph {Direction}
Alarm History
Alarm History {Display Image/Library or not}
Alarm List
Alarm List {Table Entry*3: Display Image/Library or not}
Analogue Meter
Analogue Meter {PLC Address: Table Entry*3}
(*1) M: Mark I: Image L: Library
(*2) If the image or library data for when the switch is lit is not specified, the comment for the image or library data for when the switch is not lit will be displayed.
(*3) For the NT21 and the NT31. NT31C, NT631, NT631C with “-V2” or “-V3,” the
information to be displayed depends on the Label Type as follows:
Static: Label
On Off Static: When [View] – [Simulate ON/OFF] setting is ON, displays ON
label, when OFF, displays OFF label.
Numeral Display: Same for Numeral Display information
String Display: Same for String Display information
(*4) N: Numeral Table S: String Table B: Bit Memory Table
3-2-2 Major Functions of Dialog Boxes
A dialog box is a window that is displayed in a fixed size. The purpose of a dialog
box is to set data that is required to execute the functions of the Support Tool.
The following types of dialog boxes are used and the procedure for setting the
data differs according to the type of dialog box.
Option button
This represents a selection item, with displayed to the left of the item name.
Only one of the displayed items can be chosen. The item is identified by a black
circle.
Check box
This represents a selection item, with displayed to the left of item name.
Items can be selected by giving a check mark in this box.
43
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
Text box
This text box is an input field to set characters.
List box
A list box displays a list of data: the data to be set is selected from the list.
Combo box
A list of selection items appears in the dropdown list box format. The data to be
set is selected from the list.
3-2-3 Functions of Message Boxes
Message boxes display details of errors that occur during Support Tool operation
and messages that request your confirmation of attempted operations.
When a message box shows up, operation can be continued or cancelled by
pressing the corresponding button in the message box.
3-3
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
The procedure for operating the screen data file, where the PT screen data is
stored, is described below. The PT Configuration, which determines the basic PT
operation, is also discussed.
44
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
3-3-1 Creating New Screen Data (Application) File
To create new screen data, select [New] in the [File] Menu of the main window.
PT configuration dialog box appears so that users can set information of the application environment and type of PT device.
Click the
Button after completing the setting at the PT configuration
dialog box. For details of the setting at the PT configuration dialog box, refer to
Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration below.
If the PT is set to the NT21, the clock address dialog box will appear next. Refer
to page 53.
The application manager and the data creation screen (1 Standard Screen) are
displayed.
PT screen data is created by arranging objects on this data creation screen.
The application manager is the tool to manage the screen data created by a user.
For operation procedure, refer to Section 4 Application Manager.
Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration
Before creating screen data, it is necessary to set the PT configuration and the
Control and Notify Areas that are shared with the PC (PLC).
The operation steps shown below display the PT configuration dialog box.
45
Section
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
3-3
Menu Bar → [File] → [New] (creating new application)
Menu Bar → [Tools] → [PT Configuration] (for modifying)
The PT configuration dialog box has a variety of setting items provided in three
pages.
PT Type page
System page
Control/Notify Area page
PT Type page
The PT Type page is displayed when you click on the [PT Type] tab.
The PT Type page is used to set the hardware configuration of the PT to be
connected.
PT Model
Specify the type of PT to be connected. When you are using the NT31, NT31C,
NT631 or NT631C, refer to the table below to select the correct model according
to the system program being installed.
PT Model
System Program
Ver.1.01
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.1
Ver.3.1 or Ver.4.0
NT31
”NT31”
”NT31-V1”
”NT31-V1(System Ver.2.1)”
”NT31-V2/V3 (System Ver. 3.1)”
NT31C
”NT31C”
”NT31C-V1”
”NT31C-V1(System Ver.2.1)”
”NT31C-V2/V3 (System Ver. 3.1)”
NT631
”NT631”
”NT631-V1”
”NT631-V1(System Ver.2.1)”
”NT631-V2 (System Ver. 3.1)”
NT631C
”NT631C”
”NT631C-V1”
”NT631C-V1(System Ver.2.1)”
”NT631C-V2/V3 (System Ver. 3.1)”
Reference: To check the system program version installed in a PT, display the following
screens:
Version display at the upper right position of PT system menu
PT system menu Expansion mode Version display
The the NT20, either ”NT20S” screen data (compatible with previous NT20S) or
”NT20” screen data (with expanded CS/CJ-series PLC data access) can be
used.
The following PT Models are also available:
46
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
NT31-V2
NT31C-V2
NT631-V2
MT631C-V2
NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode
For NT21 and NT31/631-V2 or higher models, the NT20/30/620 Compatible
Mode check box will be enabled. By setting this option, the Control Area will take
4 memory address, instead of 5 and Notify Area will take 3 memory address,
instead of 2. This allows straight conversion for NT30/620 PT models to
NT31/631 or NT20S models to NT21 without the need to modify the PLC program.
PLC Vendor
Specify the usable direct access type from either of the following.
MEMLINK, Mitsubishi_A and Mitsubishi_Fx can be set only with NT31, NT31C,
NT631and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
AB and GE can be set only with NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C below “-V1.”
Siemens can be set only with NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1.” (Refer to page 27).
OMRON
Mitsubishi_A
Mitsubishi_Fx
MEMLINK
AB
GE
Siemens
Font Type
If you are using NT31-V1, NT31C-V1, NT631-V1, NT631C-V1 and above hardware or had NT31, NT31C, NT631and NT631C and been updated the system
program to the -V2 (System Ver.3.1) system program, which is attached to this
Support Tool, it is possible to select the Font Type ISO8859-1 or CP437.
If you are using the European Keyboards, please refer to Appendix K for more
details.
Reference: Specify ”OMRON” as the PLC type when using memory links between the
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C.
Comment
Set the comment that is appended to the screen data file.
An arbitrary character of up to 28 characters can be set.
Reference: The PT model of the screen data that is opened can be changed. If it is
changed, the data is converted automatically. Note that changing of PT models
is allowed only for the restricted combinations shown in Appendix A Data Conversion.
47
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
System page
The System page is displayed when users click on the [System] tab.
Fundamental operating functions can be set in this System page.
Initial Screen
Screen number, which appears when the wrong data is set for PT Control Area
when PT is driven, is selected from the drop-down list box or keyboard input. Normally, this setting is invalid since PT References PT Control Area for the initial
screen number when starting up.
The screen numbers of existing screen data are listed in the list box or only
screen number 1 is displayed if the screen data is newly created.
Backlight OFF
Specify whether or not the backlight OFF function is used.
This option can be selected from System of PT Configuration in the Support Tool.
The Backlight OFF function automatically turns OFF the screen if the Support
Tool is not operated for a certain time period to save the backlight of PT.
If the check box is clicked to utilize the option, the time interval will be displayed in
the drop-down list box to set it.
For details of the PT models that can use this function, refer to Appendix E System Setting (PT Configuration).
Resume Function
The resume function holds the data in the table when the PT is OFF or reset.
For details of the PT models that can use this function, refer to Appendix E System Setting (PT Configuration).
History Setting
This item specifies the method for processing when the Log memory of the alarm
history function and History screen function becomes full.
- Alarm (Use Ring Buffer):
Same meaning with FIFO (First In First Out)
Alarm FIFO system is applied for this function if the log memory area is full.
When new alarm occurs, the oldest record data will be deleted so that the new
data can be stored there.
48
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
If the Alarm function is not chosen, newly coming data is not acceptable to record when the memory space is full.
- Screen (Use Ring Buffer):
Same meaning with FIFO (First In First Out).
When the new screen history occurred, the oldest record data will be deleted
so that new data can be stored there. This is so called FIFO. If this check box is
not ON, newly coming data is not acceptable to record when the memory
space is full.
Either the Alarm and the Screen data is available for the following PT models.
NT30, NT30C, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631,
NT631C.
(For NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, both Alarm and Screen settings are available.)
Number of Table Entries
Specify the number of numeral memory table entries, character string memory
table entries (String Table), and bit memory table entries.
Setting of the Number of Table Entries is valid for the following PT models.
NT30, NT30C, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631,
NT631C
Buzzer –Enable
Specify whether or not the buzzer function is used.
To use the buzzer function, click the check box to enter the check mark. To set the
buzzer function to be unused, click the check box to clear the check mark.
To sound the buzzer only at the occurrence of an alarm, specify [On Error] at the
drop-down list box.
If [Always] is selected for the buzzer function, the buzzer sounds at following
events.
Occurrence of an error at PT
Reception of a command from the host
Screen switching
Setting of the buzzer function is valid for the following PT models.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, buzzer function settings
are made by system menu operation at the PT and setting from the Support
Tool is not allowed.
Buzzer – Key Input
Click the check box of [Key Input] to enter the check mark if you want to sound the
buzzer in response to the input from a touch switch or the extended I/O unit. Clear
the check mark if the key input sound is not to be used.
Printer for PT
A printer can be connected to PT device for printing screen data if required. You
have to specify the type of printer being used by the application for the following
PT models:
49
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
Printer
Select one of the Supported printers from the printer drop-down list box.
Although this setting is possible for NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C, it is not
valid from Support Tool.
Please set from the Maintenance Mode of PT.
Mode
Color:
Specify “Color” for color printing.
Designation of Color is valid for the following PT models.
NT30C, NT620C, NT625C
Tone:
Specify “Tone” for monochrome printing.
If a color type PT is used with Tone set for [Mode], color data is expressed using
a gray scale, printed in monochrome.
These setting are available for the following PT models.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S (Printer only), NT620C, NT625C
For NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, this setting has to be selected
from PT.
Numeral Storage Type
BCD or Binary can be selected for the storage type of the Numeral memory table.
This setting is available only when the time the Storage Type in the Numeral
memory table has [System] setting. When BCD or Binary is set for Numeral
memory table Storage Type, this setting in the PT Configuration will be ignored
and follows the storage type in the Numeral Table.
This setting is available for the following PT Model.
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
Control/Notify Area page
The Control/Notify Area page is displayed when you click on the [Control/Notify
Area] tab.
The Control/Notify Area page is prepared to set the PT Control area, controlling PT from PC (PLC) and for PT Notify Area, notifying PT information to a PC
50
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
(PLC and for window control area, controlling a window (NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with “-V1” and “-V2” only).
PT Control Area
PC (PLC) Address
Set the type of words at the PC (PLC) and the first address (word number) of
the area used as the PT Status Control Area.
The PT Status Control Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies
the following number of words.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C:
For V1 models, and V2 models without
NT20/30/620 Compatible mode:
For V2 models with NT30/620 Compatible mode:
5 words
4 words
NT21:
Without NT20/30/620 Compatible mode:
With NT20/30/620 Compatible mode:
5 words
4 words
Other models:
4 words
Comments
Set a comment concerning this area.
As a comment, up to 16 character can be set.
PT Notify Area
PC (PLC) Address
Set the type of words at the PC (PLC) and the first address (word number) of
the area used as the PT Status Notify Area.
The PT Status Notify Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies
the following number of words.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C:
For V1 models and V2 models without NT20/30/620 Compatible mode: 2
words
For V2 models with NT20/30/620 Compatible mode: 3 words
NT21:
Without NT20/30/620 Compatible mode:
With NT20/30/620 Compatible mode:
Other models:
2 words
3 words
3 words
51
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
Comments
Set a comment concerning the area set as the PT Status Notify Area.
As a comment, a character string of up to 16 characters can be set.
Window Control Area
PC (PLC) Address
Set the type of words at the PC (PLC) and the first address (word number) of
the area used as the Window Control Area.
Window Control Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the
following number of words.
NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with “-V1” or “V2”: 9 words
Other models: can not be used
Comments
Set a comment concerning the area set as the Window Control Area.
As a comment, a character string of up to 16 characters can be set.
Note
Set memory addresses so that the PT Control Area, PT Notify Area and Window
Control Area do not overlap.
PC (PLC) Address dialog box
Clicking on the [Set] button in the [PT Control Area], [PT Notify Area] or [Window Control Area] displays the PC (PLC) Address dialog box.
In the PC (PLC) Address dialog box, the PC (PLC) address of the PT Status
Control Area, the PT Status Notify Area and the Window Control Area can be
set by specifying the area type and address individually. The setting made in
the PC (PLC) Address dialog box will be reflected on the setting made in the
[PC (PLC) Control Area], [PT Notify Area] or [Window Control Area].
Use the PC (PLC) Address dialog box only when the area type and address are
input individually. If the PC (PLC) address is directly input in the Control/Notify
Area page, it is not necessary to call this dialog box.
Example PLC Vendor: OMRON
Channel (Word)
Specify the type of PC (PLC) area that is used as a PT Status Control Area, a
PT Status Notify Area or a Window Control Area by selecting an item from the
drop-down list box.
Address
Specify the first word address in the PC (PLC) area that is to be used as the PT
Status Control Area, PT Status Notify Area, and Window Control Area.
52
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
I/O Comments
Set a comment concerning the area set as the PT Status Control Area, a PT
Status Notify Area, or a Window Control Area.
As a comment, a character string of up to 16 characters can be set.
Clock Address
When the PT is set to the NT21, the addresses must be set to read the clock
from the PLC host. This setting is not necessary for other models of PT.
If the PT is set to the NT21 on the tools page of the PT configuration dialog box,
the clock address dialog box shown below appears. Always set an address
when using the clock function (data displays, screen display history, or alarm
history).
PLC Address
Set the area and the address of the first word from which to read the clock data.
A Clock Data Area will be defined consisting of 4 words starting at the specified
address.
I/O Comments
Set a comment for the address used to define the Clock Data Area. Up to 16
character can be input.
PLC Address Dialog Box
This dialog box is set in the same way as the one for the PT configuration dialog
box.
3-3-2 Reading the Existing Screen Data (Application) File
To read the screen data that is saved in a file, select [File] → [Open] from the main
window menu.
53
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
The dialog box for the applicable folder, file name, and files of type exist appears
to specify them.
NTST Application (*.onw)
After specifying the folder, file name, and file type click on the [Open] button.
The application manager of the read out screen data is displayed.
With NT-series Support Tool for Windows, following screen data files can be handled.
onw
mmi
For details, refer to File Types in page 55
Reference: Recent used files will be shown at the bottom of [File] menu. Recent four files
can be opened from this command.
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.7) can read the screen data that is
created using an earlier version of NT-series Support Tool.
It is not possible to read screen data created by NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.7) with an earlier version of NT-series Support Tool.
With MMI files, the screen data created by the Support Tool Ver.4 can be read
using Support Tool Ver.3. as long as the PT model is supported with Ver.3..
(With MMI format, user group and grid information will be lost.)
e.g.
NT30C MMI file created with Ver.4.
Can be read with Ver.3
NT31C-V2 MMI file created with Ver.4.
Cannot be read with Ver.3
3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File
After creating the screen data, save it to a file.
The procedure for saving the screen data to a file is: [File] (main window menu)
→ [Save], or [File] (main window menu) → [Save As].
Save:
The existing screen data of the opened file is overwritten by the new screen
data.
54
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
If the file was opened using [New], the operation to be followed is the same as
for saving a file by selecting [Save As].
Save As:
The created or edited screen data is saved by specifying the folder and the file
name.
File name setting dialog
If you select [Save] when creating new screen data or [Save As], the file name
setting window (Save As) opens.
NTST Application (*.onw)
After inputting the folder and file name, click the
data is saved to the specified file.
Button the screen
If the file name of an existing file is specified, a message requesting confirmation that the file is to be overwritten is displayed.
File types
When saving files in file name setting dialog, either of following two file types
can be selected.
NTST screen data (*.onw) format (onw format)
This is a standard file format for Support Tool.
Use this format to save screen data normally.
Memory map image file (*.mmi) format (mmi format)
This is a file format to which screen data is compressed after deleting information used only for Support Tool. (Data to be lost are grid setting and grouping
information.)
Use this format for purposes such as transferring screen data using FD.
It is advisable to save the same data with onw format also, since part of information are lost with this format as mentioned above.
Once you saved data, specified file types will not be changed until you exit the
Support Tool or perform saving/reading the onw file. (Data will be saved in the
format same as before when you select “Save” to save it.) If you want to change
the file type, select “Save As.”
Reference: It is not possible to save data in DOS format.
Once you read the data that was created using DOS version Support Tool by
NT-series Support Tool for Windows, do not upload the data with DOS tool
55
Section
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
3-3
even if it has been download to PT. Downloading will be possible; however, the
data may not be used with DOS version Support Tool correctly.
ST
DOS version Support Tool
Upper
compatibility
PT
NT20, NT20S, NT30,
NT30C, NT620S,
NT620C/NT625C
Windows version Support Tool
With mmi file format, error check is executed before saving. By this error check,
data that cannot be downloaded to PT will not be stored.
With the Support Tool on CD-ROM, the NT Transfer Utility, which transmits
mmi file to the PT, is supplied. For details, refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utility.
3-3-4 Closing the Screen Data (Application) File
It is not possible to open two or more screen data files with one Support Tool. So
when you want to edit different screen data file, you need to close the currently
opened file, or start up the second Support Tool using the [Import Component]
command from the [File] menu. For details of Import Component, refer to 3-3-6
Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second
Support Tool).
To close application, select [Close] from [File] in the main window menu.
If the screen data (application) has not been saved, a message requesting confirmation of saving it is indicated/displayed.
If the file name is not set, the name setting dialog appears. If
the file name has been already determined, the data will be
overwritten.
The screen data file closes without saving the screen data.
The file close operation is canceled.
3-3-5 Importing (Reading) the DOS Version Screen Data (Application)
File
The Support Tool has a function for reading screen data files created using the
previous DOS version Support Tool. Note that although the DOS version screen
data files can be read, files cannot be saved in DOS format.
56
Section
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
3-3
The procedure for reading a DOS version screen data file is:
[File] (main window menu) → [Import].
For “Files of type,” select any of the following items according to the model of
Support Tool used to create the screen data you are going to read.
M1S:
Screen data for NT11S/NT11
M2S:
Screen data for NT20S
M6S:
Screen data for NT600S
G6S:
Screen data for NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and
NT625C
Click the
name.
Button after selecting the folder and specifying the file
The application manager of the read screen data will be displayed.
Reference: For details of the PT models and types, the Support Tool can create screen
data for, refer to 1-6 Usable Hardware Combinations.
Refer to Appendix A Data Conversion to reuse or convert screen data from
previous PT models.
3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting
Up the Second Support Tool)
Select [Import Component] from the [File] menu and you can start up the second
Support Tool and open a different screen data file. By reading out the different
screen data files with the two Support Tools, data copying/pasting can be performed easily between the files.
57
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
When you select [Import Component], a dialog box to specify the file to be read is
displayed. (For details of this dialog, refer to 3-3-2 Reading the Existing Screen
Data (Application) File.)
After specifying the folder, file name and file type, click the
Button.
The second Support Tool starts up and the application manager of the read out
screen data is displayed.
Reference: It is not possible to start up the second Support Tool from the [Start] button of
Windows (Error message will be displayed). Be sure to select [Import Component] from the [File] menu in the main window of the first Support Tool.
Copy/paste operation can not be performed between the two files if the PT
model of the two files is different. In this case, perform data conversion beforehand so that the PT model setting of the copy source screen data matches to
the setting of the copy destination screen data. (Selected PT model can be
checked on the status bar.)
It is not possible to edit the same screen data file by two Support Tools. If you try
to read out the file that is already opened by the other Support Tool, error message will be displayed.
The second Support Tool can read out the screen data file regardless of the file
types (onw, mmi).
When the second Support Tool is started, the windows of both Support Tools
are automatically resized into normal windows that overlap each other to facilitate the copy operation between the files.
It is not possible to open one more Support Tool when two Support Tools are
already started.
[Import Component] will not be displayed in the [File] menu when no screen
data is opened with the Support Tool.
Conversion of PLC address is executed when the PLC vendor (direct access)
is different between the copy source/destination screen data.
Conversion of key code is executed when the key code (font type) is different
between the copy source/destination screen data.
In case of the numeral/string table and bit memory table, if the table size of
copy destination is smaller than the size of copy source, excessive entries will
be discarded.
To achieve higher performance, close the second Support Tool after you completed import operation.
58
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
It may take time to read out MMI file since data checking is performed before
opening the file.
Possible Operation between Two Support Tools
While screen data files of the same PT model are opened with the two Support
Tools, following operations are possible.
a. Copying, cutting, pasting and drag & drop of a screen between application
managers (multiple screens can be also handled). (Refer to 4-2-4 Copying a
Screen.)
b. Copying, cutting, pasting and drag & drop of a table data between application
managers (All the data in a table is handled, it is possible to handle a table
entry individually or to handle multiple table entries collectively.) (Refer to
4-2-9 Copying the Whole Table.)
c. Copying, cutting, pasting of a number/code between the following table
entries (Drag & drop is not possible).
Between image table entries (Refer to 8-1-1 Operating the Image Table.)
Between library table entries (Refer to 8-2-1 Operating the Library Table.)
Between bit memory table entries (Refer to 7-1-4 Edit Operation.)
Between numeral table entries (Refer to 7-1-4 Edit Operation.)
Between string table entries (Refer to 7-1-4 Edit Operation.)
Between extended I/O output table entries (Refer to 7-1-4 Edit Operation.)
Between extended I/O input table entries (Refer to 7-1-4 Edit Operation.)
d. Copying, cutting, pasting and drag & drop of objects between editing screens
or library editors. (Drag & drop can not be performed if the copy destination
59
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
window is hidden under other windows.) (Refer to 6-1-5 Copying, Cutting,
Pasting, and Deleting Elements.)
e. Copying, cutting, pasting of the specified area between image editors or mark
editors (Drag & drop is not possible). (Refer to 8-1-2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor, 8-3-2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor.)
These operating procedures are same as normal operations of copy, cut, paste
and drag & drop on one Support Tool.
Copying/Pasting an Object That Contains Image/Library Data
Even if a screen or an object that contains image/library data is pasted onto a
different screen data file, image/library data itself is not copied if NT-series Support Tool version number is lower than 4.6.
If you want to copy/paste an object that contains image/library data between
screen data files, you need to copy the image/library data referenced by the object beforehand.
Ex: Copying/pasting a fixed-display image that references image code 0001
while the contents of the code are different between the screen data files
As shown above, image data to be displayed will vary even if both objects are
referencing the same code, when the contents of the referenced image code are
different between the screen data files. (When no data is registered to the referenced code,
is displayed. )
3-3-7 Using Method of Parts Collection
With the Support Tool on CD-ROM, Parts Collection is supplied.
In this section, using method of Parts Collection is described.
60
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
Parts Collection
Lamps and touch switches will be graphical and expressive parts when they are
combined with image/library data or image lamps. These graphical lamps and
touch switches are registered to the Parts Collection (Parts Collection for each
PT model is provided).
Using [Import Component] command, desired data can be copied/pasted from
Parts Collection to the editing screen easily.
Reference: Parts Collection is supplied only for the Support Tool on CD-ROM. It can be
installed by specifying “Sample Collection” when installing the Support Tool.
Parts Collection for NT11S/NT11, NT20/NT20S and NT600S is not supplied.
Parts Collection is created in MMI format. It may take time to read out/save
MMI file.
If you install the Parts Collection, the Parts Collection List, which shows how to
use the Parts Collection, the list of screen images, will be automatically
installed as well. This list is stored in the Parts Collection List folder inside the
Sample collection folder.
Operation Procedure
To use the Parts Collection, follow the procedure below.
Here, operations such as copying, pasting, drag & drop are not described in details. Please refer to 8-1 Image Editor, 8-2 Library Editor and 6-1-5 Copying, Cutting, Pasting, and Deleting Elements.
(1) Open the screen data file to which you want to paste data from Parts Collection.
(2) Select [Import Component] from the [File] menu.
(3) Dialog box to specify the file to be opened is displayed. Open the Sample
Collection folder in the folder that Support Tool has been installed into. Then,
open the folder of the required PT model (see below). Select “Memory Map
Image File (*.mmi)” as a file type.
Parts Collection for each PT model is displayed. Specify the Parts Collection
of the PT model same as the currently opened screen data file and click the
Button.
Second Support Tool starts up and the selected Parts Collection opens.
(4) In the screen data file of Parts Collection, decide the object that you want to
import.
(5) If the object contains image/library data, the image/library data should be copied between image/library table entries beforehand by copy/paste operation
if NT-series Support Tool version number is lower than 4.6. Follow the proce-
61
Operation of Screen Data (Application) File
Section
3-3
dure below.
Code number to be copied can be checked in the property of an object. (Referenced image/library code is also displayed on the status bar for some object when they are selected.)
If image/library copying is not performed beforehand, display will not be as
intended since the image/library allocated to the code is not copied even if the
object itself is copied.
Procedure
a. Open the property of an image lamp or image/library data to be imported and
check the referenced image/library code.
b. Select [Image Editor] or [Library Editor] from the [Tools] menu and copy ([Edit]
– [Copy]) the code to be imported on the image/library table.
c. Open the image/library table of the screen data file of copy destination and
paste the image/library data that has been copied.
This time, if the copy destination code number is different from the copy
source code number, display will not be correct when the object is pasted.
Register the same code number as copy source by clicking the
Button.
(6) Drag & drop the object that you want to import from the screen data file of
Parts Collection to the screen data file of copy destination ([Copy], [Paste] in
the [Edit] menu can be used also).
62
SECTION 4
Application Manager
This section shows how the application manager is used when checking the created data, copying screen data, setting a
memory table, operating a window.
4-1
4-2
What Is the Application Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Opening a Data Creation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Closing a Creation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-3 Creating a New Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-4 Copying a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-5 Deleting a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-6 Displaying and Setting the PT configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-7 Displaying and Setting Screen Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-8 Editing a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-9 Copying an Entire Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-10 Saving the Screen Data (Application) to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-11 Error Check (Validation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-12 Sending (Downloading) the Data to a PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-13 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-14 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
65
65
65
65
66
67
67
67
67
68
69
69
71
72
74
63
What Is the Application Manager?
4-1
Section
4-1
What Is the Application Manager?
A screen data (application) file holds a variety of data. The application manager
is a data management tool used for managing the various types of screen data.
Since the application manager displays the data in tree style, you can check the
created data or read the necessary data easily.
(The number and type of screens and tables displayed in the application manager vary according to the setting made for [PT Model] of [PT Type] in the PT configuration. Bit map shown above is in case of NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C.)
The application manager provides following operations:
Opening a data creation screen
Creation of new application
Copying a screen
Deleting a screen
Displaying and setting PT configuration
Displaying and setting screen properties
Editing tables
Saving the created data to a file
Sending (downloading) the created data to a PT
Icons used by the application manager
App 1: Name of application folder
When a file name has been specified, the file name specified by App 1 is used.
Double clicking of this icon opens a set of sub-data box by screen type.
screen: Screen data box
Double clicking of this icon displays the screen data boxes classified by group.
table: Table data box
Double clicking of this icon shows memory tables classified by icon.
1-1899.2000 (Standard): Screen data boxes classified by screen type
1-1899.2000: Indicates a screen number.
Standard: Indicates screen type.
Double-clicking of this icon displays the screen icons in a group.
The screen number and screen type displayed here differ from PT models.
64
Section
Operating the Application Manager
4-2
: Screen icon
1: Indicates a screen number.
Double clicking of this icon opens a data creation screen.
numeral memory table: Table data icon
Numeral memory table: Indicates a table type.
Double clicking of this icon opens a memory table dialog box setting.
The type of table to be displayed differs depending on the PT model.
When you click on [)], displayed to the left of a
icon, icons existing under the
clicked icon are displayed. Clicking on [−] hides these icons.
4-2
Operating the Application Manager
The procedure for operating and setting the data using the application manager
is shown below.
Two types of operations - mouse operation and menu operation - are possible.
For the menu driven operation, short-cut keys (keys used to call menu functions)
may be used instead of displaying the menu.
4-2-1 Opening a Data Creation Screen
The procedure for opening a creation screen of existing data is shown below.
Operation using the mouse (1)
(1) Double click the screen icon.
Operation using the mouse (2)
(1) Click the right mouse button at the screen icon.
(2) Select [Open].
4-2-2 Closing a Creation Screen
The procedure for closing a creation screen is shown below.
Operation using the mouse
(1) Click the
Button at the upper right corner in the data creation screen.
4-2-3 Creating a New Screen
The procedure for opening a new screen is shown below.
Operation using the mouse
(1) Click the screen data box icon, or right click the mouse on the screen data
box (classified by group).
(2) Select [New], choose the screen type, then click the
(3) Input a screen number and a comment, then click the
Button.
Button.
Operation using the menu
(1) Select [New] from [Screen] in the menu bar.
(2) Select the screen type, then click the
Button.
65
Section
Operating the Application Manager
(3) Input a screen number and a comment, then click the
4-2
Button.
4-2-4 Copying a Screen
The procedure for copying an existing screen to another screen number is shown
below.
Reference: The operations shown below can be performed between different screen data
files of the same PT model by starting up two Support Tools. For details, refer to
3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the
Second Support Tool).
Operation using the mouse (1)
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while
pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Click right button of the mouse on the selected screen icon, then select
[Copy].
(3) Click right button of the mouse on one of the screen icon, then select [Paste].
(4) Input a screen number, then click the
Button.
The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated
number, and in the new screen number field, the smallest number of the
available screen numbers is displayed.
If you input an existing screen number, a confirmation message is displayed
to overwrite it.
Operation using the mouse (2)
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while
pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Drag the selected screen icon in the screen icon display area.
(3) Input a screen number, then click the
Button.
The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated
number, and in the new screen number field, the smallest number of the
available screen numbers is displayed.
If you input an existing screen number, a confirmation message is displayed
to overwrite it.
Operation using the menu
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while
pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Select [Copy] from [Edit] in the menu bar.
(3) Then select [Paste] from [Edit] in the menu bar.
(4) Input a screen number, then click the
Button.
The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated
number, and in the new screen number field, the smallest number of the
available screen numbers is displayed.
If you input an existing screen number, a confirmation message is displayed
to overwrite it.
66
Operating the Application Manager
Section
4-2
4-2-5 Deleting a Screen
The procedure for deleting a created screen is shown below.
Operation using the mouse
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while
pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Click right button of the mouse on the selected screen icon, then choose
[Delete].
The message requesting your confirmation is displayed.
Operation using the menu
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while
pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Select [Delete] from [Edit] in the menu bar.
A message requesting your confirmation is displayed.
4-2-6 Displaying and Setting the PT configuration
The procedure for displaying the PT configuration dialog box is shown below.
For details, refer to Dialog Box Setting in the PT Configuration on page 45.
Operation using the mouse
(1) Click right button of the mouse on the screen data (application) file icon, then
select [Setup].
Operation using the menu
(1) Select [PT Configuration] from [Tools] in the menu bar.
4-2-7 Displaying and Setting Screen Properties
The procedure for displaying the property setting dialog box is shown below.
For details, refer to 5-1 Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations.
Operation using the mouse
(1) Click right button of the mouse on the screen data file icon, then select
[Properties].
Operation using the menu
(1) Select the screen icon.
(2) Select [Properties] from [Screen] in the menu bar.
Reference: The following operations can also display the screen property setting dialog
box.
Click right button of the mouse on the editing screen where no objects are registered, then select [Properties].
Double click on the editing screen where no objects are registered.
4-2-8 Editing a Table
The procedure for displaying the table setting dialog box is shown below.
67
Operating the Application Manager
Section
4-2
For details, refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting or Section 8 Editing Graphic
Data.
Operation using the mouse (1)
Double click the icon of the table data to be edited.
Operation using the mouse (2)
Make a right click on the icon of the table data to be edited, then select [Modify].
Operation using the menu
(1) Select [Tools] in the menu bar, then choose [Table], [Image Editor], [Library
Editor] or [Mark Editor].
(2) If [Table] is chosen, select the tab of the table to be edited.
4-2-9 Copying an Entire Table
An entire table can be copied between the screen data files of the same PT model by starting up two Support Tools.
Caution:
Copying of tables, screens, and objects between two screen data files involves
addition or overwriting of PLC address. Please check the movement sufficiently
before shifting to actual operation.
Reference: To start up second Support Tool, select [Import Component] from [File] menu,
For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data
File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
If the whole table is copied, all the contents in the specified table are copied
collectively. For method to copy the individual data in a table, refer to Section 7
Memory Table Setting or Section 8 Editing Graphic Data.
A check box for “Overwrite PLC Address” appears when copying the whole
table indicated below. If this check box is checked, PLC address setting is overwritten. If not checked, settings such as initial value will be overwritten but the
PLC address setting remains the same. Note that I/O comments are not copied
even if the PLC address is overwritten. If you need the same I/O comment,
copy the I/O comment.
Bit memory table, Extended I/O output table, Numeral table, String table, FKey input notify table
Operation using the mouse (1)
(1) Specify the table data icon.
Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing
the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Click right button of the mouse on the selected table data icon, then select
[Copy].
(3) Click right button of the mouse on the desired table in the table data icon display area of another Support Tool, then select [Paste].
(4) In the confirmation dialog box, click the
Button. If a check box for
“Overwrite PLC Address” appeared in the dialog box, make the setting as
required.
Operation using the mouse (2)
(1) Specify the table data icon.
Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing
the Shift key or Ctrl key.
68
Operating the Application Manager
Section
4-2
(2) Drag the selected table data icon to the table data icon display area of another Support Tool.
(3) In the confirmation dialog box, click the
Button. If a check box for
“Overwrite PLC Address” appeared in the dialog box, make the setting as
required.
Operation using the menu
(1) Specify the table data icon.
Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing
the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Select [Copy] from [Edit] in the menu bar.
(3) Then select [Paste] from [Edit] in the menu bar of another Support Tool.
(4) In the confirmation dialog box, click the
Button. If a check box for
“Overwrite PLC Address” appeared in the dialog box, make the setting as
required.
4-2-10 Saving the Screen Data (Application) to a File
The procedure for saving the screen data to a file is shown below.
For details, refer to 3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File.
Please save frequently. Support Tool will not save automatically.
Operation using the mouse
(1) Click right button of the mouse on the screen data file icon, then select
[Save] or [Save As].
If you select [Save] for a file other than a new file, the saving operation starts
immediately without prompting dialog box.
(2) Specify the folder and file name of the destination and click the
ton.
But-
If you specify an existing file, a message requesting your confirmation is displayed if it is overwritten.
Operation using the menu
(1) Select [File] in the menu bar, then choose [Save] or [Save As].
If you select [Save] for a file other than a new file, the saving operation starts
immediately without prompting dialog box.
(2) Specify the folder and file name of the destination and click the
ton.
But-
If you specify an existing file, a message requesting your confirmation is displayed if overwriting should be done.
4-2-11 Error Check (Validation)
The Support Tool has a function to check the data such as limitations of screen
elements and PC (PLC) address assignments in order to prevent illegal data
from being downloaded. This is called Validation.
The following three validation functions are provided:
Validation performed on real time
69
Section
Operating the Application Manager
4-2
The Support Tool provides real time validation while users are creating data.
This function mainly checks the elements one by one. Moreover, maximum
number of elements and memory size will be also watched.
Validation performed from the [Tools] menu → [Validate]
It is also possible to perform the Validation using [Tools] → [Validate] from the
menu bar.
By the check, Support Tool will detect the contradiction in the screen (application) data including association between touch switches and the elements and
so on.
This check will be also performed at the beginning of the download process to
prohibit the wrong data to be downloaded.
Validation during the data conversion and importing DOS data file
Validation will be also performed when converting the screen data (application)
from a current model to another model and when importing the DOS data file.
Data conversion will be also performed when the registered symbol data from
the Symbol Manager that was created by a certain PT model, has been
dragged and dropped to the another PT model screen. So at this time validation will be also performed.
Reference: Validation will be also performed when saving the screen data in mmi format.
Executing the Validation
Validating the current focused screen
Make sure the screen you want to validate is open, and select [Validate] from
the [Tools] menu.
Validating the whole screen data (application) file
(1) Right after performing the screen validation mentioned above, choose [Validate] from the [Tools] menu again. Confirmation dialog box arrives.
(2) Click the
Button. Then the validation will start.
During the validation, it is not possible to perform other operation.
After the validation has been completed the result message arrives.
Reference: Please execute the validation after the creation of screen data (application).
Validation might need a sufficient time period in case the screen data (application) itself has large size and validation for the whole data has been executed.
So when “Validating for the whole data” has been performed, the confirmation
dialog box appears asking whether you want to perform the validation or not.
Click the
Button to start the validation.
Displaying the error log and its location
If the error check function detects an error, a brief error message is displayed and
you are requested to confirm the “error log.”
Reference: The messages contents of the error log are cleared when an element or a
screen is operated. Therefore, if an error is detected, display the error log window immediately to determine the details of the error. Since errors occurring
during data conversion, in particular, may not reoccur if you try to check them
later, they must be checked at their occurrence.
70
Operating the Application Manager
Section
4-2
The results of the error check can be printed or saved in a file. For details, refer
to Section 12 Making Reports.
The procedure for displaying the error log window is shown below.
(1) Select [View] in the menu bar, then choose [Error Log].
The error log window opens.
With some types of errors, double-clicking on the error message will display the
screen(s) where the error has occurred.
For the meaning of error message and the solution to be taken to correct the error, refer to Appendix A Data Conversion and Appendix H Error Messages.
4-2-12 Sending (Downloading) the Data to a PT
The data created using the Support Tool can be sent (downloaded) to a PT. It is
possible to send the screen data collectively or only the data of the specified
screens or memory tables. Here, only the procedure is described. For details,
refer to 11-3 Sending (Downloading) the Data.
Before sending the data, set the communication conditions (communication port
and communication speed [Baud Rate]) by selecting [Connect] (menu bar) and
[Comms. Setting].
Operation using the mouse
Sending (Downloading) the whole data file
(1) Right click the mouse on the screen data file icon, then select [Download].
If the screen data is free of errors, sending of the data starts immediately.
A message is displayed if the data has an error.
Sending (Downloading) specified screen
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple files can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing
the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Make a right click on the selected screen icon, then choose [Download].
(3) Specify if child screens of continuous/overlapping screens are also to be
sent, then click the
Button.
If the screen data is free of errors, transmitting of the data starts immediately.
A message will be displayed if the data has an error.
71
Section
Operating the Application Manager
4-2
Sending (Downloading) specified Table
(1) Right click the mouse on the table data box icon, then select [Download].
The dialog box used for specifying the table to be sent (downloaded) is displayed for PTs that allow table data to be sent in table individually. With PTs
that do not allow table data to be sent table by table, sending of the data
starts immediately.
(2) Specify the table to be sent (downloaded), then click the
Button.
Reference: It is not possible to send (download) the direct access information or system
memory individually. Please use the menu operation.
Operation using the menu
Sending (Downloading) the whole data file
(1) Select [Connect] in the menu bar, then choose [Download (NT-series Support Tool → PT)] → [Application].
If the screen data is free of errors, sending of the data starts immediately.
A message is displayed if the data has an error.
Sending (Downloading) specified screen
(1) Specify the screen icon.
Multiple files can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing
the Shift key or Ctrl key.
(2) Select [Connect] in the menu bar, then choose [Download (NT-series
Support Tool → PT)] → [Screen].
(3) Specify if child screens of continuous/overlapping screens are also to be
Button.
sent, then click the
If the screen data is free of errors, sending of the data starts immediately.
A message is displayed if the data has an error.
Sending (Downloading) specified Tables
(1) Select [Connect] in the menu bar, then choose [Download (NT-series
Support Tool → PT)] → [Table].
The dialog box used for specifying the table to be sent is displayed for PTs
that allow table data to be sent in table units. With PTs that do not allow table
data to be sent table by table, sending of the data starts immediately.
(2) Specify the table to be sent, then click the
Button.
Reference: Downloading in table units may not be possible with some PT types.
Sending the Direct Access Information and system memory
(1) Select [Connect] in the menu bar, then choose [Download (NT-series
Support Tool → PT)] → [Direct Access Information] or [System Memory].
If the setting is free of errors, sending of the data starts immediately. A message is displayed if the data has an error.
4-2-13 Window Menu
The following Support Tool operations are possible using the [Window] menu.
Opening a new window for the data creation screen that is active
72
Section
Operating the Application Manager
4-2
Arranging windows
Switching windows
Reference: The Support Tool can operate windows in the same manner as other Windows
applications. Here, only the functions that can be selected from the Support
Tool menus are explained.
Opening a new window
To open a new window for the data creation screen that is active, follow the procedure described below.
Reference 1. Windows with the same screen number display the same contents.
2. When the same screen is displayed in two windows, elements can be copied
between the windows by dragging them while pressing the Ctrl key. Usually,
copying an element to a desired position in the same screen is not possible.
However, if two same windows are opened, it is possible to copy an element
to a desired position although they are on the same screen.
(Similarly, if different screen data files of the same PT model are opened by
two Support Tools, it is possible to copy screen data between the files.)
3. When multiple windows that have the same screen number exist, the following information is displayed in the window title area (for standard screens).
x Standard Screen:
y
(x: Screen number, y:
Serial number)
Serial numbers will be assigned in the order the windows are opened. If any
window presently opened is closed, the serial numbers are renumbered automatically.
4. The Support Tool can open up to ten windows at the same time in addition to
the application manager window.
Operation
(1) Specify the screen.
Click on the screen or double-click on the screen icon to open multiwindows.
(2) Select [New Window] from [Window] in the menu bar.
An additional window opens for the screen specified in step (1).
Arranging windows
Windows can be arranged in any of the following three ways.
Cascade:
All windows are cascaded in such a way that window titles are visible. All
windows are displayed at the same size.
The order of cascading differs depending on the display position of the windows before the cascading operation is attempted.
Tile:
All windows are arranged over the entire main window area at the same size.
However, the sizes may differ slightly, depending on the number of windows.
The order of tiling differs depending on the display position of windows before tiling operation is attempted.
73
Section
Operating the Application Manager
4-2
Arrange Icons:
The application manager and creation screens shown in icon form are arranged in the lower left part of the main window.
The order in which the icons are displayed differs depending on the display
position of the icons before the arrange icons operation was attempted.
Operation
(1) Select [Window] in the menu bar, then choose [Cascade], [Tile], or [Arrange
Icons].
The windows are arranged according to the selected item.
Switching windows
Under the [Window] menu, up to nine windows that are open are displayed in a
list.
If the number of windows is ten or more, the [More windows...] item is displayed.
The window selection dialog box opens when this item is selected.
Users can activate the particular screen to edit from [Window] in the main menu
or selecting from window selection dialog box of [More windows...].
This feature brings simple operation to edit data of veiled screen.
4-2-14 Help Menu
The [Help] menu includes the following items.
Contents
Search for Help on
What’s This?
PLC Address Help
About NT-series Support Tool
Displaying help information using the table of contents
The help information of the Support Tool is constructed so that the functions can
be tracked according to the menu configuration. To display help on a specific
function, display the table of contents of the help information and find help on the
relevant function.
Operation
(1) Select [Help] in the menu bar, then select [Contents].
The table of contents of help is displayed.
(2) Select an item to display the corresponding help contents.
In the information displayed in the help screen, items that have a link to detailed help information are underlined; click on such an item to access the
detailed information.
The necessary information will be reached by tracking the items in this way.
Reference: The
button or F1 key is also used to display the table of contents for
help information.
Displaying help information by searching for a keyword
Help information on a specific topic can be displayed by inputting the related keyword.
74
Section
Operating the Application Manager
4-2
Operation
(1) Select [Help] in the menu bar, then select [Search for Help on].
The topic search dialog box is displayed.
(2) Input a keyword.
When the keyword is input, the corresponding help item is highlighted.
(3) If you find the specified help item, click the
Button.
The help information relating to the specified item is displayed.
Displaying help information by clicking on a screen
The Support Tool provides the [What’s This?] item that allows you to get help
when an item for which you need help is displayed.
Using this feature, you can display the help information in a simple operation
without tracking the table of contents or inputting a keyword.
Operation
(1) Select [Help] in the menu bar, then select [What’s This?].
A question mark (?) is appended to the mouse cursor.
Clicking the
Button in the standard tool bar, also displays a question mark
at the mouse cursor.
(2) Click on the item (place) for which you need help.
The corresponding help information is displayed.
Checking the input method of PLC address
PLC address dialog box is displayed when an address is allocated to an object.
If [PLC Address Help] is selected in the [Help] menu, the help about the PLC address dialog box that shows the input method of PLC address is displayed.
Checking the Support Tool version
If [About NT-series Support Tool] is selected in the [Help] menu, the dialog box
that shows the version of the Support Tool is displayed.
If you have questions on the Support Tool, please check the version of your Support Tool before contacting.
75
SECTION 5
Screen Types
This section deals with the types of screens that can be created by the Support Tool.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Setting the Screen Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Grid Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-4 Filter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5 Switching Screens by Extended I/O Input at Each Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-6 Saving the Screen Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous/Overlapping Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Continuous Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Overlapping Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 Editing a Parent Screen (Modification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window/Keyboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1 Window/Keyboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2 Improved Input Key-window/Keyboard Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occurrence History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Connect Screen (System Initializing Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Format Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contrast and Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
78
80
81
85
87
88
88
89
90
91
92
92
92
95
97
98
99
99
100
101
101
101
102
102
77
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
5-1
Section
5-1
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and
Operations
The Support Tool provides various types of screen.
The screens that can be created using the Support Tool are shown below. The
screens that can be used differ depending on the PT model.
Standard screens
Continuous/overlapping screens
Window/Keyboard screens
Extended screens
Occurrence history screens
Frequency history screens
Host connect screens (system initializing screens)
The screen attributes and grid can be set for each screen, individually.
Password screens
Menu screens
Print format screens
Device monitor screens
Contrast tuning screens
5-1-1 Setting the Screen Attributes
All screens have screen attributes used for setting the screen display specifications.
The information to be set as attributes, specific to the individual screens, includes
screen number, screen comment, recording in display history, backlight, and
buzzer control.
To display the attributes, follow any of the operations indicated below.
[Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties]
Right click on a screen data icon in the application manager → [Properties]
Right click at an arbitrary position on the screen → [Properties]
Double click at an arbitrary position on the screen
78
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
Screen No.
Specify a screen number. The screen number of an existing screen may be
changed.
History (other than NT20/NT20S)
Specify whether or not the event of screen display is to be recorded in the display
history record (Screen history Log). The display history function records the
date/time and frequency of screen display for screens for which the [History] attribute check box is ticked. The recorded display history can be checked on the
occurrence history screen and the frequency history screen.
The event of screen display is recorded in the display history if the check box of
the history attribute is ticked; if it is not ticked, the event is not recorded.
Title (other than NT20/NT20S)
Specify the title of screens that are displayed in the display history.
Setting of the title is possible only when the history attribute is selected.
Comment
Set the comment for a screen. For the comment, characters of up to 24 characters can be set.
Backlight - Type
Set if the backlight is to light continuously or flash when the screen is turned ON.
Light:
When the screen is turned ON, the backlight lights.
Flash:
When the screen is turned ON, the backlight flashes.
This attributes cannot be set for NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C.
Backlight - Color (only for NT30)
Specify the backlight color, white or red.
Buzzer (other than NT11S/NT11)
Specify whether or not the buzzer should sound when a screen is displayed and
also the type of buzzer sound.
If this attribute is selected, the buzzer sounds when a screen is displayed.
The buzzer type can be selected from the following.
Continuous:
The buzzer sounds continuously.
Short:
The buzzer sounds in cycles of 0.5-second beep and 0.5-second stop. (Setting is not possible for NT20, NT20S and
NT600S.)
Long:
The buzzer sounds in cycles of 1-second beep and 1-second
stop. (Setting is not possible for NT20, NT20S and NT600S.)
Beep:
The buzzer sounds in cycles of 0.5-second beep and 0.5-second stop. (Only for NT20, NT20S and NT600S)
Buzzer type setting is possible only when the buzzer attribute is selected.
Load Local 1 (Keyboard) (other than NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S)
Select whether or not a local window 1 (Keyboard) pops up on the screen when
standard screen is opened.
79
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
If the attribute is checked, a window (keyboard) pops up when the screen is displayed. Window (keyboard) does not pop up if the attribute is not selected. If the
attribute is not set when the standard screen is created, it can be selected later to
display.
Specify the screen number of window/keyboard screen to be displayed as a popup window/keyboard.
Window (Keyboard) will be displayed at the position specified when window/keyboard screen was created.
With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, and NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C below “-V1,” window is called a keyboard window since it is used to
place keypad (touch switch) for inputting numeral/string.
With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and
above, it is simply called a window since all kinds of objects other than thumbwheel can be registered on it. For details of window/keyboard screen, refer to 5-4
Window/Keyboard Screens.
Load Local 2 (NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with “-V1” and above)
Select whether or not a local window 2 pops up on the screen when standard
screen is opened.
If the attribute is checked, window pops up when the screen is displayed. Window does not pop up if the attribute is not selected. If the attribute is not set when
the standard screen is created, it can be selected later to display.
Specify the screen number of window screen to be displayed as a pop-up window.
Window is displayed at the position specified when window/keyboard screen
was created.
For details of window/keyboard screen refer to 5-4 Window/Keyboard Screens.
System Keypad (other than NT11S/NT11, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C)
Specify whether or not the keypad that is automatically created by the system is
used for setting numerals or strings.
If the attribute is selected, the system keypad is used and it is not used if the attribute is not selected.
Color - Background (NT30, NT30C, NT31C, NT620C, NT625C, NT631C)
Set the background color.
5-1-2 Grid Setting
Specify the grid used for drawing.
The grid is used as the guide when drawing an element. When the grid is selected, dots are set in the specified spacing.
The grid can be set so that the specified points of an element being drawn are
positioned at grid points.
To display the attributes, follow any of the operations indicated below.
[Attributes] of screen property →
80
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
[Screen] (menu bar) →
Grid Size - Custom
Set the grid spacing in the horizontal and vertical directions to create the grid of
the desired spacing, respectively.
Horizontal Spacing:
Specify the grid spacing in the horizontal direction as
a number of dots.
Vertical Spacing:
Specify the grid spacing in the vertical direction as a
number of dots.
Grid Size - Touch Switch Grid
If this attribute is selected, grid spacing equivalent to the size of a touch switch is
set. The actual size differs depending on the PT model.
Display Grid
Specify whether or not the grid is displayed.
To display the grid, tick the check box of this attribute. If you want not to display
the grid, cancel the tick in the check box.
Snap to Grid
Specify if the specified position of an element being drawn is automatically adjusted so that it coincides with a grid position.
To adjust the element position, tick the check box of this attribute. If adjustment is
not necessary, cancel the tick in the check box.
Reference: When saving screen data using mmi format, grid setting information and
grouping information will not be stored.
(Refer to 3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File.)
It is possible to select whether to print screen grid or not when printing screen
image. (Refer to 12-2-2 Output to a Printer.)
If grid is to be printed, the grid setting of each screen will be included in the
screen image.
5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool
The procedures for changing the screen display method and displaying the information on elements are indicated below.
Reference: In addition to the display methods indicated below, Support Tool has a filter function that displays only the elements of the selected type. (Refer to 5-1-4 Filter
Function.)
Confirming full tiling status
When [Full Tiling] is selected in the [View] menu with a tick mark entered on the
left side of the menu item, the element is displayed on the Support Tool screen in
the tiled status.
81
Section
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
5-1
Reference: There may be differences in element display order and details in display between the Support Tool and a PT. Therefore, results of tiling may be different in
the display obtained at a PT and that confirmed by the Support Tool.
When a filter function is used for a fixed display, Full Tiling will be automatically
cancelled (confirmation message will be displayed) since the tiled status may
not be displayed correctly if the object used as a border is hidden by a filter
function.
Displaying element information (Show Tag)
The Support Tool can display the following element information on the screen at
the same time.
Information Displayed
on the Screen
PC (PLC) address
82
Description
PC (PLC) bit addresses of lamp settings (light
function) for lamps, PC (PLC) addresses of lamp
settings for touch switches, or PC (PLC) addresses of notification (notify) bits are displayed.
For a touch switch with the notification bit function,
both PC (PLC) address of the notification (notify)
bit and lamp setting are displayed (upper: notify
bit, lower: lamp bit), and for touch switches with
other functions, the PC (PLC) addresses of lamp
settings (light function) are displayed.
The first character represents the type of element
as shown below. (In case of touch switch, the first
character for lamp bit is also represented by a T.)
L:
Lamp
T:
Touch switch
The second character represents the area type of
PC (PLC) addresses.
Example (PLC Vendor: OMRON)
Blank: CIO area
H:
HR area
A:
SR area
L:
LR area
D:
DM (Data Memory) area
E:
EM Current Bank
For characters that indicates area type of Mitsubishi, refer to page 129.
Section
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Information Displayed
on the Screen
5-1
Description
Table No.
The table entry number of the Numeral or Character String Memory Table (String Table) that is referenced for a numeral display, (character-)string
display, bar graph, numeral setting input, (character-)string input, or thumbwheel switch is displayed.
The first character represents the type of table as
shown below.
N:
Numeral memory table
S:
Character String Memory Table
(String Table)
Image and library code
The code of image and library data of a fixed display is displayed as a hexadecimal number.
Multiple sets of the element information described above can be displayed at the
same time. If they are set for a single element, the information is displayed according to the priority shown below.
PC (PLC) address u Table entry number u Image and library data code
Setting for the display of element information is possible for all the editing
screens.
The display method for element information is set in the manner shown below.
(1) Select [View] in the menu bar, then choose [Show Tag].
The menu shows the items that can be set.
The items for which display is presently set are identified by a tick.
(2) Select any of [PLC Address], [Table No.], and [Image and Library Code] to
change whether element information should be displayed or not.
Each time a menu item is selected, the tick mark is set, or canceled, alternately. When a tick mark is displayed, the specified element information is
displayed.
Inverting and flashing the objects
Some of the objects have Inverse, Flash, and Inverse Flash attributes.
Inverse status is always reflected on the screen.
Flash display can be checked by specifying the Simulate Flash command. (It is
possible to view Inverse Flash state also.)
83
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
”Simulate Flash” is applied to each screen individually.
To activate this setting, follow the procedure below.
/
(1) Select “Simulate Flash” from the [View] menu. (or click on the
but-
ton.)
In the [View] menu, the check mark is set to ON and OFF each time it is selected.
When the check mark is displayed, the objects that have Flash or Inverse
Flash attribute show their flashing status.
Each time the “Simulate Flash” button is clicked, it changes as follows:
: Flash status being shown
: Flash status not shown
Lighting and flashing the lamps/touch switches
For lamps and touch switches, it is possible to specify PLC address for lamp setting. Lamps and touch switches light (flash) according to the status of the host bit.
When the PLC address for lamp setting goes to 1 (ON), they light or flash.
(Whether they light or flash is determined by the lamp attribute set to the object.)
With the Support Tool, ON status of lamps and touch switches can be checked on
the screen.
The Simulate ON/OFF setting is applied to all the screens being displayed.
Reference: In case of image lamp, ON state image and dotted line indicating the position of
OFF state image is shown when the state is ON, and OFF state image and
dotted line indicating the position of ON state image is shown when the state is
OFF.
With the NT21 and NT31/631-V2 and above, the contents of a label can be
specified for each ON and OFF state. The display of the label is changed according to the status of the lamp or the touch switch.
Display of lamp ON/OFF status may differs between the Support Tool and PT
for the following cases.
ON color when lamps/touch switches are overlapped.
ON color of lamp/touch switch label when using NT30C, NT620C/NT625C.
ON status of lamp/touch switch when overlapping with other object (other than
fixed display)
To activate this setting, follow the procedure below.
(1) Select [Simulate ON/OFF] from [View] menu. (or click on the
/
button)
In the [View] menu, the check mark is set to ON and OFF each time it is selected.
When the check mark is displayed, the lamps and touch switches show their
ON statuses.
Each time the Simulate ON/OFF button is clicked, it changes as follows:
: Lamp ON status being shown
: Lamp ON status not shown
Redrawing the editing Screen (Refresh)
In case the screen has disrupted during the edition of the screen, Refresh function will help you redrawing the screen.
Redrawing can be performed as follows:
(1) Select [Refresh] from the [View] menu. The screen will be updated.
84
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
Displaying Full Screen (Full Screen)
This is available in case if you want to view the screen in wide range. (But is impossible to edit while displaying in full screen.)
Full Screen can be performed as follows:
(1) Select [Full Screen] from [View] menu. The current editing screen will be displayed in wide range.
To recover from this condition, click at any place on the screen.
Zoom
Zooms the screen to 100% view (Normal), 200%, 400% or 800%. If the grid is set,
it will also be zoomed to the respective size.
It will help you to operate small elements. Zoom can be performed as follows:
(1) Select [Zoom] from [View] menu. On this menu, current zoom percentage is
displayed using check mark.
Displaying window/keyboard (Show Window/Keyboard)
Local window (Keyboard) set for attribute of currently displayed screen can be
displayed overlapping on the screen to check the actual status to be displayed on
PT.
Local window 2 is available only with the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C,
NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
Show Window/Keyboard command can be performed as follows:
(1) Open a property sheet of the screen and set a check mark for the window
type to be displayed and specify the screen number.
(2) Select [Show Window/Keyboard] from the [View] menu and specify the window/keyboard type to be displayed (Local 1 (Keyboard) or Local 2).
Check mark will be set on menu next to the name of the displayed window
type.
Each time you select window, the check mark switches to the objective one
and according to it, window/keyboard display will be changed.
5-1-4 Filter Function
Support Tool has a filter function that can show only the specified object on the
screen.
It is possible to edit/select objects while this function is executed. So it will be useful when you correct or edit complicated screen. In addition, it is possible to display the list of each object by types if this function is used with Select Object function. (For details, refer to the Reference.)
Filter function is applied to individual screen.
To activate this setting, follow the procedure below.
85
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
(1) Select the object to be displayed from the combo box on the utility bar.
To display all the objects (cancel filter function), select “All.”
Reference: While a filter function is used, you can edit only the objects being displayed.
If the Select Object dialog box (refer to page 107) is displayed by right-clicking
the object while a filter function is used, only the type of object being displayed
is shown in the list. In this case, the type name of the object will not be displayed
in the Select Object dialog box and detailed information of objects is shown.
If a filter function is used for a Fixed Display, Full Tiling ([View] menu) will be
cancelled automatically since the tiled status may not be displayed correctly if
the element used as a border is hidden by a filter function. (Confirmation message is displayed.)
With a filter function, only one type of object can be specified. It is not possible
to select two or more objects, such as a Touch Switch and Bar Graph.
Reference: When the operations indicated below are performed while a filter function is being used, the filter function will be reset and returned to “All.”
Operation
File→Print
File→Print Preview
Remark
When the user performs this operation the screen will refresh and then
tion,
the operation will be performed.
Edit→Paste
Edit→Align
Draw→Associate With
Draw→Disassociate
Draw→Set Order
Draw→Group
Draw→Ungroup
All menu items under “Object”
This includes all creation of screen
elements using the menus and toolbar except the object specified on
the filter.
Connect→Download
When the user performs this operation the screen will refresh and then
tion,
the operation will be performed.
Connect→Upload
All the references from the table
86
When the user chooses the reference from the table, the filter will be
reset to ALL.
Types of Screens, Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations
Section
5-1
5-1-5 Switching Screens by Extended I/O Input at Each Screen
It is possible to make a setting so that the specified screen is displayed when the
input of the extended I/O that is connected to the PT is turned ON. The following
two setting methods are provided to switch the screen by extended I/O input.
Note that this setting is possible only for NT30 and NT30C.
Common setting for all screens:
Regardless of the screen presently displayed, the specified screen is always
displayed when the extended I/O input is turned ON.
Select [Table] from [Tools] in the menu bar. Then click the tab of Extended I/O
Input to set the Switch screen.
Setting for the individual screens:
It is possible to set the screen to be displayed in response to turning ON of the
extended I/O input for each screen.
For this setting, select [Extended I/O] from [Screen] in the menu bar.
For example, this setting allows the display screen to change sequentially from
screen No. 1 to screen No. 2, then to screen No. 3 in response to turning ON of
the extended I/O input. If the extended I/O input 0 goes ON while screen No. 1
displayed, the screen switches to screen No. 2, then if the extended I/O input 0
goes ON while screen No. 2 displayed, the screen switches to screen No. 3. To
allow screens to be changed in this way, set [Switch Screen No. 2] for [Extended I/O] at screen No. 1, and [Switch Screen No. 3] for [Extended I/O] at
screen No. 2.
Here, only the setting for screen switching at the individual screens is described.
Operations of the Extended I/O Input table and the common setting to all screens
are described in 7-5 Extended I/O Input Table.
The procedure for setting the screen to be displayed on turning ON of the extended I/O input at each screen is shown below.
(1) Select the screen for which [Extended I/O] is to be set to place the screen in
edit enabled state.
(2) Select [Screen] in the menu bar, then select [Extended I/O].
An extended I/O input table dialog box is displayed.
(3) Select the extended I/O input row where setting is to be done, and click on
.
87
Section
Standard Screen
5-2
An extended I/O input setting dialog box is displayed.
(4) Set [Switch Screen] for [Function] and the screen number of the screen to be
displayed for [Screen No.].
5-1-6 Saving the Screen Image
The Support Tool provides a function to save the displayed screen image in a bit
map file as it is.
The grid display status and Show Tag can be also saved.
The following describes the procedure for saving the screen image.
(1) Select the screen that is going to be saved in a file so that it can be edited.
(2) Select [Screen] in the menu bar, then select [Copy to Image].
A dialog box is displayed to set a file name.
(3) Set the folder and file name, then click on
.
The screen image is saved to the specified file.
5-2
Standard Screen
A standard screen is the base screen for the display at a PT.
Screen numbers of standard screens differ depending on the PT model. The
table below shows the screen numbers that can be used for a standard screen.
88
Section
Continuous/Overlapping Screens
PT Model
Screen Nos.
NT11S/NT11
1 to 250
NT20, NT20S
1 to 250, 256 to 500
NT600S
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
5-3
1 to 1000
1 to 1899, 2000
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
1 to 3999
Screen No.
In a standard screen, all elements can be used.
However, the usable elements depend on the PT models.
Standard screens are also used for creating child screens of continuous/overlapping screens.
5-3
Continuous/Overlapping Screens
Continuous/overlapping screens are multiple screens that are switched consecutively or overlapped for display.
Screens that are switched consecutively are called continuous screens and
screens that overlap multiple screens are called overlapping screens.
Screen numbers that can be used for continuous/overlapping screens are same
as those for standard screens. Note that continuous screens cannot be used with
the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. To obtain the same effect as continuous screens with these PT models, use touch switches that are assigned the
switch screen function.
Reference: The application manager displays a parent screen as a folder as shown below
and child screens are displayed when the folder is opened.
For NT11S/NT11, parent screen setting is not possible.
89
Section
Continuous/Overlapping Screens
5-3
5-3-1 Continuous Screens
Two to eight screens can be registered for one continuous screen. The base
screen where multiple screens are registered is called a parent screen and multiple screens registered to the parent screen are called child screens.
Screen No. 10
Parent
screen
Screen No. 20
Continuous
screen 1
[↓]
[↑]
Screen No. 15
Continuous
screen 2
[↓]
[↑]
Screen No. 1
Continuous
screen 3
When screen No. 10 is specified, the first continuous screen, screen No. 20, is
displayed. Pressing touch switch [ ↓ ] changes the screen to screen No. 15.
Pressing the touch switch again changes the screen to screen No. 1.
Since the screen of screen No. 10 is set as the parent screen of continuous
screens, it cannot be displayed independently.
Screens set as continuous screens are switched by the pressing of the touch
switches [ ↓ ] and [ ↑ ], for which system key functions are allocated.
In the parent screen setting dialog, show page number can be set or reset to indicate currently activated child screen number out of total pages on the upper right
corner of the parent screen.
Child screens should be created on standard screens in advance.
Continuous screens are set in the procedure described below.
(1) Create child screens using standard screens.
(2) Specify [Parent Screen] from [New] command in the [Screen] menu.
(3) In the parent screen setting dialog box, set a parent screen number, child
screen numbers, and whether or not a page number is displayed.
a.
Set the number of the parent screen for [Screen No.] in [Parent].
If the number of screen data has been already created, it cannot be registered as a parent screen.
b.
Select [Continuous].
c.
If necessary, tick [Show Page Number].
d.
Specify child screens.
Select screens that are specified as child screens by selecting them from the
[Standard] field, then click on
.
The selected screen moves to the [Child] field. If a wrong number is moved,
click on
: the screen returns from the [Child] field to the [Standard]
field.
90
Section
Continuous/Overlapping Screens
5-3
Two to eight screens can be registered as child screens.
e.
Modify the screen switching order.
Child screens are displayed in the order they are set in the [Child] field.
The setting order of the child screens can be modified using
.
f.
Click on
and
after the completion of child screen setting.
When creating continuous screens with NT20, NT20S and NT600S, it is recommended to create Switch Screen touch switch.
5-3-2 Overlapping Screens
Overlapping screens allow two to eight screens to be displayed as one screen.
(For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, one to eight screens can be
set.) The base screen of an overlapping screen is called the parent screen and
multiple screens that are the constituents of the overlapping screens are called
child screens.
This is an
Screen No. 10
(child screen)
Screen No. 8
(parent screen)
This is an
example of an
overlapping
screen.
example of an
overlapping
screen.
Screen No. 7
(child screen)
Screen No. 25
(child screen)
When screen No. 8 (parent screen) is specified, the elements set on the screens
No. 10, No. 7, and No. 25 are overlapped for display on the parent screen.
Since the screen of screen No. 8 is set for a parent screen for overlapping
screens, it cannot be displayed independently.
In the setting for a parent screen, screen numbers of a parent and child screens
are set.
Child screens should be created on standard screens in advance.
Overlapping screens are set in the procedure indicated below.
(1) Create the child screens on standard screens.
(2) Specify [Parent Screen] from [New] command in [Screen].
(3) In the parent screen setting dialog box, set a parent screen number and child
screen numbers.
91
Section
Window/Keyboard Screens
a.
5-4
Set the screen number of a parent screen for [Screen No.] in [Parent].
If the screen number has already existed, it cannot be registered as a parent
screen.
b.
Select [Overlapping].
c.
Specify child screens.
Select a screen that is specified as a child screen by selecting it from the
[Standard] field, then click on
.
The selected screen moves to the [Child] field. If a wrong number is moved,
click on
: the screen returns from the [Child] field to the [Standard]
field.
Two to eight screens can be registered as child screens.
For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, one to eight screen can
be registered as child screen.
d.
Modify the screen switching order.
Child screens are overlapped in the order they are set in the [Child] field.
The setting order of the child screens can be modified using
.
e.
Click on
and
after the completion of child screen setting.
5-3-3 Editing a Parent Screen (Modification)
The type (continuous/overlapping) and configuration of a created parent screen
can be modified.
The procedure for modifying a parent screen is indicated below.
(1) Specify the parent screen that you want to modify from the application manager, or display the pop-up menu by right clicking the mouse on the parent
screen.
(2) Select [Screen] in the menu bar, then choose [Modify Parent], or select
[Modify] in the pop-up menu.
The parent screen modify dialog box is displayed.
The procedure for modifying the setting is the same as setting for new parent
screen information. Refer to 5-3-1 Continuous Screens or 5-3-2 Overlapping Screens.
Reference: If a parent screen is copied on the application manager, child screens are also
copied. (When two Support Tools are started up, the same operation is possible
between the Support Tools.)
For details of screen copying, refer to 4-2-4 Copying a Screen.
5-4
Window/Keyboard Screens
5-4-1 Window/Keyboard Screens
A window/keyboard screen is used as a window screen for the pop-up window/
keyboard function. It means a partially display window that contains a keypad or
other elements to overlap on the base screen.
Note that window/keyboard screen cannot be used with NT11S/NT11, NT20,
NT20S, and NT600S.
92
Section
Window/Keyboard Screens
5-4
With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT625C and NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C below “-V1,” only one window can be opened at a time and objects that can be registered are limited mainly to those used for inputting numeral/string as follows (with
these PTs, this window is called a keyboard screen):
Fixed displays
Touch switches (Notify bit, cursor move and print screen functions are not permitted.)
Numeral/string setting input filed (Only one input field can be set.)
Other elements are not displayed when the window/keyboard screen is opened
as a window although they can be registered for the window/keyboard screen.
With the NT21, and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and
above, up to three windows can be opened at the same time and all objects other
than thumbwheels and recipes can be registered. (However, only one input field
of numeral/string input can be registered.)
Pop-up display frame
The pop-up display frame specifies the display range and display position of a
pop-up window/keyboard, the size and position of the frame can be specified as
follows:
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C:
Specify by 1 dot unit
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C:
Specify by 20 dot
The pop-up function displays only the area enclosed by the pop-up display
frame.
Reference: Since the same memory area is shared by a pop-up window/keyboard and
print screen function, it is not possible to open the window during the printing
process. Moreover, it is also not possible to print from PT during the window is
opened.
With PT models other than the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C “-V1” and above, communication with a PC (PLC) is not possible for
elements that are displayed in a keyboard/window. Therefore, the lamp bit of a
touch switch in a window cannot be controlled.
While a window is open, display processing may be slowed a little.
Touch Switch functions that can be set on Window/Keyboard screen;
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C:
Notify Bit
Switch Screen
93
Section
Window/Keyboard Screens
5-4
Input Key-Control
Input Key-Window/Keyboard
Input Key-String
Copy setting
Cursor Move
Print Screen
With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, keyboard screen can be
used as a standard screen. If it is used as a keyboard screen (called from other
screen), Notify Bit, Cursor Move and Print Screen functions are not available.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C below “-V1”:
Switch Screen
Input Key-Control
Input Key-Window/Keyboard
Input Key-String
Copy setting
NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C “-V1” and above:
Notify Bit
Switch Screen
Input Key-Control
Input Key-Window/Keyboard
Input Key-String
Copy setting
Window Move
Print Screen
Changing the size and the position of pop-up display frame
The procedure for changing the size and the position of a pop-up display frame is
shown below.
(1) Click the mouse on a dotted line of the pop-up display frame.
Green (handles) appear around the pop-up display frame.
(Arrows in the handle indicates the direction to be resized.)
(2) The frame size can be changed by dragging a handle.
When the mouse cursor is positioned on a handle, the shape of the mouse
cursor changes as shown below according to the handle position. When the
mouse cursor is dragged in this state, the pop-up display frame size changes in the direction the arrow symbol of the mouse cursor indicates.
Right-left handle
94
Up-down handle
Apex handle
Section
Window/Keyboard Screens
5-4
(3) To move the pop-up frame, drag any position in the dotted lines other than
handles.
When the mouse cursor is positioned on dotted lines other than at handles,
the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below. The pop-up display
frame moves when the mouse cursor is dragged in this state.
(4) After the size and the position of the pop-up display frame are determined,
click on an arbitrary point in the screen other than the pop-up display frame.
The size and the position of the pop-up display frame are set and the handles are cleared.
To change the size and the position of the pop-up display frame, repeat the
procedure shown above from step (1).
Reference: The size and position of the pop-up display frame can be specified as follows:
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C:
Specify by 1 dot unit
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C:
Specify by 20 dot
5-4-2 Improved Input Key-window/Keyboard Function
This section describes input key-window/keyboard function that was improved
for the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C “-V1” and above.
Types of windows
Following two types of windows are available.
Global window
This window can be kept displaying all the time regardless of the screen displayed on PT. Global window stays at the same position even when the displayed
screen is switched. (Global window will be closed automatically when the screen
other than user screen was displayed, and will be re-displayed when the screen
was switched back to user screen.)
Only one global window can be displayed at a time.
It can be opened, closed or moved only by the operation of Window Control Area
from the host. For details of Window Control Area, please refer to the operation
manual of PT.
Local window
This window will be closed when the screen displayed on PT is switched.
By setting local window for attribute of each screen, specified window can be
opened at the same time the screen is opened.
Up to two local windows can be opened at the same time. (Local window 1, Local
window 2)
Local window can be opened, closed or moved by following operations.
Setting screen attribute (Opens when the screen is displayed.)
95
Section
Window/Keyboard Screens
5-4
Touch switch operation (By Input key-window/keyboard touch switch and window move touch switch)
Operation of Window Control Area from the host
Types of windows can be specified when opening the window.
It is possible to open same window as a Global window or as a Local window.
(However, multiple display of the same window is not possible.)
Opening/Closing and moving a window
Window can be controlled by the following operations.
Opening windows by setting screen attribute
When creating screen using Support Tool, up to two windows can be selected to
be displayed when opening the screen.
By this method, window is displayed at the position that was specified when window screen was created. This type of window will be local window. For details of
the setting, refer to 5-1-1 Setting the Screen Attributes.
Screen 5
Screen 23
Window
Opening/Closing and moving a window by touch switch operation
To create input key-window/keyboard touch switch on a screen or a window enables to open/close specified window.
By this method, window is displayed at the position set for touch switch property.
This type of window will be local window.
Screen
Screen
Local
Window
Also, by creating window move touch switch on window, it is possible to move
window by touch panel operation at PT.
Window
Screen
Window in a moving status
Screen
Screen
For details of touch switch settings, refer to 6-8 Touch Switches.
It is not possible to control global window by touch panel operation.
Opening/ Closing and moving a window by the operation of Window Control Area
Window Control Area is added for the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and
NT631C “-V1” and above as a direct access area.
96
Section
Extended Screen
5-5
While running PT, by writing window screen number or x, y co-ordinate of window
position (bottom left) at Window Control Area from the host, opening/closing,
moving a window are possible.
Window Control Area can control global window and local window. For details,
refer to the operation manual of PT.
Window
Screen
The selected
window opens
PLC
Window
screen number
Window
Window
PLC
The co-ordinates
of the window
The window shifts
Size and display position of window (the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C “-V1” and above)
With the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and above, size
of window can be specified freely by 20 dot unit. (Minimum window size: 20 × 20)
It is possible to display a window at a different position from where it was created,
or to move a window.
However, the distance between the position where window was created and
where it is displayed have to be always multiple of 20 dot.
Window
Display
Co-ordinates at the bottom
left corner (20,179)
Window
Display
Co-ordinates at the bottom
left corner (180,219)
Reference: Specify the bottom left co-ordinate of window when specifying the window position at Window Control Area.
Checking the display status of a window
Whether window is opened or closed will be written to the PT Status of the PT
Notify Area.
Window screen number and window position (bottom left co-ordinate) of currently displayed screen will be written to Window Control Area.
Checking these areas from the host enables to know the display status of window. For details, refer to the operation manual of PT.
5-5
Extended Screen
An extended screen is used by the expansion function of a PT.
Although an extended screen can be used in the same manner as a standard
screen, it should not be used unless absolutely necessary since it is used by the
expansion function.
97
Section
Occurrence History Screen
5-6
If data is registered as a standard screen, the registered data is given priority.
The screen numbers used for an extended screen are indicated below.
PT Model
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, NT600S
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
5-6
Screen No.
None
1980 to 1996
None
Occurrence History Screen
An occurrence history screen displays the screen numbers recorded by the display history (Screen History) function in the order of displayed date and time.
This function records the date/time of display and the number of times the screen
was displayed for the screens for which the [History] attribute is ticked in the
screen property.
The occurrence history screen, provided with NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C,
and NT625C, has a blank area at the right side in the screen so that scroll and
screen switching touch switches can be created. Other area of the screen must
not be changed.
The screen number of the occurrence history screen is indicated below.
PT Model
Screen No.
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, NT600S
None
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
1997
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
9001*
*:
Cannot edit (Only display is possible.)
The screen to be displayed differs according to the PT model.
Example:
For NT30, NT30C
[No.] (NT30/NT30C), [Screen No.] (NT620S/NT620C/NT625C)
Indicates a screen number.
[Date] (NT30/NT30C), [Time] (NT30/NT30C)
[(YY/MM/DD HH:MM)] (NT620S/NT620C/NT625C)
Indicates the date and time the screen was displayed.
[Cnt.] (NT30/NT30C), [Frequency] (NT620S/NT620C/NT625C)
Indicates the number of times the screen has been displayed.
[Message]
Indicates the [Title] of the screen attribute.
98
Section
Host Connect Screen (System Initializing Screen)
5-7
5-8
Frequency History Screen
A frequency history screen displays the screen numbers recorded by the display
history (Screen History) function in the order of frequency of screen display. This
function records the date/time of display and the number of times the screen has
been displayed for screens for which the [History] attribute is ticked in the screen
property.
The frequency history screen, provided with NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C,
and NT625C, has a blank area at the right side in the screen so that scroll and
screen switching touch switches can be created. Other area of the screen must
not be changed.
The screen number of the frequency history screen is shown below.
PT Model
Screen No.
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, NT600S
None
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
1998
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
9002*
*:
Cannot edit (Only display is possible.)
The screen to be displayed differs according to the PT model.
Example:
For NT30, NT30C
[No.] (NT30/NT30C), [Screen No.] (NT620S/NT620C/NT625C)
Indicates a screen number.
[Date] (NT30/NT30C), [Time] (NT30/NT30C)
[(YY/MM/DD HH:MM)] (NT620S/NT620C/NT625C)
Indicates the date and time the screen was displayed.
[Cnt.] (NT30/NT30C), [Frequency] (NT620S/NT620C/NT625C)
Indicates the number of times the screen has been displayed.
[Message]
Indicates the [Title] of the screen attribute.
5-8
Host Connect Screen (System Initializing Screen)
The host connect screen is displayed for the start of PT operation until communication with the PC (PLC) is established.
This screen can be created freely using only fixed display.
In case host connect screen is not registered, a default screen indicating that PT
is trying to connect to the host will be automatically displayed at the time PT power is switched on or when the mode is changed to the RUN mode.
99
Section
Password Screen
5-9
The screen number of the host connect screen is shown below.
PT Model
Screen No.
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, NT600S
None
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
1999
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
9000
Reference: For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, TN631, and NT631C, it is called a System Initializing Screen.
5-9
Password Screen
A Password screen is treated as one of the 250 Standard screen in NT11S/NT11.
It is used to protect another screen by password. When a password screen is
displayed on the NT11S/NT11 PT, it forces the user to enter the correct password
before bringing up the designated screen.
The figure above shows a new password screen created. It has a text element
with “password” as labeled. Next to the text element is the password element that
indicates the current password for this password screen. In the password property page, you can set the password and the designated screen number to be
displayed next.
100
Programming Console Screen
Section 5-12
5-10 Menu Screen
A Menu Screen is treated as one of the 250 Standard screens in NT11S/NT11. It
serves as a control screen that maps a numeric key inputs onto a designated
screen. A maximum of 4 designated screens for each of the numeric keys 1 to 4
can be specified in the menu screen property page.
5-11 Print Format Screen
The Print Format Screen has the screen number 255 in NT11S/NT11. It creates a
format for PT printing function mainly for the daily printing. You can only use Numeral and String display to create the format.
5-12 Programming Console Screen
The Programming Console Screen is used to access the Programming Console
functions built into the PT. Displaying the Programming Console Screen during
PT operation enables using the Programming Console functions without displaying the System Menu. PT operation, however, will stop while the Programming Console Screen is displayed.
Refer to the User’s Manual or Reference Manual for your PT for details on the
Programming Console functions.
The Programming Console Screen can not be edited on the Support Tool.
101
Section 5-14
Contrast and Brightness Adjustment
PT
Screen No.
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, NT600S,
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
None
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
9020
Reference: The Programming Console Screen is supported only by the NT21, NT31,
NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
5-13 Device Monitor Screen
These are system-defined screens and cannot be created or viewed in NTST.
Application manager will not list out these screens. Screens available are:
Screen No.
DAC Function Name
NT31/631/31C/631C-V
2 Function Name
9021
I/O Monitor
Registration Monitor
9022
DM Monitor
Continuous Monitor
9023
Error Monitor
Error Log
Reference: These screen numbers can be referred by the following functions:
(1) Touch switch
Switch screen
(2) Bit memory table
Switch screen function
(3) Bit memory table
Alarm function
These screens can only be view on PT if the communication method is NT link. If
communication method is host link, it would not be possible to switch to these
screens.
5-14 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment
This is a system-defined screen and cannot be created or viewed on NTST. The
application manager will not list this screen. Contrast and Brightness Adjustment
is used for tuning the contrast and brightness of the PT screen without the need
to disconnect from the PLC.
The screen number designated is 9030.
PT models that support this requirement are as follows:
NT31-V2 (System Ver3.1),
NT31C-V2 (System Ver3.1),
NT631C-V2 (System Ver3.1). (NT631C-ST141 only)
This screen can be accessed using the following functions:
(1) Touch switch – Switch screen
(2) Bit memory table – Switch screen function
(3) Bit memory table – Alarm function
102
SECTION 6
Element Operating Procedures
Screen data for a PT is created by arranging elements on a screen.
Elements are classified into two groups, elements for display and those used for inputting data at a PT.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
Common Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Creating an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Pop-up Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3 Selecting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-4 Modifying an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-5 Copying, Cutting, Pasting, and Deleting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-6 Aligning Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-7 Grouping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-8 Associating Elements with the Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-9 Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-10 Setting Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-11 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-12 Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-3 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-4 Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-5 Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-6 Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-7 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-8 Tiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-9 Image Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-10 Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-11 Library Object (Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 Numeral Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 Character String Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3 Thumbwheel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 Standard Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Image/library Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character String Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-1 Input Notify Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-2 Switch Screen Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-3 (Character) String Input Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-4 Pop-up Window/Keyboard Function Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-5 Control Code Input Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-6 Copy Setting Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-7 Cursor Moving Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-8 Window Moving Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-9 Print Screen Touch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
105
105
106
110
111
114
116
117
117
118
134
134
136
136
138
139
140
142
144
145
147
150
153
155
159
159
165
171
171
179
187
192
192
197
200
204
207
214
215
215
216
217
220
221
223
223
103
Section
6-9
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1 Bar Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2 Analogue Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3 Broken-line Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4 Trend Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-1 Screen Configuration of Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-2 Basic Symbol Manager Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-3 Operating the Symbol Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-4 Pasting a Symbol to Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 Recipe Screen Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11-1 Recipe Screen Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
224
224
228
235
240
250
250
252
253
257
258
259
259
Section
Common Operation
6-1
6-1
Common Operation
Operations common to all element creation steps are shown below.
6-1-1 Creating an Element
To create an element, specify the element to be created and click the mouse at
the position where the element is to be placed.
(1) Specify an element.
Menu bar:
[Objects] → Select the objects to be created.
Drawing toolbar: Click on the icon of the object to be created.
(2) Click the mouse after placing the mouse cursor at the position where you
want to create the specified element.
The elements shown below can be dragged to change the size of the elements instead of clicking the mouse when the element is positioned.
Circle, Arc, Sector, Polyline, Polygon, Rectangle, Touch switch, Standard
lamp, Bar graph, Analogue meter, Broken-line graph, Trend graph
After placing the element by clicking or dragging, the dialog box for setting
the property of the element is automatically displayed. (The procedure to
open the property setting dialog box is omitted.)
(3) In the displayed dialog box, set the property of the element.
Change the size and the shape as required.
The selection of an element, the object to be created, is canceled on completion
of the drawing of a graphic.
To draw graphics with the same element continuously, you can maintain the element’s selected status by pressing the Shift key when releasing the left mouse
button after the clicking or dragging.
Reference: The dialog will be displayed each time the element is created even when the Shift
key is being pressed to draw the same element continuously. In case of Polyline
however, the dialog will be displayed only for the last element that was created
immediately after the Shift key is released.
6-1-2 Pop-up Edit Menu
The Support Tool provides pop-up menus where functions used for editing are
collected.
The pop-up edit menu is displayed by clicking the right button of the mouse.
Items displayed in the pop-up edit menu are common to most of all elements.
(1) Select an element.
105
Section
Common Operation
6-1
(2) Right click the mouse.
6-1-3 Selecting an Element
To edit or move an element, select the created element.
When an element is selected, marks (handles) are displayed to enclose the
selected element.
Selection mark (handle)
Reference: Arrows in the handle indicate the direction to which the size of the element can be
changed. When the mouse cursor is set on the handle, the shape of the cursor is
changed to an arrow of the same direction.
Selecting an element using a mouse
Click the element you want to select.
Selecting an element using a Tab key
Each time the Tab key is pressed, elements are selected one by one according
to the display order. (If no elements are selected, the element of the highest
display order will be in selected status when the Tab key is pressed.)
When the Shift + Tab keys are pressed together, the selection order will be reversed.
Selecting an element from among overlapped elements
When elements are overlapped complicatedly, use the element selection function below.
Reference: When you click on the overlapped elements, the element with the smallest area
enclosing the point of selection will be selected. However, if you want to select an
element A that is enclosed by other element, like in the figure below, it is not possible to select element A if the element enclosing it is already selected. In this
case, click any position on the screen where no element is registered to cancel
the selected status and then select element A.
106
Section
Common Operation
6-1
For a complicated screen, element select operation will be easier if a filter function (refer to 5-1-4 Filter Function) is used to limit the display objects.
(1) Select the element at the foremost position.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Select Object].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse and choose [Select Object] in the
menu.
The list of elements behind the element selected first is displayed.
(Detailed information of the objects are displayed in the list. However, part of
the information may not be displayed for some objects such as lamps/touch
switches with long label.)
(3) Select the desired element from the list.
(4) Click on
.
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
Reference: The element selected in the Select Object dialog box is also selected on the
screen so that you can confirm which element is being selected before you
button.
click the
In the Select Object dialog box, object information same as the one displayed
on the status bar is shown.
For details, refer to page 42.
Batch selection of multiple elements
It is possible to select multiple elements collectively.
Using the Shift key
Click an element while holding down the Shift key, and it is added to the previously selected elements. If you click a selected element while holding down
the Shift key, the element is deselected.
+ Shift
Specifying a range
107
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Drag the mouse cursor so that all elements will be enclosed by the range specifying frame.
Range specifying frame
Selecting all elements in a screen
To select all the elements arranged in a screen, use the select all function.
Select [Select All] from the [Edit] menu.
Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements
To edit an element that consists of multiple elements as shown below, use the
edit element function.
Position of a label in a touch switch
Position of a label in a standard lamp
Position of a “Display %” in a bar graph
Position of a “Display %” in an analogue meter
Position of a “Display %” in a trend graph and touch switches for controlling
function
Display position of image/library data and position of touch switches in an
alarm list/alarm history
(1) Select the element to be edited.
Select only one element, if multiple elements are selected, edit object function can not be used.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Edit Object].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the elements and select [Edit
Object] in the menu.
It is also possible to enter Edit Object mode by simply pressing the [Insert]
button on a keyboard.
(To cancel Edit Object mode, press [Insert] button again.)
The green marks (handles) change into red.
(3) Select an element.
108
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Example: Changing the position of the label in a touch switch
Green
Red
(1)
(2)
(3)
Reference: The following operation is also possible.
(1) Confirm that no element (or element other than objective one) is selected.
(2) While holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key, click on the objective part of
the element that consists of multiple elements.
(3) The element automatically enters into Edit Object mode so that the element
selected at (2) can be edited.
Multiple Edit Mode for Recipe Touch Switch
Activating Edit Modes
To edit the component of a recipe element (frame and touch switches),
(1) Select the Recipe element.
(2) Select “Edit Object” from the Edit menu, or right click the mouse button and
select “Edit Object” from the pop-up menu.
This is the first level edit mode.
The recipe touch switches now behave like normal touch switches. The touch
switches can be resized and moved. When an internal touch switch is being selected, Edit Mode will be available again for you to manipulate the components of
the internal touch switch by means of activating second level edit mode. That is,
the Edit Object menu item (both in pop-up menu and main menu) will not be
checked, and by selecting it the touch switch can be switched to edit mode. You
may also switch to edit mode using the Ins key.
In short, using the Edit Object menu item or the Ins key will allow you to toggle
between edit mode and selection mode or second edit level and first edit level.
If any of the editable components is selected, the screen element will go to second edit level. In that level, the editable component will be selected.
Only when the recipe screen element is in edit level one, can the internal touch
switches be resized.
Appearance of Resize Handles
When the second edit mode is active, the red handles surrounding the recipe
screen element are switched from solid red handles to red-outlined handles,
while the handles of the internal touch switch change from green to red solid and
109
Section
Common Operation
6-1
the selected component of the internal touch switch will be decorated with green
handles.
6-1-4 Modifying an Element
The size, shape, and/or position of a created element can be modified.
Modifying the size and shape of an element
To modify the size or the shape of an element, drag one of green marks (handles) that enclose the objective element.
Position the mouse cursor on a green handle, and the shape of mouse cursor
changes as shown below. (Same direction as arrows in the handles)
Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to modify the size and the shape
of the element.
Note
If a green mark is shown as
when an element is selected, the size of this ele-
ment cannot be changed.
Moving an element by dragging operation
To move an element, position the mouse cursor on the selected element and
confirm that the mouse cursor changes as shown below. Then, drag the element
as desired.
110
Section
Common Operation
6-1
If multiple data creation screens are displayed, an element can be moved over to
another data creation screen by dragging it.
Moving an element by keyboard operation
The screen element can be moved by pressing cursor key (°, ±, ², ³) on keyboard after selection.
The size of movement depends on the setting of the Snap to Grid as follows:
When Snap to Grid is OFF
Cursor key:
move by 1 dot
Shift key + Cursor key:
move by 16 dots
When Snap to Grid is ON
Cursor key:
move by 1 dot
Shift key + Cursor key:
move by set grid size
However, if the selected elements include touch switch, elements always move
by the size of the touch switch grid regardless of whether Shift key is pressed or
not.
To move a part of an element such as the % Display for a bar graph or Label for a
lamp/touch switch, click on the objective part while holding down the Shift key
and Ctrl key (or after selecting “Edit Object”), then perform move operation.
In case of NT11S/NT11, there is a special requirement i.e. The selected objects
will move by one system grid size (8,16) in all cases. The snap to grid option value
is not considered.
Reference: The Snap to Grid setting can be made by the procedures below.
[Screen] menu - [Property] - [Grid] button
[Screen] menu - [Grid]
Double clicking on a screen – [Grid]
Right-clicking on a screen – [Property] – [Grid] button
6-1-5 Copying, Cutting, Pasting, and Deleting Elements
The operations for copying, cutting, and pasting elements using the clip board,
and also the operation for delete an element, are described below.
Copying and pasting elements
The procedure for copying an arranged element to the clip board then pasting it
at another position in the screen is shown below.
The attributes set for the copy source element are also copied.
The pasted element is displayed at the upper left section of the screen.
The element copied to the clip board can be used for pasting as many times as
desired until another element is copied or cut. Pasting a copied element to another screen is also possible.
111
Section
Common Operation
6-1
(1) Select an element.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Copy].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select [Copy] in
the menu.
(3) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Paste].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select [Paste] in the menu.
Copied element is pasted at the
upper left section of the screen.
Reference: If multiple data creation screens are displayed, an element can be moved over
to another data creation screen by dragging it.
If Ctrl key is being pressed while dragging, an element will be copied instead of
being moved.
If two Support Tools are started up, copy, cut, paste and drag & drop operations
can be performed between Support Tools.
For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data
File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
Cutting and pasting elements
The procedure for cutting an arranged element to the clip board then pasting it at
another position in the screen is shown below.
The attributes set to the cut source element are also copied.
The pasted element is displayed at the upper left section of the screen.
The element cut to the clip board can be used for pasting as many times as desired until another element is copied or cut. Pasting a cut element to another
screen is also possible.
(1) Select an element.
Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Cut].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select [Cut] in
the menu.
(3) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Paste].
112
Section
Common Operation
6-1
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select [Paste] in
the menu.
Cut element is pasted at the
upper left section of the screen.
Reference: If multiple data creation screens are displayed, an element can be moved over
to another data creation screen by dragging it.
If Ctrl key is being pressed while dragging, an element will be copied instead of
being moved.
If two Support Tools are started up, copy, cut, paste are drag & drop operations
can be performed between Support Tools.
For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data
File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
Deleting an element
The procedure for deleting an arranged element is described below.
Since the delete operation does not store the element in the clip board, the deleted element cannot be restored by the paste function.
(1) Select an element.
Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar), then select [Delete].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select [Delete]
in the menu.
Moving an overlapped element to the front or back
If multiple elements are overlapped, it is possible to move a selected element to
the front or back of other elements. This command is valid between same kinds
of elements only.
Therefore, it is not possible to change the laying order of touch switch and lamp,
for example.
113
Section
Common Operation
6-1
(However, it is effective between different shapes of fixed display since they are
treated as one kind.)
(1) Select an element.
Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible.
(2) Select [Draw] (menu bar), then select [Bring to Front] or [Send to Back].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the object and select [Bring to
Front] or [Send to Back] in the menu.
Choose [Bring to Front] to move the selected element to the foreground and
[Send to Back] to move it to the background.
Undoing the operation
The Undo function will undo or cancel the last (most recent) action that was performed. Ten times of Undo can be performed.
It is invoked by:
Menu bar: [Edit] → [Undo]
Draw bar: Click on
Redoing the operation
The Redo function will repeat the last (most recent) action that was performed.
Ten times of Redo can be performed.
It is invoked by:
Menu bar: [Edit] → [Redo]
Draw bar: Click on
6-1-6 Aligning Elements
Two or more elements can be aligned collectively.
There are following six functions for alignment. The buttons below are provided
on the alignment bar.
114
Align Top:
(Short cut key: Ctrl + Up Arrow)
Align Bottom:
(Short cut key: Ctrl + Down Arrow)
Align Left:
(Short cut key: Ctrl + Left Arrow)
Align Right:
(Short cut key: Ctrl + Right Arrow)
Center in a Column:
(Short cut key: Ctrl + F9)
Section
Common Operation
Center in a Row:
6-1
(Short cut key: Ctrl + Shift + F9)
These functions can align the elements to the extremely edge in the selected elements’ range or to the vertical/horizontal center of all the selected objects.
Align Top, Align Bottom, Align Left, Align Right
Align Left
Align
Top
Align
Bottom
Align Right
Center in a Column, Center in a Row
Center
in a
Row
Center in a Column
However, if a touch switch (including elements, such as thumbwheels, alarm
lists/histories, that contain touch switches within themselves) is included in the
selected elements, the touch switch will take precedence for alignment and the
other elements will be aligned to the touch switch as follows:
Example: Align Bottom, Align Right
Align
Bottom
Align
Right
Base line for
“Align Bottom”
Base line for
“Align Right”
Reference: Alignment function can be used also in the Edit Object mode. By using this
function in this mode, position of the lamp/touch switch label or image/library
115
Section
Common Operation
6-1
for image/library lamp ON/OFF status can be aligned easily within the element.
If alignment function was used in Edit Object mode, only the selected element
will be moved (Alignment is performed towards the whole area of the element).
Touch switches may not be aligned to the center properly when “Center in a
Column” or “Center in a Row” is performed because of the defined touch switch
grid size. (They will be aligned to the nearest center.)
If alignment function is performed when the filter function is activated, the filter
function will be cancelled.
(1) Select multiple elements to be aligned
Or: select one element that consists of multiple elements and specify the objective part after entering the Edit Object mode.
(2) Specify any of the aligning method after selecting [Align] from the [Edit]
menu.
Or: right-click the mouse and specify the aligning method after selecting
[Align] from the pop-up menu. (Short cut key can also be used. Refer to page
114.)
6-1-7 Grouping Elements
It is possible to group multiple elements into one element.
When creating a graphic by combining several elements, future editing such as
copying, pasting, and moving will be facilitated if they are grouped.
Grouped elements can be returned to individual elements by ungrouping them.
In the grouped state, it is not permissible to change the element size and property
settings. To change the size or set properties, ungroup the elements.
Reference: When saving screen data using mmi format, grid setting information and grouping information will not be stored.
(Refer to 3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File.)
Grouping
(1) Specify the elements to be grouped.
(2) Select [Draw] (menu bar), then select [Group].
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select [Group].
Ungrouping
(1) Select an element in the grouped elements. (Select only one grouped element).
(2) Select [Draw] (menu bar), then select [Ungroup].
116
Section
Common Operation
6-1
This operation is also possible using the pop-up edit menu; display the popup edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select [Ungroup].
6-1-8 Associating Elements with the Touch Switch
If the cursor move touch switch has been created independently later than a certain element, this touch switch has to be associated with this element in order to
specify the data input field when the touch switch has been pressed on PT.
For NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, it is possible to associate the
control code input touch switches (page and line scroll touch switches) with the
alarm list and history.
It is also possible to disassociate the touch switch with the elements.
Reference: If the Auto Arrange check box is ticked in the Setting property of cursor move
touch switch, the cursor move touch switch will always be moved together with
the attached data input object. So, it is not possible to move or resize the cursor
move touch switch itself independently. To move or resize it, first of all cancel
the Auto Arrange check box, then move or resize it.
For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the touch switch of trend
graph and alarm list/history is built into each element. It is only possible to
change the location of the touch switch. (Size cannot be changed.)
Association
(1) Select the touch switch that you want to associate. (Select only one element.)
The touch switches that can be associated to an element should be page or
line scroll touch switch.
(2) Select [Associate With...] from the [Draw] menu.
Dialog box that prompts the user to select the elements to be associated will
be displayed.
(3) Choose the data input or Alarm that you want to associate. Then click
.
Disassociation
(1) Select the touch switch you want to disassociate. (Select only one element.)
(2) Select [Disassociate] from the [Draw] menu.
Touch switch disassociation will be performed.
6-1-9 Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch
With the Support Tool, the label of lamp/touch switch can be centralized within
the element (both vertical and horizontal directions). This function is useful, for
117
Section
Common Operation
6-1
example, when the label is edited after the creation of lamp/touch switch. Touch
switch has two kinds of areas, one is the displayed figure and the other is the
touch sensing area. “Centralize Label” is performed toward the touch sensing
area.
(1) Select the lamp/touch switch you want to centralize.
Multiple selection is also possible. However, “Centralize Label” cannot be
performed if no lamps or touch switches are included in the selected elements.
“Centralize Label” can be performed also when elements other than lamp or
touch switch are included in the selected elements. (Nothing is performed
for elements other than lamp or touch switch)
(2) Select [Centralize Label] from the [Draw] menu, or click on the
button. (or
press Ctrl key + L)
Reference: Centralization of lamp/touch switch label can be also performed by alignment
function (Center in a Column) in Edit Object mode. However, the result may
differ since the alignment function is performed towards the whole lamp/touch
switch area.
If “Center in a Row” is performed for a label in Edit Object mode, the label is
centralized vertically.
If “Center in a Column” is performed for a label in Edit Object mode, the label is
centralized horizontally.
By selecting multiple lamps/touch switches, you can center labels collectively.
6-1-10 Setting Properties
For each element, properties are set to characterize the individual elements. Basically, following two types of properties are set.
General
General settings such as display color and character size.
Settings (only for elements that have a specific function)
Settings related to data conversion, such as PC (PLC) address and memory
table address.
In addition to the properties shown above, some elements have the following
properties.
Light Function (only for lamps and touch switches)
118
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Setting of bits (lamp bits) for control that are used when changing display.
Label (only for lamps and touch switches)
Setting of label that is displayed on lamps or touch switches.
Interlock (only for touch switches, numeral input, string input, thumbwheel and
recipe in the NT21 and NT31/631-V2 and above)
Setting of interlock bit that is used for controlling whether the corresponding
object is enabled/disabled.
Logging (Data Logging property) (only for trend graph)
Setting of the data logging function that records data.
The following explains only the basic settings. For details of the properties of
each element, refer to 6-2 Fixed Display and later sections.
Displaying the Property Setting Dialog Box
The property setting dialog box is displayed in any of the following operations.
Using the mouse (1)
(1) Double click an element.
Using the mouse (2)
(1) Right click the mouse on an element, then select [Properties...].
Using the menu
(1) Specify the element for which you want to display properties (specify only
one element).
(2) Select [Draw] (menu bar), then select [Properties].
Using the keyboard
(1) Specify the element for which you want to display properties (specify only
one element).
(2) Press the Enter key while holding down the Alt key.
Setting the line type
You can select the type of line for polylines, broken-line graphs, and trend
graphs.
Solid
Dash
Dot-dash
Dot-dot-dash
The line type is set in a property of individual elements.
Setting the display color
Set the display color of elements.
Color setting is possible with NT30C, NT31C, NT620C, NT625C, and NT631C.
The colors that can be used are shown below.
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
For some elements, [Transparent] may be specified to display a transparent
background. Note that [Transparent] can be specified only for the elements
shown below.
Background of fixed display text (Either foreground or background has to
be other color.)
119
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Background of label of lamps and touch switches
OFF state color of lamps and touch switches
Background of element tiling patterns
Setting the color for text and numerals
For text and numerals, color setting is possible both for characters and background.
Foreground: Specify the color of text and numerals.
Background: Specify the color for the background of text and numerals.
If [Transparent] is specified, elements arranged behind text is
visible.
Background color
Foreground color
Setting the color for graphics
For a graphic, the foreground color can be set.
Foreground: Specify the color of lines in a graphic and the color of the graphic
itself when the attribute is set to Inverse.
Foreground color
Reference: Color setting is possible only for color-type PT.
However, with NT30, the NT21, and NT31, setting of white and black (and transparent) is possible.
Setting the tiling color
When tiling a graphic, color designation is possible for the foreground, background, and border.
Foreground: Specify the tiling color.
Background: Specify the background color of tiling (color visible through blank
areas in the selected pattern). If [Transparent] is specified, the
background becomes transparent, and elements arranged behind text and numerals are visible.
Border:
Specify the border color of tiling area.
Background
Foreground
Border
Available tiling patterns are shown below.
When tiling a graphic, the color of border should be set to the same color as set
for graphics that surround the tiling element. If a different color is specified, or
there is a gap in the border, the tiling fills out the specified area.
120
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Reference: The Color Palette Symbol for which tiling patterns and color combinations are
registered is supplied with Support Tool as symbol data. Using color palette symbol enables you to register required tiling objects on screen while checking their
display status. Color palette symbol does not have transparent background patterns. Border colors are set to ‘White’. Change the setting as required when using
it. For details, refer to 6-10-5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol.
Setting the color for lamps and touch switches
When specifying the color for lamps and touch switches, it is possible to specify
the color for the frame, color when ON, and color when OFF.
Frame: Specify the frame color if an element is displayed with a frame.
ON:
Specify the color that represents the lamp/touch switch ON status.
OFF:
Specify the color that represents the lamp/touch switch OFF status.
If a lamp or a touch switch is set to flash, the ON color and OFF color are displayed alternately.
Lamp/touch
switch ON
Lamp/touch
switch OFF
Lamp/touch
switch flashing
ON color
Frame
ON color
OFF color
Frame
OFF color
Setting graph colors
When setting the color for bar graphs, analogue meters, broken-line graphs,
and trend graphs, specification is possible for the frame of the graph, +range,
–range, line (foreground), and scale.
Frame:
Specify the color of the graph frame.
+ Range: Specify the background color of the graph, to be applied when the
numeric value is positive.
For a bar graph, the bar is displayed in the specified color in the positive range.
– Range: Specify the background color of the graph, to be applied when the
numeric value is negative.
For a bar graph, the bar is displayed in the specified color in the
negative range.
Line-Color (Foreground color):
Specify the line color of broken-line graphs
and trend graphs, and foreground color for
present value of analogue meters.
121
Section
Common Operation
Scale Color:
Specify the scale color of analogue meters.
<Bar graph>
–100%
Frame color
–100%
6-1
<Analogue meter>
100%
0%
0%
Foreground color
+range
0%
Scale color
100%
–100%
100%
–range
Frame
color
+range
–range
<Trend graph>
<Broken-line graph>
+range
+range
100%
100%
0%
0%
–100%
–100%
–range
–range
Frame color
Frame color
Settings for text display
Set the size and display attributes for displaying fixed display of text and character strings in a character string memory table (string table) in the manner shown
below.
The following shows only the common settings for text of fixed display.
As an example, the properties for a text display (fixed display) are shown below.
Font Type
Specify the font type for displaying alphanumerics and symbols.
Standard:
A character is displayed in standard font (16 8 dots).
Half Height:
A character is displayed in half-height font (8 8 dots).
Half height
122
Standard
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Scale
Specify the character size. (Only 1 1 (Equal) and 2 1 (Wide) can be set for
NT11S/NT11.)
1 1 (Equal): A character is displayed in the original size both in height and
width.
1 1
1 2 (High):
A character is displayed with doubled height and the original
width.
2 1 (Wide):
A character is displayed with the original height and doubled
width.
2 2:
A character is displayed with doubled height and width.
3 3:
A character is displayed with threefold height and width.
4 4:
A character is displayed with fourfold height and width.
8 8:
A character is displayed with eightfold height and width (not
possible for NT20/NT20S).
1 2
2 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
8 8
Reference: With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C “-V1” and above,
characters of 2 2 or larger scale are automatically displayed in 32 dot high-definition font. (Marks inserted into a string are always displayed in 16 16 dot font.)
32 dot font and font type ISO 8859-1 are not available on PT when system programs of “-V1” type and above, were installed for NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
below “-V1,” even though other functions will be same as “-V1” and above type.
Therefore, in this case, characters of 2 x 2 or larger scale are displayed in 16 dot
font for PT, while they are displayed in 32 dot font for Support Tool. Also,
ISO8859-1 font type can not be used for PT, CP437 font type is applied.
Smoothing
Smoothing processing allows jags to be smoothed when a character is displayed
in an enlarged scale.
Selection of this item is possible for characters of 2 2 or larger and for marks
(16 16 dots). (With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, smoothing
is not performed for marks.)
Smoothing cannot be selected for NT20, NT20S and NT600S since smoothing
processing is always executed for characters larger than 2 2 with these models.
Without smoothing
With smoothing
Attribute
This is an attribute to determine how text is displayed. Attributes to be displayed
here vary somewhat according to the PT model.
123
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Standard:
Text is displayed in the specified color and specified background color.
Inverse:
Text and background are displayed in colors that are the reverse of the specified colors.
Flash:
Text flashes when displayed. If this attribute is selected, standard display and no display (background color only) are alternately displayed.
Inverse Flash: Text is displayed by alternating standard display and inverse
display.
Reference: To check “Flash” and “Inverse Flash” display on the screen, specify [Simulate
Flash] from the [View] menu. (For details, refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display
Method on the Support Tool.)
Settings for numeral display
Set the size and display attributes for displaying numeric values of numeral table
data and percentage values in a graph in the manner shown below.
The following shows only the common settings for numeral display.
As an example, the properties of a numeral display are described below.
Font Type
Specify the font type.
Standard:
A numeric value is displayed in the standard font (16 8 dots).
Half Height:
A numeric value is displayed in the half-height font (8 8 dots).
Double Width: A numeric value is displayed in the double-width font (16 16
dots).
Half height
Standard
Scale
Specify the character size. (Only 1 1 (Equal) and 2 1 (Wide) can be set for
NT11S/NT11.)
1 1 (Equal): A numeric value is displayed at the original size both in height
and width.
124
Section
Common Operation
6-1
1 2 (High):
A numeric value is displayed with doubled height and original
width.
2 1 (Wide):
A number is displayed at the original height and doubled width.
2 2:
A numeric value is displayed with doubled height and width.
3 3:
A numeric value is displayed with threefold height and width.
4 4:
A numeric value is displayed with fourfold height and width.
8 8:
A numeric value is displayed with eightfold height and width
(not possible for NT20/NT20S).
1 1 1 2
2 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
8 8
Reference: With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and above,
numbers of 2 2 or larger scale are automatically displayed in 32 dot font.
Smoothing
Smoothing processing allows jags to be smoothed when a number is displayed
in an enlarged scale.
Selection of this item is possible, for numbers of 2 2 or larger.
Smoothing cannot be selected for NT20, NT20S and NT600S since smoothing
processing is always executed for numbers larger than 2 2 with these models.
Without smoothing
With smoothing
Attribute
This is an attribute to determine how a numeric value is displayed. Attributes to
be displayed here vary somewhat according to the PT model.
Standard:
The numeric value is displayed in the specified color and specified background color.
Inverse:
The numeric value and background are displayed in colors that
are the reverse of the specified colors.
Flash:
The numeric value flashes when displayed. If this attribute is
selected, standard display and no display (background color
only) are alternated.
Inverse Flash: The numeric value is displayed by alternating standard display
and inverse display.
125
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Reference: To check “Flash” and “Inverse Flash” display on the screen, specify [Simulate
Flash] from the [View] menu. (For details, refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display
Method on the Support Tool.)
Display Type
Specify the notation in which numeric values are displayed.
Decimal:
Numeric value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal: Numeric value is displayed in hexadecimal.
The display will differ according to the specified notation even if the same content
is displayed.
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Format
Specify the number of digits in the integer part and decimal fraction part.
Integer:
Specify the number of digits entered in the integer part.
Decimal:
part.
Specify the number of digits entered in the decimal fraction
Integer part Decimal part
Zero Suppression
Specify whether leading zeros should be suppressed.
Ticked:
Leading zeros are suppressed.
Not ticked:
Leading zeros are not suppressed.
Without zero suppression
Display Sign
Specify if a sign (–) is displayed.
126
With zero suppression
Section
Common Operation
6-1
When a negative numeric value is displayed with this item selected, a negative
sign “–” is displayed preceding a numeral. Since this sign is included in the number of digits in the integer part, the maximum digit number is reduced by 1. When
this item is not selected, a negative numeric value is displayed as an absolute
value.
Ticked:
Numeric values are displayed without a sign.
Not ticked:
Numeric values are displayed with a sign.
Without a sign
With a sign
Reference: How a numeric value is displayed according to the setting for [Integer], [Decimal],
[Zero Suppression], and [Display Sign] is shown below.
Integer
Decimal
Zero
Suppression
Display Sign
Data Stored
in Numeral
Table
Display on
the Screen
3
0
Not ticked
Check mark not set
12
012
3
0
Not ticked
Check mark not set
–12
012
3
0
Ticked
Check mark not set
12
12
3
0
Ticked
Check mark not set
–12
12
3
0
Ticked
Check mark set
12
12
3
0
Ticked
Check mark set
–12
–12
3
1
Not ticked
Check mark not set
1
000.1
3
1
Not ticked
Check mark not set
–12
001.2
2
1
Not ticked
Check mark set
1
00.1
2
1
Not ticked
Check mark set
–12
–01.2
2
1
Ticked
Check mark set
1
0.1
2
1
Ticked
Check mark set
–12
–1.2
*:
With conventional PT models, negative numeric value data is prefixed by F.
For example, –12 is set as F0000012.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, numeric values are
stored as signed binary data.
Word setting for an element
Specify the PC (PLC) address used for reading and writing by an element such
as memory table entry, lamp, or touch switch.
For a numeral or character string memory table entry (string table), specify the
lower address or the least significant address of the word to be referred to.
For a lamp, a touch switch, or a bit memory table entry, specify the allocated bit
number.
When specifying a bit, specify the address of the word and the bit position in the
word that is referred to
Note that, timer (TIM) and counter (CNT) cannot be set for bits or character string
words.
Using PLC address setting dialog box
Normally, a button for displaying the PLC address setting dialog is provided for
PLC address input field.
127
Section
Common Operation
6-1
In the dialog, PLC address can be set easily by selecting from the available
areas.
Example: Numeral table
(PLC Vendor : OMRON)
Example: Touch switch
(PLC Vendor : OMRON)
Channel (Word)
Select the type of word to be referred to from the list box.
Address
Input the address of word to be referred to.
Bit
Input the bit position in the word to be referred to.
Direct input of PLC address
It is possible to input PC (PLC) address, for example D00001, directly into the
address input field. You can input addresses easily when you know which area is
available.
When inputting PLC addresses, input a word address and a bit number without a
blank following a character that indicates area type. However, in case of numeral
table or string table, specification of bit number is not needed.
When you do not specify PLC address, input “- -” into the input field.
Input methods varies according to the PLC Vendor setting as listed below. Only
input method is described here. For details on specification method of PLC address for PLC other than OMRON, refer to PC Connection Operation Manual
(V042-E1-).
PLC Vendor: OMRON
Possible areas and characters that indicate area type are as follows:
Area Type
Word
Bit
Common I/O Area
H
HR Area
A
AR Area
L
LR Area
T
Timers
C
Counters
D
Data Memory Area
E
EM Current Bank
E0
EM Bank 0 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E1
EM Bank 1 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E2
EM Bank 2 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E3
EM Bank 3 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E4
EM Bank 4 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
Character
None
128
Section
Common Operation
Character
Area Type
Word
Bit
1
E5
EM Bank 5 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
E6
EM Bank 6 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E7
EM Bank 7 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E8
EM Bank 8 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
E9
EM Bank 9 (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
EA
EM Bank A (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
EB
EM Bank B (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
EC
EM Bank C (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
1
CU
Count Up Flag (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
TU
Time Up Flag (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
W
Work Area (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
TK
Task Flag (CS/CJ–series PLCs)
1
6-1
1
1
* EM Bank D, EM Bank E, EM Bank F are not available since these are reserved
words.
1
Only available for the NT20/NT21 and the NT31/631-V2 and above models.
: Specification possible
: Specification not possible
With NT11S/NT11, NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C and
NT625C:
Input a word address as a 4-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed) and
a bit number as a 2-digit number.
With NT20, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C:
Input a word address as a 5-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed) and
a bit number as a 2-digit number.
PLC Vendor: MEMLINK
Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows:
Character
None
Area Type
Memory Link Area
: Specification possible
Word
Bit
: Specification not possible
Input a word address as a 4-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed) and
a bit number as a 2-digit number.
PLC Vendor: Mitsubishi_A
Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows:
Character
Area Type
Word
Bit
X
Input Relay
Y
Output Relay
M
Internal Relay
L
Latch Relay
B
Link Relay
C
Counter
T
Timer
129
Section
Common Operation
Character
Area Type
Word
Bit
D
Data Register
R
File Register
W
Link Register
: Specification possible
6-1
: Specification not possible
Input a word address as a 4-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed) and
a bit number as a 2-digit number.
PLC Vendor: Mitsubishi_Fx
Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows:
Character
Area Type
Word
Bit
X
Input Relay
Y
Output Relay
M
Auxiliary Relay
S
State
C
Counter
T
Timer
D
Data Register
: Specification possible
: Specification not possible
Input a word address as a 4-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed) and
a bit number as a 2-digit number.
PLC Vendor: AB
Possible file types and characters are as follows (available only for NT31/631
models):
Character
File Type
File/Slot
Number
Element/
Word
Number
Bit/Terminal Number
B
Bit
C
Counter
N
Integer
R
Control
S
Status
T
Timer
Character
Sub-Element
Number
File Type
Slot Number
Word
Address
Bit/Terminal
Number
I
Input
O
Output
: Specification possible
: Specification not possible
Input a file number as a 3-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed), element number or word address as 3-digit number, sub-element number as 1 digit
and bit number as a 2-digit number.
PLC Vendor: GE
130
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Possible memory types and characters are as follows (available only for
NT31/631 models):
Character
Memory Type
Data Offset
R
Register
AL
Analog Input
AQ
Analog Output
I
Discrete Input
Q
Discrete Output
T
Discrete Temporary
M
Discrete Internal
S
System Status
SA
System Status A
SB
System Status B
SC
System Status C
Genius Global Data
G
: Specification possible
: Specification not possible
Input a Data Offset as a 4-digit number (leading zeros can be suppressed).
PLC Vendor: Siemens
Possible memory types and characters are as follows (available only for
NT31/631-V1 models):
Character
Memory Type
Address
Bit
Counter
Data Block
I
Input
IW
Input
M
Bit Memory
Word Memory
Q
Output
QW
Output
T
Timer
C
DB
MW
: Specification possible
: Specification not possible
Input a address number as a 4-digit (5 digit in case of DB) number (leading zeros
can be suppressed) and a bit number as a 1-digit number.
Batch address change operation
The set PC (PLC) addresses can be changed into the required addresses in a
batch. Since the change source can be specified as a range, processing such as
changing the address range DM 1000 to DM 01499 to the address range
DM 1800 to DM 2299 is possible at one time. Shifting in bit units is also possible.
Reference: Batch address change operation is possible using either the dialog box displayed
by [Tools] → [Table...] or the function called by [Tools] → [Change Address]. Depending on how the address change operation is called, the objective addresses
131
Section
Common Operation
6-1
differ – in the operation using the edit dialog box of the memory table, addresses
in the table being edited are objective while all addresses in the entire screen
data are objective of the operation if the operation is performed using the [Tools]
menu.
The explanation below is given for the batch address change operation where
the entire screen data is the objective of the operation. For the procedure to perform the operation using the edit dialog box of the memory table, refer to 7-1-3
Batch Address Change Operation.
Description of batch address change dialog box
Find – Channel (Word)
Specify the channel type of the batch change source.
Find – Start Range
Specify the start address of the source range for the batch address change.
Find – End Range
Specify the end address of the source range for batch address change.
The address to be set for [End Range] must always be larger than or equal to
the address set for [Start Range].
Change to – Channel (Word)
Specify the word type, and start address, after the change.
Addresses are changed within the number of specified points from the start address (number of points from “Start Range” to “End Range”).
Change Comment
Specify whether or not the same I/O comment appended to an address before
the change is appended to the address after the change.
To append the same I/O comment, click on the check box to display a check
mark in it.
Batch address change processing starts when you click on this button.
How addresses are changed
In the operation for changing addresses in bit units, processing is executed assuming that bit 15 of a word is immediately followed by bit 0 of the next word.
Addresses are changed as shown below according to the set search range and
the address after the change.
132
Section
Common Operation
6-1
Example: Bit memory table entry
Address and Bit set
for [End Range]
Address and Bit set
for [Start Range]
CIO area
Word 1
CIO area
Bit
15
0 15
Bit
15
0 15
HR area
Word 11
Word 0
10
0
0
HR area
Word 10
[Change To] – [Address]
(start address after the change)
Before change
After change
0000010
H0001000
0000012
H0001002
0000100
H0001006
0000110
H0001100
0000115
H0001105
Operation procedure
(1) [Tools] (menu bar) → [Change Address]
(2) Select the type of word before the change in the [Channel] box.
(3) Specify the range of the change by setting addresses at the [Start Range]
and [End Range] boxes.
(4) Specify the word and the address after the change in the corresponding
boxes in the [Change To] area.
(5) Set a check mark in the Change Comment check box as desired.
If a check mark is set in this check box, I/O comments appended to the addresses before the change are also appended to the addresses after the
change.
(6) Click on
.
Setting the current object status as the existing value
Register the status of the selected object as the existing value of the same kind of
object. This feature allows the status of the object, when it is registered to the
screen, to be changed, eliminating the operation steps to modify the property of
the object.
Note that the PC (PLC) address and reference memory table entry cannot be
registered as the existing value.
(1) Specify the object to be registered as the existing value (select only one object).
(2) [Draw] (menu bar) → [Use as Default] (Or select [Use as Default] from popup edit menu)
133
Section
Common Operation
6-1
The current set status of the specified object is registered as the existing value of the same kind of object.
6-1-11 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables
The relationships between elements and memory tables are shown below.
When creating an element, attend carefully to the memory table address, capacity, etc.
: Reading from a memory table
: Writing to a memory table
Numeral Memory
Table
Character String
Memory Table
(String Table)
Bit Memory Table
Numeral display
–
–
Bar graph
–
–
Analogue Meter
–
–
Broken-line graph
–
–
Trend graph
–
–
Numeral setting
+ Touch switch (for inputting control code)*1
–
–
Numeral setting
+ Touch switch (for copy setting)*1
–
–
Numeral setting
+ Touch switch (for numeral input)*1
–
–
Thumbwheel switch
Alarm list
–
Alarm history
–
Character string display
–
–
Character string setting
+ Touch switch (for character string input)*1
–
–
Character string setting
+ Touch switch (for inputting control code)*1
–
–
Character string setting
+ Touch switch (for copy setting)*1
–
–
Standard lamp*4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Image lamp*2
Touch switch (for notifying
input)*4
*1: Numeral setting and character string setting are used in combination with a
touch switch.
*2: A standard lamp and an image lamp reads the specified PC (PLC) bit directly without using a memory table.
*3: A touch switch (for notifying input) directly drives the specified PC (PLC) bit
ON/OFF without using a memory table.
*4: When a Numeral Display or a String Display is specified as the label type,
the specified memory table will be read. (Only for NT21 and NT31/631-V2
and above)
6-1-12 Interlock
By setting the Interlock flag, the interlock facility will be activated for touch switch/
thumbwheel/numeral input/string input and recipe. When interlock is set, the cor-
134
Section
Common Operation
6-1
responding object will be enabled/disabled according to the interlock bit: when
the PLC Address set on the Interlock address is ‘ON’ the touch switch/thumbwheel/numeral input/string input will work; if the address is ‘OFF’, the touch
switch/thumbwheel/numeral input/string input will not respond to the touches.
The interlock functionality is supported for the PT models NT21 and
NT31/631-V2 and above. The temporary input object does not support interlock
function.
Operation procedure
Select the Interlock tab on the property sheet of the screen object that supports
Interlock.
Property setting
This property page will be the same for all other supported objects. Only the caption will be changed according to the object.
Interlock Check Box
To ON/OFF interlock. By default it is OFF.
PLC Bit Address
To specify the bit address associated with Interlock. Interlock is ON, if this bit is
set, OFF otherwise.
IO Comment
I/O Comment for the address specified.
Conversion
For conversions due to cut/copy/paste, drag/drop of screen elements with interlock settings (e.g. Touch Switch, Thumbwheel, Numeral Input, and String Input)
135
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
from the NT21 and NT31/631-V2 and above to previous PT models, interlock
settings will be discarded as they are not being supported.
In the case of copy/paste of screen elements, drag/drop of screen elements as
well as application conversion:
Target PT model supports Interlock
Original screen elements support Interlock
Remarks
Yes
No
Interlock Flag will assume FALSE.
No
Yes
Interlock Flag will be
set to FALSE and ignored.
No
No
No conversion required.
Yes
Yes
No conversion required.
Reference
This feature is used by Touch Switch, Thumbwheel Switch, String Input and Numeral Input.
6-2
Fixed Display
Fixed display means graphic data that does not have the data communication
function with a PC and a memory table.
Set only general properties.
Reference: Rotation and other processing are not possible for the fixed display. For image
data, rotation and inverse are possible during creation of the image data.
6-2-1 Polyline
A straight line is drawn.
Polylines cannot be used with NT11S/NT11.
(1) A continuous line is drawn and changed into a required shape.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Polyline]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Reference: To draw a continuous polyline, press the Shift key when the drag operation is finished. Dragging this end point creates a continuous polyline.
136
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Terminology
Vertex
Vertex
Property setting
General
Line Style:
Specify the type of line
Solid line, dotted line, alternate short and long lines, alternate
two short and long lines
Attribute
Standard, Flash (Flash can be set only for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631,
and NT631C)
Color
Foreground:
Specify the line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Guidance
For line type, the following four choices are provided.
Solid
Dash
Dot-dash
Dot-dot-dash
The line type is specified using the line style property.
When creating a polyline, draw a continuous line first, then add vertices in the
edit operation to change the drawn continuous line into the desired broken line.
Vertices can be set at up to 254 positions.
To add a vertex, follow the steps shown below.
(1) Draw a continuous line.
(2) After locating the cursor at a position where a vertex is to be added, right
click the mouse and select [Add Node] in the pop-up menu.
137
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
(3) Drag the vertex to the desired position.
Cursor position
[Remove Node]
executed
To remove a vertex, locate the cursor on the vertex to be removed and select
[Remove Node] in the pop-up menu.
6-2-2 Arc
An arc is drawn.
Arcs cannot be used with NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) An arc is drawn. The radius of an arc can be changed.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Arc]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
End point
Center point
Start point
Property setting
General
Position
138
Center point:
Indicates the position of the center of an arc.
Start point:
Indicates the position of the start point of an arc.
Section
Fixed Display
End point:
6-2
Indicates the position of the end point of an arc.
An arc is drawn anti-clockwise from the start point to the end
point.
Size:
Indicates the radius of an arc.
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Guidance
An arc is defined by the center point, the start point, and the end point
The line type is specified using line style attribute.
Center point:
Indicates the position of the center of an arc.
End point:
Indicates the position of the end point of an arc.
The end point can be dragged to the desired position.
Start point:
Indicates the position of the start point of an arc.
When the start point is dragged, the start point position and
arc radius are changed.
6-2-3 Rectangle
A rectangle is drawn.
Rectangles cannot be used with NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) A rectangle is drawn. The length of a vertical and horizontal sides can be
changed.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] →
[Rectangle]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
139
Section
Fixed Display
Terminology
Position
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of a rectangle.
Size:
Indicates the size of a rectangle.
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Guidance
A rectangle element can be modified in the manner shown below.
A rectangle can be modified by dragging a green mark (handle).
Modified in the
upper left direction
Modified in the
upper direction
Modified in the
right direction
Modified in the
left direction
Modified in the
lower left direction
Modified in the
upper right direction
Modified in the
lower direction
Modified in the
lower right direction
To tile a rectangle, paste a tiling element into it.
Rectangle
Tiling element
For details of tiling elements, refer to 6-2-8 Tiling.
6-2-4 Circle
A circle is drawn.
140
6-2
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Circles can be used with all models except for NT11S/NT11.
(1) A circle is drawn. The radius of a circle can be changed.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Circle]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Center point
Property setting
General
Position
Center point:
Indicates the position of the center of a circle.
Size:
Indicates the radius of a circle.
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute. (Setting is not possible with NT20,
NT20S and NT600S) Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Guidance
A circle element can be modified in the manner shown below.
A circle can be modified by dragging a green mark (handle).
141
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Note that a circle cannot be deformed to an oval.
For modification in the
upper left direction
For modification in the
upper right direction
For modification in the
lower left direction
For modification in the
lower right direction
To tile a circle, paste a tiling element into it.
Circle
Tiling element
For details of tiling elements, refer to 6-2-8 Tiling.
6-2-5 Polygon
A polygon is drawn.
Polygons cannot be used with NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) After a polygon is drawn, it is modified to give the desired shape.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Polygon]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Vertex (Node)
Vertex
Attribute point
Vertex
142
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Property setting
General
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Position:
Specify the line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Indicates the position of Attribute Point (reference point).
Guidance
A polygon is created on the basis of a triangle. After a triangle is drawn, vertices
are added in the edit operation to create a polygon.
Vertices can be set at up to 255 positions.
To add a vertex, follow the steps shown below.
(1) Draw a polygon.
(2) After locating the cursor at a position where a vertex is to be added, right
click the mouse and select [Add Node] in the pop-up menu.
(3) Drag the vertex to the desired position.
To remove a vertex, locate the cursor on the vertex to be removed and select
[Remove Node] in the pop-up menu.
Cursor position
[Remove Node] executed
143
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
To tile a rectangle, paste a tiling element into it.
Polygon
Tiling element
For details of tiling elements, refer to 6-2-8 Tiling.
6-2-6 Sector
A sector is drawn.
Sectors cannot be used with NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) A sector is drawn. The size of a sector can be changed.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Sector]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
End point
Center point
Start point
Property setting
General
Position
Center point:
Indicates the position of the center of a sector.
Start point:
Indicates the position of the start point of a sector.
End point:
Indicates the position of the end point of a sector.
A sector is drawn anti-clockwise from the start point to the end
point.
Size:
144
Indicates the radius of a sector.
Section
Fixed Display
Attribute:
6-2
Specify the display attribute.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Guidance
A sector is defined by the center point, the start point, and the end point
The line type is specified using line style attribute.
Center point:
Indicates the position of the center of a sector.
End point:
Indicates the position of the end point of a sector.
The end point can be dragged to a desired position to change
the position of the end point.
Start point:
Indicates the position of the start point of a sector.
When the start point is dragged, the start point position and
sector radius are changed.
When tiling a sector, paste a tiling element in it.
Tiling element
Sector
For details of tiling element, refer to 6-2-8 Tiling.
6-2-7 Text
Text is drawn.
Text can be used with all models.
(1) Text is drawn. Font, size, color, etc. can be changed.
Note
Mark data can be inserted into a character string. With the NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT21 and NT31/631-V2 and above with
NT20/30/620-compatible mode set, image data can also be inserted.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Text]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
145
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Terminology
Foreground color
Background color
Property setting
General
Description: Set the text to be displayed.
Position:
Indicates the position where the text is displayed.
Font type:
Specify the font. (Only Standard can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Standard, Half Height
Scale:
Specify the character size.
(Only 1 1 (Equal) and 2 1 (Wide) can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
(Not for NT20, NT20S)
Smoothing:
Specify whether smoothing processing is executed for characters
larger than 2 2 scale. (Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11,
NT20, NT20S and NT600S. For NT20S, NT600S, smoothing is always ON.)
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the text color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan,
yellow (Transparent is available for the NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C)
Background:
Specify the color of the background in the text display area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan,
yellow
:
Select the mark data to be pasted into a character string.
:
Select the image data to be pasted into a character string.
(Only for NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, and
NT21 and NT31/631-V2 and above with NT20/30/620 compatible mode set.)
Guidance
The maximum number of characters that can be input (displayed) is:
NT11S/NT11:
146
20 characters
Section
Fixed Display
NT20, NT20S, NT21:
32 characters
NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C:
40 characters
6-2
NT600S, NT620S, NT620C/NT625C, NT631, NT631C: 80 characters
To display “\”, input two characters without a blank, like “\\”.
It is possible to insert mark data, image data into a character string.
(For NT20, NT20S, NT600S, mark data can be used only in strings.)
Note that insertion of image data is possible only for the NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT21 (NT20/30/620-compatible mode),
NT31/C-V2
(NT20/30/620-compatible
mode)
and
NT631/C-V2
(NT20/30/620-compatible mode). Although the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631,
and NT631C support image data, it cannot be inserted into a character string.
The procedure for inserting mark data, image data into a character string is
shown below.
(1) In the character string input field, move the cursor ( | ) to the mark/image data
insertion position.
(2) Select
or
in the dialog box.
The mark selection dialog box or image selection dialog box is displayed.
.
Select the mark data, image data to be inserted and click on
Mark data:
Image data:
FF20 to FFFFH (FF20 to EF5FH for NT11S/NT11,
NT20, NT20S and NT600S)
Only for the NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT21, and
NT31/631-V2 and above with NT20/30/620-compatible mode
FE20 to FEFFH
Example:
Mark data
(3) The code of the specified data is displayed at the data insertion position in
the character string input field.
(4) Click on
to close the character string attribute. The set mark data,
image data, or library data is displayed in the character string displayed on
the screen.
6-2-8 Tiling
The closed area of the graphic (inside the border) will be filled with some pattern
and color.
147
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Tiling cannot be used for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) The area inside the border is tiled according to the specified color and pattern.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Tiling]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Foreground color
Background color
Border
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the position of the tiling element.
Pattern:
Specify the tiling pattern.
Color
Foreground:
Specify the foreground color of the tiling area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background:
Specify the background color of the tiling area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan,
yellow
Border:
Specify the color of the border of tiling area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Guidance
A mark (handle) is displayed when a tiling element is selected.
Property setting and tiling element can be edited by selecting the mark (handle).
148
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Tiling is possible for the elements shown below.
Rectangle, circle, polygon, sector
In addition to the elements indicated above, tiling is possible for an area enclosed by a solid line of the same color (border color). If an element such as a
lamp that changes status is specified for the border, however, tiling may not be
executed correctly due to changes in color and display.
To check the tiling status, select [View] (menu bar) then select [Full Tiling]. The
result of tiling will be displayed (in this state, a check mark is set for [Full Tiling]
in the display menu.).
When [Full Tiling] is selected again, then return to the previous mark (handle).
Selection of
[Full Tiling]
Selection of
[Full Tiling]
To execute tiling, specify the same color for the border of area and the border of
a tiling element.
Tiling is executed in the enclosed area for which the same color as the color set
for the border is set. If an enclosed area with the same color does not exist, the
tiling extends outside the enclosed area.
If the tiling area is not an enclosed area, the tiling spills out the specified area.
The patterns are displayed in the actual status of tiling according to the setting
for the foreground and background color.
The available tiling patterns are shown below.
Reference: Transparent background can be set for tiling objects. However, it will not be displayed as transparent on the Support Tool. When the screen is downloaded to
a PT, it will be displayed as transparent.
(1) Double-click the screen to display the screen property.
(2) Set Red for screen background color.
(3) Register a tiling object on the screen and set Transparent for the background and
for Pattern.
(4) Check ON the [View] – [Full Tiling] command.
(5) Tiling will be executed and the screen background color (red) will be invisible
(figure (a) below).
(6) When this screen data is downloaded to a PT, background color for tiling object will be transparent (figure (b) below).
It will not be transparent.
(a) Support Tool screen
It will be transparent (red).
(b) PT screen
149
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
If “Full Tiling” is performed, performance of Support Tool may be slower. In this
case, clear the check mark for [Full Tiling] from the [View] menu.
[Full Tiling] is automatically cancelled when a filter function is performed for a
Fixed Display.
The Color Palette Symbol, for which tiling patterns and color combinations are
registered, is supplied with Support Tool as symbol data. Using color palette
symbol enables you to register required tiling objects on screen while checking
their display status. Color palette symbol does not have transparent background patterns. Border colors are set to ‘White’. Change the setting as required when using it. For details, refer to 6-10-5 Operating Procedure of Color
Palette Symbol.
6-2-9 Image Object Data
Image data is displayed.
There are two types of image data. One type of image data references the fixed
code directly, the other type uses indirect reference. Indirect reference is a function that can change the image data to be displayed by writing the image code to
the numeral table just like the indirect reference of numeral/string display. This
enables the animation display by switching the display contents using a simple
program. For details of the PT models that can use indirect reference, refer to
Appendix D Table of Functions of Each PT Model.
Image data cannot be used for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) Image data created in the bit map (BMP) format is displayed.
Note
Bit map data created by general application software running on Windows can be
displayed.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] →
[Image Display]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Foreground color
Background color
150
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of image data.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner in the image element.)
Size:
Indicates the size of image data.
Reference Type
Direct:
Set the image code directly.
Code:
Indicates the code number of the image data to be displayed.
Mode:
Indicates the color mode of the image data (2 colors, 8 colors).
Comment:
Indirect:
Displays the comment that is set for the image data.
Set this item when the value for the specified numeral table
entry is treated as image code and referenced indirectly.
Table No.:
Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced.
When using the indirect reference, set the storage type of allocated numeral table entry to Binary. Also, when specifying the
image code from a program etc., use hexadecimal value since
the image table code is in hexadecimal.
Color
Foreground:
Background:
:
Set the display color of image data.
(Setting is possible only when 2 colors is set for the color
mode.)
Set the color of background in the image data display area.
(Setting is possible only when 2 colors is set for the color
mode.)
Displays the list for selecting the image data when Direct is
specified. Displays the list for referencing the numeral table
entry when Indirect is specified.
Guidance
When the image data is firstly specified, the data of character code FE20H (for
the NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C and NT21 and NT31/631-V2
and above with NT20/30/620-compatible mode), or the data that corresponds
to image/library code 0001H (for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
without NT20/30/620-compatible mode) is arranged as default.
The mark shown below will be displayed if image data has not been created for
the specified code.
To change the image data to be displayed, click on
in the property and se-
lect the desired image data or numeral table entry from the list.
If you are using the NT31, NT31C, NT631 or NT631C “-V1” and above, and its
system program version is 2.1 and above, “Indirect reference” can be set.
The procedure for specifying the desired image data is shown below.
Direct
Specify the code of the image data to be displayed directly.
151
Section
Fixed Display
(1) Click on
6-2
at the right side of the Code field after checking the [Direct] but-
ton in the property setting dialog box to display the image data selection dialog box.
(2) If the code of the desired image data is not found in the list, scroll the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen, or click on
to
open the code input dialog box.
Input the code of the desired image data and click on
.
By pressing cursor keys (°, ±) on keyboard, the contents of the code can be
checked in the preview window one by one.
(3) Select the code of the desired image data to be displayed.
The selected line will be highlighted.
(4) Click on
to close the dialog box.
Indirect
Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced.
With indirect reference, the contents for the specified numeral table entry are
treated as an image code and the corresponding image data is displayed. This is
useful when you want to change the image data to be displayed according to the
statuses. Set the storage type of numeral table entry to be referenced by indirect
reference to Binary and specify the value (image code) to be stored in hexadecimal since the image code is in hexadecimal.
Set the numeral table entry number to be referenced in the table entry number
field.
It is possible to display a numeral table entry so that you can select the desired
152
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
table entry number from it.
To display a numeral table entry, follow the procedure below.
(1) Click on
at the right side of the table entry number after checking the [In-
direct] button in the property setting dialog box to display the numeral table
selection dialog box.
(2) If the number of the desired numeral table entry is not found in the list, scroll
the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen, or click on
to open the entry input dialog box.
Input the number of the desired numeral table entry and click on
.
(3) Select the desired numeral table entry to be referenced.
The selected line will be highlighted.
(4) Click on
to close the dialog box.
How to create the image data is described in 8-1 Image Editor.
6-2-10 Mark
Mark data is displayed.
Mark data can be used for all models. (With NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, and
NT600S, mark data can be inserted only in string.) Since the Support Tool does
not support mark data of 32 32 dots and 64 64 dots, it is necessary to group
16 16 dot marks if image data created by the DOS version Support Tool is imported.
153
Section
Fixed Display
(1) The mark data, fixed at 16
6-2
16 dot size, is displayed.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Mark]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Foreground color
Background color
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of mark data.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner in the mark data.)
Code:
Indicates the character code of the mark data to be displayed.
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
(With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, the Inverse
attribute is not supported.)
Scale:
Specify the character size.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
Smoothing:
Specify whether smoothing processing is executed for mark
data.*1
(Setting is not possible for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and
NT631C)
Color
Foreground:
Set display color of mark data.
Background:
Set the color of background in the mark data display area.
:
*1:
Displays the list for selecting the mark data.
For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, even under condition
that the string has smoothing ON and the mark has inserted, it will not
work.
Guidance
By specifying mark data, special characters and symbols can be created on
the screen.
To display a mark, specify its code.
If no mark data has been created for the specified code, a blank is displayed.
To change the mark data to be displayed, click on
in the property setting dialog box and select the desired mark data in the list.
154
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
The procedure for selecting the desired mark data is shown below.
(1) Click on
in the attribute setting dialog box to display the mark data
selection dialog box.
(2) Specify the mark data to be displayed. The specified field is displayed enlarged. Or, input the character code that corresponds to the mark data to be
displayed into the [Code] input field.
(3) Click on
to close the dialog box.
For the procedure for creating mark data, refer to 8-3 Mark Editor.
6-2-11 Library Object (Data)
Library data is displayed.
There are two types of library data. One type of library data references the fixed
code directly, the other type uses indirect reference. Indirect reference is a function that can change the library data to be displayed by writing the library code to
the numeral table entry just like the indirect reference of numeral/string display.
This enables the animation display by switching the display contents using a simple program. For details of the PT models that can use indirect reference, refer to
Appendix E Table of Functions of Each PT Model.
Library data cannot be used for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(1) Library data consisting of fixed display elements is displayed.
Note
By registering a graphic created using multiple fixed display elements as the library data, the same graphic can be arranged in different positions.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] →
[Library Display]
155
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of library data.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner in the library data.)
Size:
Indicates the size of library data. (frame size of the library
data)
Reference Type
Direct:
Set the library code directly.
Code:
Indicates the code of the library data to be displayed.
Comment:
Displays the comment that is set for the library data.
Indirect:
Set this item when the value for the specified numeral table
entry is treated as library code and referenced indirectly.
Table No.:
Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced.
When using the indirect reference, set the storage type of allocated numeral table entry to Binary. Also, when specifying the
library code from a program etc., use hexadecimal value since
the library table code is in hexadecimal.
:
Displays the list for selecting the library data when Direct is
specified. Displays the list for referencing the numeral table
entry when Indirect” is specified.
Guidance
When the library data is specified, the data of character code FA20H (for the
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT21, and NT31/631-V2 and
above with NT20/30/620-compatible mode), or the data that corresponds to
image/library code 1000H (for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C without NT20/30/620-compatible mode) is arranged.
The mark shown below will be displayed if library data has not been created for
the specified code.
To change the library data to be displayed, click on
in the property and se-
lect the desired library data or numeral table entry from the list.
If you are using the NT31, NT31C, NT631 or NT631C “-V1” and above, and its
system program version is 2.1 and above, “Indirect reference” can be set.
The procedure for specifying the desired library data is shown below.
Direct
Specify the code of the library data to be displayed directly.
156
Section
Fixed Display
(1) Click on at
6-2
the right side of the code after checking the [Direct] button in
the property setting dialog box to display the library data selection dialog
box.
(2) If the code of the desired library data is not found in the list, scroll the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen, or click on
to
open the code input dialog box.
Input the code of the desired library data and click on
.
By pressing cursor keys (°, ±) on keyboard, the contents of the code can be
checked in the preview window one by one.
(3) Select the code of the library data to be displayed.
The selected line will be highlighted.
(4) Click on
to close the dialog box.
Indirect
Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced.
With indirect reference, the contents for the specified numeral table entry are
treated as a library code and the corresponding library data is displayed. This is
useful when you want to change the library data to be displayed according to the
statuses. Set the storage type of numeral table entry to be referenced by indirect
reference to Binary and specify the value (library code) to be stored in hexadecimal since the library code is in hexadecimal.
Set the numeral table entry number to be referenced in the table entry number
field.
It is possible to display a numeral table entry so that you can select the desired
157
Section
Fixed Display
6-2
table entry number from it.
To display a numeral table entry, follow the procedure below.
(1) Click on
at the right side of the table entry number after checking the [In-
direct] button in the property setting dialog box to display the numeral table
selection dialog box.
(2) If the number of the desired numeral table entry is not found in the list, scroll
the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen, or click on
to open the entry input dialog box.
Input the number of the desired numeral table entry and click on
.
(3) Select the desired numeral table entry to be referenced.
The selected line will be highlighted.
(4) Click on
to close the dialog box.
For the procedure for creating library data, refer to 8-2 Library Editor.
158
Section
Alarm
6-3
6-3
Alarm
Alarms are elements that check the status of a bit memory table entry and
change the contents of the display according to the detected status. Alarm elements consist of alarm lists and alarm histories.
Alarm list:
When a bit memory table entry in the specified range goes ON, the alarm list
displays the corresponding message or image/library data.
Since the bit memory table entries to be checked are set for the individual
alarm lists, it is possible to check different ranges of bit memory table entries
with different alarm table entries.
Bit memory table entries in the specified range are checked only while an
alarm list is displayed, and the message and image/library data are displayed in accordance with the bit memory table entry that is ON.
Alarm history:
When a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history
property goes ON, the date/time and the number of going ON events are recorded and displayed by the alarm history. All bit memory table entries for
which a check mark is set for the history property are objects of alarm history
recording. Therefore, it is not possible to check different bit memory table
entries with different alarm histories.
The status of the bit memory table entries for which a check mark is set is
always checked while a PT is running, regardless of whether or not an alarm
history element is displayed.
Note that an alarm history element displays only the record of past events. It
displays only the contents of the record at the point when it was displayed
and the displayed record remains the same even if the status of the bit
memory table entry changes after that.
Alarm list and alarm history elements cannot be used with NT11S/NT11,
NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
6-3-1 Alarm List
If a bit memory table entry in the check objective range goes ON, the alarm list
element displays the contents (alarm message) of the character string memory
table entry (string table) that is allocated to the bit memory table entry. It is also
possible to display the corresponding image/library data.
Note
It is possible to switch the screen by operating the alarm list element by setting
the screen number to which the screen should be switched for the bit memory
table entry.
Bit memory table
Screen
Character string memory
table (String table)
WARNING HIGH TEMP.
No.1
Alarm
list
WARNING HIGH TEMP.
No.2
Image/library data
Press
message
159
Section
Alarm
6-3
(1) When the bit memory table entry number in the specified range goes ON, the
alarm list element reads out the alarm message from the character string
memory table entry (string table) and displays the message at the alarm list
area in the screen.
(2) If an operator touches the displayed alarm message, the specified image/library data will arrive.
Note
The alarm message and the image/library data to be displayed are specified according to the setting at the bit memory table entry.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Alarm] → [List]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Related elements and settings
[Tools] → [Table] → Bit Memory
(Refer to 7-4 Bit Memory Table.)
Bit memory table entry:
Terminology
Frame
Image/
library data
Display line
Foreground
Background
Length
Page scroll touch switch
Message
Background Line scroll touch switch
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the alarm list.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the alarm list.)
Size:
Indicates the size of the alarm list.
Message
Length:
Specify the number of characters of the message to be
displayed.
Max. 32 characters:
NT21
Max. 39 characters:
NT30, NT30C, NT31, and NT31C
Max. 40 characters:
NT631 and NT631C to which a system program version lower than Ver.2.1 is installed.
With these models above, the number of characters to be displayed will be less
160
Section
Alarm
6-3
than these values according to the display method and if the history information is displayed.
Max. 40 characters:
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631 (System Ver.2.1),
and NT631C (System Ver.2.1)
With these models above, up to 40 characters can be displayed regardless of
the display method etc.
Display Line Qty: Specify the number of messages to be displayed.
Max. 7 lines:
NT21
Max. 12 lines: NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C
Max. 16 lines: NT620S
Max. 24 lines: NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C
Scale:
Specify the character size of the message to be displayed.
1
1 (Equal), 1
2 (High), 2
1 (Wide), 2
2, 3 3, 4
8
8
Smoothing:
4,
Specify if smoothing processing is executed for the message to be
displayed.
Line Scroll Touch Switch:
Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages
line by line. Only for NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631,
and NT631C
Page Scroll Touch Switch: Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages
page by page. Only for NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, and NT631C
Color
Frame:
Specify the color used for the frame of an alarm list.
Background
ON:
Specify the background color of the selected message display
field.
OFF:
Specify the background color of the message display fields that
are not selected.
Image & Library
Display of Image Lib:
Specify if the image/library data is displayed.
Color
Specification of color is valid only when 2-color mode image data is displayed by a color type PT.
Foreground:
Specify the display color of image data.
Background:
Specify the background color of the image data display
area.
Reference: With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, a dialog box is displayed to
set if the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used.
With NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, whether or not the line scroll
touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used is determined in the alarm
list/history properties.
Settings
List Setting
161
Section
Alarm
6-3
Start Bit Table Entry:
Specify the start number of bit memory table entries
that are checked by the alarm list element.
No. of Bits Referenced:
Specify the number of bit memory table entries that
are checked by the alarm list element.
Guidance
Using a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch, you can scroll
messages in units of a line or a page within the alarm list display area.
With NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, to display a line scroll touch switch
and/or a page scroll touch switch, set a check mark in the line scroll touch
switch and/or a page scroll touch switch check box in the Property setting dialog box.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, a line scroll touch switch
and a page scroll touch switch are a part of an alarm list element. Therefore,
they cannot be modified as a touch switch. They can be moved only when the
alarm list is modified. For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the
line and page scroll touch switch can be moved by clicking the desired touch
switch while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key. ([Edit Object] from the
[Edit] menu (or pop-up menu) and Ins key can also be used for this operation.)
With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, however, a line scroll
touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are independent elements and
their position, size, and label can be changed as required. However, the touch
switch function and the lamp setting should not be changed, otherwise the
switch and the lamp will fail to function correctly on PT.
To display the image/library data, set a check mark in the check box of [Display
Image Lib] in the Property setting dialog box.
The procedure for editing the image/library data display area is shown below.
(1) Specify only the image/library data display area (dotted line frame) while
holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key. (automatically enters to Edit Object
mode)
Green marks (handles) are displayed surrounding the image/library data
display area.
There are other methods to enter Edit Object mode. For details, refer to
Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements on page 108.
(2) Specify the display size of the image/library data display area and move it as
desired.
If the size of the image/library data is smaller than the display area, the image/
library data is displayed taking the lower left corner of the display area as the
reference.
Image/library data display area
Image/library data
Reference: With NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C, if image/library data is larger than the
image/library data display area, the area exceeding the display area will not be
162
Section
Alarm
6-3
displayed on PT while the whole data is displayed on the Support Tool. Be sure to
set image/library data display area so that image/library data fits inside it.
For an alarm list element, the property settings, bit memory table, and character string memory table (string table) are related to each other as shown below.
Alarm list
Displayed
at ON
Character string memory
table entry (String table):10
ABC
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Bit memory table
Image/library data
PC (PLC) address
:FE20
:0001000
10
ABC
11
DEF
12
GHI
13
JKL
Image data
FE20
Specified PC
(PLC) bit
Number of bits; Set for No. of Bits
Referenced
Table Entry No.: Set for Start Bit
Table Entry
An alarm list element is used in combination with bit memory table entries. How
they function is shown below:
Setting at bit memory table
Setting at Set dialog box
PLC Address
Setting at Function dialog box
History
Screen No.
Switch Screen
Screen No.
String Table Entry
Image/Library Code
Use of image/library data
Image/library code
Color
Property settings for alarm list element
Start Bit Table Entry
No. of Bits Referenced
The setting for the [Switch Screen] bit memory table setting differs between the
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, and the NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, and NT631C as shown below.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C:
Specifies whether or not the screen is switched at the same time the PC
(PLC) bit allocated to bit memory table entry goes ON.
163
Section
Alarm
6-3
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
Specifies whether or not the screen is switched when the message displayed at the alarm list is pressed.
The following table shows the appropriate setting of the bit memory table for the
required alarm processing, for your reference.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C:
Setting for Bit Memory Table
Usage of Alarm
Function Setting
Switch Screen
Screen No.
To display alarm only
Alarm/Switch
Screen
OFF
0
To display alarm and
switch to a specified
screen in response to
the pressing of alarm
message
Alarm/Switch
Screen
OFF
As desired
To switch to a specified screen at the
same time the bit
goes ON
Alarm/Switch
Screen
ON
As desired
To switch to the previous screen at the
same time the bit
goes ON (Switch to
the previous screen
based on the record
of screen history)
Alarm/Switch
Screen
ON
0
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
Setting for Bit Memory Table
Usage of Alarm
Function Setting
Switch Screen
Screen No.
No function (For registering only allocated
bits and securing
them)
None
–
–
To display alarm only
Alarm
OFF
–
To display alarm and
switch to a specified
screen in response to
the pressing of alarm
message
Alarm
ON
As desired
To switch to a specified screen at the
same time the bit
goes ON
Switch screen
–
As desired
WARNING
When converting the bit memory table from the NT30,
NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C to the NT21, NT31,
NT31C, NT631, NT631C, the function setting is not the
same with before converting. To adjust the setting of this
bit memory table, please refer to Data Conversion (Bit
memory conversion) in Appendix A.
164
Section
Alarm
6-3
The [Settings] of an alarm list element are used to specify the range of bit
memory table entries that are subject to the check.
The check objective range is determined by setting the start bit memory table
entry number and the number of bit memory table entries. The maximum allowable number of bit memory table entries varies according to the PT model and
the setting of the number of bit memory table entries. The range of bit memory
table entry numbers is displayed in parentheses in the dialog box: Set the start
memory table entry number and the number of memory table entries so that
the displayed range is not exceeded.
While an alarm list element is displayed, the status of the bit memory table
entries in the specified range is always checked and the element displays the
message or image/library data that is set for the bit memory table entry when a
bit memory table entry is turned ON.
Allocation of a PC (PLC) bit to a bit memory table entry is specified at
the bit memory table. (Specified character string memory table entry
(string table) and image/library data code are also specified at the bit
memory table.)
Bit memory table
PC (PLC)
No.0
1
2
3
Alarm
range
128
129
The alarm range, i.e., the start address (No.) in the bit memory
table entry and the size, is specified by the alarm list element.
6-3-2 Alarm History
If a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history property
goes ON, the date/time and the number of going ON events are recorded in an
alarm history. An alarm history element displays the recorded bit table entry numbers in the order of occurrence or frequency when the element is displayed.
An alarm history element can also display the contents (alarm message) of the
character string memory table entry (string table) and the image/library data that
are allocated to the bit memory table entry.
Bit memory table
Screen
Character string memory
table (string table)
WARNING HIGH TEMP. 98/04/10 16:02
No.1
Alarm
history
WARNING HIGH TEMP.
No.2
Image/library data
Alarm history record data
WARNING HIGH TEMP.
98/04/10 16:02
WARNING HIGH PRESS. 98/05/12 18:25
(1) When a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history
property goes ON, the alarm history element reads out the alarm message
from the character string memory table entry (string table) and records the
165
Section
Alarm
6-3
message with the date/time of the occurrence. The recorded information is
displayed when the alarm history element is displayed.
(2) If the operator touches the displayed alarm message, the specified image/library data is displayed.
Note
The bit memory table entries to be checked are determined according to the settings made at the individual bit memory table entries.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Alarm] → [History]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Related elements and settings
[Tools] → [Table] → Bit Memory
(Refer to 7-4 Bit Memory Table.)
Bit memory table:
Terminology
Frame
Message
Background
Image/
library data
Display line
Foreground
Page scroll touch switch
Length
Background
Line scroll touch switch
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the alarm history.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the alarm history)
Size:
Indicates the size of the alarm history.
Message
Length:
Specify the number of characters of a message to be displayed.
Max. 32 characters:
NT21
Max. 39 characters:
NT30, NT30C, NT31, and NT31C
Max. 40 characters:
NT631 and NT631C to which a system program version lower than Ver.2.1 is installed
With these models above, the number of characters to be displayed will be less
than these values according to the display method and if the history information is displayed.
Max. 40 characters:
166
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631 (System Ver.2.1),
and NT631C (System Ver.2.1)
Section
Alarm
6-3
With these models above, up to 40 characters can be displayed regardless of
the display method etc.
Display Line Qty:
Specify the number of messages to be displayed.
Max. 7 lines:
NT21
Max. 12 lines:
NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C
Max. 16 lines:
NT620S
Max. 24 lines:
NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C
Scale:
Specify the character size of the message to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
Smoothing: Specify if smoothing processing is executed for the message to
be displayed.
Line Scroll Touch Switch:
Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages
line by line. Only for NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C
Page Scroll Touch Switch: Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages
page by page. Only for NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C
Color
Frame:
Specify the color used for the frame of an alarm list.
Background
ON:
OFF:
Specify the background color of the selected message display field.
Specify the background color of the message display fields
that are not selected.
Image & Library
Display of Image Lib:
Specify if the image/library data is displayed.
Color
Specification of color is valid only when the image data of 2-color mode is displayed by a color type PT.
Foreground:
Specify the display color of image data.
Background:
Specify the background color of the image data display
area.
Reference: With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, a dialog box is displayed to
set if line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used.
With NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, whether or not the line scroll touch
switch and page scroll touch switch are used is determined by the setting for the
use of control touch switches in the alarm list/history properties.
Settings
History Info:
Specify whether or not an alarm message is displayed with date/time of occurrence or frequency of occurrence. If a check mark is set for this item, the date/
time of alarm occurrence is displayed with an alarm message for display in
order of occurrence, or the frequency of occurrence is displayed with an alarm
167
Section
Alarm
6-3
message for display in the frequency of occurrence. The display format of the
date/time of occurrence is set for [Info Type]. If the date/time or frequency of
occurrence is displayed, the number of alarm message display characters is
reduced accordingly.
Order Type
Order of Frequency:
Alarm messages are displayed in the order of occurrence frequency.
Order of Occurrence:
Alarm messages are displayed in the order of occurrence (from the oldest record or from the newest record). The order in which the alarm messages are
displayed depends on the system memory setting.
Info Type:
If the setting is so made to display the date/time of alarm occurrence, the display format of the date/time is specified for this item. The setting for this item is
invalid if the date/time is not displayed with an alarm message.
Y/M/D h:m (14 digits)
M/D h:m (11 digits)
h:m (5 digits)
Guidance
Using a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch, you can scroll
messages in units of a line or a page within the alarm list display area.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, to display a line scroll
touch switch and/or a page scroll touch switch, set a check mark in the check
box for the line scroll touch switch and/or a page scroll touch switch in the Property setting dialog box.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, a line scroll touch switch
and a page scroll touch switch are a part of an alarm list element. Therefore,
they cannot be modified as a touch switch. They can be moved only when the
alarm list is modified. To move a line scroll touch switch or a page scroll touch
switch, click the desired touch switch while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl
key. ([Edit Object] from the [Edit] menu (or pop-up menu) and Ins key can also
be used for this operation.)
With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, however, a line scroll
touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are independent elements and
their position, size, and label can be changed as required. However, the touch
switch function and the lamp setting should not be changed, otherwise the
switch and the lamp will fail to function correctly.
To display the image/library data, set a check mark in the check box of [Display
Image Lib] in the Property setting dialog box.
The procedure for editing the image/library data display area is shown below.
(1) Specify only the image/library data display area (dotted line frame) while
holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key. (automatically enters to Edit Object
mode)
Green marks (handles) are displayed surrounding the image/library data
display area.
(2) Specify the display size of the image/library data display area and move it as
desired.
168
Section
Alarm
6-3
If the size of the image/library data is smaller than the display area, the image/
library data is displayed taking the lower left corner of the display area as the
reference.
Image/library data display area
Image/library data
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, if image/library data is larger than the image/library data display area, the area exceeding the display area
will not be displayed on PT while the whole data is displayed on the Support Tool.
Be sure to set image/library data display area so that image/library data fits inside
it.
For an alarm history element, the property settings, bit memory table entry, and
character string memory table entry (string table) are related to each other as
shown below.
History data
H0001512 97/02/12 10:51
Displayed
at ON
Alarm list
ABC
02/12
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Bit memory table
Character string memory
table entry (String table)
:10
10
ABC
Image/library data
:FE20
11
DEF
PC (PLC) address
:H0001512
12
GHI
13
JKL
Image data
FE20
Specified PC
(PLC) bit
Number of bits; Set for No. of Bits
Referenced
table entry No.: Set for Start Bit
Table Entry
An alarm history element is used in combination with the bit memory table
entry. How they function is shown below:
Setting at bit memory table entry
Setting at Set dialog box
PLC Address
Setting at Function dialog box
History
Screen No.
Switch Screen
Screen No.
169
Section
Alarm
6-3
String Table Entry
Image/Library Code
Use of image/library data
Image/library code
Color
Property settings for alarm history element
History Info
Order Type
Order of Frequency
Order of Occurrence
All bit memory table entries for which a check mark is set for the alarm history
property are subject to alarm history recording.
170
Section
Data Input
6-4
6-4
Data Input
For inputting numerals and character strings in a PT, the following three data input elements are provided.
Numeral input:
A numeric value is input into a numeral setting input field using touch switches
to which numerals are allocated and the input from an extended I/O connected
to a PT.
Character string input:
A character string is input to a character string input field using touch switches
to which characters are allocated and a bar code reader connected to a PT.
Thumbwheel switch:
Touch switches that increase or decrease a numeral are provided at each digit
of an input field; a numeric value can be input by simply pressing the + and –
touch switches.
String input is not possible for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
6-4-1 Numeral Input
You can write numeric data to a numeral memory table entry using touch
switches and extended inputs.
Touch switches must be allocated numerals or the copy function beforehand.
For extended inputs, numerals must be allocated beforehand.
Input using touch switches (control code input function)
PT
Screen
Input field
50
Numeral
memory table
No.1
key
No.2
No.3
50 No.4
Writing
No.5
Numeric keys
System keypad
(1) Create numeric keys using the touch switch control code input function, or
create a system keypad using the screen property.
(With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, system keypad is not
available.)
(2) Set a numeric value in the numeral setting input field using the numeric keys
on the screen.
(3) Press the touch switch to which the
key code is allocated to write the data
set at the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry.
171
Section
Data Input
6-4
Input using touch switches (copy function + control code input function)
PT
Screen
Input field
50
Set
Numeral
memory table
No.1
key
50 No.2
No.3
Set
50 No.4
Copying the
No.5
set data
(1) Copy the preset data (numeral memory table entry or constant) to the input
field using the copy function allocated to a touch switch.
key code is allocated (by the control
(2) Press the touch switch to which the
code input function) to write the data that was copied (set) to the input field to
the specified numeral memory table entry.
Reference: To copy (in the numeral table) and display a numeral by a single key operation,
without using the
key code, use a touch switch (copy function) and a numeral
display element.
PT
Numeral
memory table
Screen
Display field
50
50
Part type A
50
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Input using extended input (control code input function)
PT
Numeral
memory table
Screen
Input field
50
Extended
input
key
50
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
External
numeric keys
(1) By turning ON an external switch that is connected to an external input, the
numeral or the control code set for the extended input function can be input
to the numeral setting input field.
(2) Press the touch switch to which the
key code is allocated to write the data
set at the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry.
(For the setting of an extended input, refer to 7-5 Extended I/O Input Table.)
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Related elements and settings
Touch switch (control code input):
172
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] →
Control code input function
Section
Data Input
6-4
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] →
Copy setting
Extended I/O input table (control code input):
[Tools] → [Table] → Control code function
Touch switch (copy setting):
Terminology
Cursor (focus) moving touch switch
Foreground
Background
Focus (cursor) frame
Sign digit
Integer
Decimal
Input digits of maximum limit
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the numeral setting input field.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the input field.)
Font type:
Specify the font for the numerals to be input.
Standard, Half Height, Double Width
(Only Standard can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Size:
Specify the size of numerals to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4,
8 8 (Not supported for NT20, NT20S) (Only 1 1 (Equal) and
2 1 (Wide) can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Smoothing:
Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for
numerals.
(Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and
NT600S.)
Attribute:
Specify the display attributes (attributes to be displayed depend
on PT models.)
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the numeral color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background:
Specify the color of the background in the numeral display
area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
Table Entry: Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table
where input data is stored.
173
Section
Data Input
6-4
Display Type (Only Decimal can be set for NT11S/NT11.)*1
Decimal:
Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal.
Hexadecimal:
Specify this item to display the input numeric value in hexadecimal.
Format*2
Integer:
Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input
data.
Decimal:
Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the
input data.
Limit (Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11.)*1
Maximum:
Specify the upper limit of the input data.*3
Minimum:
Specify the lower limit of the input data.*3
Zero Suppression:*1 Specify whether or not leading zeros are suppressed to
display the input data.
Display Sign:*1
Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value.
Focus Frame:
Specify whether or not the frame that indicates the data input objective is displayed. (Setting is not possible for
NT11S/NT11, NT20S and NT600S.)
Focus Attribute:
Specify how the input data is displayed before it is confirmed. Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
*1: Setting is not possible when a numeral input is used as a temporary input
field for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
*2: When a numeral input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21, NT31,
NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, only No. of digits (sign digit + integer digit +
decimal point + decimal digit) can be specified, since the digits such as decimal digits are determined by the numeral input field on a base screen.
*3: An input method for a negative value in decimal differs between the following
types of PT.
With NT20, NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, and
NT625C:
Input F to indicate a negative value in the most significant digit.
(e.g., F0000008)
With NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
Input – (negative sign) in the most significant digit.
(e.g., –8)
When setting values with decimal fractions, such as 0.1234, 1.234, or 123.4 for
upper limits or lower limits, input only the 4-digit integer.
Interlock
Refer to 6-1-12 Interlock.
Guidance
When a numeral input element is specified, a dialog box is displayed to set
whether the cursor moving touch switch is automatically created or not.
174
Section
Data Input
Note
6-4
It is possible to create a touch switch to which a cursor moving key is allocated
later.
Create Cursor Move Touch Switch
Specify whether or not a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created.
Settings may not be possible for some PT models.
Each time a numeral input or thumbwheel object is newly created, a numeral
table entry number (where input data is stored) is automatically set as 0→1→2...
incrementally (table entry number after the last set one will be the next default
number). A numeral table entry number can be changed by displaying the property setting dialog box. (It is also possible to change it later.)
A numeral input element itself creates a numeral setting input field. It is always
used with a control code inputting touch switch (control code input function) or
a system keypad. Data is input to a numeral setting input field using the control
code input touch switches and the system keypad that are displayed with the
numeral setting input field.
This data input field is created by a numeral
input element.
00000.00
1
2
After creating touch switches (control code
input) or a system keypad on the same
screen (includes a keyboard window),
pressing the key allocated the control
code [1] enters [1] in the numeral setting
input field. If key [2] is then pressed, the
input field shows 12.
Press the
key to store the data input
into the input field in the numeral memory
table.
The input field and the control code input touch
switch are automatically correlated. Carry over
is processed automatically.
Control code inputting Numeral setting
touch switch
input field
Touch
1
1
Touch
2
12
Touch
12
→ This is stored
in the memory
table.
The procedure for creating a control code input touch switch is shown below.
(1) Set the control code input function for a touch switch.
(2) Select the code from the control code list.
175
Section
Data Input
6-4
The control code input function allows an arbitrary name for a label of a touch
switch. Click the
Button in the
Tab to display the label input
dialog box. Input a label.
Confirmation
A system keypad is created in the manner shown below.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, a system keypad cannot
be created.
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar), then select [Properties].
This operation is also possible by selecting [Properties] after displaying the
pop-up edit menu, which is displayed by right clicking the mouse or by
double clicking the mouse with the mouse cursor placed at a position other
than an element.
(2) Set a check mark for the system keypad in the screen properties.
Numeral input element
System keypad
Note: A system keypad is automatically
displayed when a numeral setting
element or a character string setting
element is created in the same
screen.
The allowable maximum number of input digits is determined by the setting for
the [Format] and [Display Sign] properties.
Even if multiple input fields are arranged in a screen, input is possible only for
one numeral setting input field. Therefore, it is necessary to create a touch
switch (cursor moving touch switch, or arrow symbol touch switches) that can
be used to select the desired numeral setting input field. If the Create Cursor
Move Touch Switch check box is ON when creating the input element, a cursor
moving touch switch is automatically created overlapping a numeral setting input field. By simply pressing this input field, the cursor is moved.
Data input field
No.1
Cursor moving
touch switch
Numeric keys
No.2
No.3
176
Section
Data Input
6-4
If a touch switch on input field No. 2 is pressed, the No. 2 input field becomes
the objective field for data input. The data input using the numeric keys is
stored in input field No. 2.
A cursor moving touch switch is created using the dialog box that is displayed
when creating a numeral input element. The properties for the cursor moving
touch switch can be set in the same manner as for a standard touch switch.
How the properties for a touch switch are set is shown below.
For details of [Settings], refer to 6-8 Touch Switches.
If a check mark is set for [Use Window/Keyboard Screen] in the cursor moving
touch switch setting properties, it is possible to display the specified window/
keyboard at the same time the cursor is moved.
This feature allows appropriate numeric keys for the input field to be displayed.
It is possible to create a temporary input field in addition to numeric keys.
(With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and
above, all objects other than thumbwheel switch and recipe objects can be
created on window.)
Window/Keyboard
Displayed when the
input field is touched.
177
Section
Data Input
6-4
It is possible to create a temporary input field at the same time as numeric keys
are arranged in the window/keyboard.
A temporary input field is created using a numeral input element.
When a numeral input element is arranged in the window/keyboard, the element is automatically set as a temporary input field.
Only one numeral input element (temporary input field) can be created for one
window/keyboard.
Setting processing differs as shown below depending on whether or not a temporary input field is used.
When a temporary input field is used
(2) Storing by pressing
Numeral memory table
key
(1)
Temporary input field
(1) The data that is input using numeric keys is displayed in the temporary input
field.
key, and the data in the temporary input field is set in the numer(2) Input the
al setting input field and stored in the numeral memory table at the same
time.
When a temporary input field is not used
(2) Storing by pressing
Numeral memory table
key
(1)
(1) The data input using numeric keys is directly set in the numeral setting input
field.
(2) Press the
key, and the set data is stored in the numeral memory table.
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the settings, such as the
Display Sign cannot be set at setting property of temporary input field (These settings are determined by the numeral input field on a base screen). When a numeral input field is used as a temporary input field for the NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, and NT631C, specify the required No. of digits (sign digit + integer digit +
decimal point + decimal digit).
CAUTION
When the numeral values entered are confirmed, upper/lower limits
are checked. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
178
Section
Data Input
Note
6-4
1. The data set in the input field is not stored in the numeral memory table until
the
key (button where the Return key code is set) or the ENT key is
pressed.
At the end of data input, always press the
key or the ENT key.
2. To correct the data set in the input field, use the CLR key, the BS key, and the
DEL key.
3. When a numeral setting input field is moved, the touch switch is also moved
automatically. To modify or move a numeral setting input field and a touch
switch independently, cancel the check mark set for [Auto Arrange] in the
[Settings] page of the touch switch properties.
4. The cursor can also be moved using an arrow symbol key touch switch. The
cursor moves in the order the numeral input elements were created; this order can be changed after creating the elements.
5. With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, when hexadecimal value is input, it is regarded as signed binary data and upper/lower limit check is
performed. Therefore, if the top bit is 1, it is regarded as negative value and
input will be prohibited when the minimum limit was set as 0. In this case, set
those value such as $80000000 (–2147483648) for minimum limit setting to
prevent it from being checked.
Reference: At the numeral setting input field, the written numeric value in the numeral
memory table is displayed when the
key is pressed. Since this is different from
the one read from the numeral memory table entry, it is necessary to use another
numeral input element to read out the data from the same address of the numeral
memory table entry.
Numeral input element
Screen
Set numeral
Numeral memory table
No.1
No.2
Set numeral
Numeral setting input field
Numeric keys
Pop-up window/keyboard
6-4-2 Character String Input
You can write character string data to a character string memory table entry
(string table) using touch switches and a bar code reader.
Touch switches must be allocated character strings or a key code (control code
input and character string input function), or the copy function beforehand.
179
Section
Data Input
6-4
Input using touch switches (character string input function + control code input function)
PT
Character string memory
table (String table)
Screen
Input field
ABC
key
ABC
Writing
ABC DEF GHI
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Touch switches
(1) Set the character strings to be input using the character string input function
to touch switches.
(2) Press a touch switch to set the label that is set for the touch switch into the
character string input field.
(3) Press the touch switch for which the
key code is allocated (by the control
code input function) to write the character string set at the input field to the
specified character string memory table entry (string table).
Input using touch switches (copy function + control code input function)
PT
Character string memory
table (String table)
Screen
Input field
ABC
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
key
ABC
SET
ABC
Copying the
set data
ABC
(1) Copy the preset data (character string memory table entry (string table)) to
the input field using the copy function allocated to a touch switch.
(2) Press the touch switch for which the
key code is allocated (by the control
code input function) to write the data that was copied (set) into the input field
to the specified character string memory table entry (string table).
Reference: To copy (in the character string memory table entry (string table)) and display a
character string by a single key operation, without using the
key code, use a
touch switch (copy function) and a character string display element.
PT
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Screen
Display field
Part type A
Part type A
180
Part type A
Part type A
Copy
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Section
Data Input
6-4
Input using a bar code reader
PT
Screen
Input field
ABC
Character string
memory table
(String table)
No.1
ABC No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Bar code reader
(1) By reading out a bar code using a bar code reader, the bar code data can be
input to the character string setting input field. If “automatic confirm” is set for
bar code reading operation by the memory switch of a PT, the read-out character string is automatically written to a character string memory table entry
(string table).
(2) If the setting for bar code reading operation is “manual confirm,” the data set
in the input field is written to the specified character string memory table
entry (string table) when the touch switch allocated the
key code is
pressed.
(For details of memory switch setting, refer to the operation manual for PT.)
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Data Input] → [String]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Related elements and settings
Touch switch (character string input):
Touch switch (control code input):
Touch switch (copy setting):
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] →
character string input function
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] →
Control code input function
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] →
Copy setting
Terminology
Foreground
Cursor (focus) moving touch switch
Background
Focus (cursor) frame
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the numeral setting input field.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the input field.)
Font type:
Specify the font of the character string to be input.
Standard, Half Height
181
Section
Data Input
6-4
Size:
Specify the size of character string to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
Smoothing:
Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for character strings.
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute (attributes displayed depend on the
PT model.)
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground:
Specify the character string color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background:
Specify the color of the background in the character string
display area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
Table Entry:*1
Specify the table entry number of the character string memory
table entry (string table) where input data is to be stored.
Length:
Specify the number of characters to be input.
Focus Frame:
Specify whether or not the frame which indicates the data input
objective is displayed.
Focus Attribute: Specify how the input data is displayed before it is confirmed.
Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
*1: Setting is not possible when a string input is used as a temporary input field
for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
Interlock
Refer to 6-1-12 Interlock.
Guidance
When a character string input element is specified, the dialog box is displayed
to set whether the cursor moving touch switch is automatically created or not.
Note
It is possible to create a touch switch to which a cursor moving key is allocated
later.
Create Cursor Move Touch Switch
Specify whether or not a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created.
Each time a string input object is newly created, a string table entry number
(where input data is stored) is automatically set as 0→1→2... incrementally
(table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number). A
182
Section
Data Input
6-4
string table entry number can be changed by displaying the property setting
dialog box. (It is also possible to change it later.)
A character string input element itself creates a character string setting input
field. It is always used with a control code inputting touch switch (control code
input function) or a system keypad. Data is input to a character string setting
input field using the control code input touch switches and the system keypad,
which are displayed with the character string setting input field.
This data input field is created by a character
string input element.
The input field and the control code input touch
switch are automatically correlated. Insertion of a
character string is automatically processed.
B
A
After creating touch switches (character
string input and control code input) or a
system keypad on the same screen (includes a pop-up window), pressing the key
allocated label [A] enters [A] in the character string setting input field. If the touch key
allocated [B] is then pressed, the input field
shows AB.
Press the
key to store the data input to
the input field in the character string
memory table (string table).
Control code
inputting touch
switch
Character string
setting input field
Touch
A
A
Touch
B
AB
Touch
AB → This is stored
in the character string
memory table
(string table).
The procedure for creating a character string input touch switch is shown below.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C and NT625C
(1) Set the character string input function for the touch switch function.
(2) Set a check mark for the [Label] property in the Label tab.
(3) Click the
Button and input the character string as a label.
A label may be either a character or a character string consisting of multiple
characters. When a touch switch is pressed, the character string set as the
label is set to the character string input field.
When a lamp bit with an I/O comment is set, pressing the Copy I/O Comments button copies the I/O comment as a label.
Example
Property setting for input key-string touch switch
NT31C
Dialog box for
inputting a label
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C
(1) Set the character string input function for the touch switch function.
183
Section
Data Input
6-4
(2) Specify a string to be input for the Input Key String in the Settings tab.
The string can be either a character or a character string consisting of multiple characters. When a touch switch is pressed, the character string set as
the Input Key String is set to the character string input field.
When a label is set, pressing the Copy From Label button copies the label as an
Input Key String. When the label type is “On Off Static,” the Off label will be used.
When multiple lines of label have been set, only the first line will be used. If more
than 40 characters are set for a label, only the first 40 characters will be set.
The number of characters that can be set for a character string input touch
switch and the number of characters that are actually written to a character
string input field differ depending on the PT model, as shown below.
Number of Characters
(Label)
Number of Characters
(Written to Input Field)
NT30, NT30C
Max. 40 characters
Max. 40 characters
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
Max. 80 characters
Max. 40 characters
PT Model
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, a maximum of 40 characters
can be used for string input function regardless of the PT model.
The procedure for creating a control code input touch switch is shown below.
(1) Set the control code input function for a touch switch.
(2) Select the code from the control code list.
(3) The control code input function allows an arbitrary name for a label of a touch
switch. Click the
Button in the
Tab to display the label input
dialog box. Input a label.
Confirmation
The number of characters that can be input depends on the setting for the
[Length] property.
Even if multiple input fields are arranged in a screen, input is possible only for
one character string input field. Therefore, it is necessary to create a touch
switch (cursor moving touch switch, or arrow symbol touch switches) that is
used to select the desired character string input field. If the [Focus Frame]
184
Section
Data Input
6-4
property is selected, a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created
overlapping a character string input field. The cursor moves when the input
field is pressed.
No.1
Data input field
Cursor moving
touch switch
No.2
ABC
ABC
No.3
If the touch switch on input field No. 2 is pressed, the No. 2 input field becomes
the objective field for data input. The input character string is stored in input
field No. 2.
A cursor moving touch switch is created using the dialog box that is displayed
when creating a character string input element. The properties for the cursor
moving touch switch can be set in the same manner as for a standard touch
switch.
How the properties for a touch switch are set is shown below.
For details of [Settings], refer to 6-8 Touch Switches.
If a check mark is set for [Use Window/Keyboard Screen] in the cursor moving
touch switch setting properties, it is possible to display the specified window/
keyboard at the same time as the cursor is moved.
185
Section
Data Input
6-4
This feature allows appropriate numeric keys for the input field to be displayed.
It is possible to create a temporary input field in addition to numeric keys.
(With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and
above, all objects other than thumbwheel switch and recipe objects can be
created on a window.)
Window/Keyboard
Displayed when the
input field is touched.
It is possible to create a temporary input field at the same time as numeric keys
are arranged in the window/keyboard.
A temporary input field is created using a character string input element.
When a character string input element is arranged in the window/keyboard, the
element is automatically set as a temporary input field.
Only one string input element (temporary input field) can be created for one
window/keyboard
Setting processing differs as shown below depending on whether or not a temporary input field is used.
When a temporary input field is used
(2) Storing by pressing
key
Character string memory
table (String table)
ABCDEF
ABCDEF
ABCDEF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
(1)
Temporary input field
(1) The input character string is displayed in the temporary input field.
(2) Press the
key, and the character string in the temporary input field is set in
the character string input field and stored in the character string memory
table (string table) at the same time.
When a temporary input field is not used
(2) Storing by pressing
key
Character string memory
table (String table)
ABCDEF
(1)
ABCDEF
186
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Section
Data Input
6-4
(1) The input character string is directly set in the character string input field.
(2) Press the
key, and the set data is stored in the character string memory
table (string table).
Reference: When there are no string to show, string input will be invisible.
Therefore, with Support Tool, dotted-line frame is displayed in character foreground color enclosing string input.
(This frame will not be displayed on PT)
This frame can not be set to off. However, the dotted-line frame can be set to ON
and OFF when printing screen image (refer to page 425).
Note
1. The data set in the input field is not stored in the character string memory
table (string table) until the
key (button where the Return key code is set)
or the ENT key is input if “manual confirm” is set for the bar code read operation (set using the PT memory switches).
If “manual confirm” is set, always input the
key or the ENT key at the end of
data input.
2. To correct the data set in the input field, use the CLR key, the BS key, and the
DEL key.
3. When a character string input field is moved, the touch switch is also moved
automatically. To modify or move a character string input field and a touch
switch independently, cancel the check mark set for [Auto Arrange] in the
[Settings] page of a touch switch property.
4. The cursor can also be moved using an arrow symbol key touch switch. The
cursor moves in the order the character string input elements were created;
this order can be changed after creating the elements.
6-4-3 Thumbwheel Switch
Thumbwheel switches are provided as means to input numeric data. “+” and “–”
keys are provided at each input digit to allow you to input numeric data at individual digits. (Thumbwheel switch cannot be used with NT11S/NT11.)
Numeral
memory table
1234
(1) Touch the + or – key at each digit of thumbwheel switches to set numeric
data.
(2) The numeric data set using the thumbwheel switch is written to a numeral
memory table entry.
187
Section
Data Input
Note
6-4
If thumbwheel switches are used to input numeric data, the input data is directly
written to a numeral memory table entry without being set in a data input field.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Data Input] →
[Thumbwheel Switch]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Frame: Foreground
Character Color: Foreground
Frame: Background
Character Color: Background
End plate
Sign digit
Integer
Decimal
Input digits of maximum limit
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the thumbwheel switch.
(The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the thumbwheel
switch.)
Size:
Specify the size of the thumbwheel switch.
Small, Medium, Large
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute (attributes displayed depend on the
PT model.) Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
End Plate:
Specify whether or not end plates are displayed at the ends of the
thumbwheel switch.
Thumbwheel Color
Frame:
Specify the color of thumbwheel switch frame.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Foreground:
Specify the foreground color of the thumbwheel switch.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background:
Specify the background color of the thumbwheel switch.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Character Color
Foreground:
188
Specify the foreground color of the numeric value displayed in
the thumbwheel switch.
Section
Data Input
6-4
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background:
Specify the background color of the numeric value displayed
in the thumbwheel switch.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
Table Entry: Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table entry
where input data is stored.
Display Type
Decimal:
Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal.
Hexadecimal:
Specify this item to display the input numeric value in hexadecimal.
Format
Integer:
Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input
data.
Decimal:
Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the
input data.
Limit
Maximum:
Specify the upper limit of the input data.*1
Minimum:
Specify the lower limit of the input data.*1
Display Sign: Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value.
*1: An input method for a negative value in decimal differs between the following
types of PT.
With NT20, NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, and
NT625C:
Input F to indicate a negative value in the most significant digit.
(e.g., F0000008)
With NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
Input “–” (negative sign) in the most significant digit.
(e.g., –8)
Interlock
Refer to 6-1-12 Interlock.
Guidance
Each time a numeral input or thumbwheel object is newly created, a numeral
table entry number (where input data is stored) is automatically set as 0→1→2...
incrementally (table entry number after the last set one will be the next default
number). A numeral table entry number can be changed by displaying the property setting dialog box. (It is also possible to change it later.)
189
Section
Data Input
6-4
The size of a thumbwheel switch can be selected from the following three
sizes.
Small
Medium
Large
End plates can be displayed at both ends of a thumbwheel switch.
With end plates
Without end plate
With a thumbwheel switch, the data input method can be selected as decimal
or hexadecimal.
Decimal selection:
Numbers in the range of 0 to 9 can be set at each
digit.
Hexadecimal selection:
Numbers in the range of 0 to 9 and A to F can be set
at each digit.
For [Decimal] property, specify the position of a decimal point in the numeral to
be displayed. Numeric data is written to a numeral memory table entry without
a decimal point and input data is stored as an integer.
Numeral 2341 is written to a
numeral memory table
entry.
In the sign digit, “ ” or “–” is displayed. To set a positive value, specify a blank
(“ ”). For a negative value, specify “–.”
CAUTION
When the numeral values entered are confirmed, upper/lower limits
are checked. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
Note
1. If you use a thumbwheel switch to input numeric data, the set data is written
to a numeral memory table entry at each pressing of the + or – key.
This means that the values during data setting are also written to the memory
table.
2. With a thumbwheel type numeric setting input field, if n...n t m...m [upper
limit: 1n...n, lower limit: 0m...m (n and m are arbitrary values at each digit)],
carry over and shift to the lower digit are not possible at the highest digit position.
190
Section
Data Input
6-4
Example:
When 1200 is set for the Maximum and 201 is set for the Minimum, if the initial
value is a 3-digit value, the setting value can be changed only in the range of 201
to 999, and if the initial value is a 4-digit value, the setting value can be changed
only in the range of 1000 to 1200.
This is because the limit check function detects an error if the most significant
digit value is changed from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
To avoid this problem, set the maximum and minimum limits so that n...n y m...m
or provide a touch switch separately to write a value at carry over or shift to the
lower digit.
3. With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, when hexadecimal value is input, it is regarded as signed binary data and upper/lower limit check is
performed. Therefore, if the top bit is 1, it is regarded as negative value and
input will be prohibited when the minimum limit was set as 0. In this case, set
those value such as $80000000 (–2147483648) for minimum limit setting to
prevent it from being checked.
191
Section
Lamps
6-5
6-5
Lamps
The status of a lamp changes according to the status of a PC (PLC) bit.
Two types of lamp element are provided – standard lamps that change their display status (ON/flash/inverse flash) and image/library lamps that show different
image/library data in the lamp ON and OFF states.
Image/library lamps cannot be used with NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and
NT600S.
6-5-1 Standard Lamps
A lamp (OFF/ON/flash) is displayed in accordance with the status of a PC (PLC)
bit.
Bit status
PC (PLC)
(1) The status of a lamp is changed according to the allocated PC (PLC) bit.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Lamp] → [Standard]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Label
Frame
ON color/
OFF color
Property setting
General
192
Position:
Indicates the display position of a standard lamp.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the standard
lamp)
Size:
Indicates the size of a standard lamp.
Frame:
Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a standard lamp.
Shape:
Displays shapes of a standard lamp.
(Selectable shapes vary according to the PT model)
Rectangle, Circle, Polygon, Sector
Section
Lamps
6-5
Color
Frame:
Specify the color of a lamp frame if [Frame] is selected.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
ON:
Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC (PLC) bit is ON.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
OFF:
Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC (PLC) bit is OFF.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Light Functions
Address
PC (PLC) Bit Address: Specify the bit at the PC (PLC) that drives a standard lamp ON/OFF.
I/O Comment:
Specify the comment of the PC (PLC) bit that drives a standard lamp ON/OFF.
Lamp Attribute
ON Type:
:
:
Specify the status of a standard lamp that is ON.
Light, Flash
Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number.
Displays an I/O comment table entry.
Label
Label:
Specify whether or not a label is appended to a standard lamp.
Label Type:
Specify the type of the Label when [Label] is selected. Following
selections will be available for the NT21 and NT31/631-V2/V3
models: Static, Static On Off, Numeral Display and String Display. For the other PT models, this option is disabled and is set to
Static (default).
:
Displays the dialog box used to edit a label. This button is enabled only when [Label] is selected.
: Copies the I/O comment set to the lamp bit as a label.
To display a label, set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute in [label] page and select an option of the available options from the Label Type combo box.
For the non-NT21 and NT31/631 V2 models this combo box will have only one
choice (‘Static’) and this will remain disabled.
Static: For this option the On label and the Off label will be same.
On Off Static: For this option On/Off labels may be different.
193
Section
Lamps
6-5
Numeral Display: Displays the numeral value by referencing the specified table
entry. Indirect reference is also possible.
String Display: Displays the character string by referencing the specified table
entry. Indirect reference is also possible.
To display the settings for a label click the
setting a label is displayed.
Use the
Button. The dialog box for
button in the property dialog to copy the I/O comment
set to the PLC address of the lamp bit as a label.
The property setting dialog for both Static and On Off Static labels is shown below.
For Static, the label can be set by changing description of Off Label group box of
[Standard Lamp <Label>] dialog box. On Label group box will be disabled.
For On Off Static, the Off Label and the On Label can be set by changing description of corresponding text boxes.
194
Off Description:
Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp
bit is OFF.
On Description:
Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp
bit is ON.
Line Spacing:
Determines the space between two lines in both the Off Description and the On Description.
Insert New Line:
Inserts a new line character in the description to bring the following characters to the next line. On the Label Description
edit box, the new line character will be shown as ‘<\n>’.
Section
Lamps
Set Lines:
6-5
Displays the On/Off Description Settings dialog box. This
dialog is for entering Off Description and On Description with
multiple lines.
In all NT21 and NT31/631 V2 models, Labels can be entered in multiple lines.
The following table shows the specification for each PT model.
Maximum
number of
characters
Maximum
number of
characters
per line
Number of
lines permitted
Remarks
NT21
128
32
1 to 8
Maximum number of
characters per line include the “\n” character.
NT31/C-V2
128
40
1 to 15
Maximum number of
characters per line include the “\n” character.
NT631/C-V2 256
80
1 to 30
Maximum number of
characters per line include the “\n” character.
The Set Lines button will display On/Off Description Settings dialog box, in which
the On/Off description can be entered in multiple lines by pressing Enter Key.
When Numeral Display or String Display is selected as Label Type (For the NT21
and NT31/631-V2 Models only)
Indirect Reference:
If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table
entry number for indirect reference, specify this item.
Table Entry:
Specify the address of the numeral or string memory table entry to be referred to.
If [indirect Reference] is not selected, the contents of this numeral or string
memory table entry are displayed, and if [indirect Reference] is selected, the contents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry
number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed.
Edit:
Displays the Numeral Display or String Display property page. For description on
property settings refer to 6-6 Numeral Display and 6-7 Character String Display.
Reference: To check lamp ON status on the editing screen, select [Simulate ON/OFF] from
the [View] menu.
Additionally, to view flashing display of lamp attribute, select [Simulate Flash]
from the [View] menu. For details, refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on
the Support Tool.
Guidance
The following kinds of standard lamps are provided.
Rectangle
Circle
Polygon
Sector
195
Section
Lamps
6-5
The shape of a lamp can be modified when you select polygon or sector.
Use the element edit function to modify the lamp shape. (For details, refer to
page 110.)
(1) Click on a line of a polygon or a sector while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl
key.
(2) Drag a green mark to modify the graphic.
(3) To add a green mark (addition of a vertex), position the mouse cursor on
the line in a graphic and execute the vertex addition operation (right click the
mouse → [Add Node]).
To delete a green mark (deletion of a node), position the mouse cursor on
the green mark to be deleted and execute the vertex deletion operation
(right click the mouse → [Remove Node]).
(4) Drag the added green mark to modify the shape of the graphic.
Example: Modification of the shape of polygon
A standard lamp element can display a label (lamp name).
To display a label, set a check mark in the check box of the [Label] attribute and
. The dialog box for setting a label is displayed. Set the propclick on
erty for the label to be displayed.
For the procedure for setting the properties, refer to 6-2-7 Text. For the NT21,
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, it is possible to set different colors for lamp
ON and lamp OFF by setting [Color – OFF] and [Color – ON] instead of setting
label color. However, background color is fixed to transparent for the NT21,
NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C.
Use the
button in the property dialog to copy the I/O comment
set to the lamp bit as a label.
To edit the position of a label, use the element edit function. (For details, refer to
page 110.)
(1) Click on the label while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key.
196
Section
Lamps
6-5
(2) Drag the label to change the display position.
(2)
(1)
When displaying a string as a label, mark data and image data can be inserted
Button or the
into a string by clicking the
Button. On the NT21 and NT31/631 without NT20/30/620-compatible mode,
image data cannot be used in a string.
Reference: With a standard lamp, only the lamp color and the label color change. To
change the contents of a label, create image/library lamps and display different
image/library data according to the status of the lamp.
Example:
ON
OFF
Image/library lamp
With the NT21 and NT31/631-V2 and above, you can also change the contents
of a label by specifying ON OFF Static as label type.
With the NT21 and NT31/631 without NT20/30/620-compatible mode image
data cannot be inserted into a label.
6-5-2 Image/library Lamps
Different image/library data are displayed according to the status of a PC (PLC)
bit.
Bit status
PC (PLC)
Display when
the bit is OFF
Display when
the bit is ON
(1) The image data or the library data is switched to be displayed according to
the status of the allocated PC (PLC) bit.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Lamp] → [Image]
197
Section
Lamps
6-5
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Image/library data
Property setting
General
OFF State
Code:
Specify whether or not image/library data is displayed in the
lamp OFF state and the code of the image/library data to be
displayed.
ON State
Code:
Specify whether or not image/library data is displayed in the
lamp ON state and the code of the image/library data to be
displayed.
:
:
Specify the image data to be displayed when the lamp is ON/
OFF.
Specify the library data to be displayed when the lamp is ON/
OFF.
Color (Only for NT31C and NT631C. Setting is not possible for other color types
of PT.)
Foreground:
Set the display color of an image element.
(Specification of color is valid only when the color mode is 2
colors. Setting is not possible for a monochrome type PT.)
Background:
Set the display color of the background in the image element
display area.
(Specification of color is valid only when the color mode is 2
colors. Setting is not possible for a monochrome type PT.)
Light Functions
Address
PC (PLC) Bit Address: Specify the bit at the PC (PLC) that drives an image/library lamp ON/OFF.
I/O Comment:
Specify the comment of the PC (PLC) bit that drives an image/library lamp ON/
OFF.
:
Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number.
Displays an I/O comment table entry.
Reference: To check lamp ON status on the editing screen, select [Simulate ON/OFF] from
the [View] menu. For details, refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on the
Support Tool.
198
Section
Lamps
6-5
Guidance
For image/library lamp element, the image/library data that is displayed when
the PC (PLC) bit is ON and the image/library data that is displayed when the PC
(PLC) bit is OFF are specified independently.
To display the image data or the library data only when the PC (PLC) bit is ON or
OFF, cancel the check mark in the check box of the bit status for which the image/
library data is not to be displayed.
To select the image/library data to be displayed, click on
and select the desired image/library data from the list.
/
Click on the line of the desired data to display the line in reverse video and click
the
Button.
Clicking the
Button enables the direct display of the specified code.
If the data is not registered to the specified code, the mark shown below is displayed on the screen.
For the procedure for creating the image data, refer to 8-1 Image Editor.
For the procedure for creating the library data, refer to 8-2 Library Editor.
199
Section
Numeral Display
6-6
6-6
Numeral Display
The contents of a numeral memory table entry are displayed.
Numeral displays can be used with all models.
PT
Numeral
memory table
Screen
Display field
50
50
Read
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
(1) The contents of the specified numeral memory table entry are displayed.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Numeral Display]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Foreground
Background
Sign digit
Integer
Decimal
Display digits of maximum limit
Property setting
General
200
Position:
Indicates the display position of the numeral display field.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the display field.)
Font Type:
Specify the font of the numeric value to be displayed.
Standard, Half Height, Double Width
(Only Standard can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Scale:
Specify the scale of the numeric value to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
(Only 1 1 (Equal) and 2 1 (Wide) can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Smoothing:
Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for
numeric values to be displayed.
(Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and
NT600S.)
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute (attributes displayed depend on the
PT model.) Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Section
Numeral Display
6-6
Color
Foreground:
Specify the numeral color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
When this property page is called from Label of Standard Lamp or Touch Switch
when Label Type is Numeral Display, Foreground ON/OFF color can be specified.
ON:
Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC
(PLC) bit is ON.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
OFF:
Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC
(PLC) bit is OFF.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan,
yellow
Background:
Specify the color of the background in the numeral display
area. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
Reference:
Indirect Reference:
If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference
table entry number for indirect reference, specify this item. (Setting is not
possible for NT11S/NT11.)
Table Entry:
Specify the address of the numeral memory table entry to be referred to. If
[Indirect Reference] is not selected, the contents of this numeral memory
table entry are displayed, and if [Indirect Reference] is selected, the contents
of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry
number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed.
Display Type (Only Decimal can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Decimal:
Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal.
Hexadecimal:
Specify this item to display the input numeric value in hexadecimal.
Format
Integer:
Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input
data.
Decimal:
Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the
input data.
Zero Suppression: Specify whether or not leading zeros are suppressed to display the input data.
Display Sign:
:
Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value.
Displays the list of numeral memory table entries.
Guidance
With a numeral display element, the memory table designation method can be
selected as direct designation or indirect designation.
201
Section
Numeral Display
6-6
Example: Specifying numeral memory table address 2.
Direct designation
Indirect designation
Numeral
memory table
Numeral
memory table
1
5
2
Display
1
5
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
The contents of the specified
memory table entry are displayed.
Display
5
123
123
The contents of the specified
memory table entry are treated as
the table address reference value
and the contents of the referenced
memory table entry are displayed.
Indirect designation is possible only in the following cases. Do not apply for other
cases.
When C200H I/F unit is used.
When the NT21, NT20, NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C, NT620S, NT620C,
NT625C, NT631, or NT631C is used.
When an NT20S or NT600S that uses the direct connection ver. 5. is used.
With conventional models, up to 50 indirect designation settings can be made
per screen, including both numeral display and character string display.
For numeral display elements, it is possible to select whether numeric values
are displayed in decimal (signed/unsigned) or hexadecimal.
Numeral
memory table
23456
Display in decimal
23456
Display in hexadecimal
5BA0
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, numerals are always
stored as signed binary data. When allocating numeral memory table entries to
PC (PLC) words, it is possible to select whether the data is recognized in BCD
or recognized in hexadecimal using the [Storage Type] property.
According to the combination of the storage type and display method, numeric values are stored and displayed in the manner shown below.
PC (PLC) words
(2-word allocation)
Recognition in BCD
3456
0002
Recognition in hexadecimal
Display
Numeral
memory table
Display in decimal
23456
00005BA0
Display in hexadecimal
5BA0
5BA0
0000
With NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, the only difference in
decimal/hexadecimal display of a numeric value is whether or not F at the most
202
Section
Numeral Display
6-6
significant digit is treated as a sign or a numeral. With the NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, and NT631C, however, the stored numeric value is converted for display according to the decimal/hexadecimal designation.
For [Decimal], the number of digits entered in decimal fraction part is specified.
Since integers are stored in the numeral memory table entry, a decimal point is
appended according to this setting when a numeral is displayed.
Numeral
memory table
If setting for [Decimal] is 2.
1234
12.34
If [Display Sign] is selected, a blank (“ ”) is displayed for a positive value and “–”
is displayed for a negative value.
If a negative value is displayed with [Display Sign] deselected, it is displayed as
an absolute value.
For [Format] (number of numeral digits; integer part + decimal fraction part),
set a sufficient value according to the contents of the numeral memory table
entry.
The allowable display range for numeric values is shown below.
Display Method
Hexadecimal
Decimal (signed)
Decimal (unsigned)
NT20, NT11S/NT11, NT20S,
NT600S, NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C
00000000 to FFFFFFFFH
00000000 to 7FFFFFFFH
–9999999 to 9999999
–2147483648 to
2147483647
0 to 99999999
0 to 2147483647*1
*1: Since a negative value is also displayed as a positive value when [Display
Sign] is deselected, –2147483648 is displayed as 2147483648, even though
the maximum value that can be stored in the numeral memory table is
2147483647.
203
Section
Character String Display
6-7
6-7
Character String Display
The contents of a character string memory table entry are displayed.
Character string displays can be used with all models.
PT
Character string memory
table (String table)
Screen
Display field
TOOL
(1) The character string stored in the specified character string
memory table entry (string table) is displayed.
No.1
No.2
No.3
TOOL No.4
Read
No.5
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [the String Display]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Foreground
Background
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the (character) string display field.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the display field.)
Font Type:
Specify the font of characters to be displayed.
Standard, Half Height
(Only Standard can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Scale:
Specify the scale of characters to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
(Not possible for NT20, NT20S)
Smoothing: Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for characters to be displayed. (Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11,
NT20, NT20S and NT600S.)
Attribute:
Specify the display attribute (attributes displayed depend on the PT
model.) Standard, Inverse, Flash, Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground: Specify the character color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
When this property page is called from Label of Standard Lamp or Touch Switch
Foreground ON/OFF color can be specified for Label of type String Display.
204
Section
Character String Display
ON:
6-7
Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC (PLC) bit is ON.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
OFF:
Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC
(PLC) bit is OFF.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan,
yellow
Background:
Specify the color of the background in the (character) string display area. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.) Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
Reference
Indirect Reference:
If the numeric value in the specified memory table
entry is treated as the reference table entry number
and used for indirect table reference, specify this item.
(Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11.)
Table Entry:
Specify the number of the character string memory
table entry (string table) to be referred to. If [Indirect
Reference] is not selected, the contents of this character string memory table entry (string table) are displayed. If [Indirect Reference] is selected, the contents of this numeral memory table entry are treated
as the reference table entry number and the contents
of the referenced character string memory table entry
(string table) are displayed.
Length: Specify the number of characters to be displayed.
:
Displays the list of numeral memory table entries or character string
memory table entries (String Table). In indirect designation, the list of
numeral memory table entries is displayed and in direct designation,
the list of character string memory table entries (String Table) is displayed.
Guidance
With a (character) string display element, the memory table designation method can be selected as direct designation or indirect designation.
205
Section
Character String Display
6-7
Example
Specifying memory table address 2
Direct designation
Indirect designation
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Numeral
memory table
Character string
memory table
(String table)
1
Display
2
TOOL
1
Display
1
2
TOOL
2
TOOL
5
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
The contents of the specified
memory table entry are displayed.
TOOL
The contents of the specified numeral
memory table entry are treated as the
table entry address reference value and
the contents of the referenced memory
table are displayed.
Indirect designation is possible only in the following cases. Do not apply for other
cases.
When C200H I/F unit is used.
When the NT20, NT21, NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C, NT620S, NT620C,
NT625C, NT631, or NT631C is used.
When an NT20S or NT600S that uses direct connection ver. 5 is used.
With conventional models, up to 50 indirect designation settings can be made
per screen, including both numeral display and (character) string display.
If the value set for [Length] (the number of digits to be displayed) is smaller than
the number of characters in the specified character string memory table entry
(string table), the specified number of characters is displayed from the first
character of the (character) string. The remaining characters are not displayed.
To display mark data or image data, specify the address of the mark data or
image data as shown below.
Note that image data cannot be inserted into a (character) string when using
the NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S, NT21 (20/30/620 mode off), NT31, NT31C,
NT600S, NT631, NT631C, NT31/C-V2 (20/30/620 mode off), and
NT631/C-V2 (20/30/620 mode off).
Setting
ABC<!FFFE>
Display
ABC
Mark data at code FFFE
Reference: When there are no string to show, string input will be invisible.
Therefore, with Support Tool, dotted-line frame is displayed in character foreground color enclosing string input.
(This frame will not be displayed on PT.)
This frame can not be set to off. However, the dotted-line frame can be set to ON
and OFF when printing screen image (refer to page 425).
206
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
6-8
Touch Switches
When a touch switch is pressed, any of the nine functions shown below is
executed. In addition to the general functions such as the input notification (notify
bit) and the screen switching (standalone) function, a variety of functions can be
realized including control codes used in combination with a data input element.
(Touch switches cannot be used for NT11S/NT11.)
CAUTION
Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch applications.
Notify bit touch switch
PT
Switch
ON/OFF
notification
PC (PLC)
(1) When a touch switch is pressed, the specified bit in the PC
(PLC) goes ON/OFF.
Set switches, reset switches, alternate switches, and momentary switches can be used.
Specified
bit goes
ON/OFF
Screen switching touch switch
(1) When a touch switch is pressed, the screen is switched to the
screen with the specified screen number.
Screen 1
Screen 2
Switch
Switching
to screen 2
Character string input function touch switch
(Character) string data input field
(by (character) string input element)
ABC
ABC
DEF
(1) When a touch switch is pressed, the label of the touch switch
is stored in the (character) string input field.
Note This type of touch switch is always used in combination with
a (character) string input element.
GHI
Pop-up window/keyboard function touch switch
(1) When a touch switch (OPEN) is pressed, the specified winStandard screen (base screen)
dow (keyboard screen) is displayed on the screen presently
Window/Keyboard screen
displayed.
(2) When a touch switch (CLOSE) is pressed, the window (keyboard screen) presently displayed closes.
OPEN
CLOSE
207
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Control code input touch switch (Input key – Control)
(1) When a touch switch is pressed, the input processing of the
control code is executed as shown below.
0 to 9 numeral keys:
Data setting at the numeral setting input field
Standard screen
Input field
1234
CLR key:
Clearing the numeral setting input field
key:
Confirmation
Arrow symbol key:
Switching among continuous/overlapping screens
Moving the cursor in the numeral setting input field
Numeric keys can be created using the touch switches assigned
these control codes.
Note These touch switches are always used with a numeral/(character) string input element. (The element to be used differs
according to the allocated control codes.)
Copy setting touch switch
Memory
table
50
COPY
50
(1) When a touch switch is pressed, the data in the memory table
entry or a constant is copied to another memory table entry or
input field.
Copy Source
Numeral memory table
Character string
memory table (String
table)
Constant
Copy Destination
Numeral memory table
Character string
memory table (String
table)
Input field specified by
cursor
Window move touch switch
(1) When a touch switch (window move touch switch) is pressed,
the window can be moved by touch panel operation at PT.
When you press the destination (center of the window will
come here), window will be moved to that position.
Note Window move touch switch can be created only on window/
keyboard screen.
Window moves
MOVE
Cursor moving touch switch
Data input field 1
Data input field 2
Data input field 3
208
Input cursor
moves
Input cursor
moves
(1) When a touch switch (cursor moving touch switch) in an input
field is pressed, the cursor moves to that input field.
Note The cursor moving touch switch should be specified when
creating a numeral or (character) string input element. (The
cursor moving touch switch can be added later.)
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Print screen function touch switch
(1) When a touch switch is pressed, a hard copy of the screen is
output to a printer.
Printing screen
hard copy
PRINT
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Touch Switch]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Label
Frame
Color – ON, OFF
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of a touch switch frame (the area that
senses pressing of the switch.)
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the touch switch
frame)
Size:
Indicates the size of a touch switch frame.
Frame:
Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a touch switch.
Shape:
Specify the shape of a touch switch.
Standard, Shadow, 3-Dimension, Rectangle, Circle, Polygon, Sector
Show ON State: Specify the status when touch switch is pressed. When this
check box is ticked, touch switch will be lighten. (Not valid for
3-Dimension)
Color
Frame:
Specify the color of a touch switch if [Frame] is selected.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
ON:
Specify the display color of a touch switch which is ON.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
(Setting is valid only when [Show ON state] is selected.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
OFF:
Specify the display color of a touch switch that is OFF.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan,
yellow
209
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Settings
Function:
Specify the touch switch function. Select from the following nine
functions.
Notify bit
Switch screen
Input key – Control
Input key – Window/Keyboard
Input key – String
Copy setting
Cursor move
Window move (Only available on Window/Keyboard Screen)
Print screen
The setting contents differ depending on the selected touch switch function.
For details of setting, refer to Guidance.
Light Function
Touch switch also has the light function like a lamp.
Address
PC (PLC) Bit Address:
Specify the bit at the PC (PLC) that drives a touch
switch ON/OFF.
I/O Comment:
Specify the comment of the PC (PLC) bit that
drives a touch switch ON/OFF.
Lamp Attributes
ON Type:
Specify the status of a touch switch that is ON.
Light, Flash
Reference: To check lamp ON status on the editing screen, select [Simulate ON/OFF] from
the [View] menu.
Additionally, to view flashing display of lamp attribute, select [Simulate Flash]
from the [View] menu. For details, refer to 5-1-3 Changing the Display Method on
the Support Tool.
Label
Label:
Specify whether or not a label is appended to a touch switch.
Label Type:
Specify the type of the Label when [Label] is selected. Following selections will be available for the NT21 and
NT31/631-V2 models: Static, Static On Off, Numeral Display
and String Display. For the other PT models, this option is
disabled and set to Static (default). Refer to Guidance section for details of individual label type description.
To display a label, set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute in [Label] page and select an option of the available options from the Label Type combo box.
210
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
For non-NT21 and NT31/631-V2 models this combo box will have only one
choice (‘Static’) and this will remain disabled.
Static : For this option the On label and the Off label will be same.
On Off Static: For this option On/Off labels may be different.
Numeral Display: Displays the numeral value by referencing the specified table
entry. Indirect reference is also possible.
String Display: Displays the character string by referencing the specified table
entry. Indirect reference is also possible.
To display the settings for a label, click the
setting a label is displayed.
Use the
Button. The dialog box for
button in the property dialog to copy the I/O comment
set to the PLC address as a label.
In case of Notify Bit function:
I/O comment of notify bit
In case of other function:
I/O comment of lamp bit
The property setting dialog for both Static and On Off Static labels is shown below.
For Static, the label can be set by changing description of Off Label group box of
[Standard Lamp< Label >] dialog box. On Label group box will be disabled.
For On Off Static, the Off Label and the On Label can be set by changing description of corresponding text boxes.
Off Description:
Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp
bit is OFF.
211
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
On Description:
Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp
bit is ON.
Line Spacing
Determines the space between two lines in both the Off Description and the On Description.
Insert New Line
Inserts a new line character in the description to bring the following characters to the next line. On the Label Description
edit box, the new line character will be shown as ‘<Ņn>’.
Set Lines
Displays the On/Off Description Settings dialog box.
This dialog is for entering Off Description and On Description with multiple lines.
In all NT31/631 V2 models, Labels can be entered in multiple lines. The following
table shows the specification for each PT model.
Remarks
Maximum Maximum
number of number of
characcharacters
ters per
line
Number
of lines
permitted
NT21
128
32
1 to 8
Maximum number of
characters per line
include the “\n” character.
NT31/31C
128
40
1 to 15
Maximum number of
characters per line
include the “\n” character.
NT631/631C
256
80
1 to 30
Maximum number of
characters per line
include the “\n” character.
Set Lines button will display On/Off Description Settings dialog box, in which the
On/Off description can be entered in multiple lines by pressing Enter Key.
When Numeral Display or String Display is selected as Label Type
(For NT31/631-V2 Models only)
Indirect Reference:
If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table
entry number for indirect reference, specify this item.
Table Entry:
Specify the address of the numeral or string memory table entry to be referred to.
If [Indirect Reference] is not selected, the contents of this numeral or string
memory table entry are displayed, and if [Indirect Reference] is selected, the
contents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table
entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed.
Edit:
Displays the Numeral Display or String Display property page. For description on
property settings refer to Section 6-6 Numeral Display and 6-7 String Display.
212
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Guidance
Common description
The following shapes can be used for touch switch elements.
(Selectable shapes vary according to the PT model.)
Standard
Circle
Shadow
Polygon
3-Dimension
Rectangle
Sector
Although [Standard] and [Rectangle] have the same shape, how the touch switch
frame is defined differs between them. With [Standard], the touch switch frame
itself provides the display graphic. With [Rectangle], however, a rectangle shape
can be specified independently of the touch switch frame and the touch switch
frame can be separated from the rectangle shape.
If rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected, only the shape of a graphic
can be modified in the procedure shown below. The touch switch frame (touch
sensing area) remains unchanged even if the shape is modified.
Use the element edit function to modify the touch switch shape. (For details,
refer to page 110.)
(1) Click on a line of a graphic while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key.
(2) Drag a green mark to modify the graphic.
(3) To add a green mark (addition of a node) in a polygon, position the mouse
cursor on the line in a graphic and execute a vertex addition operation (right
click the mouse → [Add Node]).
To delete a green mark (deletion of a node), position the mouse cursor on
the green mark to be deleted and execute a vertex deletion operation
(right click the mouse → [Remove Node]).
(4) Drag the added green mark to modify the shape of the graphic.
Example: Modification of the shape of polygon
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A touch switch element can display a label (touch switch name).
213
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
To display a label, set a check mark in the check box of the [Label] property and
click on
. The dialog box for setting a label is displayed. Set the property for the label to be displayed.
For the procedure for setting the properties, refer to 6-2-7 Text. When using the
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, it is possible to set different colors for
the lamp ON and lamp OFF states. With these models, however, it is not permissible to insert image data.
button in the property dialog can copy the I/O comment set to the
PLC address as a label.
In case of Notify Bit function:
I/O comment of notify bit
In case of other function:
I/O comment of lamp bit
To edit the position of a label, use the element edit function. (For details, refer to
page 110.)
(1) Click on the label while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key.
(2) Drag the label to change the display position.
(1)
(2)
6-8-1 Input Notify Touch Switch
Function:
Notify bit
Settings
Address
214
PC (PLC) Bit Address:
Specify the PC (PLC) bit that is driven ON/OFF according to the operation of a touch switch.
I/O comment:
Specify the comment of the PC (PLC) bit that is
driven ON/OFF according to the operation of a
touch switch.
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Action Type
Set, Reset, Alternative, Momentary
:
Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number.
:
Displays the I/O comment table.
Guidance
The input notify touch switch drives the specified PC (PLC) bit ON/OFF in response to the pressing of the touch switch.
The status of the PC (PLC) bit when the touch switch is pressed is processed
as shown below according to the setting for [Action Type].
Set:
Drives the PC (PLC) bit ON when the touch switch is pressed. The PC (PLC) bit
stays ON even after the touch switch is released.
Reset:
Drives the PC (PLC) bit OFF when the touch switch is pressed. The PC (PLC)
bit stays OFF even after the touch switch is released.
Alternative:
Drives the PC (PLC) bit from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF when the touch
switch is pressed. The PC (PLC) bit is turned ON when the touch switch is
pressed while it is OFF and if the touch switch is pressed when the PC (PLC) bit
is ON, the PC (PLC) bit goes OFF.
Momentary: Drives the PC (PLC) bit ON when the touch switch is pressed; the PC (PLC) bit
remains ON only while the touch switch is being pressed. The PC (PLC) bit
goes OFF when the touch switch is released.
6-8-2 Switch Screen Touch Switch
Function:
Switch screen
Settings
Screen No.: Specify the screen number of the screen to which the display is to
change when the touch switch is pressed.
Guidance
The switch screen touch switch changes the displayed screen at a PT to the specified screen.
6-8-3 (Character) String Input Touch Switch
Function:
Input key – String
Settings
Input Key String:
Indicates the (character) string that is input into the (character) string input field when the touch switch is pressed. This
control is enabled for the PT models NT21 and NT31/631
only.
Insert Mark:
Select the mark data to be pasted into a string.
Copy from Label
Copies the contents of Touch Switch’s label to the Input Key
String label. This will be enabled only if the label type of a
Touch Switch is Static or On Off Static.
Related elements and setting
(Character) string input element:
[Objects] → [Data Input] → [String] (Refer to 6-4-2 (Character) String Input.)
215
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Guidance
The (character) string input touch switch is used for inputting a (character)
string to a (character) string input field.
The (character) string to be input is set for a label in the General attributes. It
may be a single character or multiple (character) strings.
Numeric keys can be created on the screen by combining (character) string
input touch switches and control code input touch switches.
For details of (character) string input elements, refer to 6-4-2 (Character)
String Input.
Note
(Character) string input touch switches are always used in combination with
(character) string input elements.
6-8-4 Pop-up Window/Keyboard Function Touch Switch
Function:
Input key-Window/Keyboard
Settings
Screen No.:
Specify the window (keyboard screen) type (Local 1 or Local
2) and screen number of the window (keyboard screen) that is
displayed when the touch switch is pressed.
Window Position: Specify the bottom left co-ordinate of window to be displayed.
Action Type:
Specify how the window/keyboard is displayed when the
touch switch is pressed.
Open, Close, Toggle
Replace Local Window:
Specify the behavior of windows when another window of the
same type (Local 1, Local 2) is already displayed when opening a window.
Guidance
The input key-window/keyboard touch switch is used for displaying the window
(keyboard screen) overlapping the presently displayed screen (base screen).
This touch switch function can not be used with NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
Settings shown below can be made only with the NT21 and with the NT31,
NT31C, NT631, NT631C “-V1” and above.
Local 2
Window Position
Replace Local Window
Display methods of window/keyboard varies depending on PT models.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, and NT31,NT31C, NT631, NT631C
below “-V1”
How the window/keyboard is displayed is determined by the
setting for [Action Type].
Action Type
Open:
216
Displays the specified window/keyboard. If another window/ keyboard
is already displayed, it is closed and then the specified window/key-
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
board is opened. If the specified window/keyboard is already displayed, no operation is executed.
Close:
Closes the presently displayed window/keyboard. No operation is
executed if no window/keyboard is displayed.
Toggle:
Closes the presently displayed window/keyboard and opens the specified window/keyboard. If the specified window/keyboard is already
opened, the window/keyboard closes.
NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C “-V1” and above
How the window is displayed is determined by the settings for [Action
Type] and [Replace Local Window].
Action Type
Open:
Displays the specified window. If another window of the same type (Local 1, Local 2) is already displayed, follows the setting for [Replace Local Window]. If the specified window is already displayed in specified
type, no operation is executed.
Close:
Closes the presently displayed window with specified type (Local 1,
Local 2) and number. No operation is executed if specified window is
not displayed in specified type.
Toggle:
Closes the window with specified type (Local 1, Local 2) and number if
it is presently displayed and opens the specified window if it is not
opened. If another window of the same type is already displayed, follows the setting for [Replace Local Window].
Replace Local Window
Check mark:
If another window of the same type (Local 1, Local 2) is already
displayed, no operation is executed.
No check mark: If another window of the same type(Local1, Local 2) is already
displayed, closes the window and then opens the specified window.
6-8-5 Control Code Input Touch Switches
Function:
Input key-Control
Settings
Control Key:
Specify the key code that is input when the touch switch is
pressed. (Select from 39 kinds of codes.)
Some codes cannot be specified depending on the PT model.
Related elements and setting
Numeral input element:
[Object] → [Data Input] → [Numeral] (Refer to 6-4-1 Numeral Input.)
(Character) string input element:
[Object] → [Data Input] → [String] (Refer to 6-4-2 (Character) String Input.)
217
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Guidance
Control code input touch switches control data input processing, cursor movements, etc.
The contents of control are selected from the codes shown below.
Control code input touch switches are used in combination with numeral input
elements, (character) string input elements, continuous screens, alarm list elements, and alarm history elements.
(1) Combination with numeral input elements, (character) string input elements, and continuous screens
If control code input touch switches are arranged with a numeral input element or a (character) string input element on the same screen (including the
window (keyboard) and the base screen), these touch switches can be used
to input data into the input field.
Numeric keys and other data input devices can be created by combining
these items.
: Inputs numeral 0 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 1 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 2 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 3 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 4 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 5 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 6 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 7 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 8 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 9 in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal A in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal B in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal C in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal D in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal E in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal F in a data input field.
: Moves cursor in a data input field one character left.
: Moves cursor in a data input field one character right.
: Deletes numeric value/(character) string in a data input field.
: Cancels inputs in a data input field.
: Backspaces a cursor to delete a character in a data input field.
: Deletes the character at the cursor location in a data input field.
218
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
: Confirms inputs in a data input field (cursor remains in this field.).
: Confirms inputs in a data input field (cursor moves to the next input
field.).
: Toggles plus (+) and minus (–) sign in a data input field.
: Inputs a decimal point in a data input field.
: Moves the input cursor to the data input field at the upper left area.
: Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately above the present
data input field.*1
: Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately below the present
data input field.*1
: Move the cursor to the left data input field.*1
: Move the cursor to the right data input field.*1
: Moves the cursor to the previous data input field in the order.
Changes continuous screens to the previous screen.
: Moves the cursor to the next data input field in the order.
Changes continuous screens to the next screen.
*1
When moving the cursor with the cursor keys, the cursor may not
move in the expected order if the X,Y coordinates are not aligned in
the upper left corners of the input fields.
keys, the cursor moves between the data input fields in the order
Reference: With and
the data input fields were made. However, the order of moving the cursor can be
changed with [Set Order] of the [Draw] menu.
(2) Combination with alarm list elements and alarm history elements
This control code can be selected only with NT30, NT30C, NT620S,
NT620C, and NT625C. With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C,
these touch switches are a part of alarm list/history elements.
These touch switches can be created automatically when creating an alarm
list/history.
: Scrolls up alarm list/history display page (page scroll).
: Scrolls down alarm list/history display page (page scroll).
: Scrolls up alarm list/history display page (line scroll).
: Scrolls down alarm list/history display page (line scroll).
(3) PT control
: Stops buzzer.
: Displays system menu.
Reference: Any required (character) string can be used as the label of a control code input
touch switch. For example, “SET” can be used as the label of a control code
touch switch.
Click the
Button in the
Tab attributes to display the label setting
dialog box. Input a label in the displayed dialog box.
219
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
6-8-6 Copy Setting Touch Switch
Function:
Copy setting
Settings
Copy From
Numeral Table:
Specifies a numeral table entry for the copy source.
String Table:
Specifies a character string memory table entry (string
table) for the copy source.
Code:
Specifies copying a constant (numeric data).
Data setting field: Specify the memory table entry number when a numeral
table entry or a character string memory table entry
(string table) is specified. When code is specified, specify
a constant here.
Copy To
Numeral Table:
Specifies a numeral table entry for the copy destination.
String Table:
Specifies a character string memory table entry (string
table) for the copy destination.
Cursor Position:
If this is specified, the numeral input field or the character
string input field, which is the active input objective, is selected for the copy destination.
Data setting field: Specify the memory table entry number when a numeral
table entry or a character string memory table entry
(string table) is specified. If Cursor Position is selected,
this field is invalid.
:
Displays the list of numeral/character string memory
table entries (string table).
Guidance
A copy setting touch switch is used in the cases shown below.
Copying the data in a memory table entry to another memory table entry
Character string memory
table (String table)
part1
SET 1
SET 2
SET 3
part1
part2
part3
By setting the data in several memory table entries beforehand, the necessary
data can be copied to the work area as needed.
Note
220
Data copying from a memory table entry to a memory table entry is possible only
between memory table entries of the same type; from numeral memory table
entry to numeral memory table entry, and from character string memory table
entry (string table) to character string memory table entry (string table).
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Copying a constant to a numeral memory table entry (setting)
Numeral
memory table
1234
SET 1
SET 2
2345
SET 3
3456
1234
By setting a constant in the data setting field of a copy function touch switch beforehand, the necessary data can be copied to a numeral memory table entry as
desired.
Note
Copying a constant to a string table entry is not possible.
Copying data or a constant in a memory table entry to an input field
Numeral
memory table
(Character) string
input field
PT
Numeral input
field
1234
Character string memory
table (String table)
PT
1234
CONSTANT
1
By setting the setting data to a memory table entry or a touch switch beforehand,
the data is copied to the input field at the cursor location as desired.
Since the data is copied to the input field, it can be modified after copying.
6-8-7 Cursor Moving Touch Switch
Function:
Moving cursor
Settings
Use Window/Keyboard Screen:
Specify whether or not the window (keyboard screen)
is displayed when the cursor is moved.
Screen No. :
Specify the screen type (Local 1/Local 2) and the
screen number of the window (keyboard screen) to be
displayed when moving a cursor.
Window position:
Specify the bottom left co-ordinate of window to be displayed.
Replace Local Window: Specify the behavior of windows when another window
of the same type (Local 1/Local 2) is already displayed
when opening a window.
Auto Arrange:
Specify if a touch switch is to move with, or independently of, an input field when the input fields shifts.
Related elements and setting
Numeral input element:
[Object] → [Data Input] → [Numeral] (Refer to 6-4-1 Numeral Input.)
(Character) string input element:
[Object] → [Data Input] → [String] (Refer to 6-4-2 (Character) String Input.)
221
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
Guidance
When a cursor moving touch switch is pressed, input is enabled at the specified (or associated) input field.
Settings shown below can be made only with the NT21 and with the NT31,
NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and above.
Local 2
Window Position
Replace Local Window
If a cursor moving touch switch is created automatically at the creation of a numeral/(character) string input element, the touch switch is created overlapping
the input field.
It is possible to specify a window (keyboard) for a cursor moving touch switch.
This specification enables display of the specified window (keyboard) by simply pressing the cursor moving touch switch.
Numeral/(character) string input field
Touch switches
assigned with
cursor movement
and window open
functions
Numeral/(character) string input field
123456
123456
–41.8
–41.8
ABCDE
When the touch switch
at the top is pressed
1
4
2
5
3
6
Specified window opens.
Reference: A cursor moving touch switch can be created automatically when creating a
numeral input element or a (character) string input element.
If [Auto Arrange] is selected, it is not possible to move a touch switch independently. To move a touch switch independently, deselect this attribute.
If a cursor moving touch switch is created later independently, the touch switch
can be associated with a specific input field. Specify the touch switch and select [Draw] (menu bar) → [Associate With]. To disassociate the touch switch
from an input field, select [Draw] (menu bar) → [Disassociate].
Cursor movement among data input fields is also possible using control code
input touch switches for which arrow-symbol key codes are set.
222
Section
Touch Switches
6-8
6-8-8 Window Moving Touch Switch
Function:
Moving window
Settings
Function setting only.
Guidance
When a window move touch switch on a window is pressed, window can be
moved by touch panel operation at PT.
This touch switch function is available only with the NT21 and with the NT31,
NT31C, NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and above.
Procedure for moving a window is as follows:
1) Press a window move touch switch on a window to be moved.
2) Press the touch panel at a destination position of a window (center position of
window comes) and a window moves to that position.
Window
Window in a moving status
Screen
Screen
(1)
Screen
(2)
(3)
6-8-9 Print Screen Touch Switch
Function:
Print screen
Settings
Printing of Display Screen
Start:
Specify when starting printing of screen hard copy.
Abort:
Specify when aborting printing.
Guidance
A print screen touch switch is used to print the image (hard copy) of the presently displayed screen.
Printing of a hard copy can be aborted by pressing the abort touch switch if it is
selected in Settings.
The print screen function cannot be used with the NT20, NT20S, NT21, and
NT600S.
With conventional models where the same memory area is shared by the print
screen function and the input key-window/keyboard function, it is not possible
to print a hard copy while a window (keyboard) is displayed.
223
Section
Graphs
6-9
6-9
Graphs
Graphs can be used to display the contents of a numeral memory table entry. The
Support Tool provides four types of graph as indicated below.
Bar Graph:
A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of a
bar graph.
Analogue Meter:
A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of
quarter, semi-circle, and circle graph.
Broken-line Graph:
Present values of several consecutive numeral memory table entries are
displayed in the form of a broken-line graph.
Trend Graph:
Numeral memory table entry contents that change with time are displayed in
the form of a trend graph. The graph moves as time passes.
The data logging function, which logs the past data, and the background
function, which continues logging the data while a trend graph is not
displayed, are available.
6-9-1 Bar Graph
A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of a bar
graph.
Numeral memory table
100%
7600
0%
76%
(1) A value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into a percentage value, in the range from 0 to 100% or from –100% to 100%, and displayed in the
form of a bar graph.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
224
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Bar Graph]
Section
Graphs
6-9
Terminology
Display %
Frame
Background
Foreground
–Range
+ Range
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of a bar graph.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the bar graph)
Size:
Indicates the size of a bar graph.
Frame:
Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a bar graph.
Display Sign:
Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is
displayed. (Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11.)
Direction:
Specify the display direction of a bar graph.
Right ( → ), Left ( ← ), Up ( ↑ ), Down ( ↓ )
(Only Right (→) can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Color
Frame:
Specify the color of a bar graph frame if [Frame] is selected.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
+Range:
Specify the color of bar graph displayed for a positive value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
–Range:
Specify the color of bar graph displayed for a negative value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.) Valid only when [Display
Sign] is selected. White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings (Only 100% can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Value
Table Entry: Specify the table entry number of a numeral memory table entry to
be displayed.
Display %:
Specify whether or not a percentage value is displayed on the
screen.
100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 100% value is set by a numeral memory table
entry; set the table entry number of the numeral memory table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 100% value is set by a constant; set the value
to be taken for a 100% value.
225
Section
Graphs
6-9
0%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 0% value is set by a numeral memory table
entry; set the table entry number of the numeral memory table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 0% value is set by a constant; set the value to
be taken for a 0% value.
–100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a –100% value is set by a numeral memory
table entry; set the table entry number of the numeral memory
table.
Value:
Specify this item if a –100% value is set by a constant; set the value to be taken for a –100% value.
Note that specification for –100% is valid only when [Display Sign] is selected.
Setting of 0% and –100% is not possible with NT20S and NT600S.
Guidance
The following types of bar graph element are provided.
0% to 100% display
Direction: Right
Direction: Left
Direction: Up Direction: Down
–100% to 100% display
Direction: Right
Direction: Left
Direction: Up Direction: Down
Which of [0 to 100%] and [–100 to 100%] bar graphs is displayed should be
selected with the setting for [Display Sign] in the general attributes.
Check mark set:
Check mark not set:
–100 to 100% display
0 to 100% display
In the default setting, a percentage value is displayed.
Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set with the [Display %]
property.
Check mark set:
Check mark not set:
A percentage value is displayed.
A percentage value is not displayed.
If the setting is for a percentage value to be displayed, the size and display
position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the
manner shown below. (For detail of the element edit function, refer to page
110.)
226
Section
Graphs
6-9
(1) Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key.
(2) Drag a percentage value to change the display position.
Example: Modifying the percentage value display position
(1)
(2)
(3) To change the size of a displayed percentage value, double click on the value.
The properties of a percentage value display are displayed.
Position:
Indicates the display position of the percentage value.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage
value.)
Font Type:
Specify the font of the value to be displayed.
Standard, Half Height, Double Width (Only Standard can be set
for NT11S/NT11.)
Scale:
Specify the scale of the value to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
(Only 1 1 (Equal) can be set for NT11S/NT11.)
Smoothing:
Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for the
value to be displayed.
(Setting is not possible for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and
NT600S.)
Attribute:
The display attribute cannot be set (fixed as standard display).
Color
Foreground: Specify the color of the percentage value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background: Specify the background color of the percentage value display
area. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
227
Section
Graphs
6-9
When displaying a specific value (reference value) in a bar graph, the percentage value is calculated based on the values for 100%, 0%, and –100%.
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set as indicated below, reference values are displayed in the bar graph as shown below.
Bar graph
Value referred to: 3000
100%
Value referred to: 1500
50%
Value referred to: 0
0%
Value referred to: –1000
ć 50%
Value referred to: –2000
ć 100%
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set using numeral memory
table entries as indicated below, the percentage value of the reference value is
calculated according to the value stored at the specified address.
Bar graph
Numeral
memory table
0
1
2
3
4
3000
0
–2000
5
6-9-2 Analogue Meter
A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of quarter, semi-circle, circle graph.
Analogue meter can be used only with the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C,
NT631, and NT631C “-V1” and above.
Numeral Memory Table
0%
0650
–100%
100%
65%
228
A value in a numeral memory table entry is
converted into a percentage value, in the
range from 0 to 100% or from –100% to
100%, and displayed in the form of
quarter, semicircle, circle graph.
Also, scale display is available.
Section
Graphs
6-9
Operation Procedure
Selection using the menu bar: [Objects] → [Graph] → [Analogue Meter]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Foreground Color
Display %
Scale
Frame
–Range
+Range
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of an analogue meter.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the analogue meter. It changes depending on the other settings.)
Size:
Center Point: Indicates the center point of an arc or a circle of the analogue meter.
(It is not affected by other settings.)
Radius:
Indicates the meter radius of an analogue meter.
(It is not affected by other settings.)
Frame:
Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a meter of an
analogue meter. When the frame display is ON, select the frame
color. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Display Sign:
Specify whether or not a display area for negative value is displayed.
Direction:
Specify the positive direction of an analogue meter.
Clockwise, Anti-Clockwise
Meter Shape
Shape:
Specify the shape of an analogue meter.
Quarter, Semi-Circle, Circle
Direction:
Specify the display direction of an analogue meter.
Right (→), Left (←), Up (↑), Down (↓)
Type:
Specify the display type of an analogue meter.
Needle, Fill
Width Rate:
Specify the meter width of an analogue meter in % format regarding the radius as 100%.
10 to 100 (by 1%)
229
Section
Graphs
6-9
Scale Display
Scale:
Specify whether or not a scale is displayed for an analogue meter.
Distance:
Specify the scale position in % format regarding the radius as
100%.
0 to 150 (by 1%)
Scale Length: Specify the scale length in % format regarding the radius as
100%.
10 to 110 (by 1%)
No. of Division: Specify the number of the division that the scale should be divided in the range from 0 to 100%.
1 to 20
Scale Color:
Specify the scale color of an analogue meter.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Color
Foreground:
Specify the color for displaying the present value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background: Specify the background color of the circumscribed rectangle of an
analogue meter. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Transparent, white, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
+Range:
Specify the color of analogue meter displayed for a positive value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green cyan, yellow
–Range:
Specify the color of analogue meter displayed for a negative value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
Value
Table Entry: Specify the table entry number of a numeral memory table entry to
be displayed.
Display %:
Specify whether or not a percent value is displayed on the screen.
100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 100% value is set by a numeral memory table
entry; set the table entry number of the numeral table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 100% value is set by a constant; set the value
to be taken for a 100% value.
0%
Table Entry: Specify this item is a 0% value is set by a numeral memory table
entry; set the table entry number of the numeral table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 0% value is set by a constant; set the value to
be taken for a 0% value.
–100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a –100% value is set by a numeral memory table
entry; set the table entry number of the numeral table.
230
Section
Graphs
Value:
6-9
Specify this item if a –100% value is set by a constant; set the value
to be taken for a –100% value.
Note that specification for –100% is valid only when [Display Sign] is selected.
Guidance:
Analogue meters are displayed as follows depending on the settings of
[Shape], [Direction] and [Display sign].
Assumptions
Direction: Clockwise, Display: 30%
Shape
Display
sign
Direction:
Up (↑)
Direction:
Down (↓)
Direction:
Left (←)
Direction:
Right (→)
ON
Quarter
OFF
ON
Semi
SemiCircle
OFF
ON
Circle
OFF
Which of [0 to 100%] and [-100 to 100%] analogue meters is displayed should
be selected with the setting for [Display Sign] in the general attributes.
Check mark set:
–100% to 100% display
Check mark not set:
0 to 100% display
A present value is displayed as follows according to the types.
Needle
Fill
231
Section
Graphs
6-9
Meter shape is displayed as follows according to the width rate.
Width Rate: 10%
Width Rate: 50%
Width Rate: 100%
Scale position and its shape are displayed as follows depending on the settings of [Distance], [Scale Length].
Scale
Length
Distance: 0% Distance: 100%
Distance: 150%
10%
50%
100%
Scale is always displayed at the front of meter. Therefore, when type is set to a
Needle, the needle may be invisible if meter and scale are overlapped.
When the Display Sign is set to ON, specified No. of division is applied also for
a negative range. Therefore, actual numbers of division differs as follows depending on the presence/absence of display sign even if the specified number
of divisions is same.
Example: In case No. of division is 5
Display Sign: ON
Display Sign: OFF
In the default setting, a percentage value is displayed.
Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set in the [Display Label] property.
Check mark set:
A percentage value is displayed.
Check mark not set:
A percentage value is not displayed.
If the setting for a percentage value is displayed, the size and display position
of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner
shown below. (For detail of the element edit function, refer to page 110.)
(1) Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key.
(2) Drag a percentage value to change the display position.
232
Section
Graphs
6-9
E.g. Modifying the percentage value display position.
(1)
(2)
(3) To change the size of a displayed percentage value, double click on the value.
The properties of a percentage value display are displayed.
Position:
Indicates the display position of the percentage value.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage
value.)
Font Type:
Specify the font of the value to be displayed.
Standard, Half Height, Double Width
Scale:
Specify the scale of the value to be displayed.
1 × 1 (Equal), 1 × 2 (High), 2 × 1 (Wide), 2 × 2, 3 × 3, 4 × 4, 8 × 8
Smoothing:
Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for the
value to be displayed.
Attribute:
The display attribute can not be set (fixed as standard display).
Color
Foreground: Specify the color of the percentage value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background: Specify the background color of the percentage value display
area. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
When displaying a specific value (reference value) in an analogue meter, the
percentage value are calculated based on the values for 100%, 0%, –100%
233
Section
Graphs
6-9
When the following values are specified 100%, 0%, –100% in an analogue meter
with semi-circle shape:
Analogue
Meter
Value referred to: 3000
Value referred to: 1500
Value referred to: 0
Value referred to: –1000
Value referred to: –2000
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set using numeral memory
table entries as indicated below, the percentage value of the reference value is
calculated according to the value stored at the specified address.
Analogue
Meter
Numeral
Memory
Table
0
1
2 3000
0
3
4 –2000
5
234
Section
Graphs
6-9
6-9-3 Broken-line Graph
The present values of several consecutive numeral memory table entries are
displayed in the form of a broken-line graph.
Broken-line graph
100%
Numeral memory
table
30
80
0%
32
72
33
83
(1) The values of consecutive memory table entries are converted into percentage values, in the range from 0 to 100% or from –100% to 100%, and displayed in the form of a broken-line graph.
Operation procedure
[Objects] → [Graph]
→ [Broken-line Graph]
Selection using the menu bar:
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Frame
+Range
–Range
Line
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of a broken-line graph.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the broken-line
graph)
Size:
Indicates the size of a broken-line graph.
Frame:
Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a broken-line
graph.
Display Sign: Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is
displayed.
Direction:
Specify the display direction (display direction of numeral
memory table entries in ascending order) of a broken-line graph.
Right ( → ), Left ( ← ), Up ( ↑ ), Down ( ↓ )
235
Section
Graphs
6-9
Color
Frame:
Specify the color of a broken-line graph frame if [Frame] is
selected. (Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
+Range:
Specify the color of broken-line graph displayed for a positive value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
–Range:
Specify the color of broken-line graph displayed for a negative value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Valid only when [Display Sign] is selected.
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
:
Specify this when displaying multiple broken lines. The line
properties [Line] are displayed.
:
Specify this when deleting broken lines.
:
Specify this when modifying broken lines. The line properties
[Line] are displayed.
Line
Start Table Entry: Specify the start table entry number of the numeral memory
table entries that are displayed in a broken-line graph.
No. of Points:
Specify the number of vertices in the broken-line graph.
Interval Type
Even:
Specify this when displaying numeral memory table entries at even
intervals.
Uneven:
Specify this when displaying numeral memory table entries at
user-selected intervals.
:
Set the broken-line intervals if [Uneven] is selected.
Line
Color:
Specify the broken-line color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Style:
Specify the broken-line style.
Solid, Dash, Dot-dash, Dot-dot-dash
100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 100% value is set with a numeral memory
table entry: set the table entry number of the numeral memory
table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 100% value is set with a constant: set the
value to be taken as the 100% value.
0%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 0% value is set with a numeral memory table
entry: set the table entry number of the numeral memory table.
Value:
236
Specify this item if a 0% value is set with a constant:
set the value to be taken as the 0% value.
Section
Graphs
6-9
–100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a –100% value is set with a numeral memory
table entry: set the table entry number of the numeral memory
table.
Value:
Specify this item if a –100% value is set with a constant:
set the value to be taken as the –100% value.
Note that specification for –100% is valid only when [Display Sign] is selected.
Guidance
The following types of broken-line graph element are provided.
0% to 100% display
Direction: Right
Direction: Up
°Higher digit word
³ Higher digit word
Direction: Left
Direction: Down
±Higher digit word
² Higher digit word
–100% to 100% display
Direction: Right
Direction: Up
°Higher digit word
³ Higher digit word
Direction: Left
Direction: Down
±Higher digit word
² Higher digit word
Which of [0 to 100%] and [–100 to 100%] broken-line graphs is displayed
should be selected with the setting for [Display Sign] in the general properties.
Check mark set:
–100 to 100% display
Check mark not set:
0 to 100% display
If you specify a broken-line graph element, only one broken line is displayed.
To modify the settings for the broken line, select the broken line to be modified
and click on
. The line properties are displayed.
237
Section
Graphs
6-9
To add a broken line, click on
. A broken line is added and the line
properties are displayed for the added broken line. A maximum of 256 broken
lines can be created.
To delete a broken line, select the broken line to be deleted with the “Settings”
and click on
. The specified broken line is deleted.
The following four types of line are provided for displaying broken-line graphs.
Solid
Dash
Dot-dash
Dot-dot-dash
Set the line type with the [Style] property.
The relationships between the points (vertices) in a broken-line graph and
numeral memory table contents are shown below.
When display direction is right
Numeral memory table
30
70
50
88
28
67
Start table entry number
Number of points
The intervals between numeral memory table entries in a broken-line graph
can be set as even or uneven, as desired, with the [Interval Type] line property.
If you select even, the numeral memory table entries are displayed in equal
intervals.
Even intervals
If you select uneven, the intervals between numeral memory table entries can be
set as desired.
Click on
, and the interval setting dialog box is displayed.
Set number of dots
238
Section
Graphs
6-9
Intervals can be set in the manner shown below.
Note that intervals are set as numbers of dots.
(1) Specify the point for which the interval is to be set. The field of the specified
point is displayed in reverse video.
(2) Change the width between points (the number of dots).
(3) Click on
.
(4) After setting the interval for all point positions, click on
.
When displaying a broken-line graph, the display points are determined by calculating the percentage value based on the values for 100%, 0%, and –100%.
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set as indicated below, reference values are displayed in the broken-line graph as shown below.
Value referred to: 3000
100%
Value referred to: 1500
50%
Value referred to: 0
0%
Value referred to: –1000
–50%
Value referred to: –2000
–100%
239
Section
Graphs
6-9
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set using numeral memory
table entries as indicated below, the percentage value of the reference value is
calculated according to the value stored at the specified address.
Numeral memory
table
0
1
2
3
4
3000
0
–2000
5
6-9-4 Trend Graph
Changes in the contents of a numeral memory table entry with time are displayed
in the form of a trend graph.
100%
Trend graph
Numeral memory
table
80
0%
(1) The value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into percentage values at the set intervals, in the range from 0 to 100% or from –100% to 100%,
and displayed in the form of a trend graph.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Trend Graph]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Frame
Display %
+Range
–Range
Display and control
touch switches
(Only NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C)
240
Line
Section
Graphs
6-9
Property setting
General
Position:
Indicates the display position of the trend graph.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the trend
graph)
Size:
Indicates the size of the trend graph.
Display
Type:
Specify the trend graph display type.
Standard, Pen Reco (pen recording)
Drawing Width: Specify the amount of graph shift when the display is updated.
Frame:
Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for the trend graph.
Display Sign:
Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is
displayed.
Direction:
Specify the direction of trend graph movement.
Right ( → ), Left ( ← ), Up ( ↑ ), Down ( ↓ )
Sampling Cycle:
Specify the graph updating time interval.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C: 0.1 second unit
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C:
0.5 second unit
Color
Frame:
Specify the color of the trend graph frame if [Frame] is selected.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
+Range:
Specify the color of trend graph displayed for a positive value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
–Range:
Specify the color of trend graph displayed for a negative value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
Valid only when [Display Sign] is selected.
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Settings
:
Specify this when displaying multiple graphs (lines). The line
properties [Line] are displayed.
:
Specify this when deleting a graph (line).
:
Specify this when modifying a graph (line). The line properties
[Line] are displayed.
Logging Property (only for NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C)
Data logging: Specify whether or not the data logging function is used.
Background:
Specify whether or not the background function is used.
241
Section
Graphs
6-9
Touch switches for logging
Next Page:
(Forward)
Specify whether or not a touch switch used to
move the display range in the direction of newer
records is used.
Previous Page:
(Rewind)
Specify whether or not a touch switch used to
move the display range in the direction of older
records is used.
Log Clear:
(Clear log)
Specify whether or not a touch switch used to
clear all logged data is used.
Touch switches for display function
Restart :
(Continue)
Specify whether or not a touch switch used to restart
the halted data sampling is used.
Stop:
Specify whether or not a touch switch used to halt
data sampling is used.
Display Clear:
(Clear display)
Specify whether or not a touch switch used to clear
the graph display is used. Note that the log data is
not cleared by this switch.
Line
Value
Table Entry:
Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table
entry whose contents are displayed in a trend graph.
Display %:
Specify whether or not a percentage value is displayed on
the screen.
Line
Color:
Specify the graph (line) color.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Style:
Specify the line type.
Solid, Dash, Dot-dash, Dot-dot-dash
100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 100% value is set with a numeral memory
table entry: set the table entry number of the numeral memory
table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 100% value is set with a constant:
set the value to be taken as the 100% value.
0%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a 0% value is set with a numeral memory
table entry: set the table entry number of the numeral memory
table.
Value:
Specify this item if a 0% value is set with a constant:
set the value to be taken as the 0% value.
–100%
Table Entry: Specify this item if a –100% value is set with a numeral memory
table entry: set the table entry number of the numeral memory
table.
Value:
242
Specify this item if a –100% value is set with a constant: set the
value to be taken as the –100% value.
Section
Graphs
6-9
Note that specification for –100% is valid only when [Display Sign] is selected.
Guidance
Following types of trend graph element are provided.
0% to 100% display
Direction: Right
Direction: Up
↑Time
→Time
Direction: Left
Direction: Down
↓Time
←Time
–100% to 100% display
Direction: Right
Direction: Up
↑Time
→Time
Direction: Left
Direction: Down
↓Time
←Time
Which of [0 to 100%] and [–100 to 100%] trend graphs is displayed should be
selected with the setting for [Display Sign] in the general attributes.
Check mark set:
–100 to 100% display
Check mark not set: 0 to 100% display
The following two types of trend graph display are provided.
Standard:
The latest drawing position moves in the direction set for [Direction].
Present
drawing
position
Next
drawing
position
243
Section
Graphs
Pen Reco:
6-9
The latest drawing position is fixed and the entire graph moves in
the direction set for [Direction].
Present display status
Next
display
status
Present drawing position
Present
drawing
position
If you specify a trend graph element, only one broken line is displayed.
To modify the settings for the line, select the line to be modified and click on
. The line properties are displayed.
To add a line, click on
. A line is added and the line properties are
displayed for the added line. A maximum of 50 lines can be created.
To delete a line, select the line to be deleted with the “Settings” and click on
. The specified line is deleted.
The following four types of line are provided for displaying trend graphs.
Solid
Dash
Dot-dash
Dot-dot-dash
Set the line type with the [Style] property.
The intervals between points of a trend graph in the time axis is specified by
[Drawing Width]. The width is set as a number of dots.
The time intervals in which the drawing value of a trend graph is read is specified by [Sampling Cycle]. Set the interval in units of 0.1 seconds for NT30,
NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C and 0.5 seconds for the NT21, NT31,
NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
The latest drawing value of a trend graph can be displayed as a percentage
value.
In the default setting, a percentage value is displayed.
Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set with the [Display %]
line property.
Check mark set:
A percentage value is displayed.
Check mark not set:
A percentage value is not displayed.
If the setting is for a percentage value to be displayed, the size and display
position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the
manner shown below. (For detail of the element edit function, refer to page
110.)
(1) Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key.
(2) Drag a percentage value to change the display position.
Example: Modifying the percentage value display position
(1)
244
(2)
Section
Graphs
6-9
(3) To change the size of a displayed percentage value, double click on the value.
The properties of the percentage value display are displayed.
Position:
Indicates the display position of the percentage value.
(The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage
value.)
Font Type:
Specify the font of a value to be displayed.
Standard, Half Height, Double Width
Scale:
Specify the scale of a value to be displayed.
1 1 (Equal), 1 2 (High), 2 1 (Wide), 2 2, 3 3, 4 4, 8 8
Smoothing:
Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for a
value to be displayed.
Attribute:
The display attribute cannot be set (fixed as standard display).
Color
Foreground: Specify the color of the percentage value.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Background: Specify the background color of the percentage value display
area.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Reference: A percentage value and other elements cannot be overlapped on a trend
graph.
With a trend graph, a percentage value can be displayed for each line. If there
are too many lines with percentage values and the correspondence between
the values and lines is not clear, use the procedure shown below to check the
line that corresponds to the percentage value.
(1) Select a trend graph.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar) – [Edit Object].
Or press Insert key (P122).
The trend graph element enters the edit enabled state and the marks
surrounding the trend graph change to red.
245
Section
Graphs
6-9
(3) Select [Edit] (menu bar) – [Select Object]. (Place where graph or % display
does not exist.)
The components of a trend graph (trend graph, percentage values) are displayed in a list. The line numbers that correspond to the individual percentage values are displayed.
If you click a line in the list, the corresponding percentage value display is
selected in the screen to make the correspondence between the line and the
percentage value clear.
Instead of the operation in step (3) above, right-clicking the mouse on the trend
graph → [Edit Object] → right-clicking the mouse on the trend graph near by the
% display where % display and frame does not exist → [Select Object], the percentage values displayed near the click point are displayed in a list.
When displaying a trend graph, the display points are determined by calculating the percentage value based on the values for 100%, 0%, and –100%.
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set as indicated below, reference values are displayed in the trend graph as shown below.
246
Value referred to: 3000
100%
Value referred to: 1500
50%
Value referred to: 0
0%
Value referred to: –1000
–50%
Value referred to: –2000
–100%
Section
Graphs
6-9
If the 100% value, 0% value, and –100% value are set using numeral memory
table entries as indicated below, the percentage value of the reference value is
calculated according to the value stored at the specified address.
Numeral memory
table
0
1
2
3
4
3000
0
–2000
5
The data logging function and background function can be used with the NT21,
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
Data logging function
The data logging function records the values used for display at a PT.
Usually, the data collected in sampling for display in a trend graph are not recorded internally. If you use the data logging function, the data are logged and
can be displayed by tracing them back.
The data logging function can be executed for up to 8 kinds of data.
Background function
The background function continues data sampling even when a trend graph is
not displayed.
With a trend graph, data sampling is executed only when a trend graph is displayed and stops when the screen is switched from the trend graph screen.
However, if the background function is used, data sampling can be continued
in the background mode (while the trend graph is not displayed). The data
sampled and logged when in background mode can be displayed by tracing
back to the past.
The background function is valid only when it is used with the data logging
function; when the background function is used, the objective data is continuously recorded. Please note that since data sampling is executed continuously
if the background function is used, the processing speed at a PT may be a little
slow.
How the data recording is changed depending on whether or not the data logging function and the background function are used is shown below. Regardless of the use of these functions, the trend graph element always starts drawing a graph from the initial state when the screen is changed to the trend graph
display screen.
<Without logging and background functions>
Switching
the screen
Trend graph screen
Returning
Other screen
Trend graph screen
(starts drawing a graph newly)
Data not logged
247
Section
Graphs
6-9
<With data logging function but without background function>
Switching
the screen
Returning
Trend graph screen
(starts drawing a
graph newly)
Data logged
Other screen
Trend graph screen
Data logged
Data not logged during this period
Previous data are re-displayed by pressing
(page return)
The trend graph is drawn newly when the screen is switched back to the trend
graph display screen. However, it is possible to redisplay the past data drawn in
the trend graph previously by pressing a touch switch that has the function to display the past data. In this case, however, the data are not logged while a trend
graph is not displayed.
<With logging and background functions>
Switching
the screen
Trend graph screen
Returning
Other screen
Trend graph screen
Data is always logged
Past data are re-displayed continuously by pressing
(page return)
Although the trend graph starts displaying new data when the screen is
switched back to the trend graph display screen, it is possible to display the
data of the period during which the trend graph was not displayed by pressing a
touch switch that has the function to display the past data.
The trend graph element can control data sampling, display and other related
operations using the special touch switches shown below.
These touch switches execute their function only once when they are pressed.
Stop touch switch
Stops data sampling. Updating of a trend graph display is also stopped at the
same time.
While sampling is halted, the touch switch is lit.
If data sampling is executed by the background function, data sampling in the
background mode is also halted.
When the background function is not used, if the screen is switched back to the
trend graph display screen after halting data sampling and calling other screen,
the trend graph is redisplayed and logging restarts automatically.
Restart (Continue) touch switch
Restarts halted data sampling. At the same time, updating of the trend graph display restarts.
248
Section
Graphs
6-9
During data sampling, the touch switch is lit.
DSP Display Clear (Clear Display) touch switch
CLR Clears the trend graph display. Even if the display is cleared, the logged data are
not cleared.
LOG Log Clear (Clear Log) touch switch
CLR Clears all logged data. At the same time, the trend graph being displayed is
cleared. This switch clears only the trend graph being displayed. The trend
graphs registered on other screens are not cleared. This switch is valid only
when the data logging function is used.
Previous Page (Rewind) touch switch
Displays the logged past data, older than the time range of the presently displayed graph. This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used.
Next Page (Forward) touch switch
Displays logged data that is newer than the time range of the presently displayed
graph. This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used.
If the latest data is displayed while the data is being logged, updating of the trend
graph display automatically restarts.
Concerning the previous page touch switch and the next page touch switch, the
one pressed later is lit.
Reference: When the data of trend graph made with NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and
NT625C were converted to the use for NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, if
touch switches for controlling trend graph is added after that, the Label of the
touch switch may not be appeared or some other marks may be appeared.
This is because the method of using marks of “FFEF to FFF5 (hexadecimal)
code” differs between NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C and NT31,
NT631, NT631C.
(With NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, they are used for touch switches for
controlling trend graph.)
Resetting the each mark of FFEF to FFF5 code with mark editor enables the correct display. For details, refer to Correcting the Screen Data Conversion (Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph) in Appendix A.
249
Section 6-10
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
6-10 Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager
Operation)
The created graphic data can be collectively registered as an element by using
the Symbol Manager. The graphic data registered collectively in a group is called
symbol or symbol data.
By registering data that is often used by the Support Tool, it is possible to use the
same data among multiple screen data (Application).
Since the graphic data for creating a keyboard and keypads for each PT model
and color/pattern combinations of tiling objects are registered and provided with
the Support Tool, you can save time when creating graphics.
6-10-1 Screen Configuration of Symbol Manager
The symbol manager screen configuration is shown below.
Menu bar
Symbol icon
Folder
Folder name
Symbol name
A folder represents one symbol data file, and symbols displayed under the folder
represent the individual symbol data registered in that file.
The name of the selected folder, or the name of the file that stores the selected
symbol is displayed in the title column of the Symbol Manager window.
Starting with V4.6, there is a Preview pane to show an overview picture and a
Listing pane to show the object contents.
For newly installed symbol data with V4.6, the preview is immediately available.
Old data can be reused into this version but a preview is not applicable. To make
250
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
Section 6-10
a preview of old data, copy the data to the screen on V4.6 and then copy it back to
the symbol manager to register the preview information.
File configuration
The symbol manager is controlled in a data file that is separate from the screen
data file.
The symbol data file configuration is shown below.
NTST4.7\Symbol
SPPLMNT.SBL
File storing the keyboard and keypad data
Color PL. SBL
File storing tiling objects
SYMFILE1.SBL
SYMFILE2.SBL
Group of files storing newly registered symbols
A file is created for each symbol
SYMFILE3.SBL
Reference: For the Support Tool, keyboard data for each PT model, color palette and ISO
elements are provided as symbol data.
251
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
Section 6-10
6-10-2 Basic Symbol Manager Operation
Starting up the symbol manager
(1) [Window] (menu bar) → [Symbol Manager]
Reference: The symbol manager window is always displayed at the top of the windows displayed on the screen. If this disturbs your operation, minimize the window by
either clicking on the
button at the upper right area in the window or selecting the [minimize] item from the control menu box displayed by the clicking on
the button at the upper left area in the window.
The symbol manager memorizes the folder that was open when you quit the
symbol manager last time and opens the same folder automatically when you
next start the symbol manager. The symbol registration state in the folder is,
however, the state when the folder was saved last.
Basic operation
Menu bar
File
Edit
New:
Creates a new file (folder).
Open:
Displays a file (folder) that is not displayed in the screen.
Close:
Closes the file (folder) presently displayed in the screen.
(The file is not deleted although it disappears from the
screen.)
Save:
Saves the specified folder by overwriting the present file.
Save As:
Saves the specified folder by changing the file name.
(Folder name remains unchanged.)
Save All:
Saves all folders to the individual files.
Exit:
Lets you exit the symbol manager.
Cut:
Moves the specified symbol data to the clip board.
(The data is deleted from the symbol manager.)
Copy:
Copies the specified symbol data to the clip board.
(The data remains in the symbol manager.)
Paste:
Pastes the symbol data, stored in the clip board by cut or
paste, to the active screen.
Delete:
Deletes the specified symbol data from the symbol manager. (The data is not stored in the clip board.)
Choose Icon: Changes the icon design of the symbol data.
Change Label: Changes a folder or symbol name.
View
252
Status Bar:
Specifies whether or not the status bar, which
displays menu item functions, etc., is displayed un-
Section 6-10
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
der the window. In the menu, if there is a check mark
to the left of [Status Bar], the status bar is displayed.
Help
Contents:
Displays the help information.
Search for Help on:
Enables you to display help information
on the input word.
About Symbol Manager:
Displays information such as the version of the symbol manager.
Screen Operation
Double click on the folder or symbol name,
and the folder opens to display the list of
registered symbol data.
Double clicking on the folder or symbol
name while the list of the registered symbol
data is displayed causes the folder to close
so that only the folder name is displayed.
“+” indicates that symbol data is registered for the folder. “–”
is displayed when the folder is open.
Clicking on this has the same effect as double clicking on the
folder name.
Reference: Folders are displayed in the alphabetical order of the folder names. In a folder,
the list of symbol data displays the symbol data in the alphabetical order of the
symbol names.
6-10-3 Operating the Symbol Manager
Opening a folder (file)
Open a folder in which symbol data is registered.
By opening the symbol collections supplied with the Support Tool or the files
saved by the symbol manager (P274), it is possible to display the opened data in
the symbol manager and to use the required one for screen creation.
Reference: The following symbol data files are supplied with the Support Tool.
Color Palette Symbol (ColorPL.SBL)
Keyboard/Keypad Collection (Spplmnt.SBL)
ISO Symbol Collections (ISO7000 (XXXX-XXXX).SBL) (CD-ROM version
only)
The opened folders (symbol data files) in the symbol manager remain displayed until they are closed. The symbol manager memorizes the folder configuration when you quit the symbol manager last time and displays the same
state when you next start the symbol manager. (The symbol registration state
in the folder is the state when the folder was saved last.)
While registering a symbol from a screen or pasting it to a screen, the folder to
be used (symbol data file) should be opened. However, if the symbol data file
has a Read-only property, the characters “Read Only” are displayed in the
symbol manager. In this case, it is not possible to perform symbol registration.
253
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
Section 6-10
(1) Select [File] in the menu bar, then select [Open].
The dialog to specify the file name is displayed. In the dialog, the folders that
contain the symbol data file to be read are displayed. (File type is fixed to a
Symbol File (*.SBL))
(2) Specify the desired folder and file name and click on
.
Opened symbol data file is displayed in the symbol manager.
Ex: Opening ISO Symbol file (ISO7000 (0001-0099).SBL)
Closing a folder (file)
Close the unnecessary folder (symbol data file) to remove it from the symbol
manager.
(1) Select the folder that should be closed in the symbol manager. The folder
name is displayed in reverse video.
(2) Select [File] in the menu bar, then select [Close].
If the file has not been saved, the message asking you whether to save it or
not is displayed.
(3) If you click the
played.
Button, the window to specify the file name is dis-
Specify the file name and save it. (If you click the
Button in the file
name specifying window, the symbol folder closes without being saved. If
you click the
Button, the symbol folder closes without being saved.
(Registered symbol will be discarded.) For details on saving, refer to Saving
a folder (file) on page 256.
Creating a new folder
Create a new folder to register the symbol data by the procedure shown below.
By collecting symbols related with each other in the same folder, the screen data
creation operation can be facilitated since searching for symbol data is simple.
Select [File] in the menu bar, then select [New].
254
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
Section 6-10
A new folder is named as “No description.”
Changing folder name
To change the folder name to one that is easy to understand, follow the operation shown below.
(1) Select the folder name that should be changed. The folder name is displayed in reverse video.
(2) Select [Edit] in the menu bar, then select [Change Label].
The label name change dialog box is displayed.
(3) Set the desired folder name and click the
Button.
Registering the symbol data
A graphic consisting of several elements is registered as a single element
(symbol).
After registering the symbol data, be sure to perform the file save operation.
To register the symbol data, select the elements to be registered collectively and
drag them to the symbol manager folder where they are to be registered.
Drag the symbol to the desired folder, then release the mouse.
The element in the source screen remains as it is.
For a new symbol, symbol name “New Symbol x” (x is a serial number) is assigned.
Reference: The symbol data can be registered also by the following operation.
(1) Select the elements to be registered in the source screen and select [Copy]
or [Cut] from the [Edit] menu in the Support Tool.
(2) Select [Paste] from the [Edit] menu in the symbol manager.
255
Section 6-10
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
In this case, symbol name “Pasted Symbol x” (x is a serial number) is assigned
for a new symbol.
Changing the symbol name
To change the symbol name to the one easy to understand, follow the operation shown below.
(1) Select the symbol name that should be changed. The symbol name is displayed in reverse video.
(2) Select [Edit] in the menu bar, then select [Change Label].
The label name change dialog box is displayed.
(3) Set your desired symbol name and click the
Button.
Changing the symbol icon
It is possible to change the icon of the symbol data to a desired one. To change
the icon, follow the procedure shown below.
The data that can be used for an icon is bit map data.
(1) Select the symbol for which the icon should be changed. The symbol name
is displayed in reverse video.
(2) Select [Edit] in the menu bar, then select [Choose Icon].
The data selection dialog box is displayed.
(3) Specify the bit map data that should be used as an icon and click on
.
Reference: For an icon, 16 16-dot, 8-color bit map data can be used. Although bit map data
larger than 16 16 dots can be used, only the 16 16 dots at the upper left area
of such data is used.
Saving a folder (file)
After registering the symbol data, save the registered data to a file by the operation shown below.
Select [File] in the menu bar, then select [Save], [Save As], or [Save All].
If there is a folder that has not been saved, the file name specifying window is
displayed regardless of the save method you chose. If this window opens, specify the file name to save the folder. Please note that the file name specifying window does not show the objective folder name, which means that the objective
256
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
Section 6-10
folder for saving cannot be distinguished if you select [Save All] when there are
several unsaved folders. It is advisable to save a folder that has not been saved
by assigning a file name beforehand.
Overwrites the file where the symbol data was originally
stored with the symbol data in the specified folder.
Saves the symbol data of the specified folder to the file of the
specified file name.
Overwrites the individual original files with the symbol data
that was open.
Reference: Before executing [Save] or [Save As], click the object folder.
Copying/deleting the registered symbol
Registered symbols can be moved or copied to another folder or deleted.
To move, copy, or delete a registered symbol, select [Edit] in the menu bar, then
select the required function ([Cut], [Copy], [Paste], [Delete]).
Moves the specified symbol to the clip board.
The specified symbol is deleted from the source folder.
Copies the specified symbol to the clip board.
The specified symbol remains in the source folder.
Pastes the symbol, stored in the clip board by the cut or copy
function, to the currently selected folder.
Deletes the specified symbol.
The symbol is not stored in the clip board.
Move or copy of a symbol is also possible by dragging the symbol using the
mouse.
If a symbol is dragged to another folder, the symbol is moved.
If a symbol is dragged to another folder while the Ctrl key is held, the symbol is
copied.
In these operations, the “+” mark is displayed at the mouse cursor.
6-10-4 Pasting a Symbol to Screen
To paste a registered symbol to the data creation screen of the Support Tool, select the symbol and drag it to the desired position on the data creation screen,
then release the mouse.
The symbol is copied to the data creation screen.
Drag the symbol to the data creation screen and release the mouse.
The symbol copied to a data creation screen can be used in the same manner as
other elements.
257
Registering Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)
Section 6-10
Reference: Symbols created by different PT models can be pasted to a data creation
screen. In this pasting operation, the symbol data is automatically converted
and, if an error occurred in data conversion, an error message is displayed. For
details, refer to Appendix A Data Conversion.
Concerning image/library data, only the code is registered at the symbol manager. Therefore, if the image/library data is pasted to another screen data file,
the image/library data of that code in the file to which the data was pasted is
displayed.
If the ISO symbols, supplied by the CD-ROM version Support Tool, are used
with NT20, NT20S, or NT600S, those symbols that consist of elements that
are not supported may not be displayed correctly.
Image/library collection, supplied by the CD-ROM version Support Tool, can
be used only with models that can use image/library.
Pasting an ISO symbol
To paste an ISO symbol to the data creation screen of the Support Tool, select the
symbol and drag it to the desired position on the data creation screen, then release the mouse. (Same operation as the other symbols.)
Drag the symbol to the data creation screen and release the mouse.
Reference: It is not possible to change the colors and size of ISO symbols, since the elements are registered in the grouped status.
6-10-5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol
Color palette symbol
Color palette symbol is a symbol for which tiling objects are registered with their
tiling patterns, foreground and background colors respectively combined. You
can select required tiling objects while checking the tiling status on screen.
Color palette symbol is separated into tiling patterns and each pattern is set as
one symbol as shown below. Combinations of foreground and background colors are registered for each symbol.
258
Section 6-11
Recipe Screen Element
Operation procedure
Follow the procedure below to use color palette symbol.
1. Open new screen to place color palette on it.
2. Drag required tiling pattern symbol from palette symbol and drop it on the
screen created in 1.
3. Select [Ungroup] from the [Draw] menu to cancel the grouped status (default
status) after confirming that the dragged symbol is in selected status.
4. Clear the check mark for [Full Tiling] from the [View] menu to select the tiling
object easily after you decided which one to use, then drag it to the objective
screen while depressing [Ctrl] key (or perform copy&paste). To check the tiling status, select [Full Tiling] from the [View] menu. However, in this status,
the position of tiling object will not be clear. Cancel the [Full Tiling] status when
required.
5. Border color of tiling objects in color palette symbol is set to White. Change
the border color of tiling object by displaying property sheet if required.
Note that the transparent background color is not registered for color palette
symbol. Change the property afterwards when you want to apply transparent
background.
6-11 Recipe Screen Element
6-11-1 Recipe Screen Element
Recipe screen element provides you with an interface to apply a set of data values from the recipe table to the PLC.
It can only be placed on a standard screen and it can be displayed in the parent
screen. The screen element property dialog box has 4 pages – general, touch
switch, setting and interlock.
Operation procedure
Selection using the menu bar:
[Objects] [Data Input] [Recipe]
Selection using the drawing toolbar:
Terminology
Description of Recipe Screen Element Components
Name
Specifies the recipe name.
259
Section 6-11
Recipe Screen Element
Number, ... Color
Displays parameter names.
Object A ... Object C
Displays record names.
100, ... 4
Displays record numeral data.
Write
Transfer data to PLC.
Read
Transfer data from PLC.
Scroll 1 page up.
Scroll 1 page down.
Scroll 1 page left.
Scroll 1 page right.
Scroll 1 line up.
Scroll 1 line down.
Scroll 1 line left.
Scroll 1 line right.
No.
Display recipe number.
260
Section 6-11
Recipe Screen Element
Property setting
General
Note
The text data display in the recipe frame will be such that any character that exceeds the specified column width will not be shown. This affects the following
fields: recipe name, record name and parameter name. For example, given a
recipe entry named “Long Recipe,” the recipe frame will show “Long” when the
Record Name Width is set as 4.
The parameter data values display will depend on the “Param Column Width”
setting. If it is set as 2 and the parameter data is 200, then # will be displayed for
each digit. The value will be displayed as 200 only when the column width is set
greater than 2.
The width of each cell in the recipe frame will be set such that the width is a multiple of the touch switch grid size, and just enough to accommodate the cell data
display. An example recipe frame will have the frame lines exactly over the touch
switch grid. The width of a 2-character-wide cell will be exactly 1 touch switch grid
wide.
Position:
Displays the position of the top-left corner of the
screen element.
Size:
Displays the size of the screen element.
Show Parameter:
Displays parameter when checked.
Show Serial No.:
Displays serial number when checked.
261
Section 6-11
Recipe Screen Element
No. of Parameters:
Sets the number of parameters to display on the
screen.
Display Line Qty:
Sets the number of record rows to display on the
screen.
Param Column Width:
Sets the width of each parameter column. All columns
have the same width. The actual width (in pixels) will
be in terms of touch switch grid size.
Record Name Width:
Sets the width of the record name column. All columns
have the same width. The actual width (in pixels) will
be in terms of touch switch grid size.
Scale:
Defines the font size for alphanumeric characters.
Smoothing:
Defines whether alphanumeric characters have
smoothing effect.
Frame Colour:
Defines the frame color of the screen element.
Record Name Colour
Foreground: Defines the foreground color of the serial numbers, recipe name
and record names part of the screen element.
Background:Defines the background color of the serial numbers, recipe name
and record names part of the screen element.
Parameter Comment Colour
Foreground: Defines the foreground color of the recipe name and parameter
name part of the screen element.
Background:Defines the background color of the recipe name and parameter
name part of the screen element.
Parameter Data Colour
Foreground: Defines the foreground color of the parameter data part of the
screen element.
Background:Defines the background color of the parameter data part of the
screen element.
262
Section 6-11
Recipe Screen Element
Setting
Recipe Entry:
Sets the recipe entry to refer to. The “...” button invokes the
recipe table when it is clicked.
Edit Param:
Call up the Parameter Setting Table.
Write Notify Address
PLC Address:
Inputs the write flag PLC address. If this is a
valid address, the write notify bit in the
memory map is set.
Set:
Sets the write flag PLC address via an address composition dialog.
I/O Comments:
Inputs comments for the write flag PLC address. The “...” button will invoke the I/O
comment table.
Show Window/Keyboard Screen:
Allow the use of window/keyboard screen.
Screen No.
Local 1 or Local 2: Sets the keyboard screen to use with this recipe object.
Either Local 1 or Local 2 alone can be enabled.
Screen
Position X & Position Y: Sets the position for the keyboard screen.
Screen Attributes
Replace Local Window: Determine whether to replace the local window.
263
Section 6-11
Recipe Screen Element
Touch Switch
Read/Write Touch Switch
Read:
Show Read touch switch.
Write:
Show Write touch switch.
Page Scroll Touch Switch
Up:
Show Page Scroll Up touch switch ( ).
Down:
Show Page Scroll Down touch switch ( ).
Left:
Show Page Scroll Left touch switch (
Right:
Show Page Scroll Right touch switch (
).
).
Line Scroll Touch Switch
Show Line Scroll Up touch switch (
Down:
Show Line Scroll Down touch switch (
Left:
Show Line Scroll Left touch switch (
Right:
Show Line Scroll Right touch switch (
Interlock
Refer to 6-1-12 Interlock.
264
).
Up:
).
).
).
SECTION 7
Memory Table Setting
Memory tables are areas in a PT for storing numeric value data and character string data. These areas are used for communicating with PC (PLC).
7-1
Common Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 Reference Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 Search Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-3 Batch Address Change Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-4 Edit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-5 Copy Increment Setting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Numeral Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 Related Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3 Description of Numeral Memory Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Character String Memory Table (String Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2 Related Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3 Description of Character String Memory Table (String Table) Fields . . . . . . . . .
7-3-4 Inserting Mark Data into a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-5 Inserting Image Data into a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-6 Inserting Library Data into a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Bit Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2 Related Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3 Description of Bit Memory Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Extended I/O Input Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-2 Description of Extended I/O Input Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Extended I/O Output Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-2 Description of Extended I/O Output Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 I/O Comment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-2 Description of I/O Comment Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-3 Importing I/O Comments from a Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-4 Importing I/O Comment from Tab-delimited Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8 F-Key Input Notify Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8-2 Description of F-Key Input Notify Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 Mathematical Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-2 Supported Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-3 Supported PLC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-4 Description of Mathematical Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-5 Description of Set Mathematical Formula Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-6 Description of Edit Operand Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-7 Description of Edit Result Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-8 Description of Move To Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10 Recipe Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-1 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-2 Description of Recipe Table Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10-3 Record Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
266
266
267
270
272
274
275
275
276
276
277
281
281
282
282
284
285
286
286
287
287
288
291
292
293
295
296
296
296
297
298
299
303
305
305
306
306
306
306
307
308
309
310
311
311
311
311
312
315
265
Section
Common Operation
7-1
7-1
Common Operation
The operating procedures common to all memory tables are described below.
Copy setting button
Batch address change button
Edit button
Set button
Specified number display button
Reference button
Search button
Operation starts by specifying the number, that is, clicking on the objective line
(memory table entry number). The shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown
below when it enters the No. field.
7-1-1 Reference Operation
The reference screen displays the screen numbers and the table entry numbers
in which the specified table entry is used, in the form of a list, and the screen or
element that corresponds to the specified table entry is displayed.
Reference: Reference operation is valid only when a memory table window is opened with
the [Tools] → [Table] operation. If the memory table window is called from the element property dialog box, reference operation is not possible.
Description of reference dialog box
Table Entry
Displays the selected table entry number.
Screen/Table
Displays the screen number or the table entry number where the specified table
entry is used.
Whether the displayed number is a screen number or a table entry number can
be determined from the displayed number as shown below.
For screen numbers, only a number is displayed.
266
Section
Common Operation
7-1
For table entry numbers, a number is preceded by a code that represents the
table type.
The codes representing table types are summarized below.
Table type
Code
N
Numeral memory table
S
Character string memory table (String table)
B
Bit memory table
I
Extended I/O input table
O
Extended I/O output table
M
Mathematical table*1
*1
Reference operation is slightly different for mathematical table. When a mathematical table entry is created with numeral table entry as either operand or result, a reference is created to the corresponding entry in numeral table. When
operand/result is PLC address, a reference is created to the corresponding address entry in I/O comment table.
Comments
Displays screen comments corresponding to a screen number.
No. of References
Displays the number of appearances of the screen or the table entry.
Operation
(1) Click on the table entry number of the reference memory table entry.
(2) Click on
played.
. List of referenced screen/table entry number is dis-
(3) In the reference dialog box, specify the objective screen/table entry number
and click on
.
As an alternative to the operation above, you may double click on the objective element.
The specified screen automatically opens to display the specified element.
7-1-2 Search Operation
You can locate specific data set in a table by using the search operation, and also
replace the found data with the desired data.
Search and replacement is possible for the following types of memory table.
Note that search and replacement is always executed toward the end of a table.
This means that search and replacement is possible within the range from the
present cursor position in the table to the last entry number in the table.
Table Type
Objective of Search/Replacement
Numeral memory table
PC (PLC) address, initial value
Character string memory table
(String table)
PC (PLC) address, contents of initial value
Bit memory table
PC (PLC) address, image/library code
267
Section
Common Operation
Table Type
7-1
Objective of Search/Replacement
I/O comment table
I/O comment
Extended I/O input table
–––
Extended I/O output table
–––
Description of search dialog box
PC (PLC) address
Initial value or contents of initial value
Image/library code
I/O comment
Search By
Specify the objective data for the search or replacement operation.
PC (PLC) address:
Data set for addresses of table entries.
Initial value (contents): Data set for the initial values of a numeral memory table
entry or character string memory table entry (string
table).
Image/library code:
Image/library codes set for a bit memory table entry.
I/O comment:
I/O comment in I/O comment table.
Find What
Set the data to be searched for or replaced.
Replace With
Set the new data to replace the data set for [Find What].
Clicking this button starts search processing.
When the specified data is found, the cursor in the table automatically moves to
the found table entry number.
Search for the next appearance by clicking on this button again.
Clicking this button starts replace processing.
The data specified for [Find What] is searched for and replaced with the data set
for [Replace With].
268
Section
Common Operation
7-1
When the specified data is found, the cursor in the table automatically moves to
the found table entry number.
Search for the next appearance by clicking on this button again.
Clicking this button starts replace processing.
The data specified for [Find What] is searched for and replaced with the data set
for [Replace With].
All appearances are replaced with the specified data at one time.
Operation procedure (search)
(1) Specify the table address (the start position of the search range).
(2) Click on
.
(3) Select the objective of the search in the [Search By] box.
(4) Specify the search objective data in the [Find What] box.
(5) Click on
.
Operation procedure (replace)
(1) Specify the table address (the start position of the replace range).
(2) Click on
.
(3) Select the objective of replace in the [Search By] box.
(4) Specify the data to be replaced in the [Find What] box.
(5) Specify the data to replace the old data in the [Replace With] box.
269
Section
Common Operation
(6) Click on
or
7-1
.
D00000
D00030
7-1-3 Batch Address Change Operation
The set PC (PLC) addresses can be changed into the required addresses in a
batch. Since the change source can be specified as a range, processing such as
changing the address range DM1000 to DM01499 to the address range DM1800
to DM2299 is possible at one time. Shifting in bit units is also possible.
Note that the batch address change operation is allowed only for displayed table
entries.
Independent with the location of the cursor, this address change will be performed to the whole table.
Description of batch address change dialog box
Find – Channel (Word)
Specify the word type of the batch change source.
Find – Start Range
Specify the start address of the source range for the batch address change.
Find – End Range
Specify the end address of the source range for batch address change.
The address to be set for [End Range] must always be larger than or equal to the
address set for [Start Range].
270
Section
Common Operation
7-1
Change to – Channel (Word)
Specify the word type and start address after the change.
Addresses are changed within the number of specified points from the start address (number of points from “Start Range” to “End Range”).
Change Comment
Specify whether or not the same I/O comment appended to an address before
the change is appended to the address after the change.
To append the same I/O comment, click on the check box to display a check mark
in it.
Batch address change processing starts when you click on this button.
How addresses are changed
In the operation for changing addresses in bit units, processing is executed assuming that bit 15 of a word is immediately followed by bit 0 of the next word.
Addresses are changed as shown below according to the set search range and
the address after the change.
Example: Bit memory table
Address and Bit set
for [End Range]
CIO area
Address and Bit set
for [Start Range]
Word 1
CIO area
Bit
15
0 15
Bit
15
0 15
HR area
Word 11
Word 0
10
0
0
HR area
Word 10
[Change To] – [Address]
(start address after the change)
Before change
After change
0000010
H0001000
0000012
H0001002
0000100
H0001006
0000110
H0001100
0000115
H0001105
Operation procedure
(1) Click on
.
(2) Select the type of word before the change in the [Channel] box.
(3) Specify the range of the change by setting addresses at the [Start Range]
and [End Range] boxes.
(4) Specify the word and the address after the change in the corresponding
boxes in the [Change To] area.
271
Section
Common Operation
7-1
(5) Set a check mark in the Change Comment check box as desired.
If a check mark is set in this check box, I/O comments appended to the addresses before the change are also appended to the addresses after the
change.
(6) Click on
.
7-1-4 Edit Operation
The procedure for clearing, cutting, copying, pasting, and incremental copying of
the data set in a memory table is described below.
In the “copy to next” operation, the specified incremental amount is automatically
added to the data in the memory table entry at the cursor location and copied to
the memory table entry with the next number.
The procedure for specifying the incremental amount to be used for “copy to
next” is explained in 7-1-5 Copy Increment Setting Operation.
Reference: To start editing, click on
or right click the mouse on a table entry
number to display the menu, then select the desired edit function in this menu.
It may not be possible to select an edit function if an input field is displayed. If
the selection of an edit function is not possible, left click the mouse on a table
entry number field to select the entire line and, after that, click on
or right click the mouse on a table entry number to display the menu.
When the two screen data files of the same PT model are opened using [Import
Component] command, it is possible to paste the table data that was cut/copied by one Support Tool to a table of another Support Tool. (For details, refer to
3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the
Second Support Tool).)
Clear
Clears the data in the selected memory table entry.
Cut
Cuts the data in the selected memory table entry and stores it in the clipboard.
The cut data can be pasted to another memory table entry.
Copy
Copies the data in the selected memory table entry to the clipboard.
The copied data can be pasted to another memory table entry.
Paste
Pastes the data stored in the clipboard by the cut or copy function to the memory
table entry at the cursor position.
272
Section
Common Operation
7-1
Copy to Next
Executes the “copy to next” operation.
How this function is executed differs according to the table type as shown below.
Increment Item
Table Type
Initial Value
PC (PLC) Address
Numeral memory table
Addition processing
Addition processing
Character string memory table
(String table)
Cannot be specified.
Addition processing
Bit memory table
Cannot be specified.
Addition processing
Extended I/O input table
Cannot be specified.
Extended I/O output table
Cannot be specified.
Operation procedure (Clear)
The clear function clears the data at the specified address of a table.
Since the data is not stored in the clipboard, the data deleted by the clear function
cannot be restored by the paste function.
(1) Click on the table entry number of the data to be cleared.
(2) Click on
or right click the table entry number.
(3) Select [Clear].
Operation procedure (Cut)
The cut function cuts the data at the specified address of a table and stores it in
the clip board.
The data deleted by the cut function can be used for pasting.
(1) Click on the table entry number of the data to be cut.
(2) Click on
or right click the table entry number.
(3) Select [Cut].
Operation procedure (Copy)
The copy function copies the data at the specified address of a table to the clip
board.
The data copied by the copy function can be used for pasting.
(1) Click on the table entry number of the data to be copied.
(2) Click on
or right click the table entry number.
(3) Select [Copy].
Operation procedure (Paste)
The paste function pastes the data stored in the clip board by the cut or copy operation to the specified table entry.
(1) Click on the table entry number of the table where the data is to be pasted.
(2) Click on
or right click the table entry number.
(3) Select [Paste].
273
Section
Common Operation
7-1
Operation procedure (Copy To Next)
The “copy to next” function copies the data at the specified address of a memory
table to the next address after adding the specified amount to the existing data.
The procedure for specifying the incremental amount is explained in 7-1-5 Copy
Increment Setting Operation.
(1) Click on the table entry number of the copy source table.
or right click the table entry number.
(2) Click on
(3) Select [Copy To Next].
7-1-5 Copy Increment Setting Operation
To set the incremental amount used for the “copy to next” operation, follow the
steps described below.
Copy Increment Setting dialog box
Value – Increment By
Specify the incremental amount for the initial value data in a numeral memory
table entry.
The amount set here is valid only for the numeral memory table.
Value – Input Type
Specify whether the incremental amount is specified in decimal or hexadecimal.
The specified item is identified by the indication of a radio button.
The setting is valid only for the numeral memory table.
Address – Increment By
Specify the incremental amount for table addresses.
Address – Format
Specify whether the incremental amount is specified in decimal or hexadecimal.
The specified item is identified by the indication of a radio button.
Operation procedure
(1) Click on
.
(2) Specify the incremental amount to be added to the initial value in the numeral memory table at [Value] – [Increment By].
(3) Specify whether the notation of the incremental amount set above is decimal
or hexadecimal at [Value] – [Input Type].
(4) Specify the table address incremental amount at [Address] – [Increment By]
(5) Specify whether the notation of the incremental amount set above is decimal
or hexadecimal at [Value] – [Input Type].
274
Section
Numeral Memory Table
(6) Click on
7-2
to close the dialog box.
(7) Click on the table entry number of the copy source table.
(8) Click on
or right click the table entry number.
(9) Select [Copy to Next].
7-1-6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number
Description of [Go to] dialog box
Entry
Specify the table entry number of the table to be displayed.
The cursor moves to the specified table entry number.
Operation procedure
(1) Click on
.
(2) Specify the table entry number of the table to be displayed.
(3) Click on
7-2
.
Numeral Memory Table
Numeral Memory Table
The numeral memory table is an area provided in a PT to store numeric value
data.
A numeral memory table entry is allocated to one or two words in a PC (PLC) and
the numeral memory table entry used for display can be shared with the PC
(PLC).
275
Section
Numeral Memory Table
7-2
With elements such as numeral display, graph, and numeral input, reading/writing of a numeric value is executed by specifying the numeral memory table entry
number.
PT
Screen
Numeral memory
table
Numeral display 1234
element
Numeral data
input element
Initial value
Initialization
Read
2345
Write
0
Read
1
Bar graph
Storage type
No. of words
PC (PLC)
address
I/O comment
Reference
2
Shared
Shared
PC (PLC)
Shared
3
4
5
7-2-1 Operation Procedure
A numeral memory table entry is displayed by the operation described below.
At the property settings for individual elements, click on
number field.
in the table entry
Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table], then click the [Numeral] tab.
Setting
For numeral memory table entries, the objective of an operation is specified by
clicking on a line. The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard
or by selection using a drop-down list.
For the operation procedure for
,
,
,
,
, and
, refer to 7-1 Common Operation.
(Note that
cannot be used if it is displayed by the operation using an
element property.)
Reference: For PT models other than NT20, NT20S and NT600S, numeral memory table
entries No. 247 to No. 255 are used by the clock function and, therefore, cannot
be allocated to a PC (PLC).
7-2-2 Related Elements
When reading numeral data from a numeral memory table entry
Numeral display element
[Objects] → [Numeral Display]
Bar graph element
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Bar Graph]
Analogue meter element
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Analogue Meter]
Broken-line graph element
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Broken-line Graph]
Trend graph element
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Trend Graph]
276
Section
Numeral Memory Table
7-2
Image object (Indirect reference)
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Image Display]
Library object (Indirect reference)
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Library Display]
Standard lamp (Label type: Numeral display)
[Objects] → [Lamp] → [Standard] → ([Edit] in the Label property of standard
lamp)
Touch switch (Label type: Numeral display)
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] → ([Edit] in the Label property of touch switch)
When writing numeral data to a numeral memory table entry
Numeral input element
[Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
Thumbwheel switch element
[Objects] → [Data Input] → [Thumbwheel Switch]
When copying numeral data between numeral table entries, or when setting a
constant for a numeral memory table entry
Touch switch (copy setting)
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Settings-Copy Setting] in property sheet
7-2-3 Description of Numeral Memory Table Fields
The display format varies slightly depending on the PT model. The example
screen shown above is for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
Value
Specify the initial value to be set when the power is switched ON, the PT is reset,
or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN.
The range of values that can be input in this field is shown below.
PT Model
Input Type
Input Range
Other than NT21, NT31,
NT31C NT631
NT31C,
NT631, and
NT631
BCD
NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631, and NT631
Decimal
–2147483648 to 2147483647
Hexadecimal
$00000000 to $FFFFFFFF*2
Hexadecimal
F9999999 to 99999999
00000000 to FFFFFFFF*1
277
Section
Numeral Memory Table
7-2
*1:
F in the most significant digit position (8th digit) indicates a negative value.
*2:
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, a hexadecimal number can be input by entering $ at the beginning of a numeric value. The input
hexadecimal value is converted to decimal for display.
For PT models other than the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the
input 8-digit hexadecimal value is simply stored as it is; there are no distinctions
between BCD and hexadecimal for these models. If the input numeric value is
displayed in BCD format, F in the most significant digit position (8th digit) is
treated as a negative sign.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the input numeric value is
stored after conversion to signed binary data (2 words).
Setting of an initial value is valid when the resume function is not selected and the
[Initial] item is selected for the numeral memory table entry, and in this case the
content of the numeral memory table entry is returned to the initial value. If the PT
has the memory table initialization function, this function can also be used to return the content of a numeral memory table entry to the initial value.
Initial
Specify whether or not the content of the numeral memory table entry is written to
the allocated word in the host when the PT is switched on or reset, or the mode is
changed from the System Menu to RUN.
The term “initialize” means the processing to initialize the content of a word in the
host with the content in a numeral memory table entry. The setting for [Initial] is
not valid if the numeral memory table entry is not allocated to a word in the host.
To make the [Initial] item valid, click on the check box to display a cross mark ()
in the box. If the box is clicked on while it is in the valid state, the [Initial] item is
made invalid.
Reference: The content of numeral memory table entries at the start of PT operation is as
shown below according to whether or not a numeral memory table entry is allocated to the host, the [Initial] setting for the numeral memory table entry, and
whether or not the resume function is used.
Allocation to
Host
Allocated
[Initial]
setting
Initialized
(valid)
Resume Function
Used
Not Used
Existing numeral memory
table value retained
(also for the word in the
host)
Initial value of the numeral memory table
(also for the word in the
host)
Initial value of the numeral memory table entry if it is
initialized by System Menu operation
(also for the word in the host)
Not initialized Content of word in the host
(invalid)
Not allocated
(Invalid)
Existing numeral memory Initial value of the numertable value retained
al memory table entry
In case numeral table entry has been initialized in
the system menu operation, initial value of the numeral memory table entry
Storage Type (only for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C)
Specify if a numeral in the PC (PLC) is treated as BCD or binary data when reading/writing the content of a PC (PLC) word to which a numeral memory table
278
Section
Numeral Memory Table
7-2
entry is allocated. This setting is valid only for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631,
and NT631C. With other PT models, numeric values are always treated as BCD.
BCD:
The content of an allocated word is regarded as BCD
(binary coded decimal).
When the content of an allocated word is read, it is stored as signed
binary data. If F is set at the most significant digit position in the allocated word, the content is regarded as a negative value. If an error is
found in the content of an allocated word (A to E at the most significant
digit position or A to F in other than at the most significant digit position),
the read out content is not stored in a numeral table. (The previously
stored content remains in the numeral table.)
When data is written to an allocated word, the signed binary data in the
numeral memory table entry is converted into BCD before writing. If a
negative value is written, F is entered at the most significant digit position. (In this case, the number of storable digits is reduced by one.) If
the number of digits in the content of a numeral memory table entry is
greater than the number of digits of the allocated word in the PC (PLC),
only the numeric value is written from the least significant digit value.
Binary:
The content of an allocated word is regarded as binary data.
When reading the content of the allocated word, the read content is
stored in a numeral memory table entry without change.
When writing a numeric value to the allocated word, the content of the
numeral memory table entry is written as it is. If the number of digits in
the content of a numeral memory table entry is greater than the number
of digits of the allocated word in the PC (PLC), only the numeric value is
written from the least significant digit value.
System: Conforms to the setting for [Numeral Display Type] of [System] in the
PC (PLC) Configuration.
Words
Specify the number of words to be allocated to a numeral memory table entry.
The possible specifications are 1 and 2.
If the setting is 1 word, the 4-digit BCD or binary data is shared by the PT and
PC (PLC).
If the setting is 2 words, the 8-digit BCD or binary data is shared by the PT and
PC (PLC).
When the setting is 2, the 1st to 4th digit data is allocated to the lower digit word in
the PC (PLC) and the 5th to 8th digit data is allocated to the higher digit word.
PT models other than the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C
If the setting has been made to display a sign, one digit (bit 4) in the most significant digit position is regarded as representing a sign; if F (1111 in binary) is set,
the numeric value is regarded as negative and if any other code is set, the numeric value is regarded as positive. Therefore, if the numeric value is displayed with
a sign, the maximum number of significant digits of a negative value is 3 if 1 word
is set and 7 if 2 words is set.
Example: When 1 word is set, the value –123 is treated as F123 in hexadecimal
in a numeral memory table entry.
279
Section
Numeral Memory Table
7-2
Similarly, when 2 words are set, the value –1234567 is treated as
F1234567 in hexadecimal in a numeral memory table entry.
PT models NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C
Regardless of the number of allocated words, 2 words are always secured for a
numeral memory table entry and a numeric value is stored as signed binary
data. If the setting for [Storage Type] is decimal, F appearing at the most significant digit position is treated as a negative sign. In this case, therefore, the number of significant digits of a negative value is one digit less than the number of
significant digits of a positive value, as with conventional PT models.
Example: If the settings are BCD and 1 word, the value –123 is treated as F123
in a PC (PLC) word and FFFFFF85 in a numeral memory table entry.
However, the value F123 in a PC (PLC) word is 0000F123 (61731 in
decimal) in a numeral memory table entry if the [Storage Type] is
hexadecimal.
Similarly, if the settings are BCD and 2 words, the value –1234567 is
treated as F1234567 in a PC (PLC) word and FFED2979 in a numeral memory table entry. However, the value F1234567 in a PC (PLC)
word is F1234567 (–249346713 in decimal) in a numeral memory
table entry if the [Storage Type] is hexadecimal.
Example
In PC (PLC)
Word
Write To
No. of Words
Storage Type
↔
1 word
BCD
FFFFFF85
(in decimal: –123)
↔
1 word
Binary
FFFFF123
(in decimal: –3805)
↔
2 words
BCD
↔
2 words
Binary
→
1 word
BCD
000011D7
(in decimal: –4567)
→
1 word
Binary
00004567
(in decimal: –17767)
F567
←
1 word
BCD
FFED2979
(in decimal: –1234567)
2979
←
1 word
Binary
FFED2979
(in decimal: –1234567)
F123
F1234567
4567
Note
In Numeral Memory Table
FFED2979
(in decimal: –1234567)
F1234567
(in decimal: –249346713)
If only one word is allocated although two words are necessary to express a numeric value, only the lower 4 digits of a numeric value are read or written. A sufficient number of words must be allocated for reading/writing a numeric value.
PLC Address
Specify the PC (PLC) address (start address) of the area where numeral memory
table entries are allocated.
I/O Comment
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) word.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
280
Section
Character String Memory Table (String Table)
7-3
Ref
Indicates whether the table entry with the specified number is already used or
not.
Yes:
No:
Already used as an element.
Not used.
If the indication is Yes, you can check where the table entry in question is used by
clicking on
.
, refer to 7-1-1 Reference Operation.)
(For details of
7-3
Character String Memory Table (String Table)
The character string memory table (String table) is an area provided in a PT to
store character string data.
A character string memory table entry (string table) is allocated to 1 to 20 words in
a PC (PLC) and a character string memory table entry (string table) used for display can be shared by the PT and the PC (PLC).
It is possible to insert mark data, image data or library data into a character string.
Note that, however, NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S do not have image
data and library data. With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C without NT20/30/620-compatible mode, it is not permissible to insert image data and
library data into a character string.
With elements such as character string display and character string input, reading/writing of character string data is executed by specifying the character string
memory table entry (string table) number.
PT
Screen
Character string
display element
Character string
input element
OMRON
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Read
PT
Write
0
Initial value
Initialization
No. of words
PC (PLC)
address
I/O comment
Reference
Shared
Shared
PC (PLC)
1
2
3
4
5
7-3-1 Operation Procedure
A character string memory table entry (string table) is displayed by the operation
described below.
At the property settings for individual elements, click on
number field.
in the table entry
Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table], then click [String] tab.
Setting
For character string memory table entries (string table), the objective of operation is specified by clicking on a line. The necessary setting can be made by input
using a keyboard or by selection using a drop-down list.
281
Section
Character String Memory Table (String Table)
:
:
:
Inserts mark data.
Inserts image data.
Inserts library data.
For the operation procedure for
,
(Note that
7-3
, and
,
,
,
, refer to 7-1 Common Operation.
cannot be used if it is displayed by the operation using an
element property.)
7-3-2 Related Elements
When reading from a character string memory table entry (string table)
Character string display element
Alarm list
Alarm history
[Object] → [String]
[Object] → [Alarm] → [List]
[Object] → [Alarm] → [History]
When writing to a character string memory table entry (string table)
Character string input element
[Object] → [Data Input] → [String]
When copying character strings between character string memory table entry
entries (string table)
Touch switch (copy setting)
ting]
[Object] → [Touch Switch] → [Copy Set-
7-3-3 Description of Character String Memory Table (String Table) Fields
Value
Specify the initial value to be set when the power is switched ON, the PT is reset,
or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN.
For an initial value, a character string containing a maximum of 40 characters can
be specified. (20 characters for NT11S/NT11, 32 characters for NT20/NT20S)
To display “\”, input two characters without a blank, like “\\”.
Setting of an initial value is valid when the resume function is not selected and the
[Initial] item is selected for the character string memory table entry (string table),
and in this case the content of the character string memory table entry (string
table) is returned to the initial value. If the PT has the memory table initialization
function, this function can also be used to return the content of a character string
memory table entry (string table) to the initial value.
282
Section
Character String Memory Table (String Table)
7-3
By clicking the
,
, or
Button, you can insert
mark data, image data, or library data into a character string. (With the NT21 and
NT31/631 without NT20/30/620-compatible mode,
and
are not enabled.)
Initial
Specify whether or not the contents of the character string memory table entry
(string table) are written to the allocated words in the host when the PT is
switched on or reset, or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN.
The term “initialize” means the processing to initialize the content of words in the
host with the content in a character string memory table entry (string table). The
setting for [Initial] is not valid if a character string memory table entry (string table)
is not allocated to a host word.
To make [Initial] valid, click on the check box to display a cross mark () in the
box. If the box is clicked on while it is in the valid state, [Initial] is made invalid.
Reference: The content of character string memory table entries (string table) at the start of
PT operation is as shown below according to whether or not a character string
memory table entry (string table) is allocated to the host, the [Initial] setting for the
character string memory table entry (string table), and whether or not the resume
function is used.
Allocation to
Host
Allocated
[Initial]
setting
Initialized
(valid)
[Initial] setting
Used
Not Used
Existing character string
memory table (string
table) content retained
(also for the word in the
host)
Initial value of the character string memory table
entry (string table)
(also for the word in the
host)
Content of the character string memory table entry
(string table) if it is initialized by System Menu operation
(also for the word in the host)
Not initialized Content of a word in the host
(invalid)
Not allocated
(Invalid)
Existing character string
memory table (string
table) content retained
Initial value of the character string memory table
entry (string table)
Content of the character string memory table entry
(string table) if it is initialized by System Menu operation
Words
Specify the number of words in the PC (PLC) to be allocated to the character
string memory table entry (string table).
The number of allocated words varies depending on the PT model as shown below.
PT Model
No. of Allocated Words
NT11S/NT11
1 to 10 words (1 to 20 characters)
NT20, NT20S
1 to 16 words (1 to 32 characters)
NT30, NT30S, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT600S,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C
1 to 20 words (1 to 40 characters)
283
Section
Character String Memory Table (String Table)
7-3
One word corresponds to 2 characters.
A character string is allocated to the PC (PLC) words in units of 2 characters, beginning with the leftmost character, from lower digit words to higher digit words.
The data type is 1-byte or 2-byte.
Note
If the number of characters in a character string memory table entry (string table)
is larger than the number of words used, the number of characters equal to the
number of specified words is sent to the PC (PLC) beginning with the start of the
character string.
Character string memory table
(String table)
Words allocated in PC (PLC)
If setting is 2 words.
ABCDEFG
AB
* EFG is not sent.
CD
If setting is 4 words.
HIJKLMN
HI
JK
LM
N
The character string is sent in units of 2
characters, beginning with the leftmost
character in the character string, and
allocated to words from lower word to
higher word.
00 (hexadecimal) is entered in blank
areas.
PLC Address
Specify the PC (PLC) address (start address) of the area where character string
memory table entries (string table) are allocated.
I/O Comment
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) word.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
Ref
Displays whether the table entry with the specified number is already used or not.
Yes: Already used as an element.
No: Not used.
If the indication is Yes, you can check where the table entry in question is used by
clicking on
. Note that this operation is not possible when setting a
character string memory table entry (string table) from the property dialog box of
an element.
, refer to 7-1-1 Reference Operation.)
(For details of
7-3-4 Inserting Mark Data into a Character String
To insert mark data into an initial value, follow the steps described below.
(1) After specifying the Value field, move the cursor to the position where the
mark data is to be inserted.
.
(2) Click on
The Show Mark dialog box is displayed.
(3) Specify the mark data in the list of mark data.
(4) Click on
284
.
Section
Character String Memory Table (String Table)
7-3
The code of the specified mark data is inserted to the Value field. The mark
itself is not displayed here.
[ OK ] button
[ Insert Mark ] button
Screen
Screen
↑
Mark data
7-3-5 Inserting Image Data into a Character String
To insert image data into an initial value, follow the steps described below.
Note that insertion of image data into a character string is possible only with the
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT21 (NT20/30/620-compatible
mode), NT31/C-V2 (NT20/30/620-compatible mode) and NT631/C-V2
(NT20/30/620-compatible mode).
(1) After specifying the Value field, move the cursor to the position where the
image data is to be inserted.
(2) Click the
Button.
The Image Table dialog box is displayed.
(3) Specify the image data in the list of image data.
(4) Click the
Button.
The code of the specified image data is inserted into the Value field. The
image data itself is not displayed here.
[ Insert Image ] button
[ OK ] button
Screen
Screen
↑
Image data
Reference: By clicking the
Button, an image code with no data can be added to the
list. You can first insert this image to a string and then register the image data
afterward. (Use the image editor to create image data.)
285
Section
Bit Memory Table
7-4
7-3-6 Inserting Library Data into a Character String
To insert library data into an initial value, follow the steps described below.
Note that insertion of library data into a character string is possible only with the
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT21 (NT20/30/620-compatible
mode), NT31/C-V2 (NT20/30/620-compatible mode) and NT631/C-V2
(NT20/30/620-compatible mode).
(1) After specifying the Value field, move the cursor to the position where the
library data is to be inserted.
(2) Click the
Button.
The Library Table dialog box is displayed.
(3) Specify the library data in the list of library data.
(4) Click the
Button.
The code of the specified library data is inserted to the Value field. The library
data itself is not displayed here.
[ Insert Library ] button
Screen
[ OK ] button
Screen
↑
Library data
Reference: By clicking the
Button, a library code with no data can be added to the
list. You can first insert this library code to a string and then register the library
data afterward. (Use the library editor to create library data.)
7-4
Bit Memory Table
A bit memory table is an area that operates like flags to execute preset functions
when the specified bits go ON.
A bit memory table entry provides a screen switching function that switches the
screen when the specified PC (PLC) bit goes ON and an alarm function that displays the alarm message or logs the event of alarm occurrence if the specified
PC (PLC) bit goes ON.
By allocating a bit memory table entry to a PC (PLC) bit, data can be shared between a PC (PLC) and a PT.
286
Section
Bit Memory Table
7-4
Screen switching function
Bit memory table
PT
Screen switching
Screen 1
Allocated bit ON
Screen No. :
2
PC (PLC)
address
00010
Specified PC (PLC) bit
:
Screen 2
Alarm function
Displayed in
response to
bit going ON
Alarm list
ABC
Bit memory table
Character string
memory table
(String table) No.: 10
Image/library code: FE20
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Specifying item
to be called
10
Specifying item
11
to be called
12
PC (PLC) address: 0001000
ABC
DEF
GHI
13
JKL
Image data
ON
FE20
Displayed
in response
to touching
a message
Specified PC (PLC) bit
Stored in alarm history
ABC 96/04/10
The range of bit memory table entries used for checking bit status is
set by the alarm list.
7-4-1 Operation Procedure
The bit memory table setting dialog box is displayed by following either of the operations described below.
At the properties of the alarm list element, click on the table entry number field.
Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table], then click [Bit Memory] tab.
Setting
For bit memory table entries, the objective of the operation is specified by clicking
on a line. The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by
selection using a drop-down list.
For the operation procedure for
,
,
,
, and
, refer to 7-1 Common Operation. (Note that
cannot be used if bit memory table entry is displayed by the operation
using an element property.)
7-4-2 Related Elements
Alarm list element
Alarm history element
[Object] → [Alarm] → [List]
[Object] → [Alarm] → [History]
287
Section
Bit Memory Table
7-4
7-4-3 Description of Bit Memory Table Fields
As the reference of bit memory table setting, please refer to 6-3 Alarm.
WARNING
When converting the bit memory table from NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C to NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C,
the function setting is not the same with before converting. To
adjust the setting of this bit memory table, please refer to Data
Conversion (Bit memory conversion) in Appendix A.
Items set to use the screen switching function
To use the screen switching function, follow the procedure below.
(1) Input PLC address directly on a PLC address field on a bit memory table
entry or click on
and input PLC address on a PLC address dialog. (Refer to Word setting for an element on page 127). Input I/O comment if
required.
(2) Click on
to display function dialog.
(3) Select “Switch Screen” from function combo box.
Setting items for screen switching function are displayed.
(4) Set screen number to be switched for “Screen No..”
Settings to make at the Set dialog
PLC Address
Specify the bit in a PC (PLC) whose status is reflected by the bit memory table
entry.
I/O Comment
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) bit.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
Settings to make at the Function dialog
Function
Select [Alarm/Switch Screen] for NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and
NT625C, and select [Switch Screen] for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C.
288
Section
Bit Memory Table
7-4
Switch Screen (only for NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C)
To make the screen switching function valid, click on the check box to display a
check mark in it. If you click on the check box when it already has a check mark in
it, the check mark is cleared and the screen switching function is made invalid.
For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, whether or not the screen
switching function is used is determined by the setting for [Function].
Screen No.
Specify the screen No. of the screen to which the screen switches when the bit
memory table entry goes ON.
Items set to use the alarm function
To use the alarm function, follow the procedure below.
(1) Input PLC address directly on a PLC address field on a bit memory table
entry or click on
and input PLC address on a PLC address dialog. (Refer to Word setting for an element on page 127). Input I/O comment if
required.
(2) Click on
to display function dialog.
(3) Select “Alarm” or “Alarm/Switch Screen” from function combo box.
Setting items for Alarm function are displayed.
(4) Make the settings for the alarm function. (See below)
Settings to make at Set dialog
PLC Address
Specify the bit in a PC (PLC) whose status is reflected by the bit memory table
entry.
I/O Comment
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) bit.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
Settings to make at Function dialog
Function
Select [Alarm/Switch Screen] for NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and
NT625C, and select [Alarm] for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C.
Switch Screen
The meaning of the [Switch Screen] setting differs between the NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C and the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C.
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C
To use the alarm function, the check box must not have a check mark set in it. If
it does, the screen switching function is selected.
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C
To display the specified screen by the operation of an alarm list/history element, set a check mark in the check box. Clear the check mark in the check box
in order not to display the specified screen.
Screen No.
The message area displayed in the alarm list/history element is a touch switch
and pressing the touch switch that is in the selected state displays the specified
screen.
289
Section
Bit Memory Table
7-4
NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C
Specify the screen No. of the screen to which the screen should switch by the
operation of the alarm list/history. Specify 0 if you do not switch the screen.
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C
Specify the screen No. of the screen to be displayed if a check mark is set for
[Switch Screen]. The setting for this item is not valid unless a check mark is set
for [Switch Screen].
String Table Entry
Specify the character string memory table entry (string table) number where the
character string that is displayed as a message is stored when the bit memory
table entry goes ON or the bit memory table entry registered for the alarm history
is displayed.
Image/Library Code
If you want to display image data or library data when a message is selected, set
a check mark in the check box and specify the image/library code after clicking on
or
.
Color – Foreground
Specify the color in which the message display field is displayed when a message is selected.
(Can only be set for PTs with color display.)
White, black, blue, red, magenta, green, cyan, yellow
Code setting in the image/library code field
When setting a code in the image/library code field, the desired code can be
selected from the list as an alternative to direct input of a specified code using a
keyboard.
Setting the image data
To set an image code in the image/library code field by selecting image data
from the list, follow the procedure described below.
(1) Specify the image/library code field where the code is set.
(2) Click on
.
(3) Specify the image data from the list.
(4) Click on
.
The code of the specified image data is displayed in the image/library code
field.
[Insert Image]
button
[OK] button
Setting the library data
To set a library code in the image/library code field by selecting library data from
the list, follow the procedure described below.
290
Section
Extended I/O Input Table
7-5
(1) Specify the image/library code field where the code is set.
(2) Click on
.
(3) Specify the library data from the list.
(4) Click on
.
The code of the specified library data is displayed in the image/library code
field.
[Insert Library]
button
7-5
[OK] button
Extended I/O Input Table
The extended I/O input table is used to set functions at the input terminals of an
extended I/O unit or allocate PC (PLC) bits to be referred to.
Extended I/O units can be used only with NT30 and NT30C.
The following functions can be set at extended I/O unit input terminals.
Screen switching
PT
Extended I/O input table
Screen 1
Screen switching
Screen No. 2
Screen 2
External input
When the input terminal goes ON, the screen is switched to the set screen.
If 0 is set, the display returns to the previous screen.
Notify bit
PT
Extended I/O input table
Notify bit
PC (PLC)
address:
PC (PLC)
0000002
External input
The extended I/O input table notifies the PC (PLC) of the status (ON/OFF) of the
input terminals.
291
Section
Extended I/O Input Table
7-5
Control code input
PT
Extended I/O input table
Data input field
Control code
input function
Control key RET
1234
External input
When the input terminal goes ON, it has the same effect as pressing of the control
key.
Canceling backlight OFF
PT
Extended I/O input table
Canceling backlight
OFF function
Backlight
OFF
Backlight
ON
External input
When the input terminal goes ON, the backlight, which has been turned OFF by
the Cancel Backlight Off function set by a memory switch, is turned ON to redisplay the screen. A backlight OFF function releasing attribute is automatically provided for the screen switching function and the control code input function.
WARNING
Do not use the input function of a PT extended I/O input
for applications that could cause fatal injury and/or
serious damage, or as an emergency switch function.
7-5-1 Operation Procedure
An extended I/O input table entry is displayed by following the operation described below.
Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table] → [Extended I/O Input] tab → Clicking on
table entry No. →
Setting
Settings for the extended I/O input table fields can be made by using the setting
dialog box that is displayed by clicking on
.
For the operation procedure for
refer to 7-1 Common Operation.
292
,
, and
,
Section
Extended I/O Input Table
7-5
7-5-2 Description of Extended I/O Input Table Fields
No.:
Extended I/O unit input terminal number.
Cncl:
Presence/absence of the backlight OFF cancelling attribute.
Make this setting at Set dialog.
Function:
Function set for the input terminal.
Notify bit, Switch Screen, Input Key-Control.
Make this setting at Set dialog.
Description: Contents set at “Function” are shown.
Make this setting at Set dialog.
Cancel Backlight Off
Specify whether or not the backlight OFF state is to be canceled.
To set the Cancel Backlight Off function, click on the check box to set a check
mark in it.
If you do not want to set the Cancel Backlight Off function, clear the check mark in
the check box.
This setting is valid when [None] or [Notify Bit] is set for [Function].
The Cancel Backlight OFF function is automatically provided for the screen
switching function and the control code input function.
Function
Specify the input terminal function.
None
Switch Screen
Notify Bit
Input Key – Control
When Switch Screen is specified
Screen No.
Specify the screen No. of the screen to which the screen should be switched
when the input terminal goes ON.
293
Section
Extended I/O Input Table
7-5
When Notify Bit is specified
Notify Bit Address
Specify the PC (PLC) bit where the event of the input terminal going ON is notified.
Comments
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) bit.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
When Input Key – Control is specified
Control Key
Select the control code to be input when the input terminal goes ON from the list.
: Inputs numeral 0 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 1 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 2 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 3 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 4 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 5 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 6 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 7 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 8 in a data input field.
: Inputs numeral 9 in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal A in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal B in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal C in a data input field.
294
Section
Extended I/O Output Table
7-6
: Inputs hexadecimal D in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal E in a data input field.
: Inputs hexadecimal F in a data input field.
: Deletes numeric value/character string in a data input field.
: Confirms inputs in a data input field (cursor remains in this field.).
: Toggles plus (+) and minus (−) sign in a data input field.
: Inputs a decimal point in a data input field.
: Moves the input cursor to the data input field at the upper left area.
: Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately above the present
data input field.
: Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately below the present
data input field.
: Move the cursor to the left data input field.
: Move the cursor to the right data input field.
: Moves the cursor to the previous data input field in the order.
Changes the continuous screens to the previous screen.
: Moves the cursor to the next data input field in the order.
Changes the continuous screens to the next screen.
: Stops Buzzer.
: Displays the System menu.
After setting the items for the selected function (switch screen, notify bit, control
code input), click on
.
The specified contents are displayed in the extended I/O input table entry.
7-6
Extended I/O Output Table
An extended I/O output table controls the output terminal of an extended I/O unit
according the ON/OFF status of a PC (PLC) bit.
Extended I/O units can be used only with NT30 and NT30C.
PT
Extended I/O output table
PC (PLC) address:
0001002
PC (PLC)
External output
295
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
7-6-1 Operation Procedure
An extended I/O output table entry is displayed by following the operation described below.
Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table] → [Extended I/O Output] tab
Setting
With an extended I/O output table entry, the objective of an operation is specified
by clicking on the line. Setting is performed by using the setting dialog box that is
displayed by clicking on
.
For the operation procedure for
refer to 7-1 Common Operation.
,
, and
,
7-6-2 Description of Extended I/O Output Table Fields
No.
Extended I/O unit output terminal number.
PLC Address
7-6
I/O Comment
Extended I/
O Output
Specify a comment
for a PC (PLC) bit.
A comment Table
can comprise up to 16 characters.
Specify the PC (PLC) bit that controls the output terminal of an extended I/O unit.
7-7
I/O Comment Table
The I/O comment table is an area provided in a PT to manage the comment data
of all words and bits in a PC (PLC) that are set by the Support Tool.
It displays comments on PC (PLC) words and bits specified by numeral memory
table entries, character string memory table entries (string table), bit memory
296
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
table entries, extended I/O input table entries, extended I/O output table entries,
and elements, in the form of list. The displayed comments can be edited.
Reference: If “--” is displayed for PLC Bit Address when its “Ref” is Yes, object without PLC
address exist.
Clicking on
enables to know which objects is created without PLC ad-
dress.
7-7-1 Operation Procedure
An I/O comment table entry is displayed by following the operation described below.
When allocating PC (PLC) address by the setting of lamps and touch switches
Click on
in the I/O comment field of the properties displayed for each ele-
ment → Specify the edit field → Click on
Example:
Click
[Tools] (menu bar) → [Table] → [I/O Comments] tab → Specify the edit field →
Reference: When only editing an I/O comment of a PC (PLC) address allocated to an element, call out the I/O comment table entry from the property dialog box of the
element.
To set an I/O comment for multiple PC (PLC) addresses, select the [Tools]
menu, then select [Table].
Setting
To edit an address or a comment, display the setting dialog box by clicking on
or edit directly on a table entry.
For the operation procedure for
7-1 Common Operation. (Note that
,
, and
, refer to
cannot be used if it is displayed by
the operation using an element property.)
297
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
7-7-2 Description of I/O Comment Table Fields
Displaying specified word and bit I/O comment
Editing and adding I/O comment
Displaying I/O comment for specified word and bit
The items displayed on an I/O comment table are shown below.
Address
Displays the PC (PLC) word or bit address that corresponds to the comment.
I/O Comments
Displays the comment for the PC (PLC) word or bit.
Reference
Displays if the word is already used or not.
Yes: Already used in an element or a table.
No: Not used.
If the indication is Yes, you can check where the word in question is used by clicking on
.
(For details of the
For details of the
button, refer to 7-1-1 Reference Operation.)
button, refer to 7-1-2 Search Operation.
Editing or adding an I/O comment
Editing (modifying) an I/O comment
To edit (modify) the I/O comment already set, click on the table entry number,
then click
or edit directly on a table entry.
298
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
Adding an I/O comment
To set (add) an I/O comment, after clicking on the table entry number of the
blank field at the bottom, click
.
Setting items in the set dialog box
Channel (Word)
Specify the type of area (area name in PC (PLC)) for which a comment is to be
displayed.
Address
Specify the address number where the I/O comment to be edited is allocated. If
you specify a new address or bit, an I/O comment can be added.
If a comment is allocated using an element or a table entry (i.e., Yes is displayed for [Reference]), it is not possible to change the comment.
It is possible to change the comment if it is not allocated using an element or a
table entry.
Bit
Specify the PC (PLC) bit number where the I/O comment to be edited is allocated. If you specify a new address or bit, an I/O comment can be added.
If a comment is allocated using an element or a table entry (i.e., Yes is displayed for [Reference]), it is not possible to change the comment.
It is possible to change the comment if it is not allocated using an element or a
table entry.
I/O Comments
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) address or bit.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
7-7-3 Importing I/O Comments from a Ladder Program
With NT-series Support Tool for Windows, it is possible to import I/O comments
from the ladder program that is created using the following PLC Support Software. Inputting I/O comments can save time and labor.
This section describes the import method of I/O comment.
SYSMAC Support Software, SYSMAC CPT
I/O comments can be imported from a C-series ladder program with the extension .SP1.
Reference: With SYSMAC Support Soft, when saving ladder program, I/O comments are
automatically saved in a file with an extension .SP1.
299
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
SYSMAC CPT saves ladder program in SSS program (*.SP1) and use this file
to import I/O comment.
I/O comment of CVM1/CV series can not be imported with Support Tool.
With SYSMAC CPT, it is not possible to save ladder program of PLC with “-Z” in
a file with an extension .SP1. Therefore, Support Tool can not import I/O comment of ladder program for “-Z” created with SYSMAC CPT.
Priority in I/O comment
When the I/O comment table at Support Tool has an existing I/O comment or
when both word I/O comment and its bit I/O comment exist in ladder program to
be imported (e.g., 0005CH:DDD, 000512:EEE), priority will be as follows
(smaller number takes higher priority):
(1) Existing I/O comment in Support Tool (in I/O comment table)
(2) I/O comment of bit in ladder program to be imported
(3) I/O comment of word in ladder program to be imported
Example: Existing I/O comments in Support Tool (in I/O comment table)
Word / Bit
I/O Comment
0005
AAA
000603
BBB
0007
CCC
I/O comments in ladder program to be imported
Word / Bit
I/O Comment
0005
DDD
000512
EEE
0006
FFF
000613
GGG
000708
HHH
0008
III
↓
I/O comments in Support Tool (in I/O comment table) after importing
*: Existing I/O comment in Support Tool (in I/O comment table)
300
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
Handling of I/O comments of Timer / Counter
Timer/Counter do not have their own number. They share common Timer/Counter number.
However, with an I/O comment table at Support Tool, it is possible to input Timer
and Counter separately.
So when the Timer/Counter number is imported, I/O comment table stores the
same comment both for timer and counter of the same number.
In case I/O comment table at Support Tool has an existing I/O comment for either
of timer and counter, existing I/O comment in Support Tool (in I/O comment table)
takes priority and imported I/O comment will be stored only for an empty one.
Example: Existing I/O comment in Support Tool (in I/O comment table)
Word / Bit
I/O Comment
TIM002
AAA
CNT002
BBB
CNT003
CCC
I/O comments in ladder program to be imported
Word / Bit
I/O Comment
TIM/CNT000
DDD
TIM/CNT002
EEE
TIM/CNT003
FFF
TIM/CNT004
GGG
↓
Existing I/O comments in Support Tool (in I/O comment table) after importing
*: Existing I/O comment in Support Tool (in I/O comment table)
Import Procedure
SYSMAC Support Software, SYSMAC CPT
Follow the procedure below to import I/O comment from ladder program.
(1) Select “Import I/O Comments” from the Tools menu.
Dialog box to specify I/O comment is displayed.
(2) Specify the I/O comment file (.SP1) to be imported and click the
Button.
I/O comment Import is performed. While importing, progress will be displayed on status bar.
301
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
(3) When the operation is finished, the message “Import of I/O Comments, operation completed” is displayed. Then, click the
Button.
When an I/O comment import was aborted or could not be done because of
error, the message “Failed to import I/O comment” is displayed, then click
the
Button. In this case, the contents of I/O comment table in
Support Tool remain unchanged.
If this message box is displayed, check the following points.
Is this a program file for OMRON C-series PLC?
Is the extension .SP1 (SSS program file format)?
In case OMRON SYSMAC CPT is used, store (export) the ladder program in
SSS program (*.SP1) format and then use this file to import I/O comment.
Reference: For SYSMAC Support Soft, SYSMAC CPT, priority of word types to be imported is given below. CIO has the highest priority.
(With comments of more than 3000 entries, D will be cut first.)
CIO (Bit)
L
(Bit)
H
(Bit)
TIM/CNT
A
(Bit)
CIO (Word)
L
(Word)
H
(Word)
A
(Word)
D
(Word)
The I/O comments table displays comments in numerical/alphabetical order.
Using CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to import the I/O comments from the CX-Programmer.
(1) Copy the symbol table in the CX-Programmer and paste it into Excel.
(2) In Excel, delete columns 2 and 5 to that the names, addresses, and comments are lined up across the sheet.
Delete columns 2 and 5.
302
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
(3) Select Save as and save the sheet as tab-delimited text.
(4) Select Import I/O Comments from the Tool Menu in the Support Tool and
select the file saved in step 3. The comments will be imported.
7-7-4 Importing I/O Comment from Tab-delimited Text File
Import Procedure
(1) Select “Import I/O Comments” from the Tools menu.
The dialog box to specify I/O comments will be displayed.
(2) Specify “CX-P IO Comments (Tab Delimited) (*.txt)” or “All Files” as a file
type and specify the I/O comment file (tab delimited text file) saved and click
the [OK] Button.
The I/O comment will be imported.
(3) When the operation is finished, the message “Import of I/O Comments, opButton.
eration completed” will be displayed. Next, click the
When an I/O comment import was aborted or could not be performed because of an error, the message “Failed to import I/O comment” will be displayed. Click the
Button to clear the message. In this case, the
contents of the I/O comment table in Support Tool remain unchanged.
If this message box is displayed, check the following points.
Is the data format of the I/O comment file to be imported (tab delimited text file)
correct? (see the following page)
If an import is aborted in the middle of the import operation, I/O comments in the
Support Tool will remain unchanged.
Text file format to be imported by the Support Tool
The Support Tool can read the tab-delimited text file, which was created by the
user, as an I/O comment file. Here, the rule for the text file format is described.
Format
One line must be constructed as follows:
Name [TAB] PLC address [TAB] I/O comment [Enter]
Example
START
0.01
START(ON)
STOP
0.02
STOP(OFF)
N_DataV1082
DM1082
Speed1
N_DataA1083
DM1083
Speed2
For details of the format rule, see the description below and the [Example of import].
Name
The Support Tool imports only the PLC address and the I/O comments to the I/O
comment table. Therefore, the address name can be omitted.
In this case, however, be sure to insert TAB code before “PLC address.”
Example
[TAB]0.01[TAB]START(ON) [Enter]
303
Section
I/O Comment Table
7-7
PLC address
Each word type should be expressed as shown below. To specify a bit number,
input bit number after a decimal point.
Example
Word
CIO area
Address
Prefix
(None)
Bit
HR area
Address
HR or H
Bit
AR area
Address
AR or A
Bit
LR area
Address
LR
Bit
C series
CS/CJ series
120
120
0.12
0.12
HR120
H120
HR0.12
H0.12
AR120
A120
AR0.12
A0.12
LR120
L120 *
LR0.12
L0.12 *
Timer
TIM or T
TIM100
T100
Time up flag
TU
---
TU100
Counter
CNT or C
CNT100
C100
Count up flag
CU
---
CU100
W
---
W120
---
W0.12
Work area
Address
Bit
Task flag
TK
---
TK1
Data memory area
DM o r D
DM20
D20
EM current bank
EM or E
EM20
E20
EM bank specification
(: Bank specification, hexadecimal, 1 digit)
E_
---
EC_20
*: CS/CJ series does not have an LR area. If an LR area bit (L00000 to L00199) is
set to screen data, it will be automatically converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199
inside the PT.
I/O comment
If an I/O comment longer than 16 characters is set, the remaining characters are
discarded.
Example of import
Strings
304
Import
OK/NG
Result
PLC address
I/O comment
ABC [Enter]
NG
---
---
ABC [Enter]
NG
---
---
ABC [Enter]
NG
---
---
ABC [TAB] 100.01 [TAB] comment1 [Enter]
OK
0010001
comment1
ABC [TAB]100.02 [TAB] [Enter]
OK
0010002
ABC [TAB] [TAB] comment2 [Enter]
NG
---
---
ABC [TAB] [Enter ]
NG
---
---
ABC [TAB] [TAB] [Enter]
NG
---
---
ABC [TAB] [TAB] [Enter]
NG
---
---
[TAB] [TAB] [Enter]
NG
---
---
Section
F-Key Input Notify Table
7-8
[Enter]
Ignored
---
---
[TAB] [TAB] [Enter]
NG
---
---
[TAB] [Enter]
Ignored
---
---
[TAB] 100.03 [TAB] comment3 [Enter]r
OK
0010003
comment3
[TAB] 100.04 [TAB] [Enter]
OK
0010004
[TAB] 100.05 [Enter]
NG
---
---
NG
---
---
NG
---
---
100.06 [TAB] comment5 [EOF]
OK
0010006
comment5
ABC [TAB] 100.07 [TAB] comment6 [EOF]
OK
0010007
comment6
[TAB] [TAB]
comment4 [Enter]
[TAB] [TAB] [TAB] [EOF]
[TAB]
: Blank space
[Enter]: Enter code
[TAB]: TAB code
[EOF]: End of file
Reference: It may take time to import I/O comments when there are many I/O comments.
There are the PLC address, I/O Comment, and Reference in an I/O comments
table. Addresses with no comment and no reference will not be downloaded to
PT. (See below)
Referenced
Not Referenced
With Comments
Without Comments
×
: Can be downloaded
×: Cannot be downloaded
Lines in an I/O comment table with only the PLC address input (for future use
etc.) will not be downloaded to PT, and as a result, when the data is uploaded to
the Support Tool, the line itself will be lost. (This also applies when saving data
in mmi format.)
Support Tool cannot import more than 3,000 PLC addresses with comments.
Therefore, if there are more than 3,000 PLC addresses with comments, only
the addresses will be imported for PLC addresses from entry 3001 onwards.
(I/O comment import operation will be finished normally.)
Rejected entries are displayed in the Error Log. Check them by selecting [Error
Log] from the [View] menu and print them.
7-8
F-Key Input Notify Table
This table is only available for NT11S/NT11. The F-Key Input Notify Table consists of four entries. Each entry is assigned to a function key in the PT device. It
specifies a PC (PLC) memory bit to be related to a corresponding function key.
7-8-1 Operation Procedure
An F-Key Input Notify Table is displayed by following the operation described below.
Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table] → [F-Key Input Notify] tab → Specify the
edit field →
305
Section
Mathematical Table
7-9
7-8-2 Description of F-Key Input Notify Table
Table Entry Number
The table entry number field, or the <No.> column is not editable. All table entries
are listed in ascending order of their entry numbers, starting from zero to one less
than the maximum number of entries.
Table Entry No.
F-Key Input
0
F1
1
F2
2
F3
3
F4
PLC Bit Address
Specify the PC (PLC) bit that you want to link with the Function Key.
I/O Comment
Specify a comment for a PC (PLC) address or bit.
A comment can comprise up to 16 characters.
7-9
Mathematical Table
Mathematical table is only available for the NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above. The
table may contain 0 to 255 entries and each entry can be assigned a mathematical formula. The result of each calculation can be stored in either a Numeral
Table entry or a PLC address.
7-9-1 Operation Procedure
The mathematical table setting dialog box is displayed by following either of the
operations described below.
Select [Tools] (menu bar) –> [Mathematical Table].
Double click on “Mathematical Table” from application manager window
7-9-2 Supported Objects
The following objects are affected or have an effect on the Mathematical Table:
Numeral Display, Numeral Input, Thumb wheel switch, Bar Graph, Analogue meter, Broken Line Graph, Trend Graph.
306
Section
Mathematical Table
7-9
7-9-3 Supported PLC Addresses
The supported addresses for the operand and result based on the PLC vendor
type are as follows:
Omron
Word
Range
CIO
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
DM
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
HR
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
AR
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
LR
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
EM
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
WR
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
E0 to EA
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
C
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
T
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
Memory Link
Word
Range
CIO
00000 to 32767 (decimal)
Mitsubishi A
Word
Range
X
0000 to 2700 (hexadecimal)
Y
0000 to 2700 (hexadecimal)
M
0000 to 9984 (decimal)
L
0000 to 9984 (decimal)
B
0000 to 2700 (hexadecimal)
D
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
R
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
W
0000 to 270F (hexadecimal)
C
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
T
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
Mitsubishi Fx
Word
Range
X
00000 to 23400 (octal)
Y
00000 to 23400 (octal)
M
0000 to 9984 (decimal)
S
0000 to 9984 (decimal)
D
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
C
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
T
0000 to 9999 (decimal)
307
Section
Mathematical Table
7-9
7-9-4 Description of Mathematical Table Fields
Description
The mathematical function specified in each table entry will be displayed here in
the form of a simple equation. Left-hand side of the equation will indicate the
location where result calculated from the function will be stored. Right-hand side
will display the actual function.
Set
Invokes ‘Set Mathematical Dialog Box’. Specify mathematical function using this
dialog box.
Edit
Refer to 7-1 Common Operation.
Goto Entry
Refer to 7-1 Common Operation.
Move
Invokes ‘Move To’ dialog box. Move a table entry using this dialog box
Close
Closes the dialog box.
Help
Shows help information related to mathematical table.
308
Section
Mathematical Table
7-9
7-9-5 Description of Set Mathematical Formula Fields
This dialog box is to be used to define a new/edit an existing mathematical formula.
Formula
Shows the list of available formula that can either be arithmetic, boolean or bitwise operations. This will list out combinations of available operands and operators i.e., type of the function.
Selected Formula
Shows the selected mathematical formula for this entry. It is updated whenever
there is any change in operands or operators.
Word Size
This is a common setting for Result and Operand. It is only valid for PLC Address
and constant. For Numeral Table entry, the word size will follow the setting in the
Numeral Table. This control will be enabled when the selected formula is not
‘None’.
Result
This button will be used to specify the result. This button will be enabled when the
selected formula is not ‘None’. The following choices are available for result location.
PLC word address
Numeral table entry
Operand buttons
This buttons will be used to specify operands. Operand buttons will be enabled
according selection of [Formula]. The following choices are available for operands.
Constant value (integer only)
Numeral table entry (Direct)
PLC Address
Operators
These combo boxes will provide a list of available operators. Operator combo
boxes will be enabled according selection of [Formula]. Following choices of
types of operators will be available.
309
Section
Mathematical Table
7-9
Numerical Operator (Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division (result will
have the quotient only) and Modulo)
Boolean Operator(AND, OR & XOR)
Bitwise Operator (&: bitwise AND, |: bitwise OR and ^: bitwise XOR)
Comparison Operator (<, > and =)
7-9-6 Description of Edit Operand Fields
This dialog box will be obtained by clicking ‘any of the enable Operand’ buttons.
This will be used to specify the operand.
Operand Type
This combo box will specify the type of operand. Default is ‘None’ and OK button
will remain disabled unless some other selection is made. The following choices
are available for the combo box:
PLC Address
This is almost like the address dialog box. There is an extra field: Storage Type.
Storage Type
Specify the type of the storage type (BCD/BIN).
Numeral Table Entry
Numeral Table Entry
Specifies numeral table entry number. Numeral table entry can be specified in
this edit box using corresponding table button
310
.
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
Constant
Constant
Specify constant integer for the operand.
7-9-7 Description of Edit Result Fields
This dialog box will be obtained by clicking Result button. This will be used to
specify the result.
Result Type
This is to specify type of the result. Choices for result types are:
(1) Numeral Table Entry
(2) PLC Address
Dialog boxes are same as that of corresponding ‘Edit Operand’ dialog boxes. Refer to 7-9-6 Description of Edit Operand Fields [Dialog Box] for UI and fields.
7-9-8 Description of Move To Fields
This dialog box will be used to move a mathematical table entry to any of the existing entry.
Entry
Specifies the table entry number of the table where current entry will be moved.
The cursor moves to the specified table entry number. Entries following this will
be moved downwards to adjust for the moved entry.
7-10 Recipe Table
Each application has one recipe table. A recipe table (see Section 7-10-2) consists of a number of entries. Each entry consists of a collection of records, and
each record consists of a number of parameters or attributes. Parameters designate consecutive memory areas from a starting address defined for each recipe
entry.
Each standard screen is limited to one recipe screen element. A recipe screen
element (see Section 6-11-1) is a compound screen element, consisting of an
alarm-like grid structure and some touch switches. It is like a collection of numeral inputs, featuring access and display of data from the recipe table.
Recipe Table is only available in the NT21 and NT31/631-V2 (System Ver. 3.1).
7-10-1 Operation Procedure
The recipe table can be activated by selecting [Tools] (menu bar) [Recipe
Table].
311
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
7-10-2 Description of Recipe Table Fields
Description of Recipe Table Dialog Controls
No.
Displays the entry number. By default, the 1st record is selected. Nothing happens when an entry is double-clicked. This number will not change when another
entry is deleted.
Name
Displays the name for a recipe. Mark objects can be allowed.
A [Name] can comprise up to 12 characters.
No. of Records
Displays the number of records contained in the recipe.
No. of Parameters
Displays the number of parameters contained in the recipe.
Bytes/Record
Displays the size in bytes of all records in each entry. This size is 4 * no. of parameters in 1 record. The size of a parameter value is 4 bytes regardless of whether it
is 1 or 2 words.
Occupied Bytes
Display the size in bytes of all records in each entry. This is the size of memory
occupied by each recipe entry in the recipe memory. Equals [No. of Record] *
[Bytes/Record].
New
Shows the recipe setting dialog to create a new recipe entry. The created entry
becomes the last entry and gets selected.
312
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
Delete
Delete the selected entry. Same as [Edit]–[Delete].
Set Recipe
Shows the setting of the selected entry in a recipe setting dialog.
Set Record
Show the records of the selected entry in a record setting table.
Edit
Permits delete, cut, copy and paste operations on a selected recipe. An edit popup menu with these 4 options will appear.
Delete, Cut, Copy, Paste is disabled when no entry exists. Paste is available
when the clipboard contains recipe data.
Goto Entry
Selects an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog. The behavior is the same as numeral table Go to dialog.
Total
Displays the byte-size of all entries. Equals sum of all [Occupied Bytes].
Available
Displays the table’s maximum byte-size less the used byte-size. This is the total
recipe size minus total occupied size.
Recipe Setting Dialog
313
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
This Recipe Setting dialog allows you to specify the settings for an entry in the
recipe table.
Description of Recipe Setting Dialog Controls
Number
Displays the recipe number in the recipe table.
When creating a new entry, the lowest available number is suggested.
The maximum recipe number is 200.
Name
Specifies the name of the recipe entry.
A character string of up to 12 characters can be accepted.
Insert Mark
Insert a mark object in recipe name.
Comment
Specifies a comment for recipe entry.
A character string of up to 24 characters can be accepted.
No. of Records
Inputs the number of records required for this recipe entry. If this entry is being
created, default value is 2.
Allocate up to a maximum of 200 digits.
No. of Parameters
Inputs the number of parameters required for this recipe entry. If this entry is being created, default value is 2.
Allocate up to a maximum of 200 digits.
Storage Type
Sets the numeral data type for parameter values in each record of this recipe
entry.
PLC Address
Inputs the starting PLC address for this recipe entry. Bit addresses cannot be
specified.
Set
Sets the starting PLC address via an address composition dialog.
I/O Comments
Inputs comments for the starting PLC address. By default, the current comment
is shown.
A character string of up to 16 characters can accept.
314
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
7-10-3 Record Setting Table
This Record Setting Table dialog box permits you to specify the settings for all
records of a recipe entry in the recipe table.
Description of Record Setting Table Controls
Start Address
Displays the starting PLC address.
No.
Displays the record number.
Record
Specifies the name for the record entry.
A string of up to 12 characters can be used and edited.
Parameter Title
Displays the parameter name, i.e., “Param1” and “Param2.” Default value is “ParamX,” where X is a number.
Up to 8 characters can be used and edited, with the column width depending on
the parameter values.
Parameter
Displays the numerical data values for each record.
You can edit data values. The Initial value is 0.
Lock
Sets the Record as read only.
Edit Param
Displays the parameter setting table.
315
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
Edit
Permits clear, copy and paste operations on a selected range of record entries.
An edit popup menu with these 4 options will appear, like the menu in the current
numeral table entry.
Clear, Copy, Paste is only enabled when the clipboard contains record data.
Goto Entry
Allows the selection of an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to
dialog. The behavior is same as the numeral table Go to dialog.
Insert Mark
Inserts a mark object in a record or a parameter name.
Import
Import parameter data from a CSV formatted file. A file open dialog with a CSV
Formatted Recipe Data (*.csv) filter will prompt for the source file.
Export
Export all data of this recipe entry. A file save dialog with a CSV Formatted Recipe Data (*.csv) filter will prompt for the target file name. Exporting a selection of
parameter data is not supported.
Reset Width
Resets the width of each column to the default setting.
Note
The parameter data cell will always be displayed using the parameter’s number
format. A decimal type parameter will display values in decimal, while a hexadecimal type parameter will display values in hexadecimal.
Parameter Setting Table
This dialog permits users to specify the setting for all parameters of a recipe table
entry.
When the Words field is changed from 2 to 1, you will be prompted with a message that some data will be lost with this conversion. If the value is less than
316
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
–32,768 or greater than 32,767, the value will be set to 0. Otherwise, if the sum of
Integer and Decimal digits exceed the maximum limit, the number of Decimal
digits will be reduced. For example, given a parameter with settings “Dec,” “4 Integer” and “4 Decimal” and value 54.3675, when word size is reduced to 1, setting will become “4 Integer” and “1 Decimal” and value will be 54.3.
When entering values into the Integer and Decimal fields, the following validation
will occur. When “Dec/Hex” is decimal and “Integer” or “Decimal” is set so that
their sum is greater than the maximum digits allowed, once the cell loses the focus, the following occurs:
a) If the entered value is less than or equal to the maximum digits allowed, it is
accepted. Any other value is reduced, so that their sum is not greater than the
maximum digits allowed.
b) Otherwise, the entered value is set to the maximum digits allowed and the other value is set to 0.
The maximum digits allowed is 5 (1 word) or 10 (2 words).
Description of Parameter Setting Table Controls
No.
Displays the parameter entry number.
Parameter
Displays the parameter name.
A string of up to 8 characters can be used and edited.
Dec/Hex
Displays the numeral display format, either decimal or hexadecimal.
When this is changed Integer and Decimal will be reset to default.
Sign
Display sign option. Check if you want a sign to be displayed.
Integer/Decimal
Displays the precision of the integer/decimal digit of the numeral data. Limitation
on the sum of integer and decimal digits will follow the numeral display restriction.
Words
Defines the memory size for the parameter. The address column will be reset
when this size is changed.
PLC Address
Displays the starting PLC address used by the parameter.
Goto Entry
This will allow the selection of an entry by specifying the entry number through a
Go to dialog.
Insert Mark
Inserts a mark object in a parameter name.
Import
The Parameter values in the records of a recipe can be edited through a CSV
(Comma Separated Values) file. Each line consists of the fields of a record, with a
comma separating two fields.
317
Recipe Table
Section 7-10
The first line of a CSV file is the header. The first field is the recipe name. If it contains ASCII characters from 0x00 to 0x1F will be converted to spaces after import. The second field is “Master Record Flag,” which is equivalent to the Lock
check box in the Record Setting dialog. Subsequent fields are the names of all
the parameters in the record.
The second line onwards contain the parameter value of the records in the recipe. The first field is the record name. The second field is a value indicating
whether the Lock check box should be checked or unchecked. 0 means unchecked and 1 means checked. Any other values are considered invalid. Subsequent fields are the actual values of the parameters in that record.
During export of parameters in the Record Setting Table, the decimal points of
the parameters will not be exported. Example: Parameter 1 is set to 3 integer
digits and 2 decimal digits, and the parameter value is 123.45. After exporting to
CSV format the value will become 12345. Hexadecimal values will be converted
to the decimal equivalent after export.
If you try to import a CSV file that has a value with a decimal point, it is considered
invalid and an improper line dialog is displayed. Likewise, hexadecimal values
containing A-F are not allowed.
Improper Line Dialog
The import operation will overwrite all the current parameter values. However, if
any line in the file is incorrect, an improper line dialog will prompt for instructions.
An improper line is any line of text in the source import file whose data does not
comply with the CSV format or whose data is not valid. Any incorrect value in a
CSV line is shown in red in the Original row as shown in the diagram below. The
Import row will display the adjusted values. You can change the values highlighted in red to the desired ones.
In the Name field, if the string consist of more than the allowed number of characters, the data will be truncated from the right.
In the Lock field, ’0’ means unchecked and ’1’ means checked. Anything other
than that is considered invalid. This value will be reset to uncheck.
In the Parameter fields, any non-numeric data is considered invalid. The values
will be reset to 0.
318
Section 7-10
Recipe Table
Example
For example, if the imported data is “this is only for testing” and only 11 characters
are allowed, then the grid cell will show “this is only” in red. “for testing” will be
truncated.
“**12**” is not valid for the Lock field and is thus highlighted in red.
So are “$%#@” and “$62#!78” for parameter values, which are both reset to 0.
Description of Improper Line Dialog Controls
Improper Line
You cannot edit this [Improper Line] edit box.
Displays the improper line in the CSV file.
Detail
Original – Shows the original CSV line. It cannot be edited and these invalid values will be displayed in red.
Import – Shows the default values and you can modify the default values.
Name
Shows the first value in the CSV file. This is the record name. If the value has
more than 12 characters, only the first 12 characters from the left will be shown.
Accepts a character string of up to 8 characters.
Lock
Shows the second value in the CSV file. This is the master record flag. Only the
first character from the right of the value is shown.
Can only accept 0 or 1 (0: unchecked, 1: checked).
Parameter data
Show the other values in the CSV file. These are the parameter data values. If the
imported value has more than the number of characters allowed, the value will be
set to 0.
Ignore
Ignore this improper line and proceed to import the rest of the lines in the file.
Ignore All
Ignore all improper lines and proceed to import the rest of the lines in the file.
319
SECTION 8
Editing Graphic Data
The graphic data edit function creates images in the bit map data format, library data using fixed elements, and marks that
display special characters and symbols.
8-1
8-2
8-3
Image Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1 Operating the Image Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1 Operating the Library Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2 Creating Library Data Using Library Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
322
325
334
334
337
342
342
342
321
Section
Image Editor
8-1
8-1
Image Editor
The procedure for creating images of any required shape in the bit map (BMP)
format is described below.
The bit map format graphic data that has been created using a Windows-based
general purpose application software can be pasted onto the image creation
screen by using the image editor via the clip board.
Created image data can be inserted into a character string in an image/library
lamp display, alarm list display, alarm history display, or character string display.
With the NT21 and NT31/631 without NT20/30/620-compatible mode, it is not
possible to insert image data into a character string.
Reference: Image editor has the following features.
You can draw any graphics in the bit map format freely.
It is possible to import Image data from the different screen data file.
Selected image data can be expanded or shrunk.
The bit map file can be pasted onto the image editor.
Copy, cut, paste operation of image data is possible.
Preview display of selected image data is available on the image table.
8-1-1 Operating the Image Table
Image table dialog is configured as follows:
[Edit] . . . . . . . . Deletes, cuts, copies or pastes the image data of the selected
code (refer to pages 323 to 325). It is possible to select two or
more codes and delete them collectively.
[Goto Code] . . Code number can be specified and the cursor moves to the
code. The operation method is same as the “Goto Entry” of a
memory table (refer to 7-1-6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number).
[Preview] . . . . . Switches the preview window ON and OFF (refer to page
323).
[Open] . . . . . . . Displays the editing screen (image editor) of the selected
code (P331). When two or more codes are selected, edit
screens of all the selected codes can be opened collectively.
[New] . . . . . . . . Registers the new image code to the image table (refer to
page 325).
Only the registered image codes are listed on the image table.
Press this button when you are going to create new image
data.
322
Section
Image Editor
8-1
[Delete] . . . . . . Deletes the image data of the selected code. When two or
more codes are selected, they can be deleted collectively.
[Close] . . . . . . . Closes the image table dialog.
[Help] . . . . . . . . Displays Help about the image table dialog box.
Specifying a code
To specify a code for operations, click on the objective line (image code).
To specify the continuous codes collectively, click on the first code to be selected and then the last code to be selected while pressing the Shift key.
If you click on a code while pressing the Ctrl key, the code will be selected or
deselected alternately each time it is clicked.
Preview Function
Support Tool provides a preview function that can display the contents of the
selected code.
When two or more codes are selected, the preview of the code selected last will
be displayed in preview window.
The preview window can be switched ON and OFF by clicking the
/
button.
Deleting the image data
To delete an image data, follow the procedure below. Deleted image data will
not be stored to the clipboard and its code itself will be also deleted. When two
or more codes are selected, they will be deleted collectively.
(1) Select [Image Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The image table is displayed.
(2) Select the code of the image data to be deleted.
When two or more codes are selected, they can be deleted collectively.
(3) Perform one of the following operations.
button → [Delete]
Right-click the selected code → [Delete]
button
Selected code will be deleted after you click the
firmation dialog box.
Button in the con-
Cutting/copying the image data
To cut or copy an image data, follow the procedure below. The cut/copied
image data will be stored to the clipboard and can be pasted to the other codes.
323
Section
Image Editor
8-1
In case of ““cut,” cut code will be deleted from the image table. In case of “copy,”
copied code remains in the image table.
Reference: When two Support Tools are started up by [Import Component] from the [File]
menu, the data that is cut or copied on the image table of one Support Tool can be
pasted onto the image table of another Support Tool (PT model setting of the two
screen data files should be the same). For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
(1) Select [Image Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The image table is displayed.
(2) Select the code of the image data to be cut or copied.
Select only one code. When two or more codes are selected, cut/copy operation can not be performed.
(3) Click the
Button or right-click on the selected code.
(4) Select [Cut] or [Copy].
Image data of the selected code will be stored to the clipboard. In case of
[cut], confirmation dialog box will be displayed. After clicking the
Button, cut code will be deleted from the image table.
Pasting the image data
To paste an image data that is stored in the clipboard by cut or copy operation,
follow the procedure below.
Reference: When two Support Tools are started up by [Import Component] from the [File]
menu, the data that is cut or copied on the image table of one Support Tool can
be pasted onto the image table of another Support Tool (PT model setting of the
two screen data files should be the same). For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing
Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support
Tool).
If the paste operation is performed, the image data previously registered to the
code is overwritten and lost. (Confirmation dialog box will be displayed.)
When an image data is pasted, the property (size, colors, compression, comment) of the image code is changed to that of the new one.
(1) Select [Image Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The image table is displayed.
(2) Select the code of the image data to be pasted.
Select only one code. When two or more codes are selected, paste operation can not be performed.
(3) Click the
324
Button or right-click on the selected code.
Section
Image Editor
8-1
(4) Select [Paste].
[Paste] can not be selected if the image data to be pasted is not stored in the clipboard. After clicking the
Button in confirmation dialog box, image data
will be pasted to the selected code.
Quitting the image table
You can quit the image table in any of the two ways described below.
Clicking the
Button of the image table dialog.
Clicking the
Button at the upper right corner of the image table dialog.
8-1-2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor
Registering new image data
(1) Select [Image Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The image table is displayed.
(2) Click the
Button.
The New Image Entry dialog box is displayed.
(3) Set the code, size, colors, compression, comment of the image data to be
newly created, then click the
Button.
Setting for New Image Entry dialog box
Code:
Specify the code to which the new image data is registered.
325
Section
Image Editor
8-1
When the dialog box is opened, the smallest unused code
is set.
Colors:
Specify whether the image data is created in “2 Colors”
(monochrome) or “8 Colors” (color).
Search Direction: Unregistered code can be searched using the
Button. In the Search Direction, specify Up (to the smaller
code) or Down (to the larger code) to designate the direction to which search operation is executed.
Width:
Specify the width of the image data as a number of dots.
Height:
Specify the height of the image data as a number of dots.
The image data size can be set in the range from 8 x 8 dots
(minimum) to the screen size of the PT to be used (maximum). The image data width and height must be specified
in units of 8 dots.
Compression:
Specify the data format for storing the created image data.
Check mark set: Image data is compressed for storage.
Check mark not set: Image data is stored without being
compressed.
Comments:
Specify the comment for the image data to be created.
:
Searches the unused code. Specify the search direction in
the Search Direction.
Displaying image editor
(1) [Tools] (menu bar) → [Image Editor]
The image table is displayed.
(2) Select the code in the image table and click the
Button or
double-click the mouse on the objective code line.
When two or more codes are selected, edit screens (editors) of all the selected codes can be opened collectively. Image table dialog automatically
closes at the same time the editor is displayed.
326
Section
Image Editor
8-1
Changing the property
To change the property of the code that is already registered, open the editor
and then display the property dialog of the image data as follows:
Double click with
tool,
or Right click → [Properties]
Double click,
or Right click → [Properties]
[Code]:
Displays the code of the selected image data.
[Size]:
Displays the size of the specified image data.
To change the size, set the desired size.
[Mode]:
Displays the specified color mode.
To change the color mode, set the desired color mode.
[Compression]: Specify the data format for storing the created image data.
Check mark set:
Image data is compressed for storage.
Check mark not set: Image data is stored without being
compressed.
Although the data size of the created image data will be
reduced if the data is compressed, the speed of display on the
screen will be slowed a little.
[Comments]:
Specify the comment for the image data to be created.
Screen Configuration of Image Editor
The screen configuration of the image editor is described below.
Tool box
Tool selection
Color selection
Pattern selection
Edit area
Point type selection
Line width selection
Font selection
Operating the image editor
Using the image editor, you can create a graphic in the desired shape in the edit
area as combinations of lines, points, rectangles, and circles after selecting the
327
Section
Image Editor
8-1
tool and drawing conditions (color, tiling pattern, point type, line width, and
font).
Tool selection
Used to specify the range to copy, cut, move, shrink or expand the
created graphic.
The range is specified by dragging the mouse cursor.
To cancel the range specifying frame, select the tools other than
.
,
Range specifying frame
Used to move the graphic that is defined by the range specifying frame.
The range specifying frame can be dragged, or a pop-up menu can be
displayed by right clicking the mouse.
Used to draw a point.
Click the mouse at the position where a point is to be drawn: a point is
drawn in the size specified by point type selection and in the color specified as foreground color.
Used to draw a line.
By dragging the mouse cursor from the start point to the end point of the
line to be drawn, the desired line is drawn in the width specified by line
width selection and in the specified foreground color.
Used to draw a rectangle.
By dragging the mouse cursor, a rectangle is drawn having opposing
corners at the start and the end point of dragging, having the line of the
specified width (line width selection) and in the specified foreground color. The inside of the rectangle is tiled with the colors specified as foreground color and background color in the specified pattern.
Used to draw a circle or an oval.
By dragging one corner or one side of a rectangle that circumscribes the
circle or oval to be drawn, the desired circle or oval is drawn with a line of
the specified width (line width selection) and in the specified foreground
color. The inside of the circle or oval is tiled with the colors specified as
foreground color and background color in the specified pattern.
Used to draw a character.
Click the mouse at the position where a character is to be drawn and the
character cursor is displayed. Input characters: the input characters are
displayed in the color specified as foreground color with the background
displayed in the specified background color.
Select this tool when tiling the inside of the closed area of a drawn graphic.
The area is tiled according to the specified pattern and in the colors specified as foreground color and background color.
328
Section
Image Editor
8-1
Color selection
Displays foreground color
Displays background color
Color selection palette
On the color selection palette, move the cursor to the desired color and click the
mouse; a left click selects the foreground color and a right click selects the
background color.
Pattern selection
Selection box
Move the cursor to the desired pattern and left click the mouse; the selection
box moves to the pattern at the cursor location, indicating that the pattern is
selected.
Point type selection
Selection box
Move the cursor to the desired point type and left click the mouse; the selection
box moves to the point type at the cursor location, indicating that the point type
is selected.
Line width selection
Selection box
Move the cursor to the desired line width type and left click the mouse; the line
width type display at the cursor location will be highlighted, indicating that the
line width type is selected.
Font designation
Displays sample characters
Click the
Button and the font selection dialog box is displayed.
After selecting the font, the style, and the size, click the
Button.
329
Section
Image Editor
8-1
Modifying the size of an image data
Button and drag one of green Specify the range to be modified using the
marks (handles) that enclose the range specifying frame.
Position the mouse cursor on a green handle, and the shape of mouse cursor
changes as shown below. (The arrow indicates the same direction as the arrow
mark in the handle.)
Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to modify the size of an image
data.
Reference: To shrink the size of an image data, shrink it by one dragging operation without
releasing the button of the mouse. If you try to expand the image data that was
shrunk once, the shape or the color may be modified.
Zooming the edit area
It is possible to display the edit area at an enlarged size to facilitate drawing fine
areas and creating small images.
To change the display size of the edit area, select [View] in the menu bar then
choose [Zoom]; specify the zoom percentage.
Modifying Graphics
Created graphics can be mirrored (flipped) up and down or right and left, or
turned 90° left or right.
The mirroring and 90° turn operations are possible for the graphic in the range
specifying frame.
330
Section
Image Editor
8-1
To modify the graphic, select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Rotate or Flip], then specify the
desired modification method.
Flip Horizontal
Flip Vertical
Rotate Left
Rotate Right
Cutting/copying/deleting graphics
You can cut, copy, paste, and delete the created graphic.
Cut, copy and delete operations are valid for the graphic in the range specifying
frame.
To call the desired operation, select [Edit] in the menu bar, then specify [Cut],
[Copy], [Paste], or [Delete]. (or right click the mouse, then specify [Cut], [Copy],
or [Paste])
Cuts the graphic in the range specifying
frame and stores it in the clip board.
Copies the graphic in the range specifying
frame onto the clip board.
Pastes the graphic in the clip board to the
specified position.
Deletes the graphic in the range specifying
frame.
Reference: Image data that is cut or copied on one image editor window can be pasted onto
the other image editor window (The data can be pasted until another data is
stored to the clipboard).
331
Section
Image Editor
8-1
When more than one image editor window is displayed or when two Support
Tools are opened by [Import Component] from the [File] menu (same PT model
setting), cut, copy and paste operations between these image editor windows
are possible. For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different
Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
Saving to the bit map file
You can save the created graphic to the file in bit map format.
This operation is valid for the graphics in the range specifying frame.
To save the graphic to the bit map file, follow the procedure below.
(1) Specify the area to be saved in a file with a range specifying frame.
(2) Select [Copy To] from the [Edit] menu.
The dialog box to specify the file name is displayed.
(3) Set the folder and file name and click the
Button.
Graphics in the range specifying frame is saved in a file.
Pasting from the bit map file
You can read out the graphics saved in a bit map file and paste them onto the
image editor.
The graphics can be pasted onto the image editor that is currently activated.
To paste the graphic from the bit map file, follow the procedure below.
(1) Select [Paste From] from the [Edit] menu.
The dialog box to specify the file to be read is displayed.
(2) Specify the folder and file name and click the
Button.
Read out graphic is pasted onto the image editor enclosed with a range
specifying frame.
(3) Select [Clip] from the [Edit] menu.
Image data size is changed to the read out image size.
Instead of the procedure (3), it is also possible to drag the read out image to the
required position.
332
Section
Image Editor
8-1
Changing the image data size
The image data size can be changed in either of the following two ways.
Changing the size by property setting
Changing the size to the range specifying frame size
Changing the size by property setting
Change the setting for [Size] in the image editor property settings to change the
size of the image data.
The image data size is changed according to the new setting; the reference
point of the size change is at the upper left corner of the present size.
If the size is reduced, part of the created graphic may be cut.
Changing the size to the range specifying frame size
The size of the image data can be changed to fit the size of the specified range
specifying frame.
Select [Edit] in the menu bar, then select [Clip].
Quitting the image editor
You can quit the image editor in any of the three ways described below.
Clicking the
Button at the upper right corner of the image editor.
Selecting [Close] from the control menu box of the image editor.
Double clicking the control menu box of the image editor.
Control menu box
333
Section
Library Editor
8-2
8-2
Library Editor
Graphics of any required shape can be created by combining fixed elements.
The created graphic can be registered as one element (library data) and any
number of elements can be displayed at any positions in any screen using the
library display function.
Created library data can be used for image/library lamp display, alarm list display,
alarm history display.
Reference: Library editor has the following features.
You can draw any graphics by combining fixed elements.
It is possible to import library data from the different screen data file.
Fixed display elements can be copied, cut, pasted from the editing screen
Copy, cut, paste operation of library data is possible.
Preview display of selected library data is available on the library table.
8-2-1 Operating the Library Table
Library table dialog is configured as follows:
[Edit] . . . . . . . . Deletes, cuts, copies or pastes the library data of the selected
code (refer to pages 335 to 336). It is possible to select two or
more codes and delete them collectively.
[Goto Code] . . Code number can be specified and the cursor moves to the
code. The operation method is same as the “Goto Entry” of
memory table (refer to 7-1-6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number).
[Preview] . . . . . Switches the preview window ON and OFF (refer to page
335).
[Open] . . . . . . . Displays the editing screen (library editor) of the selected
code (P343). When two or more codes are selected, edit
screens of all the selected codes can be opened collectively.
[New] . . . . . . . . Registers the new library code to the library table (refer to
page 337).
Only the registered library codes are listed on the library table.
Press this button when you are going to create new library
data.
[Delete] . . . . . . Deletes the library data of the selected code. When two or
more codes are selected, they can be deleted collectively.
[Close] . . . . . . . Closes the library table dialog.
334
Section
Library Editor
8-2
[Help] . . . . . . . . Displays Help about the library table dialog box.
Specifying a code
To specify a code for operations, click on the objective line (library code).
To specify the continuous codes collectively, click on the first code to be selected and then the last code to be selected while pressing the Shift key.
If you click on a code while pressing the Ctrl key, the code will be selected or
deselected alternately each time it is clicked.
Preview Function
Support Tool provides a preview function that can display the contents of the selected code.
When two or more codes are selected, the preview of the code selected last will
be displayed in preview window.
The preview window can be switched ON and OFF using the
/
Buttons.
Deleting the library data
To delete a library data, follow the procedure below. Deleted library data will not
be stored to the clipboard and its code itself will be also deleted. When two or
more codes are selected, they will be deleted collectively.
(1) Select [Library Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The library table is displayed.
(2) Select the code of the library data to be deleted.
When two or more codes are selected, they can be deleted collectively.
(3) Perform one of the following operations.
button → [Delete]
Right click on the selected code → [Delete]
button
Selected code will be deleted after you click the
firmation dialog box.
Button in the con-
Cutting/copying the library data
To cut or copy a library data, follow the procedure below. The cut/copied library
data will be stored to the clipboard and can be pasted to the other codes.
In case of “cut,” cut code will be deleted from the library table. In case of “copy,”
copied code remains in the library table.
335
Section
Library Editor
8-2
Reference: When two Support Tools are started up by [Import Component] from the [File]
menu, the data that is cut or copied on the library table of one Support Tool can be
pasted onto the library table of another Support Tool (PT model setting of the two
screen data files should be the same). For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
(1) Select [Library Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The library table is displayed.
(2) Select the code of the library data to be cut or copied.
Select only one code. When two or more codes are selected, cut/copy operation can not be performed.
(3) Click the
Button or right-click on the selected code.
(4) Select [Cut] or [Copy].
Library data of the selected code will be stored to the clipboard. In case of
[cut], confirmation dialog box will be displayed. After clicking on
button, cut code will be deleted from the library table.
Pasting the library data
To paste a library data that is stored in the clipboard by cut or copy operation,
follow the procedure below.
Reference: When two Support Tools are started up by [Import Component] from the [File]
menu, the data that is cut or copied on the library table of one Support Tool can
be pasted onto the library table of another Support Tool (PT model setting of the
two screen data files should be the same). For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing
Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support
Tool).
If the paste operation is performed, the library data previously registered to the
code is overwritten and lost. (Confirmation dialog box will be displayed.)
When a library data is pasted, the property (size, colors, compression, comment) of the library code is changed to that of the new one.
(1) Select [Library Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The library table is displayed.
(2) Select the code of the library data to be pasted.
Select only one code. When two or more codes are selected, paste operation can not be performed.
(3) Click the
Button or right-click on the selected code.
(4) Select [Paste].
[Paste] can not be selected if the library data to be pasted is not stored in the
336
Section
Library Editor
8-2
clipboard. After clicking the
Button in confirmation dialog box, library data will be pasted to the selected code.
Quitting the library table
You can quit the library table in any of the two ways described below.
Button of the library table dialog.
Clicking the
Clicking the
Button at the upper right corner of the library table dialog.
8-2-2 Creating Library Data Using Library Editor
Registering new library data
(1) Select [Library Editor] from the [Tools] menu.
The library table is displayed.
(2) Click the
Button.
The New Library Entry dialog box is displayed.
(3) Set the code, size, colors, compression, comment of the library data to be
Button.
newly created, then click the
Setting for New Library Entry dialog box
Code:
Specify the code to which the new library data is registered.
337
Section
Library Editor
8-2
When the dialog box is opened, the smallest unused code
is set.
Search Direction: Unregistered code can be searched using the
Button. In the Search Direction, specify Up (to the smaller
code) or Down (to the larger code) to designate the direction to which search operation is executed.
Comments:
Specify the comment for the library data to be created.
Find Next:
Searches the unused code. Specify the search direction in
the Search Direction.
Displaying library editor
(1) [Tools] (menu bar) → [Library Editor]
The library table is displayed.
(2) Select the code in the library table and click the
Button or
double-click the mouse on the objective code line.
When two or more codes are selected, edit screens (editors) of all the selected codes can be opened collectively. The library table dialog automatically closes at the same time the editor is displayed.
Changing the property
To change the property of the code that is already registered, open the editor and
then display the property dialog of the library data as follows:
Double click, or
Right click → [Properties]
[Code]:
Displays the code of the selected library data.
[Size]:
Displays the size of the specified library data.
Size data is not displayed if there are no elements in the library
data specifying frame.
[Comments]: Specify the comment for the library data to be created.
338
Section
Library Editor
8-2
Screen Configuration of Library Editor
The screen configuration of the library editor is described below.
Library data specifying frame
Edit area
Operating the library editor
Using the library editor, you can create a graphic using fixed elements in the
same manner as creating graphics in a standard screen. The size of the library
data specifying frame is taken as the size of the library data. The position and
size of the library data specifying frame can be changed as needed.
Only the graphic in the range of the library data specifying frame is registered as
the library data.
For details on how to use fixed elements, refer to 6-2 Fixed Display.
Reference: Library data that is cut or copied on the library editor window can be pasted onto
the other library editor window or standard editing screen (The data can be
pasted until another data is stored to the clipboard). Also, fixed-display elements
that were cut or copied from standard editing screens can be pasted onto the library editor window.
When more than one library editor window is displayed or when two Support
Tools are opened by [Import Component] from the [File] menu (same PT model
setting), cut, copy and paste operations between these library editor windows
are possible. For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different
Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
Library data
Display of library data
A circle extending outside
the specifying frame is not
displayed as library data.
Changing the size and display position of the library data specifying frame
To change the size of the library data specifying frame or move it, follow the steps
described below.
339
Section
Library Editor
8-2
(1) Click the mouse on the dotted lines of the library data specifying frame.
Green (handles) are displayed enclosing the library data specifying
frame.
(2) The size can be changed by dragging a handle.
Position the mouse cursor on a green handle: the shape of the mouse cursor
changes as shown below. Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction
to change the size of the library data specifying frame.
Right-left handle
Up-down handle
Apex handle
(3) The library data specifying frame can be moved by dragging the frame at
positions other than handles.
When handles are displayed, position the mouse cursor on the dotted line at
a position where there is no handle: the shape of mouse cursor changes as
shown below. Drag the mouse. The frame moves as it is dragged.
(4) After changing the size and the position of the library data specifying frame,
click on the screen at a position other than on the frame.
The size and the position of the library data specifying frame is determined
and the handles are cleared.
To change the size and the position of the library data specifying frame, repeat the procedure above from step (1).
Setting grids
To set a grid on the library editor screen, select [Screen] (menu bar) and [Grid].
The necessary settings for displaying grids are same as those for a standard
screen. For details, refer to 5-1-2 Grid Setting.
Quitting the library editor
You can quit the library editor in any of the three ways described below.
Clicking the
Button at the upper right area of the library editor.
Selecting [Close] from the control menu box of the library editor.
340
Section
Library Editor
8-2
Double clicking the control menu box of the library editor.
Control menu box
341
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
8-3
Mark Editor
Special symbols and marks can be created by tiling selected dots in a 16 16 dot
area. (For NT11S/NT11 it is 8 16 dot.)
The created mark data can be inserted into mark data displays and character
string displays.
Reference: The NT-series Support Tool cannot handle marks of 32 32 dots and 64 64
dots. If marks created by the DOS version Support Tool are imported, 32 32 or
64 64 dot size marks must be represented by dividing and grouping them as
16 16 dot size mark data.
8-3-1 Screen Configuration
The screen configuration of the mark editor is shown below.
Standard toolbar
Image display area
Edit area
Drawing toolbar
8-3-2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor
Displaying the mark editor
(1) [Tools] (menu bar) → [Mark Editor]
The mark data list dialog box is displayed.
In the mark data list dialog box, the mark data registered for the codes are
displayed.
(2) Select the code in the mark data list dialog box and click on
double click the area corresponding to the code in the list.
342
, or
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
A code can be selected either from the displayed list or by specification in the
[Code] field. If a code is selected in the list, the specified part is displayed
enlarged.
Operating the mark editor
Using the mark editor, you can create a mark by tiling dots arranged in a matrix.
To tile a dot, position the cursor on it and left click the mouse. To cancel tiling, right
click the mouse on a tiled dot.
Created graphics can be copied or pasted using the standard toolbar, and lines,
rectangles, and circles can be easily created using the drawing toolbar.
Reference: When two Support Tools are started up by [Import Component] from the [File]
menu, the data that is cut or copied on the mark editor of one Support Tool can be
pasted onto the mark editor of another Support Tool (PT model setting of the two
screen data files should be the same). For details, refer to 3-3-6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File (Starting Up the Second Support Tool).
* Standard toolbar
Redo (operation canceled by undo is executed again)
Undo (previous operation is canceled)
Paste (data that has been copied or cut is pasted)
Copy (graphic in the specified range is copied)
Cut (graphic in the specified range is cut)
Register (mark data is registered)
Open (mark data list dialog box is opened)
* Drawing toolbar
Toolbar
Used to move the graphic defined by the range specifying frame By
positioning the cursor on graphic defined by the range specifying
343
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
frame after positioning the cursor on it and dragging, the graphic is
moved.
Used to specify the range of a created graphic to copy, cut, or move.
By dragging the cursor from one corner to the diagonally opposing
corner, the range specifying rectangle frame is defined.
To cancel the range specifying frame, select the tools other than
,
.
Range specifying frame
Used to tile dots.
After placing the cursor on a dot to be tiled, left click the mouse.
To cancel tiling, place the cursor on a tiled dot and right click the
mouse.
Used to draw a line.
By dragging the mouse cursor from the start point to the end point,
dots arranged on a line are tiled.
Used to draw a rectangular frame.
By dragging the mouse cursor, the dots on a rectangle that has its
diagonally opposing corners at the start and the end point of the dragging route are tiled.
Used to draw a circular or oval frame
By dragging the mouse cursor between two diagonally opposing
corners of a rectangle that circumscribes the desired circle or oval
frame, the dots on the circle or oval are tiled.
Used to draw a tiled rectangle
By dragging the mouse cursor, the dots inside a rectangle that has its
diagonally opposing corners at the start and end point of the dragging
route are tiled.
Used to draw a tiled circle or oval
By dragging the mouse cursor between two diagonally opposing corners of a rectangle that circumscribes the desired circle or oval frame,
the dots inside the circle or oval are tiled.
Used to move the entire drawn graphic.
Drag the edit area and the graphic drawing position moves.
344
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
Used to turn the entire drawn graphic through 90°.
Left clicking on the edit area turns the graphic clockwise and right
clicking turns the graphic counterclockwise.
Left click
Right click
Referring to graphics
The mark editor allows you to refer to or reuse the existing graphics or sample
characters to draw desired new marks.
Click on
button and the reference graphic display area is displayed.
Reference graphic
display area
To close the reference graphic display area, click on
button again.
Referring to the existing mark data
To display the existing mark data as reference for creating a new mark, click on
above the reference graphic display area. The mark data list dialog box is
displayed.
345
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
Select the data you want to use as the reference in the mark data list dialog box
, or double click the mouse on the desired reference data.
and click on
Referring to characters
The mark editor allows you to use the existing characters as the reference for
above the reference graphic display area, and
creating characters. Click on
the reference character setting dialog box is displayed.
Input the characters you want to use as the reference and click on
.
For the reference characters, two characters (8 dot size) can be input.
To change the font and/or size of the characters used as the reference, click on
. The character setting dialog box is displayed.
(Presently, the Color setting is not
supported. It will be invalid even
if it was specified.)
346
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
Copying the reference graphics
To reuse the existing graphic displayed in the reference graphic display area,
above the reference graphic disspecify the range to be copied and click on
play area. After copying the graphic, click on
Paste button
above the edit area.
Copy button
Specifying
the copy range
Quitting the mark editor
To quit the mark editor, click on the
If you click on
mark editor.
button of the mark editor.
, the created mark data is discarded before you quit the
[OK] button
347
Section
Mark Editor
8-3
Deleting mark data
To delete the mark data, specify the mark data to be deleted in the mark data list
.
dialog box and click on
Reset button
348
SECTION 9
Example Screens
This section is intended to familiarize you with the operation of the Support Tool through actual operation.
The operational procedures for creating example screens are explained step by step.
Please follow the steps shown in this section and create example screens in order to understand the functions and the features
of the Support Tool.
Please do not forget to save the screen data frequently. (Refer to 3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File.)
The sample screen data to be created in this section is supplied by the CD-ROM version Support Tool.
Use this data to check the setting status etc.
(This data is provided just as a sample screen data. It is not created for the purpose of actual operation on PT after downloading
it to PT.)
9-1
9-2
9-3
Example Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-1 Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-2 Screen Transfer among Example Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Sample Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1 Starting up the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-2 File – New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-3 Setting the PT Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-4 Setting Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-5 Creating the Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-6 Creating the Monitor Screen (Child Screen 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-7 Creating the Monitor Screen (Child Screen 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-8 Creating the Monitor Screen (Parent Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-9 Creating the Set Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-10 Creating the Alarm Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-11 Creating the Alarm List Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-12 Creating the Pop-up Display Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-13 Saving the Created Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-14 Downloading to the PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
350
351
355
358
358
358
358
359
361
365
371
380
380
392
397
398
402
402
349
Section
Example Screen Configuration
9-1
9-1
Example Screen Configuration
The configuration and screen transfer of the example screens you are going to
create are described below.
9-1-1 Screen Configuration
Menu Screen (Screen No. 1)
PT power ON
Monitor
Screen
button
Set
Screen
button
Alarm
Screen
button
Menu
button
Menu
button
Set Screen (Screen No. 3)
Monitor Screen (Screen No. 2)
Set
button
Monitor
button
Alarm
button
Monitor
button
Menu
button
Alarm
button
Set
button
Alarm Screen
(Screen No. 4)
Create the Monitor Screen as overlapping screens comprising screen No. 10
and screen No. 11.
Parent screen (screen No. 2)
350
Child screen (screen No. 10)
Child screen (screen No. 11)
Section
Example Screen Configuration
9-1
9-1-2 Screen Transfer among Example Screens
How the displayed screen switches according to the button operation is shown
below.
Menu Screen
Monitor Screen button
Switches the screen to the Monitor Screen (screen No. 2).
Set Screen button
Switches the screen to the Set Screen (screen No. 3).
Alarm Screen button
Switches the screen to the Alarm Screen (screen No. 4).
Monitor Screen
Numeral Display 1
Displays the value of DM0000 in the PC (PLC).
Numeral Display 2
Displays the value of 32-bit data, the sum of DM0001 and DM0002 in the PC
(PLC).
Trend graph
Displays the value of DM0003 and DM0004 in the PC (PLC) in the form of a
trend graph.
Set the –100%, 0%, and 100% values as shown below.
value for –100%
value for 0
value for 100%
DM0003
–800
0
800
DM0004
0
600
1200
Lamp1 to Lamp 5
Displays the ON/OFF state of L000000 to L000004 in the PC (PLC).
351
Section
Example Screen Configuration
9-1
When L000000 is ON (OFF), Lamp 1 goes ON (OFF).
When L000001 is ON (OFF), Lamp 2 goes ON (OFF).
When L000002 is ON (OFF), Lamp 3 goes ON (OFF).
When L000003 is ON (OFF), Lamp 4 goes ON (OFF).
When L000004 is ON (OFF), Lamp 5 goes ON (OFF).
Image Lamp
Displays the ON/OFF state of L000005 in the PC (PLC).
Display when L000005 is ON.
Display when L000005 is OFF.
Bar Graph 1
Displays the value of DM0005 in the PC (PLC) in the form of a bar graph.
Set the –100%, 0%, and 100% values as shown below.
DM0005
value for –100%
value for 0
value for 100%
–500
0
500
Bar Graph 2
Displays the value of DM0006 in the PC (PLC) in the form of a bar graph.
Set the –100%, 0%, and 100% values as shown below.
DM0006
value for –100%
value for 0
value for 100%
–300
0
300
Menu
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Menu Screen (screen
No. 1).
Set
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Set Screen (screen No.
3).
Alarm
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Alarm Screen (screen
No. 4).
352
Section
Example Screen Configuration
9-1
Set Screen
Numeral Input 1
Used to set the data at two words, DM0010 and DM0011, in the PC (PLC).
When you touch the numeral display area, numeric keys are displayed (pop-up
window), allowing you to input the data.
Numeral Input 2
Used to set the data at two words, DM0012 and DM0013, in the PC (PLC).
When you touch the numeral display area, numeric keys are displayed (pop-up
window), allowing you to input the data.
Thumbwheel
Used to set the data at DM0014 in the PC (PLC).
String Display, Auto./Man./Step/Reset
When you touch any of the [Auto.], [Man.], [Step], and [Reset] buttons, the following character string is displayed in the [String Display] filed.
[Auto.] button:
Automatic
[Man.] button:
Manual
[Step] button:
Step
[Reset] button:
Reset
Start
This is a momentary type button.
When you touch this button, L000100 in the PC (PLC) goes ON.
If L000200 in the PC (PLC) goes ON, the button lights.
Stop
This is a momentary type button.
When you touch this button, L000101 in the PC (PLC) goes ON.
If L000201 in the PC (PLC) goes ON, the button lights.
Menu
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Menu Screen (screen
No. 1).
Monitor
This a screen switching button.
353
Section
Example Screen Configuration
9-1
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Monitor Screen (screen
No. 2).
Alarm
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Alarm Screen (screen
No. 4).
Alarm Screen
Alarm list and contents
Allocate 0002000 to 0002007 in the PC (PLC) as alarm bits.
If any of the allocated bits goes ON, the corresponding alarm message is displayed.
When you touch the alarm message, the corrective action and details of the
alarm are displayed in the alarm content display area.
Bits
Alarm Message
Alarm Content Display
0002000
Line 1 Error
Set line 1.
0002001
Line 2 Error
Set line 2.
0002002
A-spot Screw Error
Check torque screw.
0002003
B-spot Screw Error
Check torque screw.
0002004
Low Pressure
Check pipe and valve.
0002005
Area 1 Alarm
Detection near entry. Confirm safety
before restarting the line.
0002006
Area 2 Alarm
Detection near entry. Confirm safety
before restarting the line.
0002007
PC (PLC) Network
Error
Check the PC (PLC) and the network.
Menu
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Menu Screen (screen
No. 1).
Monitor
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Monitor Screen (screen
No. 2).
354
Section
Operation Flow
9-2
Set
This is a screen switching button.
When you touch this button, the screen switches to the Set Screen (screen No.
3).
Required environment
The required hardware environment for the creation of the example screens is
shown below.
PT model:
NT620C/625C
Image memory:
512 Kbytes
Memory table capacity:
Numeral memory table
Character string memory table (String table)
9-2
512 entries
256 entries
Operation Flow
Create the example screens by following the steps shown below.
Start up the Support Tool
↓
[File] – [New]
↓
Set PT configuration
↓
Set memory tables
↓
Creating the Menu Screen
Create new screen (screen No. 1)
↓
Set properties for screen No. 1
↓
Create screen title
↓
Create [Monitor Screen] button
↓
Create [Set Screen] button
↓
Create [Alarm Screen] button
↓
355
Section
Operation Flow
Creating Monitor Screen
Create new screen (screen No. 10)
↓
Set properties for screen No. 10
↓
Create screen title
↓
Create numeral display field of [Numeral Display 1]
↓
Create numeral display field of [Numeral Display 2]
↓
Create [Trend graph]
↓
Create new screen (screen No. 11)
↓
Set properties for screen No. 11
↓
Create [Lamp 1] to [Lamp 5]
↓
Create image data for image lamp
↓
Create [Image Lamp]
↓
Create [Bar Graph 1]
↓
Create [Bar Graph 2]
↓
Create [Menu] button
↓
Create [Set] button
↓
Create [Alarm] button
↓
Create parent screen
(screen No. 10, 11 as child screens)
↓
356
9-2
Section
Operation Flow
9-2
Creating the Set Screen
Create new screen (screen No. 3)
↓
Set properties for screen No. 3
↓
Create screen title
↓
Create numeral input field of [Numeral Input 1]
↓
Create numeral input field of [Numeral Input 2]
↓
Create [Thumbwheel]
↓
Create [Start] and [Stop] buttons
↓
Create [String Display] display field
↓
Create [Auto] button
↓
Create [Man.] button
↓
Create [Step] button
↓
Create [Reset] button
↓
Create [Menu] button
↓
Create [Monitor] button
↓
Create [Alarm] button
↓
357
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Creating the Alarm Screen
Create new screen (screen No. 4)
↓
Set properties for screen No. 4
↓
Create screen title
↓
Create alarm list
↓
Create [Menu] button
↓
Create [Set] button
↓
Create [Monitor] button
↓
Create alarm library data
↓
Create numeric keys for pop-up window display
↓
Save the created data
↓
Download the created data
9-3
Creating the Sample Data
This section describes the operational procedure and data creation procedure
step by step according to the operation flow shown in 9-2 Operation Flow.
Reference: The explanation in this section assumes that the default value of each object’s
property is not changed since installation.
9-3-1 Starting up the Support Tool
At the start-up screen of Windows, double click the Support Tool icon to start the
Support Tool. (Refer to 3-1 Starting-up and Exiting the Support Tool.)
9-3-2 File – New
Select [File] in the main menu, then select [New] to create a new file.
(Refer to 3-3-1 Creating New Screen Data (Application) File.)
9-3-3 Setting the PT Configuration
At the PT configuration setting dialog box, set the items as shown below.
(Refer to 3-3-1 Creating New Screen Data (Application) File.)
358
Section
Creating the Sample Data
PT Type
System
9-3
PT Model
NT620C/625C
PLC Vendor
OMRON
Font Type
CP437
Comments
SAMPLE DATA
Initial Screen
1
Backlight OFF
Check mark set,
60 min
Resume function
Check mark not
set
Number of
Table Entries
Numeral Table
512
String Table
256
Bit Memory Table
256
Printer
ESC/P
Mode
Color
Printer for PT
History Setting Alarm (Use Ring Buffer)
Check mark set
Buzzer
Enable
Check mark set,
On Error
Key Input
Check mark not
set
After setting the PT configuration items as indicated above, click on
.
9-3-4 Setting Memory Tables
Set the memory tables (numeral memory table, character string memory table
(string table), and bit memory table). (Refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting.)
Opening a table
(1) Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Table].
Setting numeral memory table
(1) Make the numeral memory table settings as shown below.
PC (PLC)
Address
I/O
Comments
Ref
1
D00000
Mtr: Num.disp.1
––
2
D00001
Mtr: Num.disp.2
––
0
1
D00003
Mtr: Trd.graph 1
––
3
0
1
D00004
Mtr: Trd.graph 2
––
4
0
1
D00005
Mtr: Bar graph 1
––
5
0
1
D00006
Mtr: Bar graph 2
––
No.
Value
0
0
1
0
2
Initial Words
––
10
0
2
D00010
Set: Num.input 1
––
11
0
2
D00012
Set: Num.input 2
––
12
0
1
D00014
Set: Thumbwheel
––
Setting character string memory table
(1) Click on [String].
359
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(2) Make the character string memory table settings as shown below.
No.
Value
Initial Words
0
PC (PLC)
Address
I/O
Comments
Ref
0
––
––
10
Automatic
0
––
––
11
Manual
0
––
––
12
Step
0
––
––
13
Reset
0
––
––
––
20
Line 1 Error
20
D00150
Alarm data 1
––
21
Line 2 Error
20
D00170
Alarm data 2
––
22
A-spot Screw Error
20
D00190
Alarm data 3
––
23
B-spot Screw Error
20
D00210
Alarm data 4
––
24
Low Pressure
20
D00230
Alarm data 5
––
25
Area 1 Alarm
20
D00250
Alarm data 6
––
26
Area 2 Alarm
20
D00270
Alarm data 7
––
27
PC (PLC) Network Error
20
D00290
Alarm data 8
––
Setting bit memory table
(1) Click on [Bit Memory].
(2) Make the bit memory table settings as shown below.
Button to set the following items.
Click the
Function
History
Switch Screen
String Table Entry
Image/Library Code
Color
Click the
Button to set the following items.
(Direct input on a bit memory table is also possible.)
PLC Address
I/O Comments
360
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
String
Table
Entry
Image/
Library
Code*1
Color
PC
Address
I/O
Comments
Alarm/Switch
Screen
20
FA20
White
0002000
Alarm 1
1
Alarm/Switch
Screen
21
FA21
White
0002001
Alarm 2
2
Alarm/Switch
Screen
22
FA22
White
0002002
Alarm 3
3
Alarm/Switch
Screen
23
FA22
White
0002003
Alarm 4
4
Alarm/Switch
Screen
24
FA23
White
0002004
Alarm 5
5
Alarm/Switch
Screen
25
FA24
White
0002005
Alarm 6
6
Alarm/Switch
Screen
26
FA24
White
0002006
Alarm 7
7
Alarm/Switch
Screen
27
FA25
White
0002007
Alarm 8
No.
Function
0
Switch
Screen
History
*1: With NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C, set the Alarm for function and unmark
the check box for “Switch Screen.”
9-3-5 Creating the Menu Screen
Create the Menu Screen.
Display the data creation window for screen No. 1, which is displayed at the startup of the Support Tool, at the front.
Setting the screen properties
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties].
(2) Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No. 1. (Refer to 5-1-1
Setting the Screen Attributes.)
Attributes
Screen No.
1
History
Title
Menu Screen
Comment
Menu Screen
Buzzer
, Short
Load Local 1 (Keyboard)
System Keypad
Color
Background
Black
361
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Grid
9-3
Grid Size
Custom
Horizontal Spacing: 5
Vertical Spacing:
5
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Creating the screen title (Menu Screen)
Setting the characters
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text] (Refer to 6-2-7
Text.)
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the
screen title is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of text).
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Menu Screen
Description
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
(4) Adjust the position of the “Menu Screen” on the data creation screen by
dragging it.
Surrounding the title with a frame
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Rectangle]. (Refer to
6-2-3 Rectangle.)
(6) On the data creation screen, drag the rectangle so that it encloses the
“Menu Screen” character string.
(7) Use the properties as they are.
(8) Adjust the size and the position of the frame (rectangle).
Creating the [Monitor Screen] button
362
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Setting the touch switch outline
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Touch Switch]. (Refer to 6-8 Touch
Switches.)
(2) Create the outline of the [Monitor Screen] button by dragging the mouse
on the data creation screen.
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
3-Dimension
Show ON State
Color
Settings
Light
Function
Label*1
––
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
Switch Screen
Screen No.
2
Address
PC (PLC) Address
––
I/O Comments
––
Lamp Attribute
Light
Label
Description
Monitor Screen
(Refer to the following)*2
*1:
For the NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or
later models, multiple lines of label, On Off static label, numeral/
string display label can also be set.
*2:
Click the
Button to set the label.
After completing the setting, go to the next step by clicking the
Button.
*3:
For the NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or
later models, it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable/disable the operations.
Setting the touch switch label
(4) Press
in the general property of a touch switch and set the label properties as shown below.
Description
Monitor Screen
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
363
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Click on
9-3
, (return to touch switch property) then click on
again.
Adjusting the size and position of the touch switch
(5) Adjust the size and position of the frame of [Monitor Screen] button.
(6) Specify the [Monitor Screen] button.
(7) Select [Centralize Label] from [Draw] menu.
The label is centralized.
Creating the [Set Screen] button
Copying and pasting the [Monitor Screen] button
(1) Specify the [Monitor Screen] button.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Copy]. (Refer to 6-1-5 Copying, Cutting, Pasting, and Deleting Elements.)
(3) Select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Paste]. (Refer to 6-1-5 Copying, Cutting, Pasting, and Deleting Elements.)
(4) Drag the [Monitor Screen] button, displayed at the upper left area in the
data creation screen, to the position where you want to create the [Set
Screen] button.
Modifying to the [Set Screen] button
(5) Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Attribute
Label
Description
Settings
*1:
Press
Screen No.
Set Screen*1
3
to set the label.
Creating the [Alarm Screen] button
Copying and pasting the [Monitor Screen] button
(1) Specify the [Monitor Screen] button.
(2) Select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Copy].
(3) Select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Paste].
(4) Drag the [Monitor Screen] button, displayed at the upper left area in the
data creation screen, to the position where you want to create the [Alarm
Screen] button.
Modifying to the [Alarm Screen] button
(5) Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
364
Section
Creating the Sample Data
General
Label
Alarm Screen*1
Description
Settings
*1:
Screen No.
Press
9-3
4
to set the label.
9-3-6 Creating the Monitor Screen (Child Screen 1)
The monitor screen consists of overlapping screens with screen Nos. 10 and 11
as its child screens. When creating overlapping screens, create the child screens
first. Here, create screen No. 10 as child screen 1.
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [New]. (Refer to 4-2-3 Creating a New
Screen.)
(2) At the screen selection dialog box, set “Standard Screen.”
(3) At the new standard screen dialog box, set 10 for the screen No.
Setting the screen properties
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties].
(2) Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No. 10.
Attributes
Screen No.
10
History
Title
Monitor Screen-1
Comment
Monitor Screen-1
Buzzer
Load Local 1 (Keyboard)
System Keypad
Color
Grid
Background
Black
Grid Size
Custom
Horizontal Spacing: 5
Vertical Spacing:
5
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Creating the screen title ([Monitor Screen])
365
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Copying the screen title from screen No. 1 (Menu Screen)
(1) Copy the “Menu Screen” character string and its frame (rectangle) on
screen No. 1 and paste them to screen No. 10.
(2) Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the
desired position.
Modifying to [Monitor Screen]
(3) Double click the “Menu Screen” character string and modify the properties
as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
If selection of the “Menu Screen” character string is not easy, select [Edit]
(menu bar) → [Select Object], then click on the fixed display text.
Description
Monitor Screen
(4) Adjust the size of the frame (rectangle).
Creating the data display field ([Numeral Display 1])
Setting the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the numeral display field title is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner
of text).
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Numeral Display 1
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
(4) Adjust the position of “Numeral Display 1” on the data creation screen by
dragging it.
Creating the numeral display field
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Numeral Display]. (Refer to 6-6 Numeral
Display.)
366
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(6) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the numeral display field is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of
numeral display).
(7) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
Font Type
Standard
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Settings
––
Reference
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Indirect
Reference
Table Entry
Display Type
Format
0
Decimal
Integer
4
Decimal
0
Zero Suppression
Display Sign
(8) Adjust the position of the numeral display field by dragging it.
Surrounding the numeral display field with a frame
(9) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Rectangle].
(10) On the data creation screen, drag the rectangle so that it encloses the numeral display field.
(11) Use the properties as they are.
(12) Adjust the size and the position of the frame (rectangle).
Creating the numeral display field ([Numeral Display 2])
Copying and pasting the numeral display field ([Numeral Display 1])
(1) Copy the “Numeral Display 1” character string, numeral display field, and
its frame (rectangle).
(2) Paste the copied contents and move them to the desired position (for displaying [Numeral Display 2]).
Modifying to [Numeral Display 2]
(3) Double click the “Numeral Display 1” character string and modify the properties as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
367
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Description
9-3
Numeral Display 2
Modifying the numeral display field
(4) Double click the numeral display field ([
0] displayed) and modify the
properties as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Reference
Format
(5) Drag the numeral display field ([
Indirect
Reference
Table Entry
1
Integer
8
Decimal
0
0]) to the desired display position.
Modifying the frame
(6) Specify the copied frame (rectangle) and adjust the size and the position.
Creating the trend graph
Setting the graph
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Graph] → [Trend Graph]. (Refer to 6-9-4
Trend Graph.)
(2) At the trend graph display position, drag the mouse to set the trend graph
display area as desired.
(3) Set the general properties as shown below.
368
Section
Creating the Sample Data
General
Position
––
Size
––
Display
Type
Standard
Drawing Width
3
Frame
Display Sign
Direction
Right
Sampling Cycle
1 *1
Color
Frame
White
+ Range
Black
– Range
Black
9-3
*1: For NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C, sampling cycle of trend graph must be
multiple of 5 (minimum 5).
Setting the graph line
(4) Double click the [Settings] tab and click on
.
Set the line 1 properties as shown below.
Line
Value
Line
100%
Table Entry
2
Display %
Color
Cyan
Style
Solid (
Table Entry
Value
0%
, 800
Table Entry
Value
–100%
, 0
Table Entry
Value
(5) Click on
)
, –800
to close the line 1 properties.
(6) Click on
to add line 2.
Set the line 2 properties as shown below.
Line
Value
Line
100%
Table Entry
3
Display %
Color
White
Style
Dot-dash (
Table Entry
Value
0%
, 1200
Table Entry
Value
–100%
)
, 600
Table Entry
Value
, 0
369
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Click on
, (returns to setting property) then click on
9-3
again.
Adjusting the size and position of the frame and % display
(7) Specify the trend graph and select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Select Object].
(8) In the list, specify [0%] (Line 1 display %) at the upper right of the trend
graph and drag it to the % display position for Data 1.
Reference: Even if elements are overlapped, you can select the desired element easily using
the [Select Object] function. For elements such as a trend graph that consist of
several elements, use the [Edit Object] function to make element selection easier.
(9) Specify [–100%] (Line 2 display %) at the upper right of the trend graph
and drag it to the % display position for Data 2.
(10) Specify the trend graph frame and adjust the size and the position.
Displaying an example
Create the example of display using fixed display text and straight lines.
(11) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(12) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor positioned at the “Data 1” display
position.
(13) Set “Data 1” in the character string setting (Fixed Display – Text) dialog
box.
(14) Adjust the “Data 1” display position.
(15) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Polyline]. (Refer to 6-2-1
Polyline.)
(16) Drag the mouse cursor in the range (from the start point to the end point)
where a line is to be displayed to the left of [Data 1].
Set the line property as shown below.
General
Line Style
Solid
Line Color
Cyan
(17) Specify the drawn line and adjust the length and the position of the line.
(18) Create the example display of “Data 2” in the same manner.
Set the line property as shown below.
General
370
Line Style
Dot-dash
Line Color
White
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
9-3-7 Creating the Monitor Screen (Child Screen 2)
Here, create screen No. 11 as child screen 2.
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [New].
(2) At the screen selection dialog box, set “Standard Screen.”
(3) At the new standard screen dialog box, set 11 for the screen No.
Setting the screen properties
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties].
(2) Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No. 11.
Attributes
Screen No.
11
History
Title
Monitor Screen-2
Comment
Monitor Screen-2
Buzzer
Load Local 1 (Keyboard)
System Keypad
Color
Grid
Background
Black
Grid Size
Custom
Horizontal Spacing: 5
Vertical Spacing:
5
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Creating the lamps ([Lamp 1] to [Lamp 5])
Creating the frame of lamp 1
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Lamp] → [Standard]. (Refer to 6-5
Lamps.)
(2) At the [Lamp 1] display position in the data creation screen, drag the
mouse to create the lamp frame.
In this step, a rectangular frame is created.
371
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
Circle
Color
Light
Functions
Address
Lamp Attribute
Label*1
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
PC (PLC) Bit Address L0000000
I/O Comment
Lamp 1
ON Type
Light
Lamp 1 (refer
to the following)*2
Label
*1:
For the NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or
later models, multiple lines of label, On Off static label, numeral/
string display label can also be set.
*2:
Click the
Button to set the label.
If the I/O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function,
clicking the
Button copies the label.
After completing the setting, go to the next step with clicking the
Button.
Setting the label for lamp 1
(4) Press
in the general property of a lamp and set the label properties as shown below.
Comment
Lamp 1
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Click on
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
, (returns to lamp property) then click on
again.
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, “Color: ON” and “Color:
OFF” can be set independently for a label so that the lamp can be displayed in
different colors in the ON and OFF states.
372
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Adjusting the size and position of the lamp
(5) Specify the “Lamp 1.”
(6) Select [Edit Object] from [Edit] menu.
For methods of specifying an element consisting of multiple elements, refer
to 6-1-3 Selecting an Element.
(7) Specify the “Lamp 1” and adjust the size and position of the lamp frame.
(8) Adjust the position of the “Lamp 1” character string by dragging it.
Creating lamp 2
(9) Copy [Lamp 1] and paste it onto the data creation screen.
(10) Move the pasted [Lamp 1] to the [Lamp 2] position.
(11) Double click the mouse on the pasted [Lamp 1] and modify the properties
as shown below. Note that the properties not shown here must be left unchanged.
Light
Functions
Address
Label
Label
*1:
PC (PLC) Bit Address
L0000001
I/O Comment
Lamp 2
, Lamp 2 *1
Press
to set the label.
If the I/O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function,
clicking on
button copies the label.
(12) Create [Lamp 3], [Lamp 4], and [Lamp 5] in the same manner.
(13) Modify the properties as shown below meeting the individual lamps.
Lamp 3
Light
Address PC (PLC)
L0000002
Functions
Bit Address
I/O
Comment
Label
Label
*1:
, Lamp 4
, Lamp 5
L0000003
L0000004
Lamp 3
Lamp 4
Lamp 5
, Lamp
3*1
, Lamp
4*1
, Lamp
5*1
Press
to set the label.
If the I/O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function,
clicking on
button copies the label.
Creating the image/library lamp image data
Create two kinds of image data for the image/library lamp.
Create the image data for codes FE20 and FE21.
FE20
FE21
373
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(1) Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Image Editor].
(2) Click on
.
(3) Set the properties as shown below and click on
FE20
Code
Size
.
Width
64
Height
48
Mode
8 Colors
Compression
(4) Click on
to create the image data. (For the image data creation
procedure, refer to 8-1 Image Editor.)
(5) Close the image editor.
(6) Call the image editor again and create the image data for code FE21.
Reference: It is possible to copy image data FE20 onto FE21 on the image table so that it can
be reused.
Follow the procedure below.
and register the code FE21 (Properties other than code
a. Click on
need not be changed).
b. Specify FE20 and select [Copy] by pressing
button.
c. Specify FE21 and select [Paste] by pressing
button.
Creating the [Image Lamp]
Creating the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the label
“Image Lamp” is to be displayed.
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Image Lamp
Description
Position
Font Type
Standard
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
374
––
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(4) Adjust the position of “Image Lamp” character string on the data creation
screen by dragging it.
Setting the image/library lamp
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Lamp] → [Image].
(6) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the
image/library lamp is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner).
(7) Set a check mark in the check box of the [Code] for OFF, in General, and
click on
.
(8) In the image table, specify “FE20” and click on
.
(9) Set a check mark in the check box of the [Code] for ON, in General, and
click on
.
.
(10) In the image table, specify “FE21” and click on
(11) Set the lamp function properties as shown below.
Light
Functions
Address
PC (PLC) Bit Address
L0000005
I/O Comment
Image Lamp
(12) Adjust the display position of the image/library lamp.
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, codes assigned to image
data are from 0001 to 0FFF. However, if NT20/30/620-compatible mode is used
with the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the image code will be the
same as NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C and NT625C.
Creating [Bar Graph 1] and [Bar Graph 2]
Creating the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the character string of [Bar Graph 1] is to be displayed (at the intended upper left
corner of bar graph).
(3)
Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Bar Graph 1
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Black
375
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(4) Adjust the position of “Bar Graph 1” character string on the data creation
screen by dragging it.
Creating the bar graph frame
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Graph] → [Bar Graph]. (Refer to 6-9-1 Bar
Graph.)
(6) Drag the mouse cursor at the position where bar graph 1 is to be displayed
(drag between diagonally opposing corners) to create the frame of [Bar
Graph 1].
(7) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Display Sign
Direction
Right
Color
Settings
Value
100%
Frame
White
+ Range
White
– Range
White
Table Entry
4
Display %
Table Entry
, 500
Display %
0%
Table Entry
, 0
Display %
–100%
Table Entry
, –500
Display %
Setting the % display
(8) After specifying the bar graph, select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object].
(9) Double click on [0%] and set the properties as shown below.
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Color
––
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Adjusting the size and position of bar graph frame and % display
376
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(10) Specify [0%] at the upper left of the trend graph and drag it to the % display
position.
(11) Specify the bar graph frame and adjust the size and position of bar graph
frame.
Creating bar graph 2
(12) Specify all of label, bar graph frame, and % display of [Bar Graph 1] and
copy and paste them onto the data creation screen.
(13) Move the pasted bar graph 1 element, which was pasted at the upper left
area in the data creation screen, to the position of [Bar Graph 2].
(14) Double click the label “Bar Graph 1,” which has been moved to the bar
graph 2 position, and modify the properties as shown below.
Label
Bar Graph 2
(15) Double click on the frame of bar graph 2 and modify the properties as
shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Value
100%
Table Entry
5
Display %
Table Entry
Display %
0%
Table Entry
Display %
–100%
, 300
, 0
Table Entry
Display %
, –300
Creating the [Menu] button, [Set] button, and [Alarm] button
Creating the [Menu] button frame
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Touch Switch]
(2) Create the [Menu] button frame by dragging the mouse at the button display position.
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
377
Section
Creating the Sample Data
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
3-Dimension
Show ON State
Color
Settings
Light
Function
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
Switch Screen
Screen No.
1
Address
Lamp Attribute
Label
Frame
9-3
PC (PLC) Address
––
I/O Comments
––
Attribute
Light
, Menu (refer
to the following)
Label
*1
*1:
Press
to set the label.
After completing the setting, go to the next step without clicking on
button.
Setting the label of [Menu] button
in the general property of a touch switch and set the la(4) Press
bel properties as shown below.
Description
Menu
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 1 (Equal)
Smoothing
––
Attribute
Color
Standard
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, “Color: ON” and “Color:
OFF” can be set independently for a label so that the lamp can be displayed in
different colors in the ON and OFF states.
Click on
, (returns to touch switch property) then click on
again.
Adjusting the size and position of the touch switch
(5) Specify the [Menu] button and select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object].
(6) Adjust the size and position of [Menu] button frame.
(7) Adjust the position of label “Menu” by dragging it.
378
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Creating the [Set] button
(8) Copy the [Menu] button and paste it on the screen.
(9) Move the [Menu] button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the
[Set] button position.
(10) Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Screen No.
3
Label
Label
, Set *1
*1:
Press
to set the label.
(11) Create the [Alarm] button in the same manner.
Modify [Alarm] button properties as shown below.
Settings
Screen No.
4
Label
Label
, Alarm *1
*1:
Press
to set the label.
Creating the frame
(12) Select [Objects] (main menu) → [Fixed Display] → [Rectangle].
(13) Drag the mouse so that the rectangular frame encloses the three buttons.
(14) Use the properties as they are.
(15) Adjust the size and the position of the frame (rectangle).
Setting the [Switch Screen] character string
(16) Select [Objects] (main menu) → [Fixed Display] → [Text]
(17) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the
[Switch Screen] character string is to be displayed (at the intended upper
left corner).
(18) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Switch Screen
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 1 (Equal)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Black
(19) Adjust the position of the “Switch Screen” character string on the data creation screen by dragging it.
379
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(20) Specify the “Switch Screen” character string, then select [Draw] (menu
bar) → [Bring to Front]. (For details of Moving an overlapped element to
the front or back, refer to 6-1-5 Copying, Cutting, Pasting, and Deleting
Elements.)
The “Switch Screen” character string is brought to the front of the frame.
Reference: The positional relationship in the display of the same kind of elements, such as
among fixed display elements, can be controlled by selecting [Draw] → [Bring to
Front] or [Send to Back].
9-3-8 Creating the Monitor Screen (Parent Screen)
Register screens No. 10 and N0. 11 as child screens of screen No. 2. Screen No.
2 is regarded as a parent screen of overlapping screens. (Refer to 5-3-2 Overlapping Screens.)
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [New].
(2) In the screen type designation dialog box, select the Parent Screen and click
.
on
(3) In the setting dialog box of a parent screen, set the displayed items as shown
below.
Parent Screen
Screen No.
2
Type
Overlapping
(4) Specify 10 in the standard screen box and click on
.
(5) Specify 11 in the standard screen box and click on
.
(6) Click on
.
9-3-9 Creating the Set Screen
Create screen No. 3 (new screen) as the Set Screen.
380
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [New].
(2) At the screen selection dialog box, set “Standard Screen.”
(3) At the new standard screen dialog box, set 3 for the screen No.
Setting the screen properties
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties].
(2) Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No. 3.
Attributes
Screen No.
3
History
Title
Set Screen
Comment
Set Screen
Buzzer
Load Local 1 (Keyboard)
System Keypad
Color
Grid
Background
Black
Grid Size
Custom
Horizontal Spacing: 5
Vertical Spacing:
5
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Creating the screen title ([Set Screen])
Copying the screen title from screen No. 1 (Menu Screen)
(1) Copy the “Menu Screen” character string and its frame (rectangle) on
screen No. 1 and paste them onto screen No. 3.
(2) Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the
desired position.
Modifying to [Set Screen]
(3) Double click the “Menu Screen” character string and modify the properties
as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Description
Set Screen
(4) Adjust the size of the frame (rectangle).
Creating the data input field ([Numeral Input 1])
381
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Setting the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data
display field title is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner).
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Numeral Input 1
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Transparent
(4) Adjust the position of “Numeral Input 1” on the data creation screen by
dragging it.
Creating the data input field
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Data Input] → [Numeral]. (Refer to 6-4-1
Numeral Input.)
(6) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data
input field is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner).
(7) At the cursor moving touch switch use selection dialog box, set the displayed items as shown below.
Create Cursor Move Touch Switch
Setting the numeral input field
(8) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
Font Type
Standard
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
382
––
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Settings
Table Entry
10
Display Type
Decimal
Format
Limit
*1:
Integer
8
Decimal
0
Maximum
99999999
Minimum
0
Zero Suppression
Display Sign
Focus Frame
Focus Attribute
Standard
9-3
For the NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or
later models, it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable/disable the operations.
Setting the cursor moving touch switch
(9) Double click on the touch switch area (dotted line frame) created at the
numeral input field position and set the properties as shown below.
If selection of the touch switch is not easy, choose [Select Object] from the
[Edit] menu and select the touch switch from the list.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
Standard
Show ON State
Color
Settings
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
Cursor Move
Use Window/Keyboard Screen
Screen No.
1900
Auto Arrange *1
Light
Function
Address
Lamp Attribute
Label
PC (PLC) Address
––
I/O Comments
––
Light
Label
*1:
Uncheck the check mark for “Auto Arrange.” Otherwise, it is not possible to change the position of each numeral input and touch switch.
*2:
For the NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or
later models, it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable/disable the operations.
383
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Adjusting the size and position of numeral input 1 input field and the touch
switch
(10) Specify only the touch switch area and adjust the size and the position.
(11) Specify only the numeral input field and adjust the size and the position.
Creating the numeral input field ([Numeral Input 2])
Copying and pasting the numeral input field ([Numeral Input 1])
(1) Copy “Numeral Input 1” character string, numeral display field, and touch
switch and paste them to the data creation screen.
(2) Move the character string, numeral display field, and touch switch pasted
at the upper left area of the screen to the desired position (for displaying
[Numeral Input 2]).
(3) Double click the “Numeral Input 1” character string and modify the properties as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Description
Numeral Input 2
(4) Double click the data input field ([
0] displayed) and modify the properties as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Table Entry
11
Creating the thumbwheel switch
Creating the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the title is
to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of text).
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Thumbwheel
Position
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
384
––
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(4) Adjust the position of the Thumbwheel on the data creation screen by
dragging it.
Creating the thumbwheel switch
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Data Input] → [Thumbwheel Switch].
(Refer to 6-4-3 Thumbwheel Switch.)
(6) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the
thumbwheel switch is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of
thumbwheel).
(7) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
Size
Medium
Attribute
Standard
End Plate
Thumbwheel
Color
Character
Color
Settings
Frame
White
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Table Entry
12
Display Type
Decimal
Format
Limit
Display sign
*1:
––
Integer
4
Decimal
0
Maximum
999
Minimum
F0009999
For the NT21 and NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or
later models, it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable/disable the operations.
(8) Adjust the position of the thumbwheel switch on the data creation screen
by dragging it.
Creating the [Start] button and the [Stop] button
385
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Creating the [Start] button frame
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Touch Switch]
(2) Create the [Start] button frame by dragging the mouse at the button display position.
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Label
, Start (refer to
the following) *1
Frame
Shape
Shadow
Show ON State
Color
Settings
––
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
Address
Notify Bit
PC (PLC) Address
L0000100
I/O Comments
Start Switch
Action Type
Light
Function
Address
Lamp Attribute
*1:
Momentary
PC (PLC) Address
L0000200
I/O Comments
Start lamp
General
Light
Press
to set the label.
After completing the setting, go to the next step without clicking on
button.
(4) Press
in the general property of a touch switch and set the label properties as shown below.
Description
Start
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Click on
Foreground
White
Background
Black
, (returns to touch switch property) then click on
again.
Adjusting the size and position of [Start] button
(5) Specify the [Start] button and select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object].
(6) Adjust the size and position of [Start] button frame.
386
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(7) Adjust the position of the label “Start” by dragging it.
Creating the [Stop] button
(8) Copy the [Start] button and paste it on the data creation screen.
(9) Move the [Start] button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the
[Stop] button position.
(10) Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Address
Light
Function
Address
Label
Label
*1:
Press
PC (PLC) Address
L0000101
I/O Comments
Stop Switch
PC (PLC) Address
L0000201
I/O Comments
Stop lamp
, Stop *1
to set the label.
Creating the character string display field ([String Display])
Setting the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the “String
Display” character string is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of text).
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
String Display
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Black
(4) Adjust the position of the “String Display” on the data creation screen by
dragging it.
387
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Creating the character string display field
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [String Display].
(6) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the character string display field is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of string display field).
(7) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Settings
––
Reference
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Indirect
Reference
Table Entry
Length
0
20
(8) Adjust the position of the character string display field by dragging it.
Creating the character string display field frame
(9) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Rectangle].
(10) On the data creation screen, drag the rectangle so that it encloses the
character string display field.
(11) Use the properties as they are.
(12) Adjust the size and the position of the frame (rectangle).
Creating the [Auto] button, [Man.] button, [Step] button, and [Reset] button
Creating the [Auto] button frame
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Touch Switch]
(2) Create the [Auto] button frame by dragging the mouse at the button display position.
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
388
Section
Creating the Sample Data
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
Shadow
Show ON State
Color
Settings
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
Copy From
9-3
Copy Setting
Numeral Table
String Table
Code
Entry (Text Box)
Copy To
10
Numeral Table
String Table
Cursor Position
Entry (Text Box)
Light
Function
Address
Lamp Attribute
Label
*1:
0
PC (PLC) Address
––
I/O Comments
––
On Type
Light
, Auto (refer to
the following) *1
Label
Press
to set the label.
After completing the setting, go to the next step without clicking on
button.
Setting the label of [Auto] button
in the general property of a touch switch and set the la(4) Press
bel properties as shown below.
Description
Auto
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Click on
Foreground
White
Background
Black
, (returns to touch switch property) then click on
again.
Adjusting the size and position of [Auto] button
(5) Specify the [Auto] button and select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object].
389
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(6) Adjust the size and position of [Start] button frame.
(7) Adjust the position of the label “Auto” by dragging it.
Creating the [Man.] button
(8) Copy the [Auto] button and paste it onto the data creation screen.
(9) Move the [Auto] button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the
[Man.] button position.
(10) Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Numeral Table
Copy From
String Table
Code
Entry (Text Box)
Label
*1:
, Man. *1
Label
Press
11
to set the label.
Creating the [Step] button and the [Reset] button
(11) Create the [Step] button and the [Reset] button in the same manner as the
[Man.] button.
For the [Step] button and the [Reset] button, change the properties as
shown below.
[Step] button
Settings
Copy From
[Reset]
button
Numeral Table
String Table
12
13
, Step
, Reset
Code
Entry (Text Box)
General
Label
Creating the button group title bar
(12) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Polyline].
(13) While pressing the shift key, drag the polyline from start point to the second vertex, and then from the second vertex to the third vertex. Repeat
this procedure to create the desired form. Release the Shift key just before
reaching at the last point.
390
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Reference: To draw continuous polyline, press shift key when drag operation is finished.
Dragging this end point creates continuous polyline.
(14) Use the properties as they are.
Creating the “Select” character string
(15) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(16) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the “Select” character string is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of
text).
In the character string setting (Fixed Display-text) dialog box, set “Select.”
(17) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Select
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 1 (Equal)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Black
(18) Adjust the position of the “Select” character string on the data creation
screen by dragging it.
(19) Specify the “Select” character string, then select [Draw] (menu bar) →
[Bring to Front].
The “Select” character string is brought to the front of the title bar.
Creating the [Menu] button, [Monitor] button, and [Alarm] button
Copying and pasting the buttons from screen No. 11
(1) Copy the “Switch Screen” character string, frame (rectangle), [Menu] button, [Set] button, and [Alarm] button collectively and paste them to screen
No. 3.
(2) Adjust the display position of the pasted character string, frame (rectangle), and buttons.
Modifying to the [Monitor] button
(3) Double click the [Set] button and change the properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Settings
Screen No.
2
Label
Label
,Monitor *1
391
Section
Creating the Sample Data
*1:
Press
9-3
to set the label.
(4) Resize the [Monitor] button larger than others.
9-3-10 Creating the Alarm Screen
Create screen No. 4 (new screen) as the Alarm Screen.
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [New].
(2) At the screen selection dialog box, set “Standard Screen.”
(3) At the new standard screen dialog box, set 4 for the screen No.
Setting the screen properties
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties].
(2) Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No. 4.
Attributes
Screen No.
4
History
Title
Alarm Screen
Comment
Alarm Screen
Buzzer
Load Local 1 (Keyboard)
System Keypad
Color
Grid
Background
Black
Grid Size
Custom
Horizontal Spacing:
5
Vertical Spacing:
5
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Creating the screen title ([Alarm Screen])
Copying the screen title from screen No. 1 (Menu Screen)
(1) Copy the “Menu Screen” character string and its frame (rectangle) on
screen No. 1 and paste them onto screen No. 4.
392
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(2) Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the
desired position.
Modifying to [Alarm Screen]
(3) Double click the “Menu Screen” character string and modify the properties
as shown below. Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Description
Alarm Screen
(4) Adjust the size of the frame (rectangle).
Creating the alarm list
Setting the title
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the “Alarm
List” character string is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of
text).
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
Description
Alarm List
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 1 (Equal)
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Black
(4) Adjust the position of the “Alarm List” character string on the data creation
screen by dragging it.
393
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Creating the alarm list
(5) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Alarm] → [List]. (Refer to 6-3-1 Alarm List.)
(6) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the alarm
list is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner).
(7) Make the following settings in the dialog box for selecting whether or not
the line scroll touch switches and page scroll touch switches are used.
Create Line Scroll Touch Switch
Create Page Scroll Touch Switch
Reference: For NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, this dialog box is not displayed.
For these models, create the alarm list and then set whether or not the line/page
scroll touch switches are created in the property settings.
(8) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Message
Color
Length
32
Display Line Qty
8
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Frame
White
Background
ON
White
OFF
Black
Image & Library Display ImageLib
Color
Settings
List Settings
Foreground
White
Background
Black
Start Bit Table Entry
0
No. of Bits Referenced
8
(9) Adjust the display position of the alarm list by dragging it.
After that, click on any position in the screen other than the alarm list to cancel the
alarm list selected state (edit state).
Changing the frame of the line scroll (down) touch switch
(10) Specify the switch at the bottom in the touch switches at the right side of
the alarm list and adjust its size and position (move it to the lowest line in
the alarm list).
(11) Double click the line scroll (down) touch switch and set the properties as
shown below.
394
Section
Creating the Sample Data
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
Standard
Show ON State
Color
Settings
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
9-3
Input Key-Control
Control Key
Light
Function
Address
Lamp Attribute
Label
*1:
PC (PLC) Address
––
I/O Comments
––
General
Light
, <!FFF9> *1
Label
Here, the label is not changed. (If you need to change it, press
button.)
After completing the setting, go to the next step without clicking on
button.
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the touch switches used to
control the alarm list are a part of the list and their properties, such as the label
and the size, cannot be changed. Only the position can be adjusted.
(12) Press
in the general property of a touch switch and set the label properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged.
Foreground Color
Cyan
(13) Adjust the position of the label graphic by dragging it.
Setting the page down, page up, and line scroll (up) touch switches
(14) Modify the page down, page up, and line scroll (up) touch switches in the
same manner as the line scroll (down) touch switch.
Refer to the screen in page 393 to check the position of each touch switch.
Modify the properties of the individual touch switches as shown below.
General
Page down
Page up
Scroll up
Position
––
––
––
Size
––
––
––
Frame
Shape
Standard
Standard
Standard
Show ON State
Color
Frame
White
White
White
ON
White
White
White
OFF
Transparent Transparent Transparent
395
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Page down
Settings
Function
Page up
9-3
Scroll up
Input
Input
Input
Key-Control Key-Control Key-Control
Control Key
Light
Address
Function
Lamp
Attribute
Label
PC (PLC)
Address
––
––
––
I/O
Comments
––
––
––
General
Light
Light
Light
, <!FFF7> , <!FFF6> , <!FFF8>
Label
(15) Modify the foreground color of the label graphic to cyan as with the line
scroll (down) touch switch.
Reference: With NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the touch switches used to control the alarm list can be adjusted only in position.
Size, color, label can not be changed. If you want to move the position, select
[Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object] (or right click → [Edit Object]) and specify the
touch switch.
Setting for the image/library data display field
(16) Specify the alarm list and select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object].
(17) Specify the image data display field, displayed at the central left part of the
alarm list, and adjust the size and the position.
(Resize the size to 200 × 200 dots.)
Creating the [Menu] button, [Monitor] button, and [Set] button
Copying and pasting the buttons from screen No. 3
(1) Copy the “Switch Screen” character string, frame (rectangle), [Menu] button, [Monitor] button, and [Alarm] button collectively and paste them onto
screen No. 4.
(2) Adjust the display position of the pasted character string, frame (rectangle), and buttons.
Modifying to the [Set] button
(3) Double click the [Alarm] button and change the properties as shown below.
Settings
Screen No.
3
Label
Label
,Set *1
*1:
396
Press
to set the label.
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
9-3-11 Creating the Alarm List Library Data
Create the library data that is displayed at the occurrence of an alarm.
Create the library data for FA20 to FA25. (For the library data creation procedure,
refer to 8-2 Library Editor.)
FA20
Set line 1.
FA21
FA22
Check torque
screw.
Set line 2.
FA23
FA24
Check pipe and
valve.
Detection near
entry. Confirm
safety before restarting the line.
FA25
Check the PC
(PLC) and the
network.
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the library data codes are
1000 to 3FFF. However, if NT20/30/620-compatible mode is used with the NT21,
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, library code will be the same as NT30,
NT30C, NT620S, NT620C and NT625C.
Creating the library data of code FA20
(1) Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [Library Editor].
.
(2) Specify FA20 in the library table and click on
(3) Click the library creation area frame (dotted lines) that is displayed at the
upper left area in the library creation screen and drag the point at the lower
right corner. The mouse cursor position is displayed under the screen;
change the frame size to X=200, Y=200 (size: 200 200).
(4) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Fixed Display] → [Text].
(5) Click the mouse at the position where the character string is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of text).
(6) Set the properties as shown below.
Set Line 1
Description
Position
––
Font Type
Standard
Scale
1 2 (High)
Smoothing
Attribute
Inverse Flash
Color
Foreground
White
Background
Black
397
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(7) Adjust the “Set Line 1” character string display position by dragging it.
(8) After creating the library data of code FA20, click
at the upper right
section in the FA20 library editor to close it.
Creating the library data of code FA21 to FA25.
(9) Create the library data of code FA21 to code FA25 in the same manner.
If character string occupies more than one line, create the character string
line by line.
Reference: It is possible to copy library data FA20 to other code so that it can be reused. Follow the procedure below.
button.
a. Specify FA20 and select [Copy] by pressing
b. Specify the code to be pasted and select [Paste] by pressing
button.
9-3-12 Creating the Pop-up Display Numeric Keys
Create the numeric keys displayed in the pop-up window at screen No. 1900.
Reference: With NT30, 30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, screen numbers of the screen
where a window/keyboard screen can be created are restricted to 1900 to 1979.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, however, a window/keyboard screen can be created for any screen number as with a standard screen (1
to 3999).
Creating the window/keyboard screen
For details of window/keyboard screen, refer to 5-4 Window/Keyboard Screens.
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [New].
(2) At the screen selection dialog box, set “Window/Keyboard Screen.”
(3) At the new standard screen dialog box, set 1900 for the screen No.
Setting the screen properties
(1) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Properties].
(2) Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No. 1900.
Attributes
Screen No.
1900
History
Title
Comment
Pop-up Numeric Keys
Buzzer
Load Local 1 (Keyboard)
System Keypad
Color
398
Background
Black
Section
Creating the Sample Data
Grid
9-3
Grid Size
Custom
Horizontal Spacing: 5
Vertical Spacing:
5
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Creating the screen (numeric keys)
Creating the [0] key frame
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Touch Switch]
(2) Create the outline of the [0] key by dragging the mouse on the data creation screen.
(3) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
––
Size
––
Frame
Shape
Standard
Show ON State
Color
Settings
Frame
White
ON
White
OFF
Transparent
Function
Input Key-Control
Control Key
Light
Function
Address
Lamp Attribute
Label
*1:
Label
PC (PLC) Address
––
I/O Comments
––
General
Light
, 0 (refer to the
following) *1
Press
button to set the label.
After completing the setting, go to the next step without clicking on
button.
399
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Setting the label of the [0] key
(4) Press
button in the general property of a touch switch and set
the label properties as shown below.
Note that other properties must be left unchanged,
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Click on
, (returns to touch switch property) then click on
again.
Adjusting the size and position of the [0] key
(5) Specify the [0] key and select [Edit] (menu bar) → [Edit Object].
(6) Adjust the size and position of [0] key frame.
(7) Drag [0] to adjust the display position.
Reference: The explanation above described the procedure for creating numeric keys using
the touch switch control code input function. The Support Tool, however, provides numeric keys as symbol data and you do not have to create numeric keys
by using the pre-registered numeric keys; in the menu bar, select [Window] →
[Symbol Manager] and drag the numeric keys appropriate for your PT model
from the symbol file (Supplmnt.sbl). The selected numeric keys can be registered on the screen. For details, refer to 6-10 Registering Created Elements
(Symbol Manager Operation).
Creating other keys
(8) Copy the [0] key, paste it onto the screen and move the pasted [0] key to
the position of the key to be created ([1] to [↵]).
Once the [0] is copied to the clipboard, it remains on the clipboard until the
next cut or copy operation.
(9) Set the properties as shown below for the individual keys.
1
Settings
Control Key
Label
Label
2
, 1 *1
, 2 *1
8
Settings
Control Key
Label
Label
,
3
, 3 *1
9
8 *1
,
9 *1
.
,
. *1
4
5
, 4 *1
, 5 *1
CLR
+/–
,
*1
CLR
,
+/– *1
6
, 6 *1
↑
7
, 7 *1
↓
, *2
, *2
<!FFFA> <!FFFB>
↵
Settings
Control Key
Label
Label
, *2
<!FFFF>
*1:
Press
button to set the label.
*2:
Press
button to set the label. It is also possible to select a
mark by pressing
button in the label property.
(10) For the [+/–] key and the [CLR] key, modify the label size to 1 2. For other
keys, the label size should not be modified.
400
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
(11) Select all the touch switches above.
(12) Select [Centralize Label] from the [Draw] menu.
The position of all the labels for the selected touch switch is centralized
both vertically and horizontally.
Creating a temporary input field
(1) Select [Objects] (menu bar) → [Data Input] → [Numeral].
(2) Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data
input field is to be displayed (at the intended upper left corner of numeral input field).
(3) At the cursor moving touch switch use selection dialog box, set the displayed items as shown below.
Create Cursor Move Touch Switch
Reference: With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, this dialog box is not displayed and, accordingly, the cursor moving touch switch cannot be set at the
temporary input field. For a temporary input field, the setting of “Create Cursor
Move Touch Switch” is not so significant. Even with NT20, NT20S, NT30,
NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, it is not necessary to set this
property.
(4) Set the properties as shown below.
General
Position
Font Type
Standard
Scale
2 2
Smoothing
Attribute
Standard
Color
Settings
Settings
Settings
*1:
Foreground
Black
Background
White
Table Entry
10
Display Type
Decimal
Format
Settings
––
Limit
*1
Integer
8
Decimal
0
Maximum
99999999
Minimum
0
Zero Suppression
Display Sign
Focus Frame
Focus Attribute
Standard
The setting is not needed for the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and
NT631C.
(5) Specify the numeral input field and adjust the position.
401
Section
Creating the Sample Data
9-3
Setting the pop-up display range frame
Set the range for pop-up display.
(1) Move the range specifying frame, displayed at the upper left section in the
screen, to the numeric key area and adjust its size so that the keys and temporary input field are enclosed.
For details of changing the size and the position of pop-up display frame,
refer to 5-4 Window/Keyboard Screens.
9-3-13 Saving the Created Data
(1) Select [File] (menu bar) → [Save As]. (Refer to 4-2-10 Saving the Screen
Data (Application) to a File.)
(2) Specify the file name of the file where the created data is saved (example:
.
SAMPLE.ONW) and click on
9-3-14 Downloading to the PT
Setting the PT status control area and PT status notify area
(1) Select [Tools] (menu bar) → [PT Configuration].
(2) Click the [Control/Notify Area] tab and set the properties as shown below.
(For details of Control/Notify area, refer to 3-3-1 Creating New Screen Data
(Application) File.)
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
PC (PLC) Address
D00100
Comments
Control Area
PC (PLC) Address
D00110
Comments
Notify Area
Downloading to the PT
(1) Place the PT in the [transfer mode] by the system menu operation.
(2) At the Support Tool, select [Connect] (menu bar) → [Download (NT-series
Support Tool → PT)] → [Application].
402
Creating the Sample Data
Section
9-3
Downloading of the screen data starts. During screen data download, the
screen as shown below is displayed.
For details of the screen data download, refer to 4-2-12 Sending (Downloading)
the Data to a PT and 11-3 Sending (Downloading) the Data.
403
SECTION 10
Quick Reference
This section enables you to access the information you require easily using what you want to do as the key.
10-1 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
405
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
10-1 Quick Reference
Item
Displaying
graphics
Operation
Refer to
To display a polyline or a
broken line
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Polyline]
6-2-1
To display a rectangle
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Rectangle]
6-2-3
To display a triangle, polygon, trapezoid, or diamond
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Polygon]
6-2-5
To display a circle
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Circle]
6-2-4
To display an arc
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Arc]
6-2-2
To display a sector
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Sector]
6-2-6
To tile a graphic
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Tiling]
6-2-8
(1) [Window] → [Symbol Manager]
Start the symbol manager, and register the created
data from color palette symbol.
6-10-5
To display bit map data
To display a special symbol/character
(1) [Tools] → [Image Editor] Create the image data.
8-1
(2) [Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Image Display]
Display the created data.
6-2-9
(1) [Tools] → [Mark Editor] Create the mark data.
8-3
(2) [Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Mark]
6-2-10
Display the created data.
To display the same
graphic in different positions and/or different
screens
(1) [Tools] → [Library Editor] Create the library data.
8-2
(2) [Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Library Display]
Display the created data.
6-2-11
To switch the graphic display according to the PC
(PLC) bit status
(1) [Tools] → [Library Editor] or [Tools] → [Image Editor]
Create the graphic to be displayed.
(2) [Objects] → [Lamp] → [Image]
8-2
8-1
6-5-2
Display the created data.
To move a graphic according to shift of the PC
(PLC) bit status.
(1) [Tools] → [Library Editor] or [Tools] → [Image Editor]
To switch the graphic display according to the status.
(1) [Tools] → [Library Editor] or [Tools] → [Image Editor]
Create the graphic to be displayed.
(2) [Objects] → [Lamp] → [Image]
Arrange the image on the locus of the graphic and display the same graphic according to bit shift of the PC
(PLC) bits.
Create the graphic to be displayed.
(2) [Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Image Display] or [Library Display]
Display the graphic using indirect reference.
(3) Write the image/library code (1) in hexadecimal value
to the numeral table entry (set the storage type to
Binary) referenced at (2) according to the status.
406
8-1
8-2
6-5-2
8-1
8-2
6-2-9
6-2-11
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Displaying
graphics
To use the same graphic
in multiple application
data.
Operation
(1) [Window] → [Symbol Manager]
Start the symbol manager, and register the created
data at the symbol manager.
Refer to
6-10
(2) Open other screen data.
(3) [Window] → [Symbol Manager]
Read the registered data.
[File] → [Import Component]
Start up the second Support Tool.
Perform copy & paste operation of graphic between the
screen data files.
(Between the files of the same PT model setting only)
3-3-6
407
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Displaying
character
strings
(texts)
Operation
Refer to
To display text that will not
change.
(1) [Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Text]
To switch the character
string according to the
status of a PC (PLC) bit.
(1) [Objects] → [Lamp] or [Touch Switch]
6-2-7
Create a text.
8-2
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static
is set as the label type
6-5-2
(2) Turn the PC (PLC) bit to which the lamp is allocated
ON/OFF.
PT
Screen
ABC
PC
(PLC)
If ON
Bit
DEF
If OFF
Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label
(Only for the NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
(1) [Tools] → [Library Editor]
8-2
Create the text to be displayed as the library data.
(2) [Objects] → [Lamp] → [Image]
6-5-2
Display the created data.
(3) Turn the PC (PLC) bit to which the image/library lamp
is allocated ON/OFF.
PT
Screen
ABC
PC
(PLC)
If ON
Bit
DEF
If OFF
Image display
(1) [Objects] → [String display]
6-7
Display the contents of a character string memory table
entry (string table).
(2) Change the contents of the word allocated to the character string memory table entry (string table) with the
PC (PLC) ladder program.
PT
PC (PLC)
Screen
Character string memory
table (String table)
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
Character string display
408
Ladder
program
ABC
DEF
7-3
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Displaying
character
strings
(texts)
To switch the displayed
character string according
to the touch switch input.
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Copy Setting]
6-8-6
Copy text to a character string memory table entry
(string table) using a touch switch for which the copy
function is set.
(2) [Objects] → [String Display]
6-7
Display the contents of the copy destination character
string memory table entry (string table).
PT
Character string memory
table (String table)
Screen
Constant ABC
ABC
ABC
Character string display
Touch switch (copy function)
To display a character
string in which a special
symbol or character is inserted.
[Objects] → [Fixed Display] → [Text]
6-2-7
Specify the mark, or image/library code.
Specification: ABCt!FE20uDE
Display: ABCDE
Screen
display
To insert image data and
library data into a string
with NT21 and
NT31/631-V2 and above
[Tool] → [PT Configuration]
To display a blank screen
Specify screen No. 0 at the first word in the PT status control area.
3-3
Set NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode on.
(The range of image/library data is as the same as
NT30/620 series in NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode.)
Note
With NT20, NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S,
NT620C, and NT625S, if screen No. 0 is set for the
touch switch assigned the screen switching function,
the previous screen is displayed instead of a blank
screen.
To switch the screen using [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Switch Screen]
a touch switch
Create a touch switch for which the screen switching function is set.
Screen
To switch the displayed
screen according to a PC
(PLC) bit status.
1-3-4
6-8-2
Screen No. n
[Tools] → [Table] → [Bit Memory]
7-4
Set the bit memory table screen switching function.
PT
PC (PLC)
Screen No. 1
Screen No. 2
409
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Screen
display
To switch the displayed
screen using an arrow
symbol key
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Input Key –
Control]
6-8-5
Create the [↑] and [↓] touch switches. or [Screen] →
[Properties] → [System Keypad: Tick]
5-1-1
Display the [↑] and [↓] keys of the system keypad.
(2) [Screen] → [New] → [Parent Screen: Continuous]
Specify the screen to be switched to when the
key is pressed.
Note
5-3-1
or
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, it
is not possible to create continuous screens. Therefore, set the screen switching function for the touch
switches created in step (1).
PT
Screen No. 1
Screen No. 2
Screen No. 3
To switch the displayed
screen using an external
switch
[Tools] → [Table] → [Extended I/O input]
7-5
Set the extended I/O input table screen switching function.
PT
Screen No. 1
Screen No. 2
To display a pop-up
screen (help, menu, etc.)
using a touch switch
(1) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Input Key-Window/Keyboard]
Create a touch switch for which the window display
function is set.
(2) [Screen] → [New]
1-3-4
Create the window/keyboard screen to be displayed.
Note
For a keyboard, the data registered to the symbol
manager can be used. Creation is also possible using
[Touch Switch] – [Function: Input Key – Control]
Screen
Screen
Keyboard
screen
410
6-8-4
6-10
6-8-5
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Screen
display
To display multiple
screens in one screen
Operation
Refer to
[Screen] → [New] → [Parent]
5-3-2
Set the child screens, then specify the parent screen on
which to overlap them.
Note
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, if
a parent screen is created, it is automatically set for
overlapping screens since continuous screens are not
supported.
Screen No. 10
ABC
PT
Screen No. 1
ABCDEF
Screen No. 11
DEF
To move a window using a (1) [Screen] → [New]
touch switch. (Only for
Create a window/keyboard screen.
NT21 and for NT31,
(2) [Objects] → [Touch Switch]
NT31C, NT631, NT631C
Register Window Move touch switch on a screen
with “-V1” and above.)
created in (1). Window
Screen
1-3-4
6-8-8
Screen
Center point of the window/keyboard screen goes to the
position touched next.
To open/close/control a
window from the host.
(1) [Tools] → [PT Configuration] → [Control/Notify Area]
Allocate Window Control Area to a host.
3-3-1
(Only for NT21 and for
NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C with “-V1” and
above.)
(2) [Screen] → [New]
Create a window/keyboard screen.
1-3-4
(3) Write window screen No. to be displayed and X, Y coordinate in a word to which window control area is allocated.
Window
3-3-1
Screen
PC (PLC)
Bit Status
Display
To turn a lamp ON/OFF
according to the ON/OFF
status of a PC (PLC) bit
Screen
[Objects] → [Lamp] → [Standard]
6-5-1
Set the PC (PLC) Bit address.
PT
Screen
PC (PLC)
411
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
PC (PLC)
Bit Status
Display
To turn a lamp ON/OFF
according to the ON/OFF
status of a PC (PLC) bit
that is controlled by the
operation of touch
switches.
To switch the graphic to
be displayed according to
the PC (PLC) bit status
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Notify Bit]
Reflect the touch switch status in the PC (PLC) bit status.
6-8-1
6-5-1
(2) [Objects] → [Lamp] → [Standard]
Reflect the PC (PLC) bit status at the lamp.
(1) [Tools] → [Image Editor]
8-1
[Tools] → [Library Editor]
8-2
Create the image data or the library data.
(2) [Objects] → [Lamp] → [Image]
6-5-2
Create an image/library lamp.
Set the light function PC (PLC) address.
PT
Screen
If ON
PC
(PLC)
Bit
If OFF
Graphic (image data)
To switch the text to be
displayed according to the
PC (PLC) bit status.
(1) [Objects] → [Lamp] or [Touch Switch]
8-2
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static
is set as the label type
6-5-2
(2) Turn the PC (PLC) bit to which the lamp is allocated
ON/OFF
PT
Screen
ABC
If ON
PC
(PLC)
Bit
DEF
If OFF
Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
(1) [Tools] – [Library Editor]
8-2
Register the text as the library data.
(2) [Objects] → [Lamp] → [Image]
6-5-2
Create a lamp that displays the registered text.
(3) Turn the PC (PLC) bit allocated to the lamp ON/OFF.
PT
Screen
ABC
If ON
Bit
DEF
If OFF
Image
412
PC
(PLC)
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
PC (PLC)
Bit Status
Display
To display an alarm message according to the PC
(PLC) bit status
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Tools] → [Table] → [Bit Memory]
7-4
Allocate the PC (PLC) bit and a character string
memory table entry (string table) (storing an alarm
message) to the bit memory table entry.
(2) [Tools] → [Table] → [String]
7-3
Create the alarm message.
(3) [Objects] → [Alarm] → [Alarm List]
6-3-1
Create the alarm list and specify the bit memory table
entry in the alarm area.
PT
Screen
Alarm
Alarm
1
2
Character string
memory table Bit memory
(String table) table
PC (PLC)
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm
1
2
Alarm list Stores alarm messages
To display alarm related
information (details and
corrective action) by
touching an alarm message
(1) [Tools] → [Table] → [String]
7-3
Create the alarm message.
(2) [Tools] → [Image Editor] or [Library Editor]
Register the alarm related information (details and corrective action).
(3) [Tools] → [Table] → [Bit Memory]
8-1
8-2
7-4
Allocate the PC (PLC) bit, a character string memory
table entry (string table) (storing an alarm message),
and image/library code to the bit memory table entry.
(4) [Objects] → [Alarm] → [List]
6-3-1
Create the alarm list and specify the bit memory table
entry in the alarm area (set a check mark for image/library display in the alarm list properties.).
PT
PC (PLC)
Screen
Screen
Temp.
Alarm
Temp.
Alarm
PLEASE CALL
No.0120
To store the ON/OFF status of a PC (PLC) bit as a
history and check the history on the screen
(1) [Tools] → [Table] → [Bit Memory]
7-4
Click the [function] button and choose alarm function.
Allocate the PC (PLC) bit to the bit memory table entry.
Then, set a check mark in the [History] check box in
the function setting.
After that, select the message and the image/library
code to be displayed from the character string memory
table (string table) and the image/library table.
(2) [Objects] → [Alarm] → [History]
6-3-2
Create the alarm history.
PT
Screen
Character string
memory table Bit memory
(string table) table
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
PC (PLC)
Alarm
Alarm 1
Alarm history
413
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
PC (PLC)
Word
Status
Display
To display numeral data
Operation
[Objects] → [Numeral Display]
Refer to
6-6
Create a numeral display element.
[Objects] → [Lamp] or [Touch Switch]
6-5, 6-8
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Numeral Display
is set as the label type.
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
To display a bar graph
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Bar Graph]
6-9-1
Create a bar graph.
To display an analogue
meter
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Analogue Meter]
To display a trend graph
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Trend Graph]
6-9-2
Create an analogue meter.
6-9-4
Create a trend graph.
To display a broken-line
graph
[Objects] → [Graph] → [Broken-line Graph]
To display character string [Objects] → [String Display]
data
Create a character string display element.
[Objects] → [Lamp] or [Touch Switch]
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which String Display is
set as the label type.
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
414
6-9-3
Create a broken-line graph.
6-7
6-5, 6-8
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Writing
Data to
the PC
(PLC)
To turn PC (PLC) bits ON/
OFF by operation at the
PT
Operation
Refer to
[Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Notify Bit]
6-8-1
Create the touch switch for which the notify input function is
set.
PT
PC (PLC)
Screen
Notify
Bit address
Writing
Data to
the PC
(PLC)
[To write a numeric value]
To input a numeric value
using numeric keys or a
system keyboard.
(1) [Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create the numeral setting input field.
(2) [Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Input Key – Control]
6-8-5
5-1-1
Create a touch switch.
or [Screen] – [Properties] – [System Keypad: Ticked]
Display the system keypad.
Note
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, register the system keypad from the symbol manager since
the system keypad cannot be used for these models.
Numeral setting input field
PT
Numeral
memory
table
Screen
123
Input
7 8 9 +–
4 5 6 ↑
1 2 3 ↓
. CL ↵
PC (PLC)
↵
123
123
Touch switch (control code input),
or system keypad
[To write a numeric value]
To write a constant using
a touch switch
(1) [Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Copy Setting]
6-8-6
Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set,
and copy a constant to a numeral memory table entry using this touch switch.
(2) [Objects] – [Numeral Display]
Display the contents in the copy destination numeral
memory table entry.
6-6
PT
Numeral
memory
table
Screen
PC (PLC)
Constant:
123
123
123
123
Numeral display
Touch switch (copy function)
415
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Writing
Data to
the PC
(PLC)
[To write a numeric value]
To write a constant to a
numeral setting input field
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] – [Data Input] – [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create a numeral setting input field.
(2) [Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Copy Setting]
6-8-6
Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set,
and copy a constant to a numeral memory table entry using this touch switch (Copy To = Cursor Position).
PT
Constant:
123
Screen
Numeral
memory
table
↵
123
PC (PLC)
123
123
Numeral setting input field
Touch switch (copy function)
[To write a numeric value]
To input a numeric value
using thumbwheel switch
[Objects] – [Data Input] – [Thumbwheel Switch]
6-4-3
Create a thumbwheel switch.
PT
Screen
– – –
1 2 3
+ + +
[ To write a character
string]
To input a character string
Numeral
memory
table
PC (PLC)
123
123
6-4-2
(1) [Objects] – [Data Input] – [String]
Create a character string input field.
(2) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Input Key – Control] or
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Input Key –
String]
Create a touch switch for which the control code input
function or the character string input function is set.
Character string input field
PT
Screen
ABC
Input
A E I
B F J
G K
HL
SP
↑
↓
↵
Character string
memory table
(String table)
↵
PC (PLC)
ABC
ABC
Touch switch (control code input)
Touch switch (character string input)
416
6-8-5
6-8-3
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Writing
Data to
the PC
(PLC)
[To write a character
string]
To copy between character string memory table
entries (string table) with
one touch switch
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Copy Setting]
6-8-6
Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set,
and copy the content of a character string memory table
entry (string table) to another character string memory
table entry (string table).
(2) [Objects] – [String Display]
Display the content of the character string memory table
entry (string table).
6-7
Character string display
PT
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Screen
ABC
ABC
ABC
Touch switch (copy function)
Writing
Data to
the PC
(PLC)
To disable the input according to the ON/OFF
status of a PC(PLC) bit
(1) [Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral],[String],[Recipe]
or [Thumbwheel Switch]
Create a data input object and set Interlock on.
6-1-12
(2) Turn OFF the PC (PLC) bit to which the interlock is
allocated to disable from inputting.
Disable the input
Numeral setting input field
PT
Numeral
memory
table
Screen
123
Input
7 8 9 +–
4 5 6 ↑
2 3 ↓
↵
.
*
↵
ÎÎ
PC (PLC)
Bit
123
Q
Touch switch (control code input),
or system keypad
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
It is possible to disable the input into a data input object by
using Numeral/Character string input flag in PT status control bits.
(Except NT20, NT20S and NT600S)
To store calculated result
in numeral table entry
(1) [Tools] – [Mathematical Table]
To store calculated result
in a specified PLC address
(1) [Tool] – [Mathematical Table]
To store more than one
value in a specified PLC
address
(1) [Tools] – [Recipe Table]
7-9
Click on Set button to specify the formula for calculation and
set result to specific Numeral table entry.
7-9
Click on Set button to specify the formula for calculation and
set result to specific PLC address.
Create Recipe entry.
6-11-1
7-10
(2) [Objects] – [Data Input] – [Recipe]
Create Recipe object referring to the Recipe entry. In Settings
properties, check Show Window/Keyboard Screen and set
screen number to display keypad. Create window screen containing keypad.
417
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Image
To modify the size of an
image data
Operation
Refer to
(1) Specify the area of an image data to be shrunk or expanded on the image editor.
8-1
(2) Drag one of the green handles () displayed on the
range specifying frame to modify the size of an image
data.
Label
To display a label in multiple lines
[Objects]–[Lamp] or [Touch switch]
6-5, 6-8
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Static or On Off
Static is set as the label type.
(NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
To change the contents
and the position of a label
according to the ON/OFF
status of the lamp bit
(1) [Objects] → [Lamp] or [Touch Switch]
6-5, 6-8
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off
Static is set as the label type
(2) Turn the PC (PLC) bit to which the lamp is allocated
ON/OFF.
PT
Screen
PC (PLC)
ABC
If ON
Bit
DEF
If OFF
Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
To change the contents of
a label according to the
values in PLC memory
[Objects]–[Lamp] or [Touch switch]
6-5, 6-8
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Numeral Display
is set as the label type.
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
[Objects]–[Lamp] or [Touch switch]
6-5, 6-8
Create a lamp or a touch switch for which String Display is
set as the label type.
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
Lamp
418
To insert image data and
library data into a string
with NT21, NT31/631-V2
and above
[Tool] → [PT Configuration]
To centralize the lamp label
Specify the lamp to be centralized and select [Draw] →
[Centralize Label]
Enable NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode.
3-3,
APPENDIX A
(The range of image/library data is as the same as
NT30/620 series in NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode.)
6-1-9
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Touch
Switches
To create numeric keys
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] – [Data Input] – [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create a numeral setting string input field.
(2) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Input Key –
Control]
6-8-5
Create numeric keys using touch switches for which
the control code input function is set.
PT
Screen
Numeral setting input field
123
Input
To display numeric keys
as a pop-up window/keyboard by touching a numeral input field
7
4
8 9 +–
5 6 ↑
2 3 ↓
. CL ↵
Touch switch
(control code input)
(1) [Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create a numeral input field, where a cursor moving
touch switch is automatically set.
(2) Specify the automatically created touch switch and add
the window/keyboard screen display function by setting
properties.
PT
6-8-4
PT
Screen
Screen
Pop-up window
123
123
To switch the objective input field among multiple
numeral setting input
fields arranged in a
screen in response to the
touching of a numeric setting input field.
123
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
.
9 +–
6 ↑
3 ↓
CL ↵
[Objects] – [Data Input] – [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create the cursor moving touch switches automatically.
PT
PT
Screen
Screen
1234
1234
5678
5678
Input objective field
419
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Touch
Switches
To switch the objective input field among multiple
numeral setting input
fields arranged in a
screen using the arrow
symbol [↑] and [↓] keys.
Operation
Refer to
(1) [Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create a numeral setting input field.
(2) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Input Key –
Control]
6-8-5
Create the [↑] and [↓] touch switches.
PT
Screen
↑
↓
PT
Screen
1234
↑
1234
5678
↓
5678
Input objective field
To copy between numeral
memory table entries or
character string memory
table entries (string table)
with one touch switch
[Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Copy Setting]
6-8-6
Create a touch switch for which the function to copy character strings or numeric values between character string
memory table entries (string table) or numeral memory
table entries.
Character string display
PT
Character string
memory table
(String table)
Screen
ABC
ABC
ABC
Touch switch (copy function)
To set a constant (fixed
numeral), including initialization and clear, using a
touch switch
[Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Copy Setting]
6-8-6
Set a constant for Code/No. of “Copy From” and a numeral
memory table entry or a numeral setting input field for
“Copy to.”
PT
Numeral
memory
table
Screen
123
Constant:
123
Touch switch (copy function)
To set a constant or a
content of a numeral
memory table entry for a
numeral setting input field
(1) [Objects] – [Data Input] – [Numeral]
(2) [Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Copy Setting]
Set a numeral memory table entry or a constant for
“Copy From” and a numeral setting input field for “Copy
To.”
PT
Screen
Constant: 123
123
Numeral setting input field
Touch switch (copy function)
420
6-4-1
Create a numeral setting input field.
6-8-6
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Touch
Switches
To print a hard copy of the
screen
Operation
(1) [Tools] → [PT Configuration]
Refer to
3-3-1
Set the printer to be connected.
(2) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Print Screen]
6-8-9
Create a touch switch for which the print screen function is set.
PT
Screen
Touch switch
(print screen) function
To stop the buzzer sound
using a touch switch
[Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Input Key – Control]
6-8-5
Create a touch switch for which the “stop buzzer” code of
the PT is set.
PT
Screen
Stopping buzzer
sound
Touch switch (control code input function)
To display the PT’s system menu using a touch
switch
[Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Input Key – Control]
6-8-5
Create a touch switch for which the menu display is set.
PT
PT
Screen
System
Menu
Touch switch (control code input function)
421
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Touch
Switches
To input a different string
from the label
Operation
Refer to
[Objects]–[Touch Switch]–[Input Key–String]
6-8-3
Create a touch switch for which a different string from the
label is set as the Input key string.
Character string input field
PT
Screen
NT31C-ST141B-V2
input
NT31C(Black)
Touch switch (string input)
(Only for NT21, NT31/631)
To centralize the touch
switch label
Specify the touch switch to be centralized and select [Draw]
→ [Centralize Label]
6-1-9
To disable the touch
switch input according to
the ON/OFF status of a
PC (PLC) bit
(1) [Objects]–[Touch Switch]Create a touch switch for
which interlock is set.
6-1-12
(2) Turn OFF the PC (PLC) bit to which the interlock is
allocated to disable the input.
PT
Screen
Constant:
123
Ï
Ï
PC (PLC)
456
Bit
Disable the input
Numeral setting input field
Touch switch (copy function)
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
Extended
Input/Output (NT30/
NT30C
only)
To switch the displayed
screen using an external
switch
[Tools] → [Table] → [Extended I/O input]
Set the screen switching function for an extended I/O input
table entry.
PT
Screen No. 1
Screen No. 2
422
7-5
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Extended
Input/Output (NT30/
NT30C
only)
To notify the PC (PLC) of
the ON/OFF status of an
external switch
Operation
Refer to
[Tools] → [Table] → [Extended I/O input]
7-5
Set the Notify Bit Function for an extended I/O input table
entry.
PT
Extended
I/O table
Extended input
To input a numeric value
using an external switch
(numeric keys, etc.)
PC
(PLC)
(1) [Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
6-4-1
Create a numeral setting input field.
(2) [Tools] → [Table] → [Extended I/O input]
7-5
Set the control code input function for an extended I/O
input table entry.
PT
Extended input
(control code input function)
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
.
123
9 +–
6 ↑
3 ↓
CL ↵
Numeral setting input field of
numeral setting element
To turn ON/OFF the lamp,
connected to a PT, according to the status of a
PC (PLC) bit
[Tools] → [Table] → [Extended I/O Output]
7-6
Set a PC (PLC) bit for an extended I/O output table entry.
PT
Extended
I/O table
PC (PLC)
Extended I/O output
To output the status of a
touch switch to an external device
(1) [Objects] – [Touch Switch] – [Function: Notify Bit]
6-8-1
Create a touch switch and notify the PC (PLC) of the
status of the touch switch.
(2) [Tools] → [Table] → [Extended I/O Output]
7-6
Set the same PC (PLC) bit as the one set in (1) above
for an extended I/O output table entry.
PT
PC (PLC)
Ladder
Extended
I/O table
Touch switch
(notify bit function)
Operations
Extended
output
To change grids
[Screen] – [Grid]
5-1-2
To copy a created graphic
(1) Specify the graphic to be copied.
6-1-5
(2) [Edit] → [Copy]
(3) [Edit] → [Paste]
If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by
[Import Component] from the [File] menu, copy & paste
operation above is possible between the Support Tools.
3-3-6
423
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Operations
To copy the screen data
Operation
(1) Using the application manager, select the file of the
screen to be copied.
Refer to
4-2
(2) [Edit] → [Copy]
(3) [Edit] → [Paste]
(4) Specify the copy destination screen number.
(1) Display the copy source screen.
6-1-5
(2) [Edit] → [Select All]
(3) [Edit] → [Copy]
(4) Open the copy destination screen.
(5) [Edit] → [Paste]
If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by
[Import Component] from the [File] menu, copy & paste
operation above is possible between the Support Tools.
To copy image/library data (1) Selected the code to be copied on the image/library
table entry.
(2) [Edit] → [Copy]
3-3-6
8-1
8-2
(3) Select the code to be pasted.
(4) [Edit] → [Paste]
To group several graphics
into one graphic
If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by
[Import Component] from the [File] menu, copy & paste
operation above is possible between the Support Tools.
3-3-6
(1) Select all graphics to be grouped.
6-1-7
(2) [Draw] → [Group]
Note
To specify the graphic that
is behind another element/graphic
Use the following commands to ungroup the grouped
graphics: [Draw] → [Ungroup]
Click the different position so that the graphic at the back
side is selected.
Note
6-1-3
The element with the smallest area enclosing the point
of selection will be selected.
(1) Select the graphic at the front side.
6-1-5
(2) [Draw] → [Send to Back]
(3) Specify the graphic brought to the front side.
(1) Select the graphic at the front side.
6-1-3
(2) [Edit] → [Select Object]
(3) Select the graphic to be specified in the list.
424
Keep pressing the Tab key (or Shift key + Tab key) until the
objective graphic is selected.
6-1-3
Specify the objective type of element on a filter and select
the graphic by the method above.
5-1-4
To display only the selected type of element to
facilitate the screen editing of complicated screen
Specify the type of element to be displayed using a filter
(on the utility bar). (During the filter function, only the displayed element can be edited.)
5-1-4
To align the position of the
graphics correctly
(1) Select all the graphics to be aligned.
6-1-6
(2) [Edit] → [Align] and select the aligning method.
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Operations
Operation
To change the PC (PLC)
words/bits in batch
[Tools] → [Table] → [Change Address]
To use the created data in
other applications
(1) [Window] → [Symbol Manager]
Refer to
7-1-3
Change the word (address) and bit numbers in a batch.
6-10
Start the symbol manager and register the created
data.
(2) Open other applications.
(3) [Window] → [Symbol Manager]
Start the symbol manager and read the registered
data.
[File] → [Import Component]
Start up the second Support Tool.
Perform copy & paste operation of graphic between the
screen data files.
(Between the files of the same PT model setting only)
3-3-6
To store large data in a
FD
[File] → [Save] or [Save As]
3-3-3
To use I/O comments in
ladder program
[Tools] → [Import I/O comments]
Save data in Memory Map Image File (*mmi) format.
7-7-3
Import I/O comments file of ladder program.
To check the flash display on the screen
[View] → [Simulate Flash]
Elements with a flash attribute flashes.
5-1-3
To check the lamp ON status of lamps/
touch switches on the screen
[View] → [Simulate ON/OFF]
Lamp ON status of lamps/touch switches is displayed.
([Simulate Flash] mentioned above can be used at the
same time.)
5-1-3
To specify whether or not to inverse the
screen color or to print screen grid/
dotted line for Screen Image printing
(without changing the screen property).
In Screen Image Attribute of Screen Image printing, set
“Inverse Print,” Hide Screen Grid” or “Show Dotted Line
Frame” items as required.
12-1-6
To display time
[Objects] → [Numeral Display]
6-6
Specify numeral memory table entries No. 247 to No. 253
(time data) to display the time.
To set the time to be displayed
(1) [Objects] → [Data Input] → [Numeral]
Set the time to be written to a numeral memory table
entry.
(2) [Objects] → [Touch Switch] → [Function: Copy Setting]
6-4-1
6-8-6
Copy the memory table contents where the time is set
to numeral memory table entries No. 254 and No. 255
(time setting).
To display the display history of PT
The display history is displayed by calling the following
screen numbers.
5-6
5-7
NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C:
No. 1997, No. 1998
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C: No. 9001, No.
9002
The history is displayed in either the order of occurrence or
order of frequency.
To sound a buzzer at the occurrence of
an error
[Tools] → [PT Configuration]
3-3-1
Set “On Error” for the buzzer setting.
425
Section 10-1
Quick Reference
Item
Operation
To upload/download the screen data
without modifying the contents
Use the NT Transfer Utility supplied with the Support Tool
on CD-ROM.
(The screen data should be saved in mmi format.)
To display calculated numeric value
[Tool]–[Mathematical Table]
Define formulas that are used for calculations on PT.
(Only for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and above)
426
Refer to
Appendix C
7-9
SECTION 11
Data Communications with a PT
This section describes the procedure for sending the created and edited screen data to a PT to register them in the PT and also
the procedure for reading the data registered in the PT.
11-1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure . . .
11-1-1 Connection to PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-3 Data Communication Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Communication Setting at the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Sending (Downloading) the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 Receiving (Uploading) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5 Receiving (Uploading) the History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6 Setting and Reading the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
428
428
428
430
430
431
434
437
438
427
Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure
Section 11-1
11-1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data
Communication Procedure
11-1-1 Connection to PT
To send/receive data between a PT and the NT-series Support Tool (personal
computer), connect them with a cable.
Cable
The recommended communication cable supplied by OMRON has a 25-pin
RS-232C connector at the end for connection to a personal computer. To connect to a PC/AT compatible personal computer that has a 9-pin (female) connector, use a 25-pin to 9-pin conversion adapter available on the market.
Recommended cable is in the Appendix J.
Connection
Connect the RS-232C connector at the personal computer to the Support Tool
connection port at the PT.
For the location of the connection port in the PT, refer to the Appendix of the
User’s Manual of the PT. With some models of PT, it is necessary to disconnect
from the host before connecting the Support Tool.
An example of connection is shown below assuming NT31/NT31C.
RS-232C, 9 pins
11-1-2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models
Data communication is possible by the two methods indicated below.
Batch transmission of all screen data
Data transmission in screen and data units (individual transmission)
Whether or not individual data transmission is possible depends on the PT model
as shown below.
PT Model
428
Batch Transmission
Individual Transmission
NT11S/NT11
NT20, NT20S
NT21
NT600S
NT30
NT30C
NT620S
Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure
PT Model
Section 11-1
Batch Transmission
Individual Transmission
NT620C, NT625C
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
:
Possible : Not possible
Reference: The type and content of individual transmission differs between the
NT20/NT20S/NT600S and the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. For
details, refer to 11-3 Sending (Downloading) the Data and 11-4 Receiving
(Uploading) Data.
In case of NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, screen data file that can be transmitted is as follows depending on the version of PT hardware and the system program version installed in a PT.
Use the method below to check the system program version of a PT (For details
of the operation of a PT, refer to the manual of PT).
(1) Display the system menu on a PT.
(2) At the upper right position of the system menu screen, its version is displayed, like “Ver.2.10.” If you are using NT31, NT31C, NT631 or NT631C, it
is also possible to check the PLC vendor by selecting [Expansion Mode] →
[Version Display].
Type of PT
Hardware
PT model
selected at
Support Tool
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
below “-V1”
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
“-V1” and above
System System System System System System System System
program program program program program program program program
Ver.1.0
Ver2.0
Ver2.1
Ver3.1
Ver1.0
Ver2.0
Ver2.1
Ver3.1
NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C without “-V1”
∆1
∆1
∆1
∆1
NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C “-V1”
∆2
∆2
∆2
NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C “-V1 (System
Ver.2.1)”
∆2
∆2
NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C “-V2 (System
Ver.3.1)”
∆2
: Downloading/Uploading is possible (Both Batch Transmission and Individual Transmission are possible).
:
The message shown below is displayed on transmitting.
Application version mismatched; communication aborted.
∆1: Message warning you about 32 dot font and font type ISO-8859 is displayed
on transmitting. If this combination is selected, 32 dot font and font type
ISO-8859 are displayed on a PT but they are not available on the Support
Tool.
∆2: Message warning you about 32 dot font and font type ISO-8859 is displayed
on transmitting. If this combination is selected, 32 dot font and font type
429
Communication Setting at the Support Tool
Section 11-2
ISO-8859 are displayed on the Support Tool but they are not available on a
PT (16x16 font and CP437 font type are used on the PT).
Note) If the vendor (manufacturer) of the PLC you are using and the PLC vendor setting of the created screen data is different, transmission is not possible. The following message is displayed.
Memory access mismatched: communication aborted
11-1-3 Data Communication Procedure
The procedure for transmitting data between a PT and the Support Tool is indicated below.
Setting for communications at Support Tool
Set the RS-232C port and baud rate at the Support Tool (personal computer).
↓
Set PC (PLC) to Transmit mode
Place the PT in the Transmit mode to allow communications of the data between the PT and the personal computer.
For details of this procedure at PT, refer to the User’s Manual of your PT.
↓
Selecting the data to be sent/received
From the menu at the Support Tool, select the direction of data transmission
(download/upload) and the kind of data to be transmitted. Depending on the
data, more detailed selection may be possible.
After the data has been determined, data transmission will start.
11-2 Communication Setting at the Support Tool
Set the baud rate and communication port at the Support Tool (personal computer)
Operation procedure
(1) Select [Connect] (menu bar) → [Comms. Setting].
The communication dialog box is displayed.
(2) Set the data for the displayed items.
The meanings of the items are described below.
430
Section 11-3
Sending (Downloading) the Data
Item
COM Port
Description
Specify the RS-232C port to be used.
Specify either COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.
Baud Rate Set the data communication rate.
If “38.4 Kbps (High)” is set, high-speed data communication is possible. (Not available for NT11S/NT11.)
It is recommended to specify “9.6 Kbps (Standard)” to ensure error-free communication if a communication error
occurs due to an inadequate communication environment.
Data communication at the “9.6 Kbps (Standard)” setting
will take about twice the time required in the “38.4 Kbps
(High)” setting.
If the PT is set to the NT21, even faster communications
are possible by selected 115 Kbps.
Verify
Select this item by setting a check mark in the check box if
you want to check the communication data at the same
time it is transmitted. Please note that this setting is allowed only for NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S and NT600S.
(3) After completing the setting for all items, click on
.
11-3 Sending (Downloading) the Data
To send (download) the data created or edited by the Support Tool to a PT, follow
the steps shown below.
The type of data that can be sent is indicated in the table below.
Data Type
Description
Application (in file units)
All data is sent in batch.
Screen
Data is sent in units of a screen.
It is possible to send the data of several
screens at a time.
When sending the data of a parent screen, you
can specify whether or not the data of the child
screens should be sent with the parent screen
data.
Direct Access Information
NT20, NT20S and NT600S:
Information on the PC (PLC) addresses allocated to the PT status control area, PT status
notify area, numeral/character string memory
table (string table), etc.
NT21:
Information on the PC (PLC) addresses allocated to PT status control area, PT status
notify area, and window control area.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
Information of the PC (PLC) addresses allocated to PT status control area, PT status
notify area and window control area (models
with “-V1” and above).
431
Section 11-3
Sending (Downloading) the Data
Data Type
Description
System Memory*1
The setting contents of “System” of “PT Configuration” are sent and set at the PT.
Table*2
NT20, NT20S and NT600S:
The following data is sent in a batch.
Numeral memory table data
Character string memory table (String table)
data
Mark data
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
The following data can be sent individually.
Numeral memory table
Character string memory table (String table)
Bit memory table
Mark data
Image data
Library data
Recipe table
*1:
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, individual transmission
of system memory is restricted as follows:
The following data stored in a PT cannot be overwritten.
Number of numeral table entries
Number of string table entries
Number of bit memory table entries
Screen history setting
Alarm history setting
Numeral storage type
The following data can be overwritten.
Initial screen number
Screen data comment
*2:
You cannot transmit the mathematical table separately. The mathematical
table will be transmitted only when application transmission is performed.
Reference: When data is sent from the Support Tool to a PT, the existing data in the PT is
lost. Therefore, make sure that the existing data in the PT is backed up by the
Support Tool before executing data transmission from the Support Tool to the
PT.
With the Support Tool on CD-ROM, NT Transfer Utility that is exclusively used
for downloading/uploading the screen data is supplied (For details, refer to Appendix C).
Operation procedure
(1) Select [Connect] (menu bar) → [Download (NT-series Support Tool → PT)].
432
Section 11-3
Sending (Downloading) the Data
The menu is displayed, allowing you to select the data to be sent.
The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model.
Selection of “Screen” is not possible if screen data is not selected.
(Pressing Ctrl key + Shift key + D executes Application downloading.)
(2) Select the data to be sent.
Data transmission timing is determined according to the type of data selected to be sent.
Description
Data Type
Application (in file units)
Data transmission starts immediately.
Screen
If a parent screen is included in the
screens selected to be sent, a dialog box is
displayed requesting you to specify whether child screens are sent with the parent
screen.
Set a check mark for the “Include Child
Screen” item if you want to send the child
screens with the parent screen.
Data transmission starts when
is
clicked.
Direct Access Information
Data transmission starts immediately.
System Memory
Data transmission starts immediately.
Table
NT20, NT20S and NT600S:
Data transmission starts immediately.
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C:
The dialog box where the information to
be sent is specified is displayed.
Only the information for which a check
mark is set is sent.
Data transmission starts when
is clicked.
(3) Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data sent from the Support
Tool can be received.
If the PT is not in the Transmit mode, a timeout error occurs in about 10 seconds at the Support Tool. In this case, set the PT in the Transmit mode and
click on
in the error message dialog box.
(4) While the data is being sent to the PT, the progress of data transmission is
indicated by a bar graph.
To abort the operation, click on
.
Reference: If data transmission is aborted, it is necessary to initialize the image data memory
in the Maintenance mode (System Menu). Execute the same processing if data
transmission is interrupted due to trouble.
When sending all the screen data (Application), initialization is not necessary
since initialization is automatically executed.
433
Section 11-4
Receiving (Uploading) Data
CAUTION
When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in a
memory table and /or direct access, transfer such data along with the
screen data.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
11-4 Receiving (Uploading) Data
To receive (upload) data stored in a PT at the Support Tool as the screen data
being edited, follow the steps shown below.
The type of data that can be received is indicated in the table below.
Data Type
434
Description
Application (in file units)
All data is sent in batch.
Screen
Data is received in units of a screen.
It is possible to receive the data of several
screens at a time.
When receiving the data of a parent screen,
you can specify whether or not the data of the
child screens is to be received with the parent
screen data.
Direct Access Information
NT20, NT20S and NT600S:
Information on the PC (PLC) addresses allocated to the PT status control area, PT status
notify area, numeral/character string memory
table (string table), etc.
NT21:
Information on the PC (PLC) addresses allocated to the PT status control area, PT status
notify area, and window control area.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
Information on the PC (PLC) addresses allocated to the PT status control area, PT status
notify area and window control area (models
with “-V1” and above).
Section 11-4
Receiving (Uploading) Data
Data Type
Description
System Memory*1
The contents of “System” set at the PT are received and set for “System” of “PT Configuration.”
Table*2
NT20, NT20S and NT600S:
The following data is received in a batch.
Numeral memory table data
Character string memory table (String table)
data
Mark data
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C:
The following data can be received individually.
Numeral memory table data
Character string memory table (String table)
data
Bit memory table data
Mark data
Image data
Library data
Recipe table
*1:
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C, individual transmission
of system memory is restricted as follows:
The following data stored in the Support Tool can not be overwritten.
Number of numeral table entries
Number of string table entries
Number of bit memory table entries
Screen history setting
Alarm history setting
Numeral storage type
The following data can be overwritten.
Initial screen number
Screen data comment
*2:
It is not possible to perform individual transmission of the mathematical
table. The mathematical table will be transmitted only when application
transmission is performed.
Reference: When the Support Tool receives data from a PT, the data being edited at the
Support Tool is lost. Therefore, make sure that the edit data is saved in a file
before executing data receiving from the PT to the Support Tool.
With the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, individual uploading of
tables is possible. However, it may take time to upload the bit memory table. In
this case, perform batch transmission of the application (in file units).
435
Section 11-4
Receiving (Uploading) Data
With the Support Tool on CD-ROM, NT Transfer Utility, which is exclusively
used for downloading/uploading the screen data, is supplied (For details, refer
to Appendix C).
Operation procedure
(1) Select [Connect] (menu bar) → [Upload (PT → NT-series Support Tool)].
The menu is displayed, allowing you to select the data to be received.
The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model.
(Pressing Ctrl key + Shift key + U executes Application uploading.)
(2) Select the data to be received.
The data receiving timing is determined according to the type of data selected to be received.
Data Type
Description
Application (in file units)
Data receiving starts immediately.
Screen
If a parent screen is included in the
screens selected to be received, a dialog
box is displayed requesting you to specify
whether child screens are to be received
with the parent screen.
To specify multiple screens in batch, specify the screen numbers in the manner “1, 3 5, 7,” delimiting them with commas “,” and
hyphens “–”.
Set a check mark for the “Include Child
Screen” item if you want to receive the
child screens with the parent screen.
Data receiving starts when
is
clicked.
Direct Access Information
Data receiving starts immediately.
System Memory
Data receiving starts immediately.
Table
NT20, NT20S and NT600S:
Data receiving starts immediately.
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C:
The dialog box is displayed where the
information to be received is specified.
Only the information for which a check
mark is set is received.
Data receiving starts when
is
clicked.
(3) Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data can be transmitted to the
Support Tool.
If the PT is not in the Transmit mode, a timeout error occurs in about 10 seconds at the Support Tool. In this case, set the PT in the Transmit mode and
click on
in the error message dialog box.
(4) While the data is sent from the PT, the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph.
To abort the operation, click on
436
.
Section 11-5
Receiving (Uploading) the History Record
11-5 Receiving (Uploading) the History Record
It is possible to receive (upload) the display history record data and the alarm history record data, recorded in a PT, at the Support Tool to save them in a file.
The type of history record data that can be received is indicated in the table below.
Screen Display
History Record Data
Alarm History
Record Data
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S
NT30, NT30C, NT600S,
NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C
PT Model
The received history record data is saved in a desired folder by assigning a file
name. The extension of the file name is fixed as .LOG.
Since the file is described in a special format, the contents cannot be read using
Windows general application tools.
Reference: The history record data file (.LOG) can be output to a printer, saved in an RTF file,
or output to the screen, using the [Print] function or the [Print Preview] function of
the Support Tool.
To analyze the history record data using other software, convert the file into an
RTF file so that it can be read by other software.
Operation procedure
(1) Select [Connect] (menu bar) → [Get History Log].
The menu is displayed, allowing you to select the history record to be received.
The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model.
(2) Select the history record to be received.
The dialog box for setting the file name for saving the history record is displayed.
(3) Set the folder and file name where the history record is to be saved and click
on
.
Receiving of the history record data starts.
(4) Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that it can send the data to the Support
Tool.
If the PT is not in the Transmit mode, a timeout error occurs in about 10 seconds at the Support Tool. In this case, set the PT in the Transmit mode and
in the error message dialog box.
click on
(5) While the data is sent from the PT, the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph.
To abort the operation, click on
.
437
Section 11-6
Setting and Reading the Date and Time
11-6 Setting and Reading the Date and Time
It is possible to set the date and time to PT from the Support Tool or to read the
date and time from the PT to display them at the Support Tool.
The functions that can be used are indicated below.
PT Model
NT11S/NT11, NT20, NT20S,
NT600S
NT21
NT30, NT30C, NT620S,
NT620C, NT625C
NT31, NT31C, NT631,
NT631C
Setting Date/Time
Reading Date/Time
*1
*1
*2
*2
*1:
The NT21 can read clock data from the PLC.
*2:
PT has the clock function. For displaying and setting the date/time at a PT,
use the System Menu.
Operation procedure
(1) Select [Connect] (menu bar) → [Date and Time].
The date and time dialog box is displayed.
Current Date & Time
Displays the date and time at the time the dialog box is displayed.
Date
This area is used for sending/receiving date data to/from a PT.
To set the date at a PT, set “Year, Month, Day, and Day of Week” here and
execute sending (downloading).
Click the
button to download it to the PT.
To read the date data of a PT, execute receiving (uploading) and the result is
displayed here.
Click the
button to upload it from the PT.
At first, the same contents as displayed at [Current Date & Time] are displayed.
Time
This area is used for sending/receiving the time to/from a PT.
438
Section 11-6
Setting and Reading the Date and Time
To set the time at a PT, set “Hour, Minute, and Second” here and execute
sending (downloading).
Click the
button to download it to the PT.
To read the time data of a PT, execute receiving (uploading) and the result is
displayed here.
Click the
button to upload it from the PT.
At first, the same contents as displayed at [Current Date & Time] are displayed.
Used to download the date and time data, set at [Date] and [Time], to a PT to
set them.
Used to upload the date and time data in a PT and display them at [Date] and
[Time].
(2) To set the date and time at a PT, set the data at [Date] and [Time] and click on
.
To read the date and time of a PT, click on
Data transmission starts when
or
.
is clicked.
(3) Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that communications between the
Support Tool and the PT are enabled.
If the PT is not in the Transmit mode, a timeout error occurs in about 10 seconds at the Support Tool. In this case, set the PT in the Transmit mode and
click on
in the error message dialog box.
(4) In the case of receiving (uploading), the date and time data that have been
read from the PT are displayed at [Date] and [Time].
439
SECTION 12
Making Reports
The Support Tool provides a function for displaying various kinds of data, such as screen data and memory table use status, in
the form of a list, and printing them.
12-1 Report Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-1 Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-2 Direct Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-3 History Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-4 Image/Library Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-5 Mark List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-6 Screen Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-7 Screen List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-8 Table Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-9 Validation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-10 Mathematical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-11 Recipe Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2 Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-1 Printer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-2 Output to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-3 Output to a File (RTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3 Displaying the Print Image (Preview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-4 Outputting the Screen Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
442
443
444
445
445
446
446
447
448
448
448
449
449
449
450
455
456
457
441
Section 12-1
Report Types
12-1 Report Types
The Support Tool outputs the following types of report.
Cross-Reference
Direct Connection Information
History Report
Image/Library Report
Mark List
Screen Image
Screen list
Table Report
Validation Report
Output of these reports can be selected from the following three types (use [Print
Preview] for outputting to the display).
Printer:
Screen image, setting data, etc. are output to a printer.
Rich Text Format (file):
Various setting data, etc. are output to a file in RTF.
Display (print preview):
Screen image, setting data, etc. are displayed on the screen before output
to a printer.
The screen image can be output to a file in bit map format using the [Screen]
(menu bar) → [Copy to Image]. (Refer to 12-4 Outputting the Screen Image.)
442
Section 12-1
Report Types
12-1-1 Cross-References
The use statuses of memory tables such as the numeral memory table and character string memory table (string table) are printed or displayed.
The cross-reference allows you to find the screens where a specific memory
table is used.
443
Section 12-1
Report Types
12-1-2 Direct Connection Information
Direct connection information is printed or displayed.
This report is available only when the direct connection setting data has been set.
444
Section 12-1
Report Types
12-1-3 History Report
By specifying the display history record file or the alarm history record file, sent
from a PT, the history record data can be printed or displayed.
The history record that can be read by the Support Tool depends on the PT model
as shown below (refer to 11-5 Receiving (Uploading) the History Record).
NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C
Screen display history record
NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C
Screen display history record
Alarm history record
[Screen History Report]
[Screen History of Occurrence]
Screen No Month Day Hour Minute
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
1
4
15 19
58
2
4
15 19
58
98/05/01 12:51 P.445
Comments
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
HISTORY TITLE
HISTORY TITLE 2
[Screen History of Frequence]
Screen No Count Comments
1
10
HISTORY TITLE
2
10
HISTORY TITLE 2
12-1-4 Image/Library Report
A list of the image data and the library data is printed or displayed.
[Image/Library List]
Type
Image
Image
Library
Library
Library
Library
Library
Library
Code Compression Color Mode
1
Yes
8 Colors
2
Yes
8 Colors
1000
–
–
1001
–
–
1002
–
–
1003
–
–
1004
–
–
1005
–
–
.rtf
98/04/30 22:01 P.445
Size Comments
64x48
64x48
200x200
200x200
200x200
200x200
200x200
200x200
445
Section 12-1
Report Types
12-1-5 Mark List
A list of mark data is printed or displayed.
[Mark List]
98/04/30 22:01 P.446
Reference: In the case that the font size for Display Properties of Control Panel is set to large
font, it may be printed while part of mark list is being chipped off. When it occurs,
please select [Start] – [Settings] – [Control Panel], then open the Display Properties and set the font size in Setting to small font, and perform the mark list printing
(displaying).
12-1-6 Screen Image
The screen image and the setting contents of a screen are printed or displayed
(to print the screen image, add [Screen Image] to the simultaneously printed
items. With the default status, check mark is set).
You can select whether or not to inverse screen image for printing.
It is also possible to select whether or not to include screen grid or dotted line
frame for string display etc. for printing (P461).
446
Section 12-1
Report Types
Reference: It is possible to save each screen image to a bit map file. In this case, open the
screen to be saved and select [Screen] – [Copy to Image]. The saved screen
image can be edited using the application software such as “Paint.”
Screen No.: 1 Standard Screen
Screen Comment: Menu Screen
[Fixed Display: Rectangle/Square]
Start Pos End Pos FrGnd Color BkGnd Colour Attribute
10, 10 204, 59 White
Transparent
Standard
[Fixed Display: Text/Mark]
Position Font
Scale
20, 15 Standard
2x2
[Fixed Display: Rectangle/Square]
Start Pos End Pos FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Attribute
10, 10
204, 59 White
Transparent
Standard
Smoothing Attribute FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Description
Yes
Standard White
Transparent
Menu Screen
[Touch Switch Display]
Start Pos End Pos Function
Frame
Disp SPos Disp EPos Attr Pos Lamp Bit
On State Attribute Frame Col Off Col
On Col Flash Col Label Pos Font
Scale Smoothing
Attribute Label Fg Col Label Bg Col Label On Col Label
181, 141 500, 200 Switch Screen No. 2 3–Dimension 181, 141 500, 200 –
–––––––
No
Light
White
Transparent White
White
230, 155
Standard 2x2
Yes
tandard
White
Transparent –
Monitor Screen
181, 221 500, 280 Switch Screen No. 3 3–Dimension 181, 221 500, 280 –
–––––––
Yes
Light
White
Transparent White
Whit
265, 235 Standard 2x2
Standard White
Transparent –
Set Screen
Yes
181, 301 500, 360 Switch Screen No. 4 3–Dimension 181, 301 500, 360 –
–––––––
Yes
Light
White
Transparent White
White
250, 315
Standard 2x2
Standard
White
Transparent –
Alarm Screen
Yes
[Fixed Display: Text/Mark]
Position Font
Scale
20, 15 Standard
2x2
Smoothing Attribute
FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Description
Yes
Standard White
Transparent Menu Screen
[Touch Switch Display]
Start Pos End Pos Function
Frame
Disp SPos Disp EPos Attr Pos Lamp Bit
On State Attribute Frame Col Off Col
On Col Flash Col Label Pos Font
Scale Smoothing
Attribute Label Fg Col Label Bg Col Label On Col Label
181, 141 500, 200 Switch Screen No. 2
3–Dimension 181, 141 500, 200 –
–––––––
No
Light
White
Transparent White
White
230, 155 Standard
2x2
Yes
Standard
White
Transparent
–
Monitor Screen
181, 221 500, 280 Switch Screen No. 3
3–Dimension 181, 221 500, 280 –
Yes
Light
White
Transparent White
White
265, 235 Standard
Standard
White
Transparent –
Set Screen
–––––––
2x2
Yes
181, 301 500, 360 Switch Screen No. 4
3–Dimension 181, 301 500, 360 –
Yes
Light
White
Transparent White
White
250, 315 Standard
Standard
White
Transparent –
Alarm Screen
–––––––
2x2
Yes
12-1-7 Screen List
Screen numbers and comments are printed or displayed.
447
Section 12-1
Report Types
12-1-8 Table Report
The setting contents of memory tables are printed or displayed.
12-1-9 Validation Report
The results of an error check on the setting contents are printed or displayed.
The contents to be printed or displayed are the same as in the error display dialog
box.
12-1-10 Mathematical Report
The setting of mathematical table is printed or displayed.
448
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
12-1-11 Recipe Report
The setting of Recipe table is printed or displayed.
12-2 Printing Reports
This section describes the procedure for printing reports (screen data, memory
table use status, etc.) using a printer.
12-2-1 Printer Setting
To print a report using a printer, it is necessary to set the type of printer and print
mode.
To set the printer information, display the Print Setup property by selecting [File]
(menu bar) → [Print Setup].
Printer:
Set the information of the printer you are going to use.
Name:
Specify the printer by selecting the printer name from the list of
registered printer names.
Status:
Displays the status of the selected printer, and the number of
files in the queue.
Type:
Displays the name of the driver that is set for the selected
printer.
Where:
Displays the name of the port that is set for the selected printer.
Comment:
Displays the comment that is set for the selected printer.
Paper:
Set the paper size and the paper tray.
449
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
Size:
Set the size of paper to be used.
Source:
Set the paper tray to be used.
Orientation:
Portrait:
Set the direction of printing paper.
Specify this item if the data is to be printed parallel to the shorter dimension of the paper.
Landscape: Specify this item if the data is to be printed parallel to the longer
dimension of the paper.
[Properties]:
Used to set the printer properties.
Since the setting differs according to the printer, refer to the manual of the printer
driver.
Reference: If the print setup, print, or print preview has been executed under condition that
no printer driver has been installed, there may be times Support Tool does not
move correctly.
12-2-2 Output to a Printer
To output the report to the printer, follow the procedure shown below.
(1) Select [File] (menu bar) → [Print].
The Reports dialog box is displayed. (page 451)
(2) Set “Printer” for [Destination].
(3) To specify the printing position of the paper, click on [Set Margins ..] button.
The Set Margins dialog box is displayed.
After setting the items in this dialog box, click on
. The Reports
dialog box is displayed again.
(4) To set the header/footer, click on the [Header/Footer] button.
The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed.
After setting the items in this dialog box, click on
. The Reports
dialog box is displayed again.
(5) After completing the setting, click on
The Print dialog box is displayed. (page 455)
Set the print range and the number of copies.
450
in the Reports dialog box.
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
(6) After completing the setting, click on
in the Print dialog box.
Printing starts.
Reports
Set Margins
Print
Header and Footer
Reports dialog box
In this dialog box, the contents of printing, and printing header/footer, are set.
Report Type:
Select the type of report to be printed.
Destination:
Specify the destination of report output.
Printer:
The report is output to the printer.
Rich Text Format:
The report is output to a file.
Header:
Footer:
Specify this item to attach the header.
The contents of header can be specified by pressing
Specify this item to attach the footer.
The contents of footer can be specified by pressing
.
.
Specification of “Screen Image”
If you specify “Screen Image” for [Report Type], a dialog for setting and selecting the range and print items is displayed.
451
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
Screen Image Attribute
Inverse Print:
Specify this item when you want to inverse
black and white for printing.
When this item is selected, the screen image
will be monochrome even when color-printer
is used. With the color-type PT, the screen
image will be turned to gray and the screen will
be inverse for printing.
Hide Screen Grid:
Specify this item when you do not want to include screen grid for printing. With the default
status, check mark is set. If it is unchecked,
the grid is printed according to the grid setting
of each screen’s property.
Show Dotted Line Frame: Specify this item when you want to include the
dotted line frame for the following objects.
Dotted line frame indicating the position of
string input and string display
Dotted line frame indicating the touch
sensing area of touch switch
Dotted line frame indicating the display
position of image/library data of an image
lamp
(The status of an image lamp to be printed
depends on the [Simulate ON/OFF] setting of the [View] menu. With lamp ON status, display position of image/library data
for OFF state is shown with the dotted line
frame and with lamp OFF status, display
position of image/library data for ON state
is shown with the dotted line frame.)
Screen:
Specify the screen to be printed.
All:
Select this item to print all screens.
Range:
Select this item if you want to print only specified screens.
Specify the screen numbers using a comma (,) as a delimiter.
By joining two page number with a hyphen (–), you can specify
the range. (“5 - 12,” for example, indicates the range from
screen
No. 5 to screen No. 12.)
Include:
Specify the items to be printed.
It is possible to select all items.
Screen Image:
Specify this to print the screen image.
Screen Information:
Specify this to print the detailed screen setting
information.
Lamp/Touch Switch Number:
Specify this when there is a lamp and/or touch
switch on the screen and you want to print the allocated bit number of a lamp and/or touch switch.
Usually in the case of a touch switch, the allocated
bit number specified when setting a lamp is
452
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
printed. If the notify
bit function is set, however, the notify bit number is
printed.
Memory Table Entry Number:
Specify this when there is a character string display, numeral display, bar graph, and/or input
setting element on the screen and if you want to
print the element with the set memory table
entry number.
Image/Library Number:
Specify this when there is image data display
and/or library data display on the screen and
you want to print the displayed data with the
image/library code number.
Specification of “History Report”
If you specify “History Report” for [Report Type], you are requested to specify
the file name where the display history record data sent from the PT is stored.
Specification of “Validation Report”
If you specify “Validation Report” for [Report Type], you are requested to specify whether an error check is to be executed and then the result of the check is to
be printed or the present error log information is to be printed.
If an error check is executed, the existing error log is lost. To keep the record on
the error for which the message is displayed like after the conversion, select
“Print Current Error Log Window.”
To print the result of error check, click on
after selecting “Print After
Validation.” A message asking if you want to execute an error check is displayed. The time necessary for error check execution varies depending on the
registered screen data.
Reference: Printing information on errors occurring during data conversion
The procedure for printing information on errors occurring during data conversion is shown below.
(1) Data of NT-series Support Tool
Open the source file.
453
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
Select [Tools] → [PT Configuration] and specify the PT model (conversion destination).
Execute data conversion.
Data of DOS version
Specify the file using [File] → [Import].
Execute data conversion.
(2) If an error occurs, the message “Application conversion has resulted
some messages in Error Log.” is displayed.
Click on
.
(3) Select [View] → [Error Log] to display the error log.
(4) Select [File] → [Print] and set the properties as shown below.
Report Type:
Validation Report
Destination:
Printer, or Rich Text Format
Screen:
Print Current Error Log Window
For details of data conversion, refer to Appendix A Data Conversion.
Setting margins
Specify the margins to define the print area.
Top
Bottom
Right
Left
The units for dimensions can be selected between cm and inch.
Setting footer and header
Specify contents of header and footer to be printed.
The header/footer print position can be set as Left, Center, or Right.
Left
Center
Right
Header
Footer
Left
Center
Right
Page numbers, date, time, and file name can be printed automatically.
To select the item to be printed as a header or a footer, move the cursor to the
454
Section 12-2
Printing Reports
print location and click on the corresponding button (
,
).
,
,
Print dialog box
Printer: Set the printer to be used.
Range: Specify the pages to be printed.
All:
All pages are printed.
Pages: Only the specified pages are printed.
The pages to be printed are specified as a range.
The pages to be specified here are actual print pages and it must be
taken into consideration that one screen data does not always correspond to one print page. If you want to print the screens partially, use
the “Print Preview” function to check the correspondence between
pages and screens to specify pages.
Print to File:
Specify this item to output the contents to be printed to a file. The
file format differs depending on the printer used.
After setting a check mark in the check box, click on
:
the file name setting dialog box is displayed.
Copies:
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
Number of copies: Set the number of copies.
Collate:
Specify if the same page is printed in a group when printing
multiple copies. (The same page is printed in a group if a check
mark is set in the check box.)
12-2-3 Output to a File (RTF)
Reports can be output to a file in the rich text format.
The operation for outputting the reports to a file is basically the same as that for
printing them.
Reference: The rich text format is a file format used for document data; in this file format, information such as characters and indents is retained. The data saved in this format is highly interchangeable among Windows 95/98 applications.
Operation procedure to output to a file is shown below:
(1) Select [File] (menu bar) → [Print].
The Report dialog box is displayed. (page 451)
(2) Set “Rich Text Format” for [Destination].
(3) To specify the print position of the paper, click on [Set Margins ..].
The Set Margins dialog box is displayed.
After setting the items in this dialog box, click on
. The Reports
dialog box is displayed again.
(4) To set the header/footer, click on the [Header/Footer].
The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed.
After setting the items in this dialog box, click on
. The Reports
dialog box is displayed again.
455
Section 12-3
Displaying the Print Image (Preview)
(5) After completing the setting, click on
in the Reports dialog box.
Reports
If you click on
in the Reports dialog box, the dialog box used to specify
the report output file is displayed. Specify the file name and click on
then the report is output to a file.
,
For details on operations at the Reports dialog box, the Set Margins dialog box,
and the Header and Footer dialog box, refer to 12-2-2 Output to a Printer.
12-3 Displaying the Print Image (Preview)
Before printing a report, it is possible to visually check the print image on the
screen.
The procedure for displaying the print image is basically the same as that for outputting the report to a printer.
Operation procedure to display the print preview is shown below:
(1) Select [File] (menu bar) → [Print Preview].
The Reports dialog box is displayed.
(2) To specify the print position of the paper, click on [Set Margins ..].
The Set Margins dialog box is displayed.
After setting the items in this dialog box, click on
. The Reports
dialog box is displayed again.
(3) To set the header/footer, click on the [Header/Footer].
The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed.
After setting the items in this dialog box, click on
dialog box is displayed again.
456
. The Reports
Section 12-4
Outputting the Screen Image
(4) After completing the setting, click on
in the Reports dialog box.
For details, Reports dialog box, the Set Margins dialog box, and the Header and
Footer dialog box, refer to 12-2-2 Output to a Printer.
The operation procedure at the preview screen is shown below.
Print:
Specify this item to output the data to the printer.
Next Page:
Specify this item to display the next page.
Prev Page:
Specify this item to display the previous page.
Two Page:
Specify this item to display two pages on the screen.
Zoom In:
Specify this item to enlarge the displayed image.
cursor to the desired position, click the mouse
After moving the
and the specified area is enlarged.
Zoom Out:
Cancels the enlarged display mode.
Close:
Closes the print preview screen.
12-4 Outputting the Screen Image
It is possible to output only the data creation screen in the bit map format.
The output data can be used in other applications to be displayed or printed.
The operation procedure for outputting the screen image is shown below.
(1) Display the screen to be output at the front.
(2) Select [Screen] (menu bar) → [Copy to Image].
The file name setting dialog box is displayed.
(3) Specify the folder and file name and click on
.
457
Outputting the Screen Image
Section 12-4
Reference: The screen image of the editing screen is saved in the bit map file without
change.
If you want to save an inverted image to a file, select [File] - [Print] and set “Screen
Image” for “Report Type” and “Rich Text Format” for “Destination,” set a check
mark for “Inverse Print”and output it. (Refer to 12-2-3 Output to a File (RTF).)
If you use this method, the screen image will be monochrome even when the color-printer is used.
458
APPENDICES
This section provides reference information on using the Support Tool, information on the operational procedure for the system installer which is supplied with the Support Tool. Please refer to the information that you need.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Data Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Installer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT Transfer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Translation Support Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables of Functions of PT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limits on Numbers of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
461
485
491
499
515
535
539
541
543
545
547
553
555
557
459
Appendix A
Data Conversion
This section describes the data conversion method between different direct access types and different PT models.
In the following explanation, the NT20, NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S,
NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C are referred to as “conventional models” and
the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C (including models with “-V1,” “-V1
(System Ver. 2.1)” and “-V2 (System Ver.3.1)”) are referred to as “new models.”
Direct Access Types
Direct access type can be set at “PLC Vendor” of “PT Type (PT Configuration).”
Changing PLC vendor of existing screen data changes direct access type.
The direct access types that can be handled by the Support Tool (Ver. 4.) are as
follows;
OMRON:
This is a direct access for OMRON PLCs
Memory Link:
This is a simulative direct access with which host and PT
execute sending or receiving of command via RS-232C/422A
communication.
Mitsubishi A:
This is a direct access for Mitsubishi A series PLC.
Mitsubishi FX:
This is a direct access for Mitsubishi FX series PLC.
Memory Link, Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi FX can be set only with NT31, NT31C,
NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
Reference: The direct access version that can be handled by the Support Tool is:
NT20S, NT600S: Ver. 5
Conventional models other than NT20, NT20S, NT600S:
Ver. 4
New models:
No direct access versions
Depending on the direct access types, exclusive system program may be
needed for the PT hardware.
For details of the system programs and system installer, refer to Appendix B
System Installer Operation.
Direct access version 4 screen data for the NT20S or NT600S, or direct access
version 3 or lower screen data from previous PT models can be used on Windows by using version 4 or 5 of the Support Tool for Windows.
NT20M/NT600M screen data can be reused by converting it to NT20S/
NT600S screen data using the Support Tool for Windows. Refer to the Support
Tool for Windows Operation Manual (Cat. No. V028-E1-).
To create screen data to be used for direct access (PLC vendor) other than
OMRON, Memory Link, Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi FX, use system installer of
DOS version.
Conversion between different direct accesses (PLC vendor)
With the Support Tool (Ver. 4.), data conversion between different direct accesses such as OMRON→Mitsubishi A or Mitsubishi FX→OMRON is possible.
461
Appendix A
Data Conversion
However, data conversion between different direct accesses is limited to data of
the same PT model. (e.g., Between NT31-V1 data for OMRON and Mitsubishi A)
When both direct accesses and PT model are different, convert data to that of the
same PT model first (see figures in next page) and then convert the direct access
type.
Conversion between conventional PT models (Between same direct access)
NT600S
NT620S
NT620C/NT625C
NT20S
NT20
NT30
NT30C
Conversion from conventional PT model to new PT model (Between same direct access)
NT30C
NT30
NT31C (-V2)
NT31C (-V1)
NT31 (-V2)
NT31 (-V1)
NT620S
NT620C/NT625C
NT631 (-V1)
NT631C (-V1)
NT631 (-V2)
NT20S
NT11S
NT21
NT11
NT631C (-V2)
Conversion between new PT models (Between same direct access)
NT31
NT31C
NT31-V1
NT31C-V1
NT31-V1
NT31C-V1
NT631
NT631C
NT631-V1
NT631C-V1
NT631-V1
NT631C-V1
System Program Ver.2.0
NT31-V2
NT31C-V2/V3
NT631-V2
NT631C-V2/V3
System Program Ver.2.1
System Program Ver.3.1
NT21
NT31-V2
System Program Ver.3.1
It is possible to convert the screen data for the lower system program version to
that for the higher system program version freely regardless of the PT models.
(e.g., from “-V1” to “-V2” or from “-V2” to “-V2 (System Ver3.1)).
However, conversion towards the opposite direction is not possible (ex. PT models with V1 → PT models without -V1 or higher system program version → lower
462
Appendix A
Data Conversion
system program version).
When the PT models with the large screen size are converted to those with the
smaller screen size (ex. NT631 → NT31), the elements exceeding the screen
size after conversion are deleted.
Note that when the screen data is converted, user group and grid information will
be lost.
Reference: The data conversions shown above indicate the conversion of entire screen
data files.
If an element registered to the symbol manager is registered for a screen of
another PT model, the data is converted. In this case, conversion is performed in
element units. For data conversion in element units, the restrictions shown
above are not applicable and element data can be converted between any combination of PT models.
You cannot convert both the PT Model and PLC Vendor at the same time (an
error message will be displayed). First, change either of them and then perform
conversion a second time.
Data Conversion Procedure
The data conversion procedure is shown below.
(1) Open the existing screen data file.
Open the existing screen data file that is the source for data conversion.
If the data has been created using the DOS version Support Tool, select
[File] (menu bar) → [Import] in the Support Tool screen to open the file.
For details of the operation, refer to 3-3-2 Reading the Existing Screen Data
(Application) File or 3-3-5 Importing (Reading) the DOS Version Screen
Data (Application) File.
(2) Convert the data.
At the Support Tool, select [Tools] (menu bar) → [PT Configuration], then select the [PT Type] tab. Select the conversion destination PT model or PLC
Vendor (refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT configuration on page 45).
Click on
played. Click on
, and the data conversion confirmation message is disagain to execute data conversion.
NT11S/NT11 cannot convert to other model from [PT Configuration]. If you
want, please use symbol manager to convert to other model.
Reference: After converting the screen data, there might be some messages in the error
log. This error messages will disappear when the screen data has been edited.
Especially for the converting errors, it is not possible to reproduce these errors
even if the error check (Validation) has been performed. So soon after the converting error occurs, it is recommended to perform “Print Current Error Log
Window.” The operation for this, refer to 12-2 Printing Reports.
When converting the screen data to the NT21 or the NT31, NT31C, NT631 or
NT631C using “-V2,” the specification of NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode is
possible. (For details of NT20/30/620 compatible mode, refer to Appendix A
NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode). For details of the modification of screen data
and program at the host, refer to Correcting the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631,
and NT631C screen data after conversion on page 465).
463
Appendix A
Data Conversion
(3) Change the allocated bits and words
If necessary, change the allocated bits and words.
Usually, it is not necessary to change the allocated bits and words since their
settings in the conversion source data are reflected in the converted data.
However, if the data is converted from the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, or
NT631C to a conventional model in element units, or if the data is converted
between different direct access types, modification of the allocated bits and
words may become necessary since the range of usable word addresses
differ. For details, refer to Correcting the PC (PLC) addresses on page 466.
(4) Correct the screen data
If the data is converted from a PT model to another PT model that has smaller screen than the source PT model, it is necessary to modify the screen
data in accordance with the screen size.
If data is converted between a conventional model and a new model, the
data must be corrected in accordance with the conversion destination because there are many differences between a conventional model and a new
model.
Refer to page 464.
(5) Modify the program.
If the screen data is corrected, the program at the host may have to be modified. Modify the program by referring to “Correcting the Screen Data Conversion” (page 464).
Correcting the Screen Data Conversion
This section describes how the screen data should be corrected after it has been
converted.
If the screen data cannot be converted correctly, an error message is displayed
on conversion of the data (when changing a PT model or PLC Vendor, or registering a symbol from the symbol manager). If an error message is displayed, it will
be necessary to correct the screen data or the program.
464
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Correcting the NT11, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C screen data after conversion
If the screen data is converted to the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 or NT631C,
the following modification of the screen data and program is needed according to
the source/destination PT model.
Convert From
NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C,
NT625C
Convert To
Modification needed
NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with
“-V1” *1
If image/library is inserted into a lamp/touch switch label or a character
string, modification of screen data is needed. For how to perform the
correction, refer to Correction of image codes (page 472) or Correction
of library codes (page 472).
Word configuration of PT control/notify area differs between the source
and destination PT model. Check the program at the host and make
corrections. For details, refer to Appendix A NT20/30/620 compatible
mode.
If a keyboard screen is used, the size of the keyboard screen frame
needs to be checked/adjusted. For how to perform the correction, refer
to Correction related to keyboard screens (page 468).
NT20S
Word configuration of PT control/notify area differs between the source
and destination PT model.
Check the program at the host and make corrections. For details, refer
to Appendix A NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode.
NT21
Some changes will occur on the screens, such as in the sizes of touch
switches and the positions of objects, check all converted screens and
correct them as necessary.
NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C,
NT625C
NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with
“-V2” or “-V3” *2
If a keyboard screen is used, the size of the keyboard screen frame
needs to be checked/adjusted. For how to perform the correction, refer
to Correction related to keyboard screens (page 468).
NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with
“-V1”
NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with
“-V2” or “-V3”
Not needed.
NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with
“-V2”
NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C with
“-V2” or “-V3”
Not needed.
NT21
NT31 with “V2”
Not needed.
NT11S
NT11
Not needed.
*1:
When converting the screen data from NT30/620 series to NT31/631 series, we recommend converting to NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with
“-V2” using NT30/620 compatible mode. This requires less modification of
screen data and is easy to perform. In this case, check if the system program installed in the PT is Ver3. or Ver 4.. For details of how to install the
system program, refer to Appendix B System Installer Operation.
*2:
On conversion, check if “NT20/30/620 Compatible Mode” ([PT Configuration] – [PT Type] is selected). (In the default status, the check mark will be
ON when trying to convert screen data from the NT20S, NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C to the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C with “-V2” or “-V3”.)
Correcting colors
Conversion from monochrome display models to color display models
Colors (black and white) remain as they are after the conversion.
If you want to color the converted data, change or color the data as needed.
465
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conversion from color display models to monochrome display models
Colors are converted into black or white as shown below.
Colors for objects other than Image
Black, blue, red, magenta: Black
Green, cyan, yellow, white: White
Colors for Image
Black:
Black
Blue, red, magenta, green,
cyan, yellow, white:
White
Change the colors as needed.
Correcting the PLC addresses (On data conversion between direct accesses)
When converting the data between different direct accesses, it may be necessary to change PLC addresses since corresponding PLC is changed. In this
manual, conversion between OMRON and MEMLINK is described.
Difference
OMRON:
Various words are available such as CIO area and
data memory area.
Available word addresses differ depending on the
PLC that is used.
MEMLINK:
Only memory link area (PT memory) can be used.
Available word addresses: 0000-9999
Conversion result, error message and corrective action.
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With OMRON data,
an area other than
the CIO area is set.
The PLC address is
reset.
Error Message
Corrective Action
PLC address (XXX)
of YYY is invalid. It
is reset to default.
Reset the area to
memory link area (PT
memory). If this PC
(PLC) address is referred to from the program, it is necessary to
correct the program accordingly. (Refer to
6-1-10 Setting Properties.)
Correcting the PC (PLC) addresses (On data conversion between PT models)
When converting the data of the entire screen data file, screen data for use with
new models cannot be converted to screen data for use with conventional models. However, if the data of a new model is registered for the screen of a conventional model using the symbol manager, the following points must be taken into
consideration due to differences in the usable PC (PLC) address range between
a conventional and a new model.
Difference
New models:
Word addresses can be handled up to five digits.
Conventional models:
Word addresses can be handled up to four digits.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
466
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
word addresses are
within four digits.
With a conventional
model, word
addresses remain
as they were.
With a new model,
the word address is
five digits.
The word address is
reset.
Invalid PC (PLC)
address. It is reset
to default.
Reset the word address
to a number of four or
less digits. If this PC
(PLC) address is referred to from the program, it is necessary to
correct the program accordingly. (Refer to
6-1-10 Setting Properties.)
With a new model
with V2/V3, the accessible CS/CJ-series area is specified.
The word address is
reset.
Invalid PL (PLC) address. It is reset to
default.
Reset the word address
to an accessible area. If
this PLC address is referred to using programming, also make corrections in accordance with
the programming. (Refer
to Word setting for an
element in 6-1-10 Setting Properties.
Error Message
Corrective Action
––
––
Correction related to continuous screens
When the data of a conventional model is converted into data for a new model, an
error may occur due to differences in the handling of continuous screens between conventional models and new models.
Difference
New models:
Continuous screens cannot be used.
Conventional models:
Continuous screens can be used.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With conventional
models, continuous
screens are used.
The parent screen
of the continuous
screens is deleted.
Error Message
The screen no.
XXXX was a Continuous Parent
Screen that is not
supported in this
model. It is discarded.
Corrective Action
Use a touch switch to
switch screens. If the
program is created to
display the parent
screen of continuous
screens, correct the program so that the first
child screen is displayed. (Refer to 6-8-2
Switch Screen Touch
Switch.)
Correction related to overlapping screens
When overlapping screens are converted, an error may occur due to differences
in the handling of overlapping screens between conventional models and new
models.
Difference
New models:
A window/keyboard screen cannot be specified as a
child screen.
Conventional models:
A window/keyboard screen can be specified as a
child screen.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
467
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, a window/
keyboard screen is
specified as a child
screen.
With a new model,
a window/keyboard
screen is removed
from child screens.
Error Message
Corrective Action
The screen no. XXX
of type YYY is not
supported as a
child, so the parentchild association is
discarded.
Copy the contents of the
window/keyboard
screen to a standard
screen and specify that
standard screen as a
child screen. (Refer to
5-3-2.Overlapping
Screens)
Correction related to number of window/keyboard screens to be opened
When a window/keyboard screen is converted, conversion is executed as shown
below due to differences in number of window/keyboard screens that can be displayed at the same time.
Difference
New models (NT21, NT31/631-V1 and above):
Up to three window/keyboard screens can be opened
at the same time. (1 Global Window and 2 Local Windows)
With a screen attribute, up to two local windows can
be specified as pop-up windows to be displayed
when the screen is opened.
With a touch switch (cursor move and input key-window/keyboard function), specification of local window 1 or 2 is possible.
Conventional models, New models (NT31/631):
Only one window/keyboard screen can be opened.
(Local window 1 (keyboard) only)
With a screen attribute, only one window can be specified as a pop-up window to be displayed when the
screen is opened.
With a touch switch (cursor move and input key-window/keyboard function), specification of only local
window 1 (keyboard) is possible.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model
with “-V1” and
above, local window
2 is specified for the
attribute of touch
switch. And the
touch switch is registered to the symbol manager.
Minimum value is
restored for window/
keyboard screen
number.
Error Message
Corrective Action
Input Key-Window/
Keyboard screen
number is not within
the valid range.
Minimum value restored.
Correct the screen data
so that the local window
1 includes all the required elements.
Correction related to display range of window/keyboard screens
When a window/keyboard screen is converted, conversion is executed as shown
below due to differences in the window/keyboard screen display range between
a conventional and a new model.
Difference:
New models:
468
A window/keyboard screen can be specified only in
the range that fits the touch switch grids.
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conventional models:
A window/keyboard screen can be specified at any
desired position.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
With a conventional
model, a range that
does not fit the
touch switch size is
specified as the display range.
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
the range is corrected so that it
agrees with the
touch switch positions.
Error Message
Corrective Action
Some screen elements exceed
frame size. The elements will not be
downloaded to PT
Hardware.
If the position and the
range of the window to
be displayed is inconvenient for operation, correct the position and the
range. (Refer to 5-4
Window/Keyboard
Screens.)
Correction related to the system initializing screen (Host Connect screen)
When the system initializing screen is converted, conversion is executed as
shown below due to differences in screen numbers and elements that can be
registered between conventional and new models.
Difference
New models:
Screen No. 9000
Only fixed display elements (excluding image data
and library data) can be registered.
Conventional models:
Screen No. 1999
All kinds of element can be registered.
Some elements that need communications with a
host may not be displayed correctly.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, elements
that cannot be registered on a new
model are registered.
With a new model,
the screen No. is
modified to 9000.
Elements that cannot be registered for
a new model are removed.
Error Message
This screen does
not support XXX. It
is discarded.
Corrective Action
Correct the screen so
that the same screen as
before the conversion is
created using fixed display elements excluding
image/library data. (Refer to 5-8. Host Connect
Screen (System Initializing Screen))
Correction related to extended screens
When an extended screen is converted, an error message may be displayed due
to differences in the handling of an extended screen between conventional and
new models.
Difference
New models:
Extended screens are not supported.
Conventional models:
Extended screens can be used as standard screens.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
With a conventional
model, the screen
number of an extended screen is
used for a standard
screen.
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
the screen is
treated as a standard screen.
Error Message
Corrective Action
The screen no. XXX
was an Extended
Screen that is not
supported by this
model, so it is converted to a standard
screen.
––
469
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Correction related to history screens
When a history screen is converted, an error message may be displayed due to
differences in the handling of the screen numbers of the frequency history screen
and the occurrence history screen between conventional and new models.
Difference:
New models:
Screen No. 9001 and No. 9002
History screens (occurrence order, frequency order)
cannot be edited.
Conventional models:
Screen No. 1997 and No. 1998
History screens (occurrence order, frequency order)
can be edited.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
Error Message
Corrective Action
With a conventional
model, a history
screen (occurrence
order, frequency order) is edited.
With a new model,
the history screen is
deleted (displaying
the edited history
screen is possible
by specifying it from
a PT).
The screen no. xxx
was a history occurrence (frequency)
screen that is not
supported in this
model. It is discarded.
––
Correction related to the number of memory tables
Since the number of entries that can be used in the memory tables depend on the
PT model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below.
Difference
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
NT11S/
NT11
NT20/
NT20S
NT600S
NT30
NT30C
NT620S
NT620C
NT625C
Numeral
memory table
128
128
512
512, or
1000
512, or
1000
512,
1000, or
2000
Character
string memory
table (String
table)
128
128
256
256, or
1000
256, or
1000
256,
1000, or
2000
Bit memory
table
––
––
––
256
256
256, or
1000
Extended I/O
input table
––
––
––
64
––
––
Extended I/O
output table
––
––
––
64
––
––
F-key input
notify table
4
––
––
––
––
––
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
A memory table
number that is outside the allowable
range for the
memory table is
used for display or
input.
470
Status after
Conversion
The memory table
number is reset to
0.
Error Message
[Object Name] refers to invalid numeral table entry.
The referenced
table entry is reset
to entry 0.
Corrective Action
Correct the memory
table number to the one
that is in the valid range.
If the memory table
number is specified in a
program, correct it also.
(Refer to Dialog Box
Settings in the PT Configuration on page 45.)
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Correction related to contents of numeral memory table
When the data of a conventional model is converted to the data for a new model,
the converted data requires your attention to the fact that the processing that occurs if incorrect data (existence of A to F other than F at the most significant bit
position) is written to an allocated word in the host differs between a conventional
and a new model.
Difference
New models:
The written data is invalid and the existing content is
retained.
Conventional models:
The incorrect data is stored.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
Error Message
Corrective Action
––
––
––
Note that the display differs between a conventional and a new model
if incorrect data is written. (Refer to 7-2 Numeral Memory Table.)
Correction related to bit memory table
If a bit memory table is converted from the conventional model to the new model,
conversion will be executed in the manner shown below due to the difference of
the bit memory table function.
Difference
New models:
Alarm function and switch screen function cannot be
set simultaneously.
Conventional models:
Alarm function and switch screen function can be set
simultaneously.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
Error
Message
Corrective Action
[Switch screen]: OFF
[Screen No]: 0
Function: None
[Switch screen]: OFF
[Screen No]: 0
––
Change function to
[Alarm], if you want to display the alarm. (Refer to
7-4 Bit Memory Table.)
[Switch screen]: OFF
[Screen No]: As desired
Function: Alarm
[Switch screen]: ON
[Screen No]: As desired
––
Correction is not necessary.
[Switch screen]: OFF
[Screen No]: 0
Function: Alarm
[Switch screen]: ON
[Screen No]: 9999
––
Correction is not necessary.
[Switch screen]: ON
[Screen No]: As desired
Function: Alarm
[Switch screen]: ON
[Screen No]: As desired
––
Change the function to
[Switch screen]. (Refer to
7-4 Bit Memory Table.)
Correction related to extended I/O input/output table
When an extended I/O input/output table is converted, the data is converted in
the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of an extended I/O
input/output table between NT30/NT30C and other models.
Difference
NT30/NT30C:
Extended I/O input/output table can be used.
Other models:
Extended I/O input/output table cannot be used.
471
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
With an NT30/
NT30C, an extended I/O input/
output table is set.
Status after
Conversion
With a PT model
other than NT30/
NT30C, the setting
of an extended I/O
input/output table is
discarded.
Error Message
Corrective Action
––
Correct the screen data
and a host program so
that unusable table
entries can be replaced
with inputs/outputs of a
host, etc. (Refer to 7-5
Extended I/O Input
Table and 7-6 Extended
I/O Output Table.)
Correction of image codes
When an image code is converted between a conventional and a new model,
conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the
image codes between them.
Difference
New models:
0001 to 0FFF (hexadecimal)
Conventional models:
FE20 to FEFF (hexadecimal)
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
Error Message
Corrective Action
If the code after conversion differs from the
image code to be used,
change the code to the
correct one. (Refer to
8-1 Image Editor.)
Conventional model
Assume the code is
X.
New model
The code is X –
FE1F.
[E]
Image Table entry
has been converted.
[W]
The code for screen
element [Object
Name] has been
converted from
XXXX to YYY.
New model
Assume the code is
Y.
Conventional model
The code is Y +
FE1F (if the converted code is outside the usable
range, the code is
fixed as FE20.)
[W]
The code for screen
element [Object
Name] has been
converted from
XXXX to YYY.
Correction of library codes
When a library code is converted between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the library
codes between them.
Difference
New models:
1000 to 3FFF (hexadecimal)
Conventional models:
FA20 to FAFF, FB20 to FBFF, FC20 to FCFF, FD20 to
FDFF (hexadecimal)
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
472
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
Error Message
Corrective Action
If the code after conversion differs from the library code to be used,
change the code to the
correct one. (Refer to
8-2 Library Editor.)
Conventional model
Assume the code is
X.
New model
The code is X –
EA20.
[E]
Library Table Entry
has been converted.
[W]
The code for screen
element [Object
Name] has been
converted from
XXXX to YYYY.
New model
Assume the code is
Y.
Conventional model
The code is Y +
EA20 (if the converted code is outside the usable
range, the code is
fixed as FA20.)
[W]
The code for screen
element [Object
Name] has been
converted from
XXXX to YYYY.
Correction related to image/library in character strings
When an image/library in a character string is converted between a conventional
and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in handling of the image/library between them.
Difference
New models:
Insertion of an image/library into a character string is
impossible except for NT21, NT31/631-V2 and later
models in NT20/30/620-compatible mode.
Conventional models:
Insertion of an image/library into a character string is
possible.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, the image/library is used in a
character string.
With a new model,
the code is displayed like this:
\<!xxxx>.”
(The code after conversion conforms to
the image/library
code conversion
method.)
Error Message
Corrective Action
[E]
Image Table entry
has been converted.
[E]
String Table: Table
Entry XXXX has invalid component
code. It has been
converted from
XXXX to YYYY.
Delete a code in the
character string and
make corrections so that
the character string and
image/library (fixed display or image lamp) are
overlapped for display or
grouped, allowing the
image/library to be displayed in the same way
as a character string.
(Refer to 6-1-7 Grouping
Elements.)
(In case of lamp/touch
switch label, a fixed display-image goes behind
the label and the display
will not be as desired. In
this case, use an image
lamp instead.)
Correction of graphic display attributes
When a graphic is converted between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in the display attributes.
Difference
New models:
The inverse attribute is not supported for some kinds
of graphic.
Conventional models:
All graphics have inverse attributes.
473
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, the inverse
attribute is specified
for a graphic for
which the inverse attribute is not supported by a new
model.
With a new model,
the foreground color
and background color are automatically
interchanged.
Error Message
Corrective Action
[Object Name] –
inverse attribute not
supported. Foreground and background colors interchanged.
Since the foreground color and background color
are automatically interchanged, no special
correction is required
(display attribute is set to
default (standard)).
Correction of smoothing processing for marks
If a mark is converted between a conventional and a new model, conversion is
executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of mark
smoothing processing between them.
Difference
New models:
Smoothing processing is not possible for marks.
Conventional models:
Smoothing processing is possible for marks.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
With a conventional
model, smoothing
processing is specified for a mark.
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
smoothing processing is invalid for a
mark.
Error Message
[Fixed Display Mark]
–
smoothing not supported. It is ignored.
Corrective Action
Correction not necessary.
Correction related to the system keypad
If a system keypad is converted between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling
of the system keypad between them.
Difference
New models:
The system keypad cannot be set.
Conventional models:
Numeric keys can be created automatically by setting
a system keypad.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, a system
keypad is automatically created with a
numeral setting input screen.
With a new model,
the system keypad
is invalid and thus
not displayed.
Error Message
Corrective Action
––
Either copy the registered keyboard from the
symbol manager (refer
to 6-10 Registering
Created Elements (Symbol Manager Operation)), or create numeric
keys that are equivalent
to a system keypad using the touch switch
control code input function (refer to 6-8-5 Control Code Input Touch
Switches).
Correction of alarm list/history touch switches
If a touch switch for alarm list/history is converted between a conventional and a
new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of this kind of touch switch between them.
474
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Difference
New models:
Control touch switches are annexed to alarm lists/histories; correction is possible only with regard to the
position of the touch switches.
When converted to the NT21, NT31/631-V2 or later
models (NT20/30/620-compatible mode ON)
associated touch switches will keep other properties,
as it is, only thing is that it cannot be edited separately.
Conventional models:
Control touch switches can be handled as independent touch switches (to be associated with alarm lists/
histories). Their position, size, label, etc. can be
edited as desired.
Switches:
When converted to the NT21, NT31/631-V2 models
(20/30/620 mode on) associated touch switches will
keep other properties, as it is, only thing is that it cannot be edited separately.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, an alarm list/
history is registered
for a screen and
touch switches are
associated with it.
Error Message
Corrective Action
With a new model,
the associated
touch switches are
deleted and the
control touch
switches (in the initial state) are automatically created.
When converted to
the NT21,
NT31/631-V2 or later models
(NT20/30/620-compatible mode on)
associated touch
switches will be
converted to control
touch switches, other properties remaining the same.
[E]
Touch Switch function type is not supported. It is discarded.
[W]
The associated
touch switches of
the alarm has been
discarded and component touch
switches have been
created.
No error message
will be generated.
Adjust the position of
control touch switches if
necessary. (Refer to 6-3
Alarm.)
With a conventional
model, an alarm list/
history is registered
for a screen (without control touch
switches).
With a new model,
control touch
switches (in the initial state) are automatically created.
[W]
The associated
touch switches of
the alarm has been
discarded and component touch
switches have been
created.
If control touch switches
are not necessary, delete them by setting in
the alarm list/history
properties. (Refer to 6-3
Alarm.)
With a new model,
touch switches are
automatically
created by registering alarm list/history
to the symbol manager.
With a conventional
model, all control
touch switches are
deleted.
[W]
The component
Touch Switches of
the Alarm List will
be discarded.
Create the control touch
switches using the touch
switch control code input
function and associate
them with the alarm list/
history. (Refer to 6-8-5
Control Code Input
Touch Switches.)
Correction of touch switch position and size
Touch switch size differs between NT20, NT20S, NT600S, NT620S and other PT
models.
Therefore, when the data of NT20, NT20S, NT600S, NT620S is converted to the
data for other PT models, touch switch position and size may change.
475
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
––
Status after
Conversion
Error Message
Corrective Action
––
Correct the touch switch
position and size as
needed. (Refer to 6-8
Touch Switches)
Touch switch position and size may
change.
Correction related to a touch switch for which a pop-up window/keyboard function is set
If a touch switch assigned the pop-up window/keyboard function is converted between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner
shown below due to differences in the range of screen numbers of the touch
switch window/keyboard screen.
Difference
New models:
Screen numbers of window/keyboard screen:
1 to 3999
Conventional models:
Screen numbers of window/keyboard screen:
1900 to 1979
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
the touch switch for
which a pop-up window/keyboard function is set is registered to the symbol
manager.
With a conventional
model, the window/
keyboard screen
number is corrected
to 1900.
Error Message
Corrective Action
Input Key-Window/
Keyboard screen
number is not within
the valid range.
Minimum value restored.
Create the window/keyboard screen for a
screen number in the
range 1900 to 1979 and
correct the window/keyboard screen number
set for the touch switch
accordingly. (Refer to
5-4 Window/Keyboard
Screens and 6-8-4 Popup Window/Keyboard
Function Touch Switch.)
Correction related to the touch switch for which the copy function is set
If a touch switch assigned the copy function is converted between a conventional
and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeric values that can be input.
Difference
New models:
As a constant for the copy setting function, a numeric
value of up to 10 digits can be input.
Conventional models:
As a constant for the copy setting function, a numeric
value of up to 8 digits can be input.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
476
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
a touch switch for
which the copy setting function is set
with a numeric value greater than
100000000 or
smaller than
–10000000 specified is registered to
the symbol manager.
With a conventional
model, a value
greater than
100000000 is corrected to 99999999
or a value smaller
than –10000000 is
corrected to
F0000000.
Error Message
[W]
Constant Value is
out of limit. Maximum value restored.
Corrective Action
Correct the screen data
or the program in the
host so that a constant
of up to 8 digits suffices.
(Refer to 6-8-6 Copy
Setting Touch Switch.)
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Corrections related to lamp/touch switch label
In the conversion of data between a V2 model and a non-V2 model/conventional
model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in
the new functions of the lamp/touch switch label added to V2 models.
Difference
V2/V3 models: Multiple lines of label, On Off Static label, Numeral/String Display label can be set.
Conventional models, non-V2/V3 models: Only fixed display label (one line)
can be set.
Conversion from conventional models to V2/V3 models
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, a fixed display object is used
with a label to display multiple label
lines.
With a V2/V3 model, multiple label
lines can be set (no
need to add a fixed
display object.)
*1
Create multiple label
lines using Label property (6-5-1 Standard
Lamps or 6-8 Touch
Switches) and delete
fixed display objects.
With a conventional
model. A numeral/
string display object
is created on a
lamp/touch switch.
With V2/V3 models.
numeral/string display labels can be
set.
*1
Select “Numeral Display” or “String Display”
as the Label Type in Label Property for the
lamp/touch switch. Make
the setting as required.
Delete the numeral/
string display objects
created on the lamp/
touch switch.
Error Message
Corrective Action
*1: It is also possible to use the screen data after conversion without performing the above modification.
Conversion from V2/V3 models to conventional models
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a V2/V3 model, a lamp/touch
switch allocated a
newly added function is registered in
the symbol manager.
According to the
status before conversion, the label
will be converted to
a default status (Label) or OFF label
(see below).
Error Message
See below
Corrective Action
Create a fixed display
object or a numeral/
string display object on
a lamp/touch switch
(use Group function if
needed) so that it
matches the status before conversion.
Label error messages following conversion from V2 models to conventional
model.
Status of label before conversion
Error Message
Static
One line
Label Type – Static not supported. Label will be set to Off Description.
Two or more lines
Label Type – Static not supported. Label will be set to default.
Off label – one line
Label Type – On Off Static not supported. Label will be set to Off Description.
Off label – two or
more lines
Label Type – On Off Static not supported. Label will be set to Default.
On Off Static
Numeral Display
Label Type – Numeral Display not supported. Label will be set to Default.
String Display
Label Type – String Display not supported. Label will be set to Default.
477
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Correction related to the lamp label (ON state)
If a lamp’s label is converted between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to difference of label color setting.
Difference
New models:
ON state and OFF state can be set independently.
Background color is transparent only.
Conventional models:
Only foreground color can be set. (OFF, ON/Flash
has same color). Background color can be set as desired.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model;
Background: Any
Foreground: Any
With a new model;
Background: Transparent
OFF State: Same
as Foreground
ON State: Black
Error Message
Corrective Action
––
This will lead to an invisible label when the lamp
is ON. Select the lamp
and choose [Edit] – [Edit
Object] and double click
at the label. Then
change the label ON
state color to different
color.
Correction related to the maximum and minimum limit check function for numeral input
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of
numeral that can be input.
Difference
New models:
A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input for the
maximum/minimum limit.
Conventional models:
A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input for the
maximum/minimum limit.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
a numeral setting
input field for which
a numeric value
greater than
100000000 or
smaller than
–10000000 is specified as a maximum
or minimum limit is
registered to the
symbol manager.
With a conventional
model, maximum
and minimum value
greater than 8 digits
will be reset.
Error Message
Corrective Action
[W]
Numeral Input Maximum value is out of
limit. Default values
restored for maximum and minimum.
Create a new numeral
setting input field. Correct the screen data or
the program in the host
so that a constant of up
to 8 digits suffices. (Refer to 6-4-1 Numeral Input, 6-4-3 Thumbwheel
Switch.)
Correction related the number of digits for numeral input
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of
numeric values that can be input.
Difference
478
New models:
A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input.
Conventional models:
A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input.
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
a numeral setting
input field (or a
thumbwheel switch)
for which a numeric
value exceeding 8
digits is input is registered to the symbol manager.
With a conventional
model, a numeral
setting input field (or
a thumbwheel
switch) of greater
than 8 digits is discarded.
Error Message
[E]
[Numeral Input] –
Total number of integer and decimal
exceeds limit. It is
discarded.
Corrective Action
Create a new numeral
setting input field
(thumbwheel switch).
Correct the screen data
or the program in the
host so that a constant
of up to 8 digits suffices.
(Refer to 6-4-1 Numeral
Input , 6-4-3 Thumbwheel Switch.)
Correction related the reference memory table entries for numeral input
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the numeral
memory table entries that can be referred to.
Difference
New models:
For numeral memory table entries No. 247 to No.
253, reference is not possible for numeral input/
thumbwheel switch.
Conventional models:
For numeral memory table entries No. 247 to No.
253, reference is possible for numeral input/thumbwheel switch. (Display only)
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, a numeral
setting input field (or
a thumbwheel
switch) for which a
numeral memory
table in the range
No. 247 to No. 253
is referred to is registered to the symbol manager.
With a new model,
the reference numeral memory table
No. is corrected to
0.
Error Message
Corrective Action
Thumbwheel switch
refers to reserved
numeral table entry.
The referenced
table entry is reset
to 0.
Make corrections so that
the contents of a numeral memory table in the
range No. 247 to No.
253 are displayed in a
numeral display. (Refer
to 6-6 Numeral Display.)
Correction related to an interlock function of a touch switch, numeral/string input, or thumbwheel
In the conversion of the data between a V2/V3 model and a non-V2/V3 model/
conventional model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to
an interlock function, that has been added to V2/V3 models.
Difference
V2/V3 models: Operations/Inputs can be enabled/disabled according to the
status of the host bit (interlock bit).
Conventional models, non-V2/V3 models: Interlock bit can not be set.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With V2/V3 models,
an object allocated
an interlock function
is registered in the
symbol manager.
With non-V2/V3
models/conventional models, an interlock bit setting will
be discarded.
Error Message
Interlock not supported. Interlock
setting will be discarded.
Corrective Action
Screen switching, numeral/string input at PT
side can be enabled/disabled using the PT control bit in PT control area
also. Modify the program according to the
setting.
479
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Correction related the number of digits for numeral display
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of
numeric values that can be displayed.
Difference
New models:
A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be displayed.
Conventional models:
A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be displayed.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
a numeral display
element for which a
numeric value exceeding 8 digits is
displayed is registered to the symbol
manager.
With a conventional
model, a numeral
display element of
greater than 8 digits
is discarded.
Error Message
Numeral Display:
Total number of integer and decimal
exceeds limit. It is
discarded.
Corrective Action
Create a new numeral
display element. Correct
the screen data or the
program at the host so
that a constant of up to
8 digits suffices. (Refer
to 6-6 Numeral Display.)
Correction related to analogue meter
In the conversion of the data between new models (with “-V1” and above) and
other PT models, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to
presence/absence of analogue meter.
Difference
New models (with “-V1” and above):
Analogue meter can be used.
Conventional models, new models (below “-V1”):
Analogue meter cannot be used.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model
(“-V1” and above),
an analogue meter
is registered to the
symbol manager.
With a conventional
model and a new
model (below
“-V1”), an analogue
meter is not displayed.
Error Message
Cannot paste analogue meter. It is
discarded.
Corrective Action
Create a bar graph or
other display element
instead of an analogue
meter to display contents that was displayed
by an analogue meter.
Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the trend graph
control touch switches.
Difference
480
New models:
Marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 (hexadecimal) are
used as trend graph control touch switches.
Conventional models:
No trend graph control touch switches (codes FFEF
to FFF5 may be used as desired).
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, the marks
with codes FFEF to
FFF5 are used as
desired.
With a conventional
model, the marks
with codes FFEF to
FFF5 are not used.
Error Message
Corrective Action
With a new model,
marks registered
with a conventional
model are used as
trend graph control
touch switches.
––
(1) Copy marks registered under codes
FFEF to FFF5 to
other codes with the
mark editor.
(2) Reset the marks
with codes FFEF to
FFF5 with the mark
editor. (By resetting,
the marks are returned to the trend
graph control
marks.)
(3) For the elements
that use the conventional marks of
codes FFEF to
FFF5, correct the
codes to those assigned after copying
the marks. (Refer to
8-3 Mark Editor.)
With a new model,
nothing is registered
for codes FFEF to
FFF5 and trend
graph control touch
switches are not
displayed.
––
Reset the marks with
codes FFEF to FFF5
with the mark editor. The
marks of these codes
are recognized as the
trend graph control
marks. (Refer to 8-3
Mark Editor.)
Correction related to sampling cycles of trend graphs
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences of trend graph
sampling cycles.
Difference
New models:
The sampling cycle can be set in the range from 0.5 to
6553.5 s in units of 0.5 s.
Conventional models:
The sampling cycle can be set in the range from 0.1 to
6553.5 s in units of 0.1 s.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a conventional
model, the sampling
cycle is set in units
other than 0.5 s.
With a new model,
the sampling cycle
is corrected to 0.5 s
unit cycle (corrected
to the nearest value).
Error Message
Corrective Action
[W]
Sampling cycle less
than minimum value. Minimum value
restored.
[W]
Sampling cycle not
multiple of 5. Value
rounded off to nearest multiple of 5.
Since there are no problems in actual operation,
correction is not necessary.
Correction related to the 100% value, 0% value and –100% value of a graph
In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of
numeral that can be input.
481
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Difference
New models:
A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input for a %
value.
Conventional models:
A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input for a %
value.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a new model,
a graph for which a
value greater than
100000000 or
smaller than
–10000000 is set
for a % value is registered.
With a conventional
model, if a % value
is outside the allowable range, it is replaced as shown
below: for a 100%
value, the existing
value is corrected to
100, for a 0% value,
it is corrected to 0,
and for a –100%
value, it is corrected
to –100.
Error Message
Corrective Action
[W]
[Object Name] – %
value is out of limit.
Default values restored for 100%,
0% and –100%.
Correct the screen data
or the program at the
host so that a constant
of up to 8 digits suffices.
(Refer to 6-9 Graph.)
Correction related to the label component of standard lamp and touch switch
In the conversion of the data between a NT31/631-V2 or later model and a
NT31/631-V1 or earlier model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the label data of standard lamp and touch switch.
Difference
V2 or later models:
On label and Off label can be different.
Other models:
On label and Off label should be same.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
Error Message
Corrective Action
With a V2 or later
model, a standard
lamp/touch switch
label type is set to
Static’ and On/Off
label descriptions
are different.
With a V2 or earlier
model, standard
lamp/touch switch
label type is set to
Static’ and On label
description will be
set to that of Off label.
[W]
Label Type-On Off
Static is not supported. Label will
set to Off description.
None
With a V2 or later
model, set Standard
Lamp/Touch Switch
label to “Label<\n>
in <\n> multiple
<\n> lines”.
With a V2 or earlier
model, standard
lamp/touch switch
label set to “Label”
(Default).
[W]
Label Type-Static
not supported. Label will set to default.
None
From a 31/631-V2
model application
copy Touch Switch/
Standard Lamp with
Label Type set to
Numeral Display or
String Display and
paste in an application for a model earlier than V2.
Label properties are
set to default.
[W] Label Type-Numeral Display not
supported. Label
will set to default.
(Or)
[W] Label TypeString Display not
supported. Label
will set to default.
None
Correction related to ‘switch screen’ screen numbers
In the conversion of the data between a V2 or later model and a V1 or earlier model, conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the
new device monitor screens available in V2 or later models.
482
Appendix A
Data Conversion
Difference
V2 or later models:
New device monitor screens available.
Other models:
Device monitor screens are not supported.
Conversion result, error message and corrective action
Status before
Conversion
Status after
Conversion
With a V2 or later
model, a touch
switch of switch
screen type is
created with switch
screen number being 9023 (device
monitor screen)
With a model earlier
than V2, touch
switch will be discarded, because
switch screen number 9023 is not supported
Error Message
[E]
Invalid screen number in Touch Switch
(Switch Screen).
Corrective Action
None
In the case of Bit Memory Table, it will be reset based on the following table.
Default Screen
Number
PT-Models
0
NT30, NT30C, NT620C/625C, NT620S
1
NT20S, NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT31C-V1,
NT31C-V1 (System Ver 2.1), NT31-V1
NT31-V1 (System Ver 2.1), NT600S, NT631, NT631C,
NT631C-V1, NT631C-V1 (System Ver 2.1) NT631-V1,
NT631-V1 (System Ver 2.1)
NT20/30/620-compatible Mode
For the NT21 and the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or “-V3”
NT20/30/620-compatible Mode can be set. Using this mode requires less modification of screen data and programs, and is easier following conversion of screen
data between the NT21 and NT20S, and between V2 models and NT30, NT30C,
NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C.
If NT20/30/620-compatible mode is used, the functions of the NT21, NT31,
NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2” or “-V3” will differ as described below. For
details of the each function, refer to the NT21/31/631 Series Reference Manual
(V069-E1-).
Reference: Except for the following points, the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631C-V2/V3 functions can be used as they are in NT20/30/620-compatible
mode.
When trying to convert the screen data from NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C
or NT625C to NT31, NT31C, NT631 or NT631C with “-V2” or “-V3” or from the
NT20S to the NT21, NT20/30/620-compatible mode will be automatically ON
in the default status. If you do not want to use NT20/30/620-compatible mode,
disable the NT20/30/620-compatible mode ([PT Configuration] – [PT Type]).
NT20/30/620-compatible mode can be set only when NT21, NT31, NT31C,
NT631 or NT631C-V2/V3 is selected as a PT Model. In NT20/30/620-compatible mode, the following points will be the same as for the NT30/620 series.
Image/library can be inserted into a lamp/touch switch label or a character
string.
Image/library code
Word configuration of PT control/notify area
483
Appendix B
System Installer Operation
The Support Tool is provided with a system installer, which installs the system
program at a PT.
Version up of the PT system program or installation of new communication programs in a PT are possible by installing the system program.
Reference: Version up of NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with “-V1” (system program Ver.
2.1)” or below is possible by installing the system program that is supplied with
the Support Tool (Ver. 4.).
For details of the conversion method, refer to Appendix A Data Conversion.
In this case, however, the following function can not be used.
32-dot high-definition font (Refer to Settings for text display in 6-1-10 Setting
Properties.)
Font type ISO8859-1 (Refer to Font Type in 3-3 and Appendix K.)
Memory unit system transmission (Refer to operation manual of NT31,
NT31C, NT631, NT631C with “-V2”.)
To reuse the existing NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C screen data, the screen
data should be converted to the data for system program Ver.3.1 beforehand.
Applicable PT Models
The system installer is used to install the system program in the following PT models.
NT11S/NT11, NT21, NT30, NT30C, NT31, NT31C, NT620S, NT620C/
NT625C, NT631, NT631C
Note
For the individual PC (PLC) models, always install the system program of the
specific PT model. It is not permissible to install the system program of another
PT model.
Reference: The Support Tool is provided with the system programs of the following PT
models.
NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with “-V2” (system program Ver.3.1),
NT11S/NT11, NT21, NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C/NT625C
The system program must be installed with the system installer when installing
the Support Tool at your personal computer. For details of installation at the
personal computer, refer to Section 2 Setting Up the Support Tool.
These system programs can be transmitted to a PT using the system installer
supplied with the Support Tool (Ver.4.1).
Starting and Exiting the System Installer
The system installer is started by pressing the Windows start button, then
selecting [Programs] → [Omron] → [Ntst4.8] → [NT-series System Installer] as
shown below.
485
Appendix B
System Installer Operation
Example: Windows XP
When the system installer starts, the main window, shown below, is displayed.
Existing the system installer
You can exit the system installer by using any of the following operations:
Select [Download System] → [Exit].
Click on the
button in the upper right section of the main window.
Double click on the system installer icon in the upper left section of the main
window.
Click on the system installer icon in the upper left section of the main window,
then select [Close] in the control menu box.
Press the [F4] key while holding down the [Alt] key.
When you exit the system installer, the Windows screen is displayed.
486
Appendix B
System Installer Operation
Functions of the Main Window
The functions provided by the main window of the system installer are described
below.
Drive:
Specify the drive where the system program is stored. Click on
and select
the drive name from the displayed items.
The drive in the network can be selected only when it is allocated to “My Computer.” (When installing on a personal computer, the system installer will be
installed but the system program will not be installed.)
PT Model:
Specify the PT model for which the system program is installed. Click on
and select the drive name from the displayed items.
Select NT31, NT31C, NT631 or NT631C to use NT31, NT631C, NT631 or
NT631C.
Com Port:
Specify the port used for communications with the PT. Click on
and select
the drive name from the displayed items. Selection is possible from [COM1]
and [COM2].
Look in:
Specify the folder where the system program is stored. The folder can be
opened or closed by double clicking on the folder line.
Among the folders that are open, the folder at the bottom line is selected.
System File(s):
The system programs in the specified folder and those for the specified PT
model are displayed. Specify the system program that is to be installed at the
PT from among the displayed programs. The extension of a system program
file name represents the PT model.
487
Appendix B
System Installer Operation
Extension
PT Model
.20
NT20 (System)
.20M
NT20 (Extended)
.21
NT21
.31
NT31
.31C
NT31C
.31G
NT31-V3
.31D
NT31C-V3
.631
NT631
.63C
NT631C
.63D
NT631C-V3
.11S
NT11S
.11
NT11
30
NT30
30C
NT30C
62S
NT620S
62C
NT620C/NT625C
Specifying the System and Extension
These selection items will be displayed if the NT20 is selected for the PT model.
For the NT20, the system program will be divided into the following two items:
System: Program itself
Extension: Resource data for each display language
Select which of the two will be transferred.
:
The system program is installed when this button is clicked.
Installing the System Program
The procedure for installing the system program is shown below.
(1) Specify the PT model for which the system program is installed for [PT Model] in the main window.
(2) Specify the system program to be installed by setting the information at
[Drive], [Look in], and [System File(s)] in the main window.
(3) Specify the RS-232C port used for the communications with the PT for [Com
Port].
(4) Make the PT ready for installation of the system program.
The operation required at the PT varies depending on the PT model. Basically, execute the processing for deleting the system program, then that for
setting the PT in the state in which it waits for the reception of the system
program. For details, refer to the manual for your PT.
(5) Click on
488
in the main window.
Appendix B
System Installer Operation
The system program is installed.
While the system program is being installed, the progress of the operation is
displayed in graph form.
(6) At the completion of system program installation, the corresponding message is displayed.
Read the message and click on
.
(7) At the PT, press the touch switch that acknowledges the end of system program installation.
The PT re-starts by the installed system program.
489
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
With the Support Tool on CD-ROM, the NT Transfer Utility, which can transmit
screen data to a PT easily on site, is supplied.
It can download the screen data file in mmi format to a PT and can save the
screen data uploaded from a PT to a file in mmi format.
Screen data file in mmi format is less than 1.44 Mbytes. So it is useful when you
save the file in a floppy disk to transfer the data to and from a PT on site.
Reference: NT Transfer Utility is a software that is exclusively used for downloading/
uploading the screen data without modifying the contents.
NT Transfer Utility can handle only the file in mmi format. It is not possible to
read or write the file in onw format, which is a standard format of the Support
Tool. Therefore, please be sure to save the screen data in mmi format when
you use the NT Transfer Utility. For details of the restriction of the file types and
mmi format, refer to 3-3-3 Saving the Screen Data (Application) File.
NT Transfer utility downloads/uploads the screen data in the application unit. It
is not possible to perform individual transmission such as the transmission in
the screen unit.
Equipment necessary for using the NT Transfer Utility
The following indicates the equipment necessary for using the Support Tool.
Hardware
Recommended CPU
Pentium 100 MHz or faster CPU
Personal Computer
Use an IBM personal computer or 100% compatible.
Recommended Memory
32 Mbytes minimum
Free Area in Hard Disk
At least 3.5 Mbytes
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 95/98 and Windows NT (Windows NT is only available with
NT-series Support Tool Ver.3.3 onward.)
Device necessary for transmitting screen data
RS-232C cable
The cable used for the Support Tool can be used.
For cable specifications, refer to Appendix J Connecting Cable Specifications.
Installing the NT Transfer Utility
Install the NT Transfer Utility in the personal computer that is to be connected to a
PT on site. NT Transfer utility operates alone. You do not need to pre-install the
Support Tool in the personal computer.
491
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
Before installing
To install the NT Transfer Utility in the personal computer without a CD-ROM
drive, make the floppy disks for installation beforehand following the procedure
below.
Equipment to prepare
2 floppy disks (3.5 inch 1.44 Mbytes 2HD, formatted)
Creating installation FD
Copy the contents in the following folder of the Support Tool (CD-ROM) to FDs.
– The contents of [disk1] folder in [Transfer Utility] folder
→ To the first installation disk
– The contents of [disk2] folder in [Transfer Utility] folder
→ To the second installation disk
Reference: If the personal computer has a CD-ROM drive, the install program can be
executed from the CD-ROM of Support Tool directly.
Installation
To install the NT Transfer Utility, execute the install program that is in your software package.
Reference: The basic operation of the install program is same as the install program of the
Support Tool. Refer to 2-2-1 Basic Installation Operation.
Procedure
(1) Start up Windows.
(2) If your media is FD, set the first FD of the system disks in drive A (or other 3.5
inch FD drive)
If you are using CD-ROM, set the Support Tool CD-ROM in the CD-ROM
drive while holding down the Shift key to prevent the Support Tool setup program from starting up. (Release the Shift key after CD-ROM is recognized
and the access to the CD-ROM is stopped.) If the Support Tool setup program is automatically started, click on
to abort it.
Reference: You can execute the setup program by double clicking Setup.exe for NT Transfer
Utility in the Support Tool system disk by displaying the Windows Explorer. In this
case, steps 3, 4 and 5 bellow can be skipped.
(3) Click on the Start button of Windows and select “Run...”
492
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
(4) Input “a:\setup” in the input field in the specified window.
Note that drive designation must agree with the name of the drive where you
set the system disk. If you set the disk in drive B, input “b: \ setup.” In case of
CD-ROM, click on
and specify SETUP.EXE in the disk1 folder in
the Transfer Utility folder.
(5) Click on
.
The installation started.
(6) When the setup screen of the NT Transfer Utility is displayed, click on
.
The screen for specifying the destination of program installation is displayed.
(7) Specify the directory for installation.
In the initial state, the directory shown below is set as the destination directory.
C: \Program Files\Omron\Ntst4.8E\Transfer Utility
If you want to change the directory, click on
and input the drive and
directory. (If a directory that does not exist in the hard disk is specified, the
directory is automatically made.)
After specifying the destination, click on
.
The screen for specifying the destination for registering the start menu is displayed.
(8) In the start menu of Windows, specify the folder where the short-cut to the
Support Tool is created.
In the initial state, the following folder is selected.
Start\Program\Omron\Ntst4.8E
493
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
If you want to change the folder, select the desired folder from the Existing
Folders or directly input the folder name. (If a folder that does not exist in the
hard disk is specified, the specified folder is automatically made.)
After specifying the folder, click on
.
Installation of the specified programs is implemented; files are copied.
During program installation, the progress of the processing is indicated as a
percentage.
(9) After the completion of installation, the folder specified in step (8) is displayed along with the installation completion message.
Click on
, then click on
in the setup completion screen.
Installation operation is completed.
Uninstall
An uninstaller (uninstall software) is supplied with the NT Transfer Utility.
If you want to remove the NT Transfer Utility from your personal computer, run
the uninstaller to delete the NT Transfer Utility program files and installation information. (Note that the data saved by the NT Transfer Utility is not deleted.)
Starting the uninstaller from the Windows start menu
Select “Uninstall Transfer Utility” in the same folder where the short-cut to the
Support Tool is stored.
Example:Assuming the short-cut to the Support Tool exists in the Start\Program\Omron\NTST4.8E\Uninstall Transfer Utility folder
Select the uninstaller by the following operation.
[Start] → [Program] → [Omron] → [NTST4.8E] → [Uninstall Transfer
Utility]
After the start up of the uninstaller, follow the instructions displayed on the
screen.
494
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
How to use the NT Transfer Utility
Reference: For connection method of the NT Transfer Utility and PT, refer to 11-1-1 Connecting to PT.
Start up and exiting the NT Transfer Utility
Starting up the NT Transfer Utility
To start up the NT Transfer Utility, select [Program] – [Omron] – [Ntst4.8] – [NT
Transfer Utility] starting from the Windows Start button. (Items to select vary
depending on the [Program Folder] setting specified on installation.)
The NT Transfer Utility starts up and displays the main window shown below.
Exiting the NT Transfer Utility
You can exit the NT Transfer Utility in any of the methods below.
Select [File] – [Exit].
at the upper right area of the main window.
Click on
Double click on the NT Transfer Utility icon at the upper left area of the main
window.
Click on the NT Transfer Utility icon at the upper left area of the main window
and select [Close] from the displayed control menu box.
Press F4 key while holding down the Alt key.
The screen returns to the Windows screen after the NT Transfer Utility is closed.
Communication Setting at the NT Transfer Utility
Set the baud rate and communication port at the NT Transfer Utility (personal
computer).
(1) Select [Configure] (menu bar) → [Comms. Setting].
The communication setting dialog box is displayed.
(2) Set the data for the displayed item
The meanings of the items are described below.
495
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
Item
Description
COM Port
Specify the RS-232C port to be used.
Specify either COM1 or COM2.
Baud Rate
Set the data communication rate.
If “High” is set, high-speed data communication is possible.
(Not available for NT11S/NT11.)
It is recommended to specify “Standard” to ensure error-free communication if a communication error occurs due to an inadequate communication environment.
Data communication at the Standard setting will take
about twice the time required in the High setting.
(3) After completing the setting for all items, click on
.
Sending (Downloading) the Data
The screen data file saved in mmi format is sent (downloaded) to a PT.
Reference: When data is sent from the NT Transfer Utility to a PT, the existing data in the
PT is lost. Therefore, make sure that the existing data in the PT is backed up by
the Support Tool or by the NT Transfer Utility before executing data transmission from the NT Transfer Utility to the PT.
NT Transfer Utility can send only the file in mmi format.
Operation Procedure
(1) Select [Download] from the [File] menu.
The dialog box to specify the screen data file (mmi format) to be sent is displayed (see below). This dialog box can be called also by pressing the Ctrl
key + Shift key + D key.
Click on
and the dialog to confirm the screen data to be transmitted is displayed.
(2) Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data sent from the NT Transfer
Utility can be received.
(3) Click on
after confirming the screen data to be transmitted in the
dialog shown below. Downloading of data is started.
496
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
If you want to change the screen data to be transmitted, click on
at the
right side of the file name and select the file you want to download.
If the PT is not in the Transmit mode, a timeout error occurs in about 10 seconds at the NT Transfer Utility. In this case, set the PT in the Transmit mode
and click on
in the error message dialog box.
(4) While the data is being sent to the PT, the progress of data transmission is
indicated by a bar graph.
To abort the operation, click on
.
(5) After data transmission is completed, click on
in the message
box.
Receiving (Uploading) the Data
The NT Transfer Utility receives (uploads) the data stored in a PT and saves it in
mmi file format.
Operation Procedure
(1) Select [Upload] from the [File] menu.
The dialog box to specify the PT model is displayed (see below). This dialog
box can be called also by pressing the Ctrl key + Shift key + U key.
(2) Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data can be transmitted to the
NT Transfer Utility.
(3) Click on
after selecting the PT model. Uploading of data is
started.
If the PT is not in the Transmit mode, a timeout error occurs in about 10 seconds at the NT Transfer Utility. In this case, set the PT in the Transmit mode
and click on
in the error message dialog box.
If the type of PT connected and the PT model setting at the NT Transfer Utility is different, error message is displayed.
(4) While the data is sent from the PT, the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph.
To abort the operation, click on
.
497
Appendix C
NT Transfer Utility
(5) After data transmission is completed, click on
in the message
box.
(6) The dialog to confirm the screen data is displayed (see below).
(7) Click on
and the file name setting window is displayed.
Specify the folder and file name where data is to be stored and click on
. The warning message about the mmi format is displayed. Click on
and the screen data is saved to the specified file in mmi format. If
you specify the existing file, the overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
For details of the file name setting dialog, refer to 3-3-3 Saving the Screen
Data (Application) File.
Reference: The screen data file received from a PT can be edited using the Support Tool.
498
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
The Translation Support Utility is utility software that runs on Windows
95/98/Me/2000/Xp and Windows NT Ver.4. The Translation Support Utility was
developed to help in translating a language to another supported language.
Currently, translation for label contents in NTST can only be performed manually
by opening and editing individual visible string contents in NTST, before downloading applications to a different language PT.
Therefore, the purpose of this utility is to provide a translation support utility that
enables you to load the memory map image file (.MMI) for the source language
and be able to translate the new string contents of the application and generate
independent memory map files (.MMI) for the specified target language. The
string data can be exported to Microsoft Excel files and from there you can edit/
change the string data outside the Translation Support Utility. You can also import the string data in Microsoft Excel format to Translation Support Utility.
Installing the NT Translation Support Utility
The basic installation method is the same as that for the NT Transfer Utility. Refer
to Installing the NT Transfer Utility in Appendix C.
Setup.exe for NT Translation Support Utility is in the \Translation Support Utility\disk1 folder in the Support Tool CD-ROM. By double-clicking the Setup.exe
icon, you can start the installation program. Follow the instructions on the setup
screen to install the NT Translation Support Utility.
Flow of Operations
An NTST application needs to be saved in MMI format before it can be used in
Translation Support Utility.
(1) Load MMI files using [File] – [Open].
(2) Use [Translation] – [New] to create a new language column. More than one
target languages may be created.
(3) Strings in target language text are translated using the translation editor window.
Select the cell in the target language in which the source text is to be translated. The source text is displayed in the upper pane of the editor translation
window. You can input the translated text in the lower pane and confirm by
clicking the
button.
(4) Repeat the steps for each of the strings to be translated.
(5) Select [Translation] – [Delete] operation if you wish to remove any of the target languages.
(6) Use [File] – [Generate MMI] to save all the languages to their respective MMI
files.
(7) If you wish to perform the translation using an Excel sheet rather than in the
utility itself, use the Export function in [Translation] – [Export] to export the
strings to .XLS format.
499
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
(8) To read back the translated text in Excel format to the utility, use the Import
function in [Translation] – [Import].
Application Window
The name of each part and the available functions are described below.
Main
Translation
Table
Translation
Editor
window
Status Bar
Main Translation Table
The Main Translation Table displays the ID, Source Text and Language in columns for the particular MMI file.
Sorting preference for display of extracted string contents are as follows: Screen
number, and then the object type sorted alphabetically for that particular screen
when there are no header rows identifying the object type.
Select the cell in the target language, into which the source text is to be translated. You can move around the cells in the translation columns using the arrow
keys or the tab key.
Short Form in the ID Column
The ID of screen objects are displayed in short form.
Below are the short forms with their meanings:
500
Scr
Screen
Txt
Fixed Display Text
TSW
Touch Switch
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
Lmp
Lamp
Rec
Record in Recipe Entry
Param
Parameter in Recipe Entry
Translation Editor Window
You can view the Translation Editor Window in the lower part of the Application
Window. This is where the translated text can be input.
When the source text in the source language column in the translation table is
selected, both panes will be disabled.
Source text of the selected label or string.
Input translated label
or string.
Counter
Displays remaining number of characters that can
be entered for the selected cell from the selection
table. It will display 0 if the current selected cell is
on the Source Language column. In addition, if the
length exceeds the limit, the counter will display a
negative value in the red color.
Navigate to previous item in selected column. Wrap around
will be performed in case it reaches the top of the row.
Navigate to next item in selected column. Wrap around will be
performed in case it reaches the end of the row.
Copy source text into the editor
Accept changes. Enabled only when contents
are changed.
Status Bar
The status bar, which you can find at the bottom of the translation window, is divided into four panes.
The progress is the display operation status for time-consuming
and intensive operations like saving target language .MMI files,
Importing to Excel etc.
Type/Category of the
screen object to which
the selected label text
item belongs.
Current line
and total number of lines.
(Text Table
window only)
Language of
the current
active
translation.
Menu Bar
The menu bar shows the names of each function. The pull-down menu commands provided by the Translation Support Utility and the functions of each
menu item are shown below.
501
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
File
or ALT+F
Open or Ctrl+O – Opens the source MMI file.
Close – Close current Application.
Generate MMI or Ctrl+S – Save current Application
in MMI format.
Exit – Exit Utility.
Recent File List – Displays recently opened file list.
File
or ALT+T
New or Ctrl+N – Creates a new target translation column.
Import– Import from Excel.
Export – Export to Excel.
Settings or Ctrl+T – Opens the translation setting dialog.
Delete – Deletes the selected translation column.
This option will only be enabled if there is at least one
target language.
Update Database or Ctrl+U – Refresh database if timestamp of the source MMI file is different from the source
application, thereby indicating that the source application
has changed.
Edit
or ALT+E
Find/Replace or Ctrl+F – Search for and/or replace
specified text.
Edit Translation Item or Ins – Move focus to the lower
pane of Translation Window for user input.
Next Item – Navigate to previous item under selected
column. It will wrap around when it reaches the last row.
Previous Item – Navigate to previous item above selected column. It will wrap around when it reaches the top
row.
View
or ALT+V
Toolbar – Displays or hides toolbar.
Status Bar – Displays or hides status bar.
Help
or ALT+H
Contents – Opens the Online Help.
About – Displays the version number.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard Tool Bar displays the functions that are used most frequently. In
the Translation Support Utility, the standard toolbar options are Open and Save.
502
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
These functions can be called easily without selecting the function item from the
menu bar.
Open
Save
File Open
A File Open dialog box is a window that is displayed in a fixed size.
To Open a .MMI file, select [Open] in the [File] Menu of the Application window.
The File Open Dialog box will be displayed so that the user can select the .MMI
file that will be opened.
after selecting the MMI file. A Translation Dialog Box
Click the
will be displayed for the user to enter the language and character set of the file
being opened. However, this translation dialog will not be shown when .MMI files
are opened subsequently as the languages information will be stored in the database the first time it is opened.
Source Project Language
Displays all the available Languages. You may input a language that is not in the
list.
Source Project Character Set
This will be disabled if the specified Source Project Language type is the same as
the pre-defined Source Project language type. However, if you have input your
own language, the Source Project Character Set combo box will be enabled and
the default language will be Latin.
New Translation
Creates a new target language column for translation.
Select [New] in the [Translation] Menu of the Application window.
503
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
The New Translation Dialog box will appear and the user can edit the Language,
Character Set and Output File Name.
Language
Displays all the available Languages. You may input a language that is not in the
list.
Character Set
The Code Page will be disabled if the specified language type is the same as the
pre-defined language type. However, if you have input your own language in the
edit box, the character set combo box will be enabled and the default will be Latin.
Output File Name
Modify the path or name of the output file of the translated language.
Translation Setting
This option is used to display translation settings such as language, character
set, database file, source file, output file name of the source file, and the target
file. You can also use this setting to change the output file name of the target language.
Select [Settings] in the [Translation] Menu of the Application window.
The Source Translation Setting Dialog box will be displayed.
504
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
If you change the source language to the target language, the source translation
dialog box will become the target translation dialog. The path and name of the
Output File Name may be modified.
Delete Translation
Deletes the selected Language column.
Select [Delete] in the [Translation] Menu of the Application window.
This option will only be enabled if there is at least one target language translation
data present.
The Delete Translation Dialog box will be displayed.
You can delete any language except the source language.
Export
Use Export to export string data to an MS Excel worksheet (*.xls). You can then
translate the strings on MS Excel and subsequently import the data to the
Translation Support Utility to save it to the MMI files of the translated language.
Select [Export] in the [Translation] Menu of the Application window.
505
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
The Export Translation Dialog box will be displayed.
Click the
Button after selecting the language to be exported. A
file save dialog box similar to the file open dialog box will prompt you to enter a
filename. Once a valid filename is specified, the export operation begins. The
cursor will change to a wait cursor for the duration of this operation. When the
operation is finished, an export completion message box will be displayed.
Import
Use Import to import string data from an MS Excel worksheet (*.xls).
Select [Import] in the [Translation] Menu of the Application window.
The Open File dialog box will be displayed. Enter the name of the file to the imported.
The Import Translation Dialog box will be displayed.
Language
Displays all the available target languages present in the Translation Table and
that have corresponding valid target language data in Excel. All items are selected as the default, but are disabled once the import operation starts.
506
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
Status
Displays the status of each target language that is being imported.
Current Text – Source]
Displays the source text present in the Translation Table.
Current Text – Translation
Displays the translated text for the target language existing in the Translation
Table.
Excel Text
Displays the translated text for the target language that can be imported from
Microsoft Excel format.
Import Text
Shows the converted text, i.e., with correct converted key code (if necessary),
length limit, etc. However, if you modify the text and then press Import or Import
All, validation is performed.
Start
Use the Start button to activate the import operation for a language.
Stop
Use the Stop Button to terminate the import operation for that language.
Next
Use the Next Button to move down by one item.
Previous
Use the Previous Button to move up by one item.
Import All
Use the Import All Button to import all items for the selected column.
Import
Use the Import Button to import the selected item.
The sequence of events for the import operation is given below (The term
Translation Data Item may be used interchangeably with a ’Record’ in the notes
below and both mean the same thing):
First of all, the Language Selection list box is enabled so the user can choose
from the list of languages available for Import. By default, all items are selected.
Press the Start button to initiate the whole import operation. Once Start is clicked,
the Language list box is disabled and the Import operation starts. The multi-line
edit boxes are populated with relevant data. The status box displays the start of
the import operation by displaying “Importing <Language>...”
At this stage, you have the following options:
Import translation data for all the languages in the Language list box (i.e., accept
all translation data as it exists in Excel format) by clicking the Import All button. By
doing this, translation data for all languages is processed and imported. During
this process, when all translation data for a particular language is processed/imported, that language is removed from the Language list box and the status box
displays “Done,” for that language. This process is repeated for all languages in
the Language list box.
507
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
Import translation data one by one by viewing the data (in the Excel Text edit box
in the Import dialog above) to be imported and, if necessary, edit the data (in the
Import Text edit box in the Import Dialog above), and then click the ’Import’ button. This way, you can inspect and also edit the translation data that is being imported for that language. During this process of importing translation data items
one by one, you can skip any of the translation data items by clicking the ’Next’
button the item will be ignored for import and processing will proceed to the next
record. Conversely, you can navigate back to any of the previous records that
you may have missed inadvertently by clicking the ’Previous’ Button, so that you
can inspect and import that particular record.
When the last record of a language is processed, the language will be removed
from the Language list box and the next language will become ready for import. In
addition, the status box displays “Done” for the completed language, and the
Start button (which had until now displayed ‘Stop’) caption changes back to
‘Start’. You may start importing the next language by clicking the ‘Start’ Button
again.
Find/Replace
You can search for specific text and replace it, or you can search for and replace
all forms of a word (for example, replace “lamp” with “standard lamp.”
Select [Find/Replace] in the [Edit] Menu of the Application window.
A Find/Replace Dialog box will appear on the screen.
[Language] Display the currently selected language column.
Error/Warning Messages
Situations where error/warnings may be displayed are given below. The list is by
no means exhaustive as more may be added. Also, there may be differences
with the exact messages that are shown.
(1) Fonts with the following character sets are not available on your local machine. Not all languages can be shown with the required character set.
(2) Only with the NT30/620 series, when saving, once the translation is completed a warning message will be displayed to prompt you to open the translated MMI file in NTST and validate the application to ensure proper behavior. This is due to the paging memory constraints for those PT Models.
(3) Database file cannot be found/No access rights for database file/Database
file cannot be opened.
(4) Export/Import successful/unsuccessful (as appropriate).
508
Translation Support Utility
Appendix D
(5) When closing the source MMI file or exiting the Translation Support Utility, if
you have made some translation changes that have not been committed to
MMI files corresponding to target languages, the Translation Support Utility
will prompt you to generate the corresponding MMI for the target languages
(if any). Refer to the message below.
(6) If the current source MMI file is newer than the one registered in the MDB
database or it has contents that are different from the MDB database file,
then it prompts you whether to update the database with the information of
the current file or not. Refer to the message below.
(7) File save error when saving translated target MMI files. Refer to the following image for a sample.
System Function
Translation Scope and Policy
(1) Only the following kinds of label translation are supported, subject to availability in the target PT model of the source application:
509
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
Static label of Touch Switch and Standard Lamp (where Touch Switch is a
standalone screen object and not any component such as touch switch in
Alarm/Trend Graph in NT21, NT31/631 models).
On/Off static label of Touch Switch and Standard Lamp (where Touch
Switch is a standalone screen object and not any component such as
touch switch in Alarm/Trend Graph in NT21, NT31/631 models).
Fixed Display Text
Input Key String label
String Table Initial value
Screen History Title
Names of Recipe Table Entries, their records (name only) and parameters
(name only)
Static label of Touch Switches internal to Recipe Screen Element
(2) Multiple language translation is supported by Translation Support Utility.
(3) Automatic generation of translated MMI file. Default target filename with
country/language name as qualifier is used to store the translated MMI file.
(4) Contents not translated are displayed as blank and changes will not be
tracked.
(5) The length limit of label is constrained by the target PT Model.
(6) Code that corresponds to an image/mark/library entry will be displayed in its
original form (ASCII representation), i.e., it will not be tagged by the NTST
opening token !< and closing token >.
(7) Touch Switch and Standard Lamp with dynamic labels only, or those with no
label at all will not be extracted for translation.
(8) The validations performed are the number of row/column and the length limit
of the label according to PT Model.
Additionally, with the NT30/620 series, during saving, once the translation is
completed a warning message will be displayed to open the translated MMI
file in NTST and validate the application to ensure proper behavior.
(9) Translation Support Utility will also take care of key code conversion
(ISO8859-1 –> CP437) results wherever necessary and also restricted Chinese Input for NT20S.
Translation Management
Languages
The following is a list of commonly used languages available for selection. You
can also specify a language not in the list.
(1) English
(2) Japanese
(3) Simplified Chinese
(4) Traditional Chinese
(5) German
(6) French
510
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
(7) Italian
(8) Spanish
Character set
A character set is an ordered set of characters in which a numeric index (codepoint value) is associated with each character.
Different languages and locales may be used in different character sets.
Character sets to choose from are provided based on the language selected.
However, for the Translation Support Utility, the following are the character set
shown.
(1) Japanese (Shift JIS)
(2) Simplified Chinese (GB 2312)
(3) Traditional Chinese (BIG 5)
(4) Latin (ISO 8859-1/CP437)
Filename
An output filename is provided as a default. The filename can be edited.
Database Management
All translation data for each of the source applications with their respective
translation will be stored in a Microsoft Access relational database, which has to
be retained for later retrieval of translated data for modification etc.
You can update the database with the latest application information.
When updating the database, Translation Support Utility checks for changes
made at the source file. Items will be added, removed, or updated depending on
the current file. As a result, there may be new text requiring translation or already
translated text that is obsolete in the database.
File Management
Upon opening a source application MMI file for translation, the user will be
prompted to inform the utility about the language character set pertaining to the
application that is going to be opened for translation.
At any given time, only one application can be opened.
Standard file operations are available for the user to close files, save files, and
exit the utility (which will prompt you to save if any changes have been made).
The following are the file types involved in translation management for this utility:
.MMI files (Memory Map Image file corresponding to NTST data)
.mdb files (Microsoft Access database storing translation data for source and
target)
.xls files (for Export/Import functionality)
Export/Import Management
Export:
(1) All language column headers (excluding the source) will be displayed for
selection of export and the user will be able to select one or more languages
for export from among them.
511
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
(2) The ID for screen objects containing the label and the source text will be
mandatory export fields and therefore will be exported automatically.
(3) For multi-line text, new lines will remain unchanged and also image, library
and mark codes will remain in binary when exported.
(4) Non-translated text will be exported as blank.
(5) Column widths will take the default for Microsoft Excel after export. The exported format in Excel will resemble that of the Translation Table.
Import:
(1) You are allowed to export translated string data for one or more languages of
your selection and also will be able to view and change each data item under
a language before it is imported.
(2) The following will be displayed for selection and navigation by the user:
Listing and selection of source column headers in Excel to be imported.
Display of corresponding target column headers into which the column
data from Excel will be imported.
Read-only Listing of source text for selected items in selected language
and corresponding translation text existing in Translation Support Utility
tables read from the database.
Display of text that is being exported corresponding to selection made
above with facility for editing.
Navigational buttons for moving up and down each data item for the selected language.
(3) Import All facility will also be provided.
(4) Import of Excel data into Translation Support Utility will be a controlled
check-in with key code conversion being performed if necessary.
(5) If you attempt to change the item data during import, validation is performed
for length limit, limit for number of rows and columns for multi-line data etc.
before the changed text can be accepted for import.
Launching and Closing
Launching the Translation Support Utility
To Launch the Translation Support Utility, Select [Launch Translation Support
Utility] in the [Tools] Menu in NTST.
This option is not available when no application is loaded in NTST.
When launching the translation Support Utility, the current application in NTST
will close. The user can easily reopen the file by selecting it from recent file list.
Closing the Translation Support Utility
To close the Translation Support Utility, use any of the operations shown below.
In the menu, select [File] [Exit].
Click the
Button at the upper right corner in the main window.
Double click the Translation Support Utility icon displayed in the upper left section in the main window [Control Menu].
512
Appendix D
Translation Support Utility
Click the Support Tool icon displayed in the upper left section in the main window, then select
in the control menu box.
Press the F4 key while holding down the Alt key.
If you are going to exit the Translation Support Utility, a confirmation message will
be displayed for you to generate .MMI files for the particular languages.
After you exit the Translation Support Utility, the screen will return to the Windows
screen.
513
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
The functions that can be set by the Support Tool are summarized below for each
PT model. Some functions can be set at the PT side even if they cannot be set by
the Support Tool.
PLC Vendor (PT Configuration-PT Type)
Items
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
OMRON
Mitsubishi_A
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Mitsubishi_Fx
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Memory Link
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
AB
D*2
D*2
D*2
D*2
GE
D*2
D*2
D*2
D*2
Siemens
D*3
D*3
D*3
D*3
Modicon
D*4
D*4
D*4
D*4
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Can be set only with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
Can be set only with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V2.”
Can be set only with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1.”
Can be set only with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and “-V2.”
System Setting (PT Configuration)
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
1–
250
1–
250
256 –
500
1–
2000
1–
2000
1–
1000
1–
2000
1–
2000
1–
3999
1–
3999
1–
3999
1–
3999
1–
3999
Enable
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Key
Input
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Resume Function
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Backlight OFF
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
Items
Initial Screen
Buzzer
Number
of Table
Entries –
Numeral
T bl
Table
128
512
1000
2000
Number
of Table
Entries –
g
String
T bl
Table
128
256
1000
2000
256
1000
Number
of Table
Entries –
Bit
Memory
Table
515
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
Items
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Printer
for PT
Printer
*1
*1
*1
*1
Mode
History
Setting
Alarm
Screen
Numeral Display
Type
*1: Setting is not possible from the Support Tool. Set these items at the PT.
*2: For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, set the screen saver function at the PT. The Backlight OFF function is only for
turning off the screen or the backlight. If the screen saver function is used, it is possible to display a string at a desired position in
predetermined intervals in addition to turning off the screen/backlight.
Report
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Cross-Reference
Direct Connection Information
History Report
Image/Library Report
Mark List
Screen Image
Screen List
Table Report
Validation Report
Mathematical Report
*1
*1
*1
*1
Recipe Table
*2
*2
*2
*2
Items
*1
*2
This option is available only for V2 models and above
This option is available only for V2 (System Ver.3.1) models and above
Data Transmission (Download/Upload)
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Application
Screen
Direct
Access
Information
System
Memory
Table
Screen
History
Alarm
History
Items
Download/
Upload
Get Histo
History Log
Date and Time
516
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
Image Data, Library Data, and Marks
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
Total No.
224
224
4095
Code
FE20 to FEFF
FE20 to FEFF
0001 to 0FFF
Comp.
Mode – 8
Colors
Comment
Total No.
Items
Image
Code
Library
Mark
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
896
FA20 to FAFF
FB20 to FBFF
FC20 to FCFF
FD20 to FDFF
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631
NT631C
896
12288
FA20 to FAFF
FB20 to FBFF
FC20 to FCFF
FD20 to FDFF
1000 to 3FFF
Comment
Total No.
64
64
224
64
224
224
FF20
to
FF5F
FF20
to
FF5F
FF20 to FFFF
FF20
to
FF5F
FF20 to FFFF
FF20 to FFFF
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
Code
NT631C
Memory Tables
Items
No.
Table –
Numeral
Table –
String
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
128
128
512/1000
512
512/1000
512/1000/2000
Value
Initial
Words
PC
(PLC)
Address
I/O Comment
No.
128
128
256/1000 *1
256
256/1000 *1
256/1000/2000 *2
Value*3
(20)
(32)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(40)
Initial
Words
PC
(PLC)
Address
I/O Comment
*1: String Table entry no. from 256 to 999 are the entries that only the initial value can be stored and can not be changed.
*2: String Table entry no. from 500 to 1999 are the entries that only the initial value can be stored and can not be changed.
*3: Image/library data can be inserted in the following models, NT30/C, NT620/C, NT625C, NT21 (NT20S-compatible mode) NT31/C-V2
or later models (NT30/620-compatible mode) and NT631/C-V2 or later models (NT30/620-compatible mode).
517
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
No.
256
256
256/1000
History
String
Table
Entry
Color
Image/
Library
Code
Switch
Screen
Screen
No.
PC
(PLC)
Address
I/O Comment
No.
64
Cancel
Backlight
Off
Function
Description
No.
64
PC
(PLC)
Address
I/O Comment
Total No.
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
Address
I/O Comments
Total No.
4
PC
(PLC)
Address
I/O Comments
Mathematical
Table
Total No.
256
256*4
Recipe
Table
No.
200
200*5
Items
Table –
Bit
Memory
Table –
Extended
I/O Input
Table –
Extended
I/O Output
Table
T
bl –
I/O Comments
F-key
Input
y
Notify
Table
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
*4: This option is available only for V2 or later models.
*5: This option is available only for V2 (System Ver. 3.1) or later models.
518
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
Screens
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
Screen Size
(Dots)
160
64
256
128
320
240
640
400
640
400
640
480
260
140
Max. No. of
Screen
250
500
2000
1000
2000
3999
1 to
250
1 to
250
256 to
500
Standard Screen
1 to 1899, 2000
1 to
1000
1 to 1899, 2000
1 to 3999
Parent Screen
1 to
250
256 to
500
1 to 1899, 2000
1 to
1000
1 to 1899, 2000
1 to 3999
Window/Keyboard
Screen
1900 to 1979
1900 to 1979
1 to 3999
Extended Screen
1980 to 1996
1980 to 1996
Occurrence History Screen
1997
1997
9001 (Not editable)
Frequency History
Screen
1998
1998
9002 (Not editable)
Host Connect
Screen
1999
1999
9000
Password Screen
Menu Screen
Print Format
Screen
Device Monitor
Screen
9021-9023*1
Brightness and
Contrast Adjustment Screen
9030*2
Items
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT31
NT31C
NT631
320
240
NT631C
640
480
*1: Available only for V2 models.
*2: Available only for V2 (System Ver. 3.1) or later models.
Screen Properties
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
None
Continuous
Beep
Long
Short
System Keypad
Type
Color
Items
B
Buzzer
History
BackBack
light
Color – Background
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
519
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
Elements
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Message –
Display
Line Qty
(1-12) (1-12)
(1-16)
(1-24)
(1-7)
(1-12) (1-12) (1-24)
(1-24)
Message –
Length
(1-39) (1-39)
(1-40)
(1-40)
(1-32) (1-39) (1-39) (1-40)
(1-40)
Message –
Smoothing
Message –
Scale
Display
ImageLib
Color –
Frame
Color –
Background –
ON
Color –
Background –
OFF
Image &
Library –
Color –
Foreground
Items
Alarm
Alarm List
Start Bit
Table Entry
Alarm List
No. of Bits
Referenced
Alarm
History
order of
frequency/
order of
occurrence
Alarm
History
History Info
Alarm
History
Info Type
520
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Image &
Library –
Color –
Background
Line Scroll
Touch
Switch
Page
Scroll
Touch
Switch
Shape –
Rectangle
Shape –
Circle
Shape –
Polygon
Shape –
Sector
Frame
Color –
Frame
Lamp Attribute
Color – ON
Color –
OFF
Label –
Max No. of
characters
(32)
(40)
(40)
(80)
(80)
(80)
(32)
(40)
(40)
(80)
(80)
Label –
Font Type
Label –
Scale
Label –
Smoothing
Label – Attribute
Label –
Color – ON
Label –
Color –
OFF
Label –
Color –
Background
D*2
D*2
D*2
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Label-OffDescription
Items
Alarm
Standard
Lamp
521
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Label-OnDescription
*3
*3
*3
*3
Multiline
Label
*3
*3
*3
*3
Static Label Type
Numeral/
String Display Label
Type
*3
*3
*3
*3
Items
Standard
Lamp
*1: Fix to transparent
*2: Fix to black
*3: Available only in V2 and later models
With the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above, smoothing is not performed since 32 dot font is
used.
522
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Insert Mark
Insert
Image
ON State –
Code
OFF State
– Code
Indirect
Reference
Table Entry
Items
Standard
Lamp
Image
Lamp
Numeral Display
Display
Type –
Decimal/
Hexadecimal
Decimal
only
Format –
Integer/
Decimal
Zero Suppression
Display
Sign
Font Type
Standard
only
Scale
String
Display
21,
11
Smoothing
Attribute
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Indirect
Reference
Table Entry
(20)
(32)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(32)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(40)
Length
Font Type
Standard
only
Scale
11,
21
523
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Smoothing
Attribute
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Table Entry
Items
String
Di l
Display
Data
I
Input
t–
Numeral
Display Type
– Decimal/
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Limit – Maximum
Limit – Minimum
Format – Integer/Decimal
Zero Suppression
Display Sign
Font Type
only
Standard
only
Scale
11,
21
Data
I
Input
t–
String
Smoothing
Attribute
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Focus
Frame
Focus Attribute
Interlock
*3
*3
*3
*3
Table Entry
Length
(40)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(32)
(40)
(40)
(40)
(40)
Font Type
Scale
Smoothing
*3: Available only in V2 and later models.
524
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Focus
Frame
Focus Attribute
Interlock
*3
*3
*3
*3
Table
Entry
Display
Type –
Decimal/
Hexadecimal
Items
Data
Input –
String
Data
Input –
Th b
Thumbwheel
Switch
Attribute
Format –
Integer/
Decimal
Limit –
Maximum
Limit –
Minimum
Display
Sign
Attribute
Size
End Plate
Character Color
– Foreground
Character Color
– Background
Thumbwheel
Color –
Frame
*1
*2
*1: Small & Medium only
*2: Medium only
*3: Available only in V2 and later models.
525
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Thumbwheel Color – Foreground *1
Thumbwheel Color – Background *2
Interlock
*4
*4
*4
*4
Polygon
Circle
Arc
Sector
Color –
Foreground
Maximum
Character
20
32
40
40
80
80
80
32
40
40
80
80
Standard
only
11,
Items
Data
Input –
Thumbwheel
S it h
Switch
Graphic
(Fixed
Display)
Text
(Fixed
Di
Display)
Polyline
Rectangle
Font Type
Scale
21
Tiling
(Fi d
(Fixed
Display)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Smoothing
Attribute
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Insert Mark
Insert
Image
*5
*3
*3
*3
*3
Pattern
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Color –
Border
Foreground color for switch
Background color for switch
This option will be available for corresponding V2 and later models in NT30/620-compatible mode.
Available only in V2 and later models.
This option is available in NT20S-compatible mode.
526
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Code
Scale
Attribute
Smoothing
*1
*1
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Indirect
Reference
D*2
D*2
D*2
D*2
Color –
Foreground
Color –
Background
Indirect
Reference
D*2
D*2
D*2
D*2
Function
– Notify
Bit
Function
– Switch
Screen
Function
– Input
Key –
Control
Function
– Input
Key –
Window/
Keyboard
Function
– Input
Key –
String
*3
*3
*3
*3
Function
– Copy
Setting
Items
Mark
(Fi d
(Fixed
Display)
Image Display (Fixed
Display)
Library Display
(Fixed Display)
Touch
Switch
*1: For NT20, NT20S, NT600S, smoothing is always ON.
*2: Can be used only NT31, NT31C, NT631, NT631C with system Ver. 2.1 and above or with “-V2” or “-V3”.
*3: Input character strings different from the label characters can be specified.
527
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Function
– Cursor
Move
Function
– Screen
Print
Function
– Window
Move
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
PC (PLC)
Bit Address
Shape –
Standard
Shape –
Shadow
Shape –
3-Dimension
Shape –
Rectangle
Shape –
Circle
Shape –
Polygon
Shape –
Sector
Frame
Color –
Frame
Show ON
State
Lamp Attribute
Color –
ON
Color –
OFF
Max No.
of Characters
32
40
40
80
80
80
32
40
40
80
80
Label –
Font
Type
Label –
Scale
Label –
Smoothing
Items
Touch
Switch
*1: Can be used only for NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V” and above.
528
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Label –
Attribute
Label –
Color –
ON
Label –
Color –
OFF
Label –
Color –
Background
Label –
Insert
Mark
Label –
Insert
Image
Interlock
*3
*3
*3
*3
Multiline
Label
*3
*3
*3
*3
Static Label Type
Numeral/
String
Display
Label
Type
*3
*3
*3
*3
Standard/
Pen
Reco
Drawing
Width
1-320
1-320
1-640
1-640
2-260
2-320
2-320
2-640
2-640
Sampling
Cycle
Table
Entry
100% –
Table
Entry
100% –
Value
0% –
Table
Entry
0% – Value
–100% –
Table
Entry
–100% –
Value
Items
Touch
Switch
Trend
Graph
*3: Available only in V2 and later models.
529
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Line –
Style
Line –
Color
Direction
Display
Sign
Frame
Color –
Frame
Color – +
Range
Color – –
Range
Display
%
Display
% – Font
Type
Display
%–
Scale
Display
%–
Smoothing
Display
% – Color –
Foreground
Display
% – Color –
Background
Items
Trend
Graph
530
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S
/NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Start
Table
Entry
No. of
Points
2-320
2-320
2-512
2-512
2-260
2-320
2-320
2-512
2-512
100% –
Table
Entry
100% –
Value
0% –
Table
Entry
0% – Value
–100% –
Table
Entry
–100% –
Value
Line –
Style
Line –
Color
Direction
Display
Sign
Frame
Color –
Frame
Color – +
Range
Color – –
Range
Items
Brokenline
Graph
531
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Table
Entry
100% –
Table
Entry
100% –
Value
0% –
Table
Entry
0% – Value
–100% –
Table
Entry
–100% –
Value
Items
Bar
Graph
Direction
Right
only
Display
Sign
Frame
Color –
Frame
Color – +
Range
Color – –
Range
Display
%
Display
% – Font
Type
Display
%–
Scale
532
Standard
only
11,
21
Display
%–
Smoothing
Display
% – Color –
Foreground
Display
% – Color –
Background
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Frame
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Color –
Frame
D*1
D*1
Display
Sign
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Direction
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Meter –
Shape
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Meter –
Direction
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Meter –
Type
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Meter –
Width
Rate
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Scale
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Distance
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Scale
Length
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
No. of Division
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Scale
Color
D*1
D*1
Color –
Foreground
D*1
D*1
Color –
Background
D*1
D*1
Color –
+Range
D*1
D*1
Color –
–Range
D*1
D*1
Value –
Table
Entry
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Items
Anal
logue
Meter
*1: Can be used only with NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
533
Appendix E
Tables of Functions of PT Models
NT11S/
NT11
NT20S
Ver. 5/
NT20
NT30
Ver. 4
NT30C
Ver. 4
NT600S
Ver. 5
NT620S
Ver. 4
NT620C/
NT625C
Ver. 4
NT21
NT31
NT31C
NT631
NT631C
Display
Label
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
100% –
Table
Entry
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
100% –
Value
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
0% –
Table
Entry
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
0% –
Value
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
–100% –
Table
Entry
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
–100% –
Value
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Display
% – Font
Type
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Display
%–
Scale
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Display
%–
Smoothing
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Display
%–
Foreground
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
Display
%–
Background
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*1
D*2
D*2
D*2
D*2
Items
Analogue
M t
Meter
Recipe
Object
*1: Can be used only with NT31, NT31C, NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
*2: Can be used only with NT31/631C(System Ver.3.1) and above.
534
Appendix F
Limits on Numbers of Elements
Limits with Conventional Models
For NT20, NT20S, NT30, NT30C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C, the
limits on the use of elements are indicated below for each PT model.
Item
Limit
Numeral Display
50 entries/screen
String Display
NT20, NT20S: 32 entries/screen
Other models: 50 entries/screen
Bar Graph
50 entries/screen
Broken-line graph
NT20, NT20S, NT600S: Not supported
Other models:
Trend Graph
NT20, NT20S, NT600S: Not supported
Other models:
Lamp
1 frame/screen, 256 lines/frame
1 frame/screen, 50 lines/screen data file
NT20, NT20S: 128 entries/screen
NT600S:
255 entries/screen
Other models: 256 entries/screen
Touch Switch
NT20, NT20S: 72 entries/screen
NT600S:
128 entries/screen
Other models: 256 entries/screen
Data Input – Numeral
Data Input – String
Alarm List
Alarm History
50 entries/screen
(overlapping screens: Registration is possible only on one child
screen.)
NT20, NT20S, NT600S: Not supported
Other models:
4 groups/screen
(max. 32 groups in overlapping screens)
535
Appendix F
Limits on Numbers of Elements
New Models
Item
Limit
Fixed Display
65,535 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 524,280 entries)
Numeral Display
256 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 1,024 entries)
String Display
256 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 1,024 entries)
Image Data
256 entries/screen, including library data
(overlapping screens*1: max. 1,024 entries)
Library Data
256 entries/screen, including image data
(overlapping screens*1: max. 1,024 entries)
Mark Display (fixed dis- 65,535 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 52,480 entries)
play)
Bar Graph
50 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 400 entries)
Analogue Meter*2
50 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 400 entries)
Broken-line Graph
1 frame/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 8 frames) 256 lines/frame
Trend Graph
1 frame/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 8 frames)
Data logging function not used:
50 lines/screen data
Data logging function used:
8 lines/screen data
Lamp
256 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 1,024 entries)
Touch Switch
256 entries/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 1,024 entries)
Numeral
Input
Numeric
Key Type
256 entries/screen (overlapping screens*3: Registration is possible only
on one child screen)
Thumbwheel SW
Type
NT21: 26 entries/screen (overlapping screens*4: Registration is possible only on one child screen.)
NT31/NT31C: 64 entries/screen (overlapping screens*4: Registration is
possible only on one child screen.)
NT631/NT631C: 256 entries/screen (overlapping screens*4: Registration is possible only on one child screen.)
Data Input – String
256 entries/screen
(overlapping screens*3: Registration is possible only on one child
screen.)
Alarm List
Alarm History
4 groups/screen (max. 32 groups in overlapping screens*1)
(Alarm history: One group each for occurrence order and frequency
order in standard/child screen)
Recipe
1 frame/screen (overlapping screens*1: max. 8 frames)
*1: Limits on numbers of elements on a window/keyboard screen is same as on
a standard screen. Limit check is not performed for overlapping screens at
the Support Tool.
*2: Analogue meter can be used only with the NT21 and with the NT31, NT31C,
NT631 and NT631C with “-V1” and above.
*3: Either of numeral input (numeric key type) or string input can be registered
on a window/keyboard screen.
*4: Thumbwheel type numeral input can not be registered on a window/keyboard screen.
536
Limits on Numbers of Elements
Appendix F
Limits on display
For elements, limits are also applied to display in addition to the limits on the
numbers shown above.
Limits on reading the data
For the NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C, the allowable number of
data entries that can be read at the same time is set and read elements exceeding this limit are not displayed. If the same data is read from different elements,
reading of the data is counted separately.
Refer to the appendix in the NT21/31/631 Reference Manual for the allowable
maximum number of data entries that can be read.
537
Appendix G
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.1
Here, differences between the Support Tool Ver.3.3 and Ver.4.1 and the new
functions added to Ver.4.1 are shown in the table. Various functions are added to
Ver.4.1 to improve operational efficiency.
Items
NT31/631 V2 Models
support
Ver.3.3
Not supported
Ver.4.1
The following PT Models are supported:
Section
3-3
NT31-V2
NT31C-V2
NT631-V2
NT631C-V2
Different On/off description for standard
lamp/touch switch.
Not supported
Insertion of image/library in character
string
Not available in new
models
The following functions are supported.
6-5-1
6-8
On description and Off description
of standard lamp/touch switch can
be different in V2 models.
This option will be available for
NT31/C-V2 and NT631/C-V2 models in NT30/620 compatible mode.
6-2-7
6-7
7-3-5
Retaining of alarm his- Not supported
tory/list associated
touch switch attributes,
when converted from
NT30/620 model to
new V2 models.
Alarm history/list associated touch
switches will keep its attributes unchanged when converted from
NT30/620 to V2 models in
NT30/620-compatible mode.
Appendix-A
Correction of
alarm
list/history touch
switches
Centralizing the Label
of Lamp and Touch
switch in both horizontal and vertical direction.
Label is centralized
only in horizontal
direction
Label is centralized both horizontal
and vertical direction.
6-1-9
9-3-12
Mathematical Table
Not supported
A different memory table is supplied to input mathematical functions.
7-9
9-3
Interlock
Not supported
This facility is provided to activate
or deactivate the associated object.
Only when interlock is ON the object will response to the user
touches, deactivated otherwise.
6-1-12
New Words Added to
OMRON
Not supported
Words for EM Bank 0..F, Time Up
Flag, Counter Up Flag, Task Flag
and Work Area are added.
6-1-10
Device monitor screen
Not supported
New Device monitor screens
5-12
(9021-23) are available switch
screen functionality of touch switch/
bit memory table.
539
Appendix G
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.1
Items
540
Ver.3.3
Ver.4.1
Section
I/O Comments Import
Not supported
I/O Comments in TAB delimited text 7-7-4
file can be imported to NTST.
Multiline Label
Not supported
Labels (ON/OFF Descriptions) can
be entered in multiple lines.
6-5-1
6-8
NT30/620 Compatible
Mode
Not supported
With this option it can be chosen
between the existing 31/631 model’s 5-2 control/Notify structure or
the 30/620 model’s 4-3 control/
notify structure.
3-3-1
App-A
Correcting the
Control/
Notify
Area
Conversion
Numeral/String Display Not supported
Label Type
Enables dynamic labeling as Label
can be taken from Numeral or
String table.
6-5-1
6-8
Input Key – String
function Touch Switch
of NT31, NT31C,
NT631, NT631C
Description of label is
always used as a character string to be input.
(When a touch switch
is pressed, a label will
be input.)
Character strings can be specified
individually. Addition of Copy From
Label button. When a touch switch
is pressed, set character string will
be input regardless of the label.
6-8-3
Start-up of system installer from the Support Tool
Not supported
System installer can be started directly by selecting [Connect] –
[Launch System Installer]. (It can
also be started up from Windows.)
1-1
System programs to
be attached
NT31/631 series system programs
System programs of conventional
models such as NT30/620 series
are also included in a CD-ROM.
1-1
Recipe
Not supported
This is available only for
NT31/631-V2 (System Ver.3.1).
6-11-1
Can be started using
Windows Start button
only
7-10
Brightness and Contrast Adjustment
Screen
Not supported
This is available only for
NT31/631-V2 (System Ver.3.1).
5-14
Multi-Edit Mode
Not supported
Available only for recipe object.
6-1
Appendix H
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.6
Some User Interface functionality was added to Ver.4.6 to improve operation efficiency.
Item
Ver. 4.1
Ver. 4.6
NT21 Model support
Not supported.
NT21 is supported.
Pick I/O comment from
CX-Server database
Only CSV file import is available.
When defining PLC address for each object,
the I/O name in CX-Server point data is
picked up as the PT I/O comment.
When editing the I/O comment table multiple
I/O names in CX-Server point data are
imported as PT I/O comments.
Property Dialog for
Grouped Object
Preview in Symbol
manager
Grouped object attributes cannot be edited
unless ungrouped.
Each symbol cannot be previewed on the
Symbol Manager.
Grouped object attributes can be edited to
select each property for grouped object.
Symbol Manager shows preview and object
tree view. Symbols created before V4.6 can
be read on V4.6 screen edit to add preview
data, then can be previewed after copying
then back to the Symbol Manager.
Copying
Image/Library/Mark with
contents
Only code of image/Library/Mark in the
object is copied when the object is copied
from other application with Import
Components Command. Contents must be
copied separately.
Contents of Image/Library/Mark in the object
is copied when the object is copied form
other application with Import Components
command. Separate copying of contents is
also available.
541
Appendix I
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.7
Some User Interface functionality was added to Ver.4.7 to improve operation efficiency.
Item
Ver. 4.1
Ver. 4.7
NT11-V1 Model support
Not supported.
NT11-V1 is supported.
Supported OS
Windows 95/98 and NT
Windows 95/98, Me, NT, 2000, and Xp
Screen size at start of
screen editing
100% (fixed)
For NT11S, NT11, NT20S, and NT21,
magnification of 100%, 200%, or 400% is
automatically selected to match the
resolution of the personal computer being
used.
543
Appendix J
New Functions of Support Tool Ver.4.8
Version 4.8 supports NT20.
• Support for NT20
A system program for the NT20 has been added.
Functionality for transferring the system program to the NT20 has been added to the system installer.
545
Appendix K
Error Messages
The error message that may be displayed while using the Support Tool, and the
action to take in response to them, are shown below.
The indications [W] and [E], given at the beginning of an error message, classify
the level of errors as indicated below.
[W]:
Minor error (permits transmission and execution of screen data)
[E]:
Major error (disables transmission of screen data)
Error Message
Corrective Action
Sign
% display or other element(s) cannot
overlap with the Trend Graph.
A “% display” or other element is overlapping the trend graph. Move the element
outside the trend graph frame.
A
Application version mismatched; Communication aborted.
System program version installed in a PT
maybe a lower one. For details of the combination of system program version that
can be transmitted and the PT model setting at the Support Tool, refer to 11-1-2
Available Data Communication Methods
by PT Models.
For details of updating the system program, refer to Appendix B.
C
Cannot have more than XXX child
screens.
When creating a new screen, insert a
number of child screens that does not exceed the maximum limit.
Clock Monitoring Address has not been
set.
With an NT21 PT, set the Clock Address to
define a clock Data Area so the clock data
can be read from the PLC.
Constant Value is out of limit. Maximum
value restored.
Correct the screen data or the program in
the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits
set for the copy setting touch switch will
suffice.
Continuous screen does not allow child
screen to have Thumbwheel/Numeral/
String Input elements.
Delete thumbwheel switches, numeral input elements, and/or character string input
elements.
Control/Notify/Window Control area cannot overlap each other.
Make sure that the PT status control area,
the PT status notify area and the window
control area are not overlapping each other.
Cursor Move Touch Switch does not
have any association link.
Select the cursor moving touch switch on
the screen, choose [Draw] – [Associate],
then specify the element with which the
selected touch switch is to be associated.
547
Appendix K
Error Messages
Error Message
D
Due to length limitation, Input Key –
String Touch Switch is only displaying
part of the label message.
Corrective Action
With NT620S, NT620C and NT625C, if a
character string input is selected as the
touch switch function, up to 80 characters
can be set for an input character string.
With NT21, NT31, NT31C, NT631 and
NT631C, however, although up to 80 characters can be set for a label, the limit is 40
characters for an input character string (a
character string that is input using a touch
switch).
F
[Fixed Display Mark] – smoothing not
supported. It is ignored.
The mark is automatically displayed without smoothing processing.
I
Image Table entry has been converted.
If the converted image code differs from
the code of the image data that is to be
displayed, correct the code.
Incompatible PT hardware connected;
communication aborted.
The PT model between the screen data
and the target PT is mismatching on downloading/uploading. Check the contents of
PT Configuration.
Input key-window/keyboard screen number is not within the valid range. Minimum value restored.
Create the window/keyboard screen for a
screen number in the range 1900 to 1979
and convert the window/keyboard screen
number set for the touch switch accordingly.
L
Library Table Entry has been converted.
If the converted library code differs from
the code of the library data that is to be
displayed, correct the code.
M
Memory access mismatched; communication aborted.
Target PLC vendor type or PT type is mismatching between the Support Tool and
PT hardware. Confirm the Support Tool
and PT side PLC vendor and PT type is
mismatching.
Memory utilization has exceeded the
XXX bytes limit by YYY bytes.
Delete several elements.
Memory utilization has exceeded the
XXX bytes limit by YYY bytes.
Delete several elements and screens.
More than one Numeral Input/Thumbwheel are referring to Numeral Table
entry 0.
Set different numeral memory table entry
numbers at the numeral input and thumbwheel switch properties.
Notify Area not specified.
Set the PC (PLC) address for the PT status control area/PT status notify area after
selecting [Tools] – [PT Configuration].
N
Control Area not specified.
Number of [Object name] has exceeded
the XXX limit by YYY.
Delete several elements.
[Numeral Input] – Total number of integer Create the numeral input field again. Corand decimal exceeds limit. It is disrect the screen data and the program in
carded.
the host so that numeric values such as
maximum/minimum check values and an
input value of up to 8 digits will suffice.
548
Appendix K
Error Messages
Error Message
O
Corrective Action
[Object Name] – % value is out of limit.
Default values restored for 100%, 0%,
and –100%.
Correct the screen data or the program at
the host so that a value of up to 8 digits
will be sufficient for the 100% value, 0%
value and –100% value in the bar graph.
[Object Name] has exceeded the maximum number of characters.
Set the character string within the limit.
[Object name] refers to invalid numeral
table entry. The referenced table entry is
reset to entry 0.
Correct the table entry number to a number within the valid range. If the table entry
number is specified in a program, correct
the program also.
[Object Name] – Invalid PLC address. It
is reset to default.
Reset the word number to a number of up
to 4 digits. If this PC (PLC) address is referred to from the program, it is necessary
to correct the program accordingly.
[Object Name] – inverse attribute not
supported. Foreground and Background
colors interchanged.
Since foreground color and background
color are automatically interchanged, no
special correction is required (display attribute is set to default (standard).).
Overlapping screen has more than 1
child screen containing Thumbwheel/Numeral/String Input elements.
Overlapping screens do not allow the setting of multiple input functions. Correct the
child screens.
P
Please make sure this parent screen
have at least 2 children.
Select the parent screen, then right click
the mouse and select [Modify]. Insert at
least 2 child screens for the parent screen.
S
Sampling cycle less than the minimum
value. Minimum value is restored.
Since there are no problems in actual operation, correction is not necessary.
Sampling cycle not multiple of 5. Value
rounded off to nearest multiple of 5.
Since there are no problems in actual operation, correction is not necessary.
Screen is empty, downloading may not
be possible.
Create the data in the empty screen or delete the empty screen.
Some objects exceed library size in code
FA20. The objects will not be downloaded to PT hardware.
Reduce the size of elements exceeding
the library size using the library editor, or
set a larger library size.
String Table: Table Entry XXX has invalid
component code. It has been converted
from XXXX to YYYY.
Delete the code from the character string
and make corrections so that an equivalent display can be obtained by displaying
and grouping the character string and the
fixed display image/library data.
The associated touch switches of the
alarm has been discarded and component touch switches have been created.
Correct the position of the control touch
switches as needed. If a control touch
switch is not necessary, cancel the check
for the control touch switch in the alarm
list/history properties. (With alarm touch
switches for NT31, NT31C, NT631, and
NT631, it is not possible to change the
size and label.)
T
The child screen XXX containing Numer- In the screen properties, set the same
al/String Input element(s) does not have [Keypad] attribute both for the parent and
the same key attribute as the overlapping child screens.
screen.
549
Appendix K
Error Messages
Error Message
T
Corrective Action
The code for screen element [Object
If the converted code differs from the code
Name] has been converted from XXXX to of the image element that is to be disYYYY.
played, correct the code.
The code for screen element [Object
If the converted code differs from the code
Name] has been converted from XXXX to of the library data that is to be displayed,
YYYY.
correct the code.
The component Touch Switches of the
Alarm List will be discarded.
Create the control touch switches using
the control code input function as required,
and associate them with the alarm list/history.
The screen no. XXX of type YYY is not
supported as a child, so the parent-child
association is discarded.
With a new model, it is not permissible to
specify a window/keyboard screen as a
child screen of overlapping screens. Copy
the contents of the window/keyboard
screen to a standard screen and specify
this screen as the child screen of the overlapping screens.
The screen no. XXX was a Continuous
Parent Screen which is not supported in
this model. It is discarded.
Use a touch switch to switch screens. If
the program is created to display the parent screen of the continuous screens, correct the program so that the first child
screen is displayed.
The screen no. XXX was an Extended
Screen which is not supported in this
model, so it is converted to standard
screen.
Correction not necessary.
The screen number referenced in Touch
Switch, is not a Window/Keyboard
screen.
Create the window/keyboard screen after
selecting [New], then use it as the reference screen.
The total number of Alarm List and Histo- Create the alarm list/history within the limit.
ry exceeds the overlapping screen’s limit
of XXX by YYY.
550
The total number of Bar Graph exceeds
the overlapping screen’s limit of 400 by
YYY.
Create the bar graphs within the limit.
The total number of Broken Line Graphs
exceeds the overlapping screen’s limit of
XXX by YYY.
Create the broken line graphs within the
limit.
The total number of lines in Broken Line
Graphs exceeds the overlapping
screen’s limit of XXX by YYY.
Create the broken line graphs within the
limit.
The total number of XXX exceeds the
overlapping screen’s limit of 256 by ZZZ.
Create the elements within the limit.
The total number of Image Display and
Library Display exceeds the overlapping
screen’s limit of 256 by XXX.
Create the image/library data within the
limit.
The total number of Numeral Display exceeds the overlapping screen’s limit of
1024 by XXX.
Create the numeral display fields within
the limit.
Appendix K
Error Messages
T
Y
Error Message
Corrective Action
The total number of Numeral Table references exceeds the overlapping screen’s
limit of XXX by YYY.
Reduce the number of reference elements.
The total number of String Table references exceeds the overlapping screen’s
limit of XXX by YYY.
Create the elements within the maximum
limit.
The total number of touch switches exceeds the overlapping screen’s limit of
XXX by YYY.
Create the touch switches within the limit.
The total number of Trend graph frame
exceeds the overlapping screen’s limit of
8 by XXX.
Create the trend graphs within the limit.
The total number of Trend Graph line
with Data Logging is ON exceeds the application limit of 8 by YYY.
Create the trend graphs within the limit.
The total number of vertices in Broken
Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping
screen’s limit of XXX by YYY.
Create the broken line graphs within the
limit.
This screen does not support XXX. It is
discarded.
Correct the system initialization screen so
that the same screen as before the conversion is created using fixed display elements excluding image/library data.
Touch Switch function type is not supported. It is discarded.
Correct the position of the control touch
switch as needed.
Touch switch does not have associated
alarm object.
Select the alarm touch switch on the
screen, choose [Draw] – [Associate], then
specify the element with which the selected touch switch is to be associated.
You have already started NT-series Support Tool.
To import screen data by starting up two
Support Tools, select [Import Component]
from the [File] menu.
551
Appendix L
Shortcut Keys
The following shortcut keys can be used with the Support Tool. Pressing these
shortcut keys can perform the functions easily without selecting the items from
the menu.
Menu
File
Function
Shortcut key
New
Ctrl + N
Open
Ctrl + O
Save
Ctrl + S
Print
Ctrl + P
Undo
Ctrl + Z
Redo
Ctrl + Y
Cut
Ctrl + X
Copy
Ctrl + C
Paste
Ctrl + V
Align Top
Ctrl + Up Arrow
Align Bottom
Ctrl + Down Arrow
Align Left
Ctrl + Left Arrow
Align Right
Ctrl +Right Arrow
Center in a Column
Ctrl + F9
Center in a Row
Ctrl + Shift + F9
Delete
Del
Select All
Ctrl + A
View
Refresh
F9
Draw
Group
Ctrl + G
Ungroup
Ctrl + U
Bring to Front
Ctrl + F
Send to Back
Ctrl + B
Centralize Label
Ctrl + L
New
Ctrl + W
Delete
Ctrl + E
Table
Ctrl + T
Validate
F12
Download (Application)
Ctrl + Shift + D
Upload (Application)
Ctrl + Shift + U
Properties
Alt + Enter
Edit
Screen
Tools
Connect
Others
Objects Selection
Higher Display Order
Tab
Lower Display Order
Shift + Tab
Edit Object Mode ON/OFF
Insert
Edit Object Mode ON + Object Selection
Ctrl + Shift + Click
The “+” mark in the list indicates that you should press the key after the “+” mark while you press the Ctrl key etc.
553
Appendix M
Connecting Cable Specifications
Tool Interface Connector Specifications
The following specifications apply to the connection between the PT and the support tool (personal computer).
Pin No.
Signal Name
1
FG
Frame ground
2
SD
Send data
3
RD
Receive data
4
RS
Request to send
5
CS
Clear to send
9
SG
Signal ground
Meaning
Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type
of RS-232C connector.
25-pin Connector
Connector for peripheral
devices on PT body
Personal computer
Shield
Connector
hood
Connector
hood
Note Connect the shield wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and at the PT.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector hood
Cable
Model
Remarks
XM2D-2501
25-pin Made by OMRON
XM2A-0901
9-pin Made by OMRON
XM2S-2511
25-pin Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911
9-pin Made by OMRON
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable Made by
Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable Made by
Hitachi, Ltd.
555
Appendix M
Connecting Cable Specifications
9-pin Connector
Personal computer
Connector for peripheral
devices on PT body
Connector
hood
Shield
Connector
hood
Note Connect the shield wire to the connector hood at both the personal computer and at the PT.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
Connector
Cable
hood*
Model
Remarks
XM2D-0901
9-pin Made by OMRON
XM2A-0901
9-pin Made by OMRON
XM2S-0911
9-pin, mm-pitch screw Made by
OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin, inch-pitch screw Made by
OMRON
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multi-core shielded cable Made by
Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable Made by
Hitachi, Ltd.
*: At personal computer, use the connector hood which conforms to the
standard of the screw at connector part.
556
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
ISO 8859/1
Example:Hex code is represented by 30, decimal code by 48, and character by 0.
30
0
20
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
48
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
0
@
P
’
p
Space
Space
NBSP
°
À
Ð
à
ð
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
!
1
A
Q
a
q
Space
Space
¡
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
33
49
65
81
97
113
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
”
2
B
R
b
r
Space
Space
¢
2
Â
Ò
â
ò
34
50
66
82
98
114
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
#
3
C
S
c
s
Space
Space
£
3
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
35
51
67
83
99
115
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
$
4
D
T
d
t
Space
Space
¤
,
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
36
52
68
84
100
116
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
%
5
E
U
e
u
Space
Space
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
õ
37
53
69
85
101
117
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
&
6
F
V
f
v
Space
Space
¦
¶
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
38
54
70
86
102
118
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
’
7
G
W
g
w
Space
Space
§
·
Ç
ç
÷
39
55
71
87
103
119
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
0
1
0
(
8
H
X
h
x
Space
Space
¨
’
È
Ø
è
ø
40
56
72
88
104
120
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
)
9
I
Y
i
y
Space
Space
©
1
É
Ù
é
ù
41
57
73
89
105
121
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Space
Space
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
42
58
74
90
106
122
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
+
;
K
[
k
{
Space
Space
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
43
59
75
91
107
123
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
,
<
L
\
l
|
Space
Space
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
44
60
76
92
108
124
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
–
=
M
]
m
}
Space
Space
SHY
½
Í
Ý
í
ý
45
61
77
93
109
125
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
.
>
N
^
n
~
Space
Space
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
þ
46
62
78
94
110
126
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
/
?
O
_
o
Space
Space
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
47
63
79
95
111
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
127
557
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
MS-DOS CP437
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
0
@
P
’
p
Ç
É
á
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
!
1
A
Q
a
q
ü
æ
Í
33
49
65
81
97
113
129
145
161
”
2
B
R
b
r
é
Æ
ó
34
50
66
82
98
114
130
146
162
#
3
C
S
c
s
â
ô
ú
35
51
67
83
99
115
131
147
163
$
4
D
T
d
t
ä
ö
ñ
36
52
68
84
100
116
132
148
164
%
5
E
U
e
u
à
ò
Ñ
37
53
69
85
101
117
133
149
165
&
6
F
V
f
v
å
û
ª
38
54
70
86
102
118
134
150
166
’
7
G
W
g
w
ç
ù
º
39
55
71
87
103
119
135
151
167
(
8
H
X
h
x
ê
ÿ
¿
40
56
72
88
104
120
136
152
168
)
9
I
Y
i
y
ë
Ö
ÿ
41
57
73
89
105
121
137
153
169
*
:
J
Z
j
z
è
Ü
¬
42
58
74
90
106
122
138
154
170
+
;
K
[
k
{
ï
¢
½
43
59
75
91
107
123
139
155
171
,
<
L
\
l
|
î
£
¼
44
60
76
92
108
124
140
156
172
–
=
M
]
m
}
ì
¥
¡
45
61
77
93
109
125
141
157
173
.
>
N
^
n
~
Ä
Pts
«
46
62
78
94
110
126
142
158
174
/
?
O
_
o
Å
ƒ
»
47
63
79
95
111
143
159
175
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
558
127
B0
176
177
C0
192
193
D0
208
209
E0
F0
α
≡
224
240
β
±
225
241
Γ
≥
242
178
194
210
226
π
≤
179
195
211
227
243
Σ
⌠
180
196
212
228
244
σ
⌡
229
245
181
197
213
∝
182
183
184
198
199
200
214
215
216
230
÷246
τ
≈
231
247
Φ
°
232
248
Θ
•
233
249
185
201
217
Ω
.
186
202
218
234
250
δ
√
187
203
219
235
251
188
189
190
204
205
206
220
221
222
∞
n
236
252
φ
2
237
253
ε
238
254
∩
191
207
223
239
NOT
USED
255
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
Appendix N
Keycode Conversion Rules
When you are using the European keyboard, please read the following keycode
conversion rules.
Also, PT Hardware NT21 and NT31-V1/NT31C-V1/NT631-V1/NT631C-V1 and
above are supporting both Keycodes ISO8859/1 and CP437. This section will
describe the rule for Keycode conversion between ISO8859-1 & Latin-US
(CP437) and vice versa.
Above mentioned will be explained in following order.
(1) When the conversion will be performed.
(2) Basic Policy of the Conversion.
(3) How to Convert.
(4) Conversion Rule from ISO8859/1 to CP437.
(5) Conversion Rule from CP437 to ISO8859/1.
(1) When the conversion will be performed.
The conversion will take place during the following cases.
1. By changing to a different keycode from an existing application.
(From <Tools> – <PT Configuration>)
This is only for the NT21 and the NT31-V1/31C-V1/631-V1/631C-V1 and
above.
2. Drag/Drop of Symbols with different keycode.
3. Key input (Old & new models from ISO8859/1-CP437).
(2) Basic Policy
Basic Policy : If the Character is not found in the Target keycode, “?” (063) is
chosen.
(3) How to convert. (Only for the NT21 and the NT31/631 series with “-V1” and
above.)
The way to convert the Keycode will be as follows.
1. Go <Tools> – <PT Configuration>.
2. Change the “Font Type.”
3. Press [OK] Button.
(4) Conversion Rule from ISO8859/1 to CP437.
Mapping tables for the conversion.
This conversion will be performed when you try to make the former model
screen data such as,
NT11S/NT11,
NT20S,
N30/30C,
NT600S,
NT620S/620C,
NT31/NT631 series (System program ver.1.0) by using European Keyboard.
559
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
Also this conversion will take place if you are selecting “CP437” in NT31/631
series with “-V1” and above.
Note
Source
If you have Hardware NT31/631(below V1) and version up the system program
of NT31/631 series to “-V2” system program which is version 3, treat it as
NT31/631 series hardware with “-V2.”
Destination
560
Source
Destination
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
No.
No.
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
01
”Space”
128
[?]
063
19
”Space”
146
[’]
039
02
”Space”
129
[?]
063
20
”Space”
147
[”]
034
03
”Space”
130
[,]
044
21
”Space”
148
[”]
034
04
”Space”
131
[ƒ]
159
22
”Space”
149
[•]
249
05
”Space”
132
[”]
034
23
”Space”
150
[–]
045
06
”Space”
133
[?]
063
24
”Space”
151
[—]
196
07
”Space”
134
[?]
063
25
08
”Space”
135
[?]
063
26
”Space”
152
”Space”
153
[~]
126
[?]
063
09
”Space”
136
[^]
094
27
”Space”
154
[s]
115
10
”Space”
137
[?]
063
28
”Space”
155
[>]
062
11
”Space”
138
[S]
083
29
”Space”
156
[?]
063
12
”Space”
139
[<]
060
30
”Space”
157
[?]
063
13
”Space”
140
[?]
063
31
”Space”
158
[?]
063
14
”Space”
141
[?]
063
32
”Space”
159
[Û]
089
15
”Space”
142
[?]
063
33
”Space”
160
”Space”
032
16
”Space”
143
[?]
063
34
[¡]
161
[¡]
173
17
”Space”
144
[?]
063
35
[¢]
162
[¢]
155
18
”Space”
145
[’]
039
36
[£]
163
[£]
156
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
Source
Destination
Source
Destination
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
No.
No.
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
37
[]
164
[?]
063
62
[½]
189
[½]
171
38
[¥]
165
[¥]
157
63
[¾]
190
[?]
063
39
[¦]
166
[?]
063
64
[¿]
191
[¿]
168
40
[§]
167
[?]
063
65
[À]
192
[A]
065
41
[¨]
168
[?]
063
66
[Á]
193
[A]
065
42
[]
169
[?]
063
67
[Â]
194
[A]
065
43
[a]
170
[a]
166
68
[Ã]
195
[A]
065
44
[«]
171
[«]
174
69
[Ä]
196
[Ä]
142
45
[¬]
172
[¬]
170
70
[Å]
197
[Å]
143
46
[–]
173
[?]
063
71
[Æ]
198
[Æ]
146
47
[]
174
[?]
063
72
[Ç]
199
[Ç]
128
48
[¯]
175
[?]
063
73
[È]
200
[E]
069
49
[°]
176
[°]
248
74
[É]
201
[E]
144
50
[±]
177
[±]
241
75
[Ê]
202
[E]
069
51
[2]
178
[2]
253
76
[Ë]
203
[E]
069
52
[3]
179
[?]
063
77
[Ì]
204
[I]
073
53
[·]
180
[”]
034
78
[Í]
205
[I]
073
54
[µ]
181
[µ]
230
79
[Î]
206
[I]
073
55
[¶]
182
[?]
063
80
[Ï]
207
[I]
073
56
[⋅]
183
[⋅]
250
81
[Ð]
208
[D]
068
57
[,]
184
[,]
044
82
[Ñ]
209
[Ñ]
165
58
[1]
185
[?]
063
83
[Ò]
210
[O]
079
59
[º]
186
[º]
167
84
[Ó]
211
[O]
079
60
[»]
187
[»]
175
85
[Ô]
212
[O]
079
61
[¼]
188
[¼]
172
86
[Õ]
213
[O]
079
561
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
Source
Destination
No.
Destination
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
87
[Ö]
214
[Ö]
153
108
[ë]
235
[ë]
137
88
[×]
215
[×]
120
109
[¡]
236
[¡]
141
89
[Ø]
216
[O]
079
110
[í]
237
[í]
161
90
[Ù]
217
[S]
083
111
[î]
238
[î]
140
91
[Ú]
218
[S]
083
112
[Ï]
239
[Ï]
139
92
[Û]
219
[S]
083
113
[ô]
240
[d]
100
93
[Ü]
220
[Ü]
154
114
[ñ]
241
[ñ]
164
94
[Ý]
221
[Y]
089
115
[Ò]
242
[Ò]
149
95
[Þ]
222
[T]
084
116
[Ó]
243
[Ó]
162
96
[ß]
223
[ß]
225
117
[Ô]
244
[Ô]
147
97
[à]
224
[à]
133
118
[õ]
245
[O]
111
98
[á]
225
[á]
160
119
[Ö]
246
[Ö]
148
99
[â]
226
[â]
131
120
[÷]
247
[÷]
246
100
[ã]
227
[ä]
228
[a]
097
[ä]
132
121
[Ø]
248
[Ø]
237
122
[ù]
249
[ù]
151
102
[å]
229
[å]
134
123
[ú]
250
[ú]
163
103
[æ]
230
[a]
145
124
[û]
251
[û]
150
104
[ç]
231
[ç]
135
125
[ü]
252
[ü]
129
105
[è]
232
[è]
138
126
[ÿ]
253
[y]
121
106
[é]
233
[é]
130
127
[P]
254
[t]
116
107
[ê]
234
[ê]
136
128
Not Used
255
[ÿ]
152
101
562
Source
No.
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
(5) Conversion Rule from CP437 to ISO8859/1
This conversion will be performed at the time when you try to change the PT
Type to the NT21 and NT31-V1/31C-V1/631-V1/631C-V1 and above with
Font Type ISO8859/1.
Source
Destination
Source
Destination
MS-DOS CP437
Windows ISO8859/1
No.
No.
MS-DOS CP437
Windows ISO8859/1
01
[Ç]
128
[Ç]
199
26
[Ö]
153
[Ö]
214
02
[ü]
129
[ü]
252
27
[Ü]
154
[Ü]
220
03
[é]
130
[é]
233
28
[¢]
155
[¢]
162
04
[â]
131
[â]
226
29
[£]
156
[£]
163
05
[ä]
132
[ä]
228
30
[¥]
157
[¥]
165
06
[à]
133
[à]
224
31
[Pts]
158
[?]
063
07
[å]
134
[å]
229
32
[ƒ]
159
[?]
063
08
[ç]
135
[ç]
231
33
[á]
160
[á]
225
09
[ê]
136
[ê]
234
34
[í]
161
[¡]
237
10
[ë]
137
[ë]
235
35
[ó]
162
[ó]
243
11
[è]
138
[è]
232
36
[ú]
163
[ú]
250
12
[Ï]
139
[Ï]
239
37
[ñ]
164
[ñ]
241
13
[Î]
140
[Î]
238
38
[N]
165
[N]
209
14
[Ì]
141
[Ì]
236
39
[ª]
166
[ª]
170
15
[Ä]
142
[Ä]
196
40
[º]
167
[º]
186
16
[Å]
143
[Å]
197
41
[¿]
168
[¿]
191
17
[É]
144
[É]
201
42
[
169
[?]
063
18
[æ]
145
[æ]
230
43
[¬]
170
[¬]
172
19
[Æ]
146
[Æ]
198
44
[½]
171
[½]
189
20
[ô]
147
[ô]
244
45
[¼]
172
[¼]
188
21
[ö]
148
[ö]
246
46
[¡]
173
[¡]
161
22
[ò]
149
[ò]
242
47
[«]
174
[«]
171
563
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
Source
Destination
MS-DOS CP437
Destination
Windows ISO8859/1
MS-DOS CP437
Windows ISO8859/1
200
[?]
063
201
[?]
063
]
202
[?]
063
203
[?]
063
204
[?]
063
205
[?]
063
206
[?]
063
207
[?]
063
208
[?]
063
209
[?]
063
210
[?]
063
211
[?]
063
212
[?]
063
213
[?]
063
214
[?]
063
48
[»]
175
[»]
187
73
49
176
[?]
063
74
50
177
[?]
063
75
178
[?]
063
76
179
[?]
063
77
180
[?]
063
78
181
[?]
063
79
182
[?]
063
80
183
[?]
063
81
184
[?]
063
82
185
[?]
063
83
186
[?]
063
84
187
[?]
063
85
188
[?]
063
86
189
[?]
063
87
190
[?]
063
88
215
[?]
063
191
[?]
063
89
216
[?]
063
192
[?]
063
90
217
[?]
063
193
[?]
063
91
218
[?]
063
194
[?]
063
92
219
[?]
063
195
[?]
063
93
220
[?]
063
196
[?]
063
94
221
[?]
063
197
[?]
063
95
222
[?]
063
198
[?]
063
96
223
[?]
063
199
[?]
063
97
[α]
224
[?]
063
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
564
Source
No.
No.
Appendix N
Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule
Source
Destination
Source
Destination
MS-DOS CP437
Windows ISO8859/1
No.
No.
MS-DOS CP437
Windows ISO8859/1
98
[β]
225
[B]
223
114
[±]
241
[±]
177
99
[Γ]
226
[?]
063
115
[≥]
242
[?]
063
100
[π]
227
[?]
063
116
[≤]
243
[?]
063
101
[Σ]
228
[?]
063
117
[⌠]
244
[?]
063
102
[σ]
229
[?]
063
118
[⌡]
245
[?]
063
103
[µ]
230
[µ]
181
119
[÷]
246
[÷]
247
104
[τ]
231
[?]
063
120
[≈]
247
[?]
063
105
[Φ]
232
[?]
063
121
[°]
248
[°]
176
106
[Θ]
233
[?]
063
122
[•]
249
[Space]
149
107
[Ω]
234
[?]
063
123
[⋅]
250
[⋅]
183
108
[δ]
235
[?]
063
124
[3]
251
[?]
063
109
[∞]
236
[?]
063
125
[n]
252
[?]
063
110
[φ]
237
[φ]
248
126
[2]
253
[2]
178
111
[ε]
238
[?]
063
127
[]
254
[?]
063
112
[∩]
239
[?]
063
128
Not Used
255
”Space”
160
113
[≡]
240
[?]
063
565
Index
Symbols
child screen, 90, 91
[Circle], 140
[Help] Menu, 74
[Clip], 333
[Show Window/Keyboard], 85
Closing a Creation Screen, 65
Color Palette Symbol, 258
Numbers
32 dot font, 123
Colour, 80
Comment, 79
[Comms. Setting], 71
Comms. Setting, 430
A
communication method, 27
Communication method for each PT type, 27
[About NT–series Support Tool], 75
[Add Node], 137
Alarm History, 165
alarm history, 437
Alarm list, 159
Applicable PT, 26
Connection to PT, 428
[Contents], 74
Continuous Screen, 89
Control Code Input Touch Switches, 217
[Copy], 112
Copy Setting Touch Switch, 220
Application (in file units), 433, 436
[Copy to Image], 88
Application Manager, 64
Copying a Screen, 66
[Arc], 138
Copying and pasting elements, 111
Arrange Icons, 74
Creating a New Screen, 65
[Associate With...], 117
Creating an Element, 105
[Attribute], 123
Cross–Reference, 443
Available Data Communication Methods, 428
Cursor Moving Touch Switch, 221
Cutting and pasting elements, 112
B
[Background function], 247
D
[Backlight], 79
Data Communication Procedure, 430
[Bar Graph], 224
Data logging function, 247
base screen, 92
[Date and Time], 438
Batch selection of multiple elements, 107
Decimal, 126
[Bring to Front], 114
[Delete], 113
[Broken–line Graph], 228, 235
Delete, 67
Buzzer, 79
Deleting a Screen, 67
Deleting an element, 113
C
Direct Access Information, 433
Direct Connection Information, 444
Cable, 428
[Disassociate], 117
Cascade, 74
display history, 437
Channel setting, 127
display history (Screen History) function, 98
(Character) String Input, 179
[Display Sign], 126
(Character) String Input Touch Switch, 215
Display Type, 126
567
Index
Displaying and Setting Screen Properties, 67
Input Notify Touch Switch, 214
Displaying and Setting the PT configuration, 67
K
Displaying the Print Image (Preview), 456
Distance, 230
Download (NT–Series Support Tool ” PT), 432
Keyboard Screens, 92
Download (NT–series Support Tool ” PT), 72
L
E
[Edit Object], 108
Editing a Table, 67
Error Log, 71
Extended I/O Input table, 15
[Lamp], 192
Library data, 8
[Library Display], 155
[Load Keyboard Screen], 79, 80
Local window, 95
Extended I/O input table, 17
M
Extended I/O Output table, 15, 17
Extended Screen, 97
[Mark Editor], 342
Mark List, 446
F
Marks, 8
MEMLINK, 129
[Fixed Display], 136
[Format], 126
Full Screen, 85
Full Tiling, 81
Menu Chart, 22
Meter Shape, 229
Mitsubishi_A, 129
Mitsubishi_Fx, 130
[Modify Parent], 92
G
Modifying an Element, 110
[More windows...], 74
Get History Log, 437
Moving an overlapped element to the front or back, 113
Global window, 95
[Graph], 224
[Group], 116
Grouping Elements, 116
N
[New], 65
[New Window], 73
H
Hardware, 6
No. of Division, 230
[Numeral Display], 200
Numeral Input, 171
Hexadecimal, 126
History, 79
History Report, 445
Host Connect Screen (System Initializing Screen), 99
O
Objects which can be used, 9
Occurrence History Screen, 98
I
OMRON, 128
Opening a Data Creation Screen, 65
[Image], 197
Opening/Closing and moving a window, 96
Image data, 8
Output to a File (RTF), 455
[Image Display], 150
Output to a Printer, 450
Image/Library Report, 445
Outputting the Screen Image, 457
568
Index
Overlapping Screens, 91
[Sector], 144
[Select Object], 107
P
Selecting an Element, 106
[Selector], 105
parent screen, 90, 91
Sending (Downloading) the Data, 71, 431
[Paste], 112
Setting footer and header, 454
PC (PLC) address, 127
setting for screen switching, 87
[Polygon], 142
Setting margins, 454
[Polyline], 136
Setting the color for graphics, 120
pop–up window function, 92
Setting the color for lamps and touch switches, 121
Pop–up Window/Keyboard Touch Switch, 216
Setting the color for text and numerals, 120
[Print], 450
Setting the display color, 119
[Print Preview], 456
Setting the line type, 119
Print Screen Touch Switch, 223
Setting the Screen Attributes, 78
[Print Setup], 449
Setting the tiling color, 120
Printing information on errors occurring during data conversion, 453
Settings for numeral display, 124
[Properties], 67, 78, 119
setup, 31
[PT Configuration], 67
[Show Tag], 83
Settings for text display, 122
Size and display position of window, 97
R
[Smoothing], 146
Smoothing, 123
Receiving (Uploading) Data, 434
Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements, 108
Receiving (Uploading) the History Record, 437
Standard Lamps, 192
[Rectangle], 139
Standard Screen, 88
Refresh, 84
[String Display], 204
Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables, 134
String table, 16
[Remove Node], 138
Style Fun, Style Name, Page# Sep
[Window Control Area], 52
Alarm list/history function, 287
Application manager screen, 39
[Backlight OFF], 48
Bit Memory Tables, 286
[Buzzer], 49
Canceling backlight OFF, 292
character string memory table (string table), 281
Check box, 43
[Close], 56
Code setting in the image/library code field, 290
Combo box, 44
[Comment], 47
Connecting Cable Specifications, 555, 556
Control code input, 292
Control Menu Box, 39
[Control/Notify Area], 50
Copy Increment, 274
Copy Increment Setting Operation, 274
Correcting colors, 465
Correcting the PC (PLC) addresses (On data conversion between PT models), 466
Correction of alarm list/history touch switches, 474
Correction of graphic display attributes, 473
Correction of image codes, 472
rich text format, 455
Right click the mouse, 106
Rotate or Flip, 331
S
Save, 69
Save As, 69
Saving the Screen Image, 88
[Scale], 123, 124
Scale, 230
Scale Length, 230
Screen, 433, 436
Screen Image, 446
Screen List, 447
Screen No., 79
Search for Help on, 75
569
Index
Correction of library codes, 472
Correction of smoothing processing for marks, 474
Correction of touch switch position and size, 475
Correction related the number of digits for numeral display,
480
Correction related the number of digits for numeral input,
478
Correction related the reference memory tables for numeral
input, 479
Correction related to a touch switch for which a pop–up keyboard function is set, 476
Correction related to analogue meter, 480
Correction related to bit memory table, 471
Correction related to contents of numeral memory table, 471
Correction related to continuous screens, 467
Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph,
480
Correction related to display range of window/keyboard
screens, 468
Correction related to extended I/O input/output table, 471
Correction related to extended screens, 469
Correction related to history screens, 470
Correction related to image/library codes in (character)
strings, 473
Correction related to keyboard screens, 468
Correction related to number of window/keyboard screens to
be opened, 468
Correction related to overlapping screens, 467
Correction related to sampling cycles of trend graphs, 481
Correction related to the 100% value, 0% value and –100%
value of a graph, 481
Correction related to the lamp label (ON state), 478
Correction related to the maximum and minimum limit
check function for numeral input, 478
Correction related to the number of memory tables, 470
Correction related to the system initial screen (Host Connect
screen), 469
Correction related to the system keypad, 474
Correction related to the touch switch for which the copy
function is set, 476
Cursor Position, 40
cursor position, 40
data conversion, 463
Data creation screen, 39
device monitor, 483
dialog box, 43
Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration, 45
Direct access (PLC vendor, 461
direct connection type, 47
Edit Operation, 272
[Enable], 49
Error Messages, 547, 548, 549
[Exit], 39
Extended I/O Input Tables, 291
File types, 55
floating palette, 42
[History Setting], 48
I/O Comment Tables, 296
[I/O Comments], 53
[Import], 463
Import I/O Comments, 301
Importing I/O Comment from Ladder Program, 299
[Initial], 278
[Initial Screen], 48
Inserting Image Data, 285
570
Inserting Library Data, 286
Inserting Mark Data, 284
Installing the System Program, 488
interlock function, 479
[Key Input], 49
Limits on display, 537
Limits on Numbers of Elements, 535, 536, 537
Limits on reading the data, 537
limits on the use of elements, 535
List box, 44
Main Window, 39
Mathematical table, 306
MEMLINK, 47
Menu bar, 40
message box, 44
Mitsubishi–A, 47
Mitsubishi–FX, 47
mmi format, 55
[New], 45
New Models, 536
Notify bit, 291
[NT–series Support Tool], 38
[Number of Table Entries], 49
Numeral Memory Tables, 275
[Numeral Storage Type], 50
object position, 40
OMRON, 47
onw format, 55
[Open], 53
Option button, 43
PC (PLC) Address dialog box, 52
PLC Vender, 40
[Printer for PT], 49
[PT Control Area], 51
[PT Notify Area], 51
PT Type page, 46
Reference Operation, 266
Remaning memory, 40
replacement, 267
[Resume Function], 48
[Save], 54
[Save As], 54
Screen switching, 291
Screen switching function, 287
Search Operation, 267
Selected PT model, 40
Siemens, 47
Start–up Procedure, 38
Status bar, 40
[Storage Type], 278
System Installer Operation, 485, 486, 487
System page, 48
system program, 485
Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Number,
275
Table of Functions, 4, 491, 492, 493, 515, 516, 517
Text box, 44
the import method of I/O comment, 299
Title bar, 40
[Tools], 463
Total memory, 40
[Value], 277
[Vendor], 47
[Words], 279
Switch Screen Touch Switch, 215
Index
Switching Screen by Extended I/O Input, 87
Switching Screens by Extended I/O Input at Each Screen, 87
U
[Symbol Manager], 252
[Ungroup], 116
System installer, 30
Uninstall, 36
System Keypad, 80
System Memory, 433, 436
T
Table, 15, 68, 87, 433
Table Report, 448
[unInstallShield], 36
Upload (PT ” NT–series Support Tool), 436
V
Validate, 70
Validation Report, 448
[Text], 145
The relationships between elements and memory tables, 134
[Thumbwheel Switch], 188
Thumbwheel switch, 171
Tile, 74
W
[What’s This?], 75
Width Rate, 229
[Window], 72
[Tiling], 147
Window Moving Touch Switch, 223
Title, 79
Window/Keyboard Screens, 92
[Touch Switch], 209
[Trend Graph], 240
Type, 229
Z
Types of Screens, 18
[Zero Suppression], 126
Types of windows, 95
[Zoom], 85
571
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V061-E1-05
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
01
Date
July 2000
Revised content
02
October 2001
Revisions to add information on the NT21 and clarify terminology.
03
January 2004
04
June 2004
Revisions to add information on the upgraded version (Ver. 4.7) of the NT Support
Tool for the NT11.
Page 4: ”CS1” changed to CS-series PLC.”
Original production
Page 25, 47, and 57: Reference information added.
Page 27: Model numbers added.
Page 174: Information on inputting decimal fractions added toward bottom of
page.
Page 219: Note added.
Page 302: Information added just before 7-7-4.
Page 461: Information added on direct access versions.
Page 475: Left cell in bottom table changed.
Page 487: Sentence added at end of Drive information.
Page 551 and 552: Text added to graphic and note added.
05
May 2007
Revisions to add information on the NT20, NT31/31C-V3, and NT631C-V3
(new models).
573
OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200
E3X-N
E3X-N
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. V061-E1-05
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
1615956-0E
Printed in Japan
Below is a list of articles with direct links to our shop Electric Automation Network where you
can see:
• Quote per purchase volume in real time.
• Online documentation and datasheets of all products.
• Estimated delivery time enquiry in real time.
• Logistics systems for the shipment of materials almost anywhere in the world.
• Purchasing management, order record and tracking of shipments.
To access the product, click on the green button.
Product
Code
Reference
Product link
Industrial Career Final / Push buttons, round blue flush
Head
144458
A22-FA
Buy on EAN
Monitoring Relays, Current transformer
111690
SET-3B
Buy on EAN
Operator Interface, semi-graphic LCD Keyboard 22 keys
+ numeric (Beige)
168608
NT11-SF121EV1
Buy on EAN
Basis for relay Base LY 11 pins 10A solder terminals
113370
PT11
Buy on EAN
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement